Columbia  (Bnitier^ttp 


^^ 


'^M 

^^«i^i^jiX^ 

J^-^jJj 

!^^  fe^ 

^'^M^ 

^^^ 

^^^^ 

«^ 

l^i 


Digitized  by  tine  Internet  Arciiive 

in  2010  with  funding  from 
Columbia  University  Libraries 


http://www.archive.org/details/567usefulhintsfo00stee 


Useful  Hints 


FOR   THE 


BUSY  DENTIST. 


WM.  H.  STEELE,  D.D.S. 


PUBLISHED    BY 

THE  WILMINGTON  DENTAL  M'K'G  CO. 
No.  1413  Filbert  Street,  Philadelphia. 

1895- 


l^.Ks:-^; 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  j'ear  1895,  by 

The  Wilmington  Dental  M'f'g  Comtaxy,  Philadelphia,  P.-v 

in  the  OflBce  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington,  D.  C. 


AUTHOR'S  NOTE. 


IXtliis  volume,  I  have  endeavored  to  cany  out  the  same 
principle  embodied  in  my  first  work;  namely,  to  pre- 
sent to  the  busy,  practical  dentist,  the  latest  and  best 
methods  of  our  most  skilled  operators,  and  best  writers, 
arranged  in  such  a  manner  as  to  be  accessible  at  a  moment's 
notice. 

This  volume  contains  much  more  original  matter  than 
the  first;  illustrations  have  been  employed,  which  will  add 
greatly  to  the  value  of  the  work  as  a  book  of  ready  refer- 
ence. 

In  otfering  this  second  little  volume  to  the  profession,  I 
have  many  acknowledgments  to  make  for  the  generous  and 
friendly  reception  given  to  the  first ;  and  it  is  hoped  this 
efl:brt  will  prove  as  acceptable,  and  meet  with  the  same  indul- 
gent welcome. 

WILLIAM  II.  STEELE. 

For.EST  City,  Iowa. 


DEPARTMENT  A. 


USEFUL   HINTS. 

DEPARTMENT  A. 


].  Health  in  the  Office." — Since  health  is  the  corner- 
stone of  all  good  work,  either  of  boch^  or  mind,  we  venture 
on  a  few  suggestions  as  to  how  this  may  be  secured  in  our 
office  surroundings. 

Pure,  fresh  air  is  of  prime  importance  to  health,  j^ethow 
little  value  seems  to  be  attached  to  it,  if  we  may  judge  from 
the  close  unhealthy  atmosphere  of  many  of  our  dental  oper- 
ating-rooms, charged  with  the  concentrated  emanations  from 
iodoform,  creosote,  and  half  a  dozen  more  ill-smelling  com- 
pounds, and  mixed  with  the  perfumes  of  dead  pulps  and  foul 
teeth.  Though  the  operator  may  exist  in  these  improper 
surroundings  for  a  long  time,  yet  nature,  insulted  by  such 
treatment,  finally  rebels,  and  protests  in  the  form  of  head- 
aches, backaches,  weakened  eyes,  and  the  like. 

To  secure  a  healthy  office  we  must  have  good  light  and 
good  ventilation. 

In  regard  to  light,  north,  south,  and  east  each,  has  its 
advantages  and  disadvantages. 

The  north  is  a  clear,  steady  light,  but  is  not  strong;  and 
in  the  short  winter  months  and  cloudy  weather  its  defects 
are  clearly  seen  and  felt. 

The  east  is  a  good  morning  light,  but  is  weakest  in  the 
closing  hours  of  the  day,  just  Avhen  one  is  tired  and  wants 
the  best  light  possible. 

A  south  light  is  the  strongest  and  longest,  and  if  prop- 
erlj'-  regulated  by  white  curtains  in  the  middle  of  the  day, 
the  best. 

A  west  light  should  never  be  chosen  if  either  of  the 
others  can  be  had,  as  it  will  be  weak  in  the  morning  and  bad 


*  Read  at  tlie  semi-annual  meeting  of  the  Massacluisetls  State  T>ental  So- 
cietv. 


8  DEPARTMENT     A. 

in  the  afternoon,  even  if  you  are  protected  from  the  direct 
rays  by  a  necessary  curtain. 

The  dental  operating-room  shauld  not  be  a  small  one,  or 
a  box  partitioned  off  from  an  ordinary  room,  without  appar- 
ent thought  of  air  or  ventilation.  This  condition  of  aiFairs 
is  often  seen  in  our  large  cities,  sometimes  several  of  these 
"stalls"  being  found  in  one  end  of  a  room.  On  the  con- 
trary, the  operating-room  should  be  of  good  size  and  separate 
from  the  parlor  or  anteroom.  The  laboratory  should  be  a 
commodious,  light  sunny  room,  not  the  little  back  pantry- 
closet  or  dark,  damp  cellar  often  seen. 

Sun  and  air  must  be  had  if  either  good  health  or  good 
work  is  expected. 

Then,  have  all  medicines  in  glass-stoppered  bottles,  in  a 
case,  so  as  to  keep  the  office  as  free  as  possible  from  disagree- 
able odors. 

It  is  notatall  necessary  to  have  one's  office,  instruments, 
or  person  so  saturated  with  creosote  and  iodoform  as  to  ad- 
vertise one's  calling.  This  is  neither  gentlemanly  nor  agree- 
able. 1^0  professional  man  is  so  likely  to  neglect  ^I'roper 
exercise  asthedentibt,  with  his  tired  back  calling  him  to  the 
lounge  or  easy  chair ;  but  air  and  exercise  must  be  had,  either 
by  riding,  driving,  or  walking.  To  this  end  it  is  well  to 
have  the  office  separate  from  the  dwelling,  so  that  in  vv^alking 
back  and  forth  the  eye  may  be  allowed  to  take  in  fresh 
scenes  and  the  lungs  fresh  air,  thus  refreshing  both  mind  and 
body.— H.  B.   Noble,  D.D.S. 

2.  Separating  Teeth. — I  think  the  separator  is  a  dan- 
gerous instrument.  It  is  in  rare  cases  only,  where  good  and 
sufficient  space  may  be  thus  acquired,  and  in  unskilful 
hands,  especially  young  practitioners,  the  probability  of  fail- 
ure at  the  cervical  border  is,  in  my  opinion,  increased  ten- 
fold. If  a  tooth  is  to  be  filled,  the  first  and  most  important 
point  is  that  the  completed  filling  shall  be  perfect.  There 
are  few  men  who  can  put  in  as  good  a  filling  in  a  space 
barely  admitting  an  instrument,  and  there  are  fewer  still 
conscientious  enough  to  do  it,  even  granting  them  the  skill. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  9 

The  best  teaching  tlien  for  the  3'ouiig,  and  I  think  for  the 
old  as  well,  is  to  depend  on  the  rubber  or  wooden  wedge. 
There  is  a  trick  in  the  application  of  each.  When  using 
rubber  allow  a  bit  of  it  to  protrude  below  the  cutting  ends 
of  the  teeth.  This  part,  by  contraction  as  the  teeth  move, 
will  swell,  and  the  rubber  is  prevented  from  pressing  up 
against  the  gum.  To  apply  the  wooden  wedge,  proceed  thus: 
The  wedge  is  trimmed  to  the  proper  width  and  should 
approach  a  taper  very  gradually.  •  If  it  is  then  made  smooth 
with  a  bit  of  sandpaper  it  will  be  less  likely  to  split.  Lastly, 
it  should  be  soaped..  A  second  wedge  should  be  made  quite 
thin,  and  have  a  shoulder  which  will  prevent  it  from  passing 
between  the  teeth  beyond  that  point.  This,  also  soaped,  is 
placed  between  the  teeth  next  to  the  gum  temporarily,  Now, 
when  the  permanent  wedge  is  forced  into  position,  this  one, 
iirst  placed,  prevents  it  irom  hurting  the  gum,  and  oiFers  a 
slippery  surface  for  it  to  slide  against.  The  wedge  in  place 
and  trimmed  to  suit,  the  temporary  slip  is  removed,  and  this 
relief  of  pressure  against  the  gum  is  gratefully  acknowledged 
by  the  patient.  At  the  next  sitting,  supposing  the  teeth 
separated  but  quite  sore,  gutta-percha  should  be  put  between 
them  and  worn  for  several  daj^s. — ^Dr.  Ottolengui,  in  Brook- 
lyn Dental  Society. 

3.  Application  of  Rubber-dam. — Probably  no  denti3t 
will  admit  that  he  is  not  master  of  so  simple  a  thing  as  the 
rubber-dam ;  and  yet  how  often  does  the  dam  become  the 
master  of  the  dentist  merely  because  some  unforeseen  acci- 
dent occurs  in  the  midst  of  an  operation.  There  is  the  tiniest 
tear  through  which  mucus  will  ooze;  the  dam  did  not  pass 
entirely  down  between  the  teeth,  and  moisture  is  creeping 
toward  our  work;  the  clamp  slips;  we  have  not  allowed 
quite  enough  margin  to  the  rubber  to  cover  the  mouth  ;  we 
thought  we  had,  but  when  we  applied  the  clamp  we  discov- 
ered our  error,  and  so  on  ad  infinitam;  through  some  little 
oversight  we  have  failed  in  that  seemingly  simple  operation, 
the  application  of  the  dam.  So  much  annoyance  has  occurred 
in  this  manner  that  perhaps  you  will  pardon  me  if  I  think  it 


10  DEPARTMENT     A. 

important  enough  to  tell  you  all  the  little  tricks  which  I 
have  learned  in  this  connection. 

For  comfortable  work,  the  rubber,  when  in  position, 
should  embrace  at  least  four  teeth ;  on  dark  days  it  is  not 
amiss  to  take  in  twice  as  many.  It  should  lay  over  the  face 
without  a  wrinkle,  and  should  not  cover  the  nostrils ;  it 
should,  however,  completely  cover  a  moustache,  as  the  hairs 
often  intervene  between  our  eyes  and  work.  To  accomplish 
this,  a  piece  of  dam  of  sufficient  size  should  be  stretched  over 
the  parts  which  it  is  intended  to  cover,  so  that  the  proper 
position  for  the  holes  may  be  ascertained,  allow^ance  being 
made  for  the  stretching  which  will  be  made  by  the  clamp. 
In  this  position  the  cusps  of  the  teeth  will  show  through  the 
rubber,  and  a  mark  over  each  may  be  best  made  with  an 
excavator,  a  pencil  not  answering  as  well.  If  because  of  the 
loss  of  a  tooth  a  space  must  be  spanned,  the  rubber  should 
not  be  stretched  at  that  point ;  if  this  is  not  considered  it 
will  be  found  that  when  the  dam  is  stretched  over  the  teeth 
it  will  not  hug  the  necks  of  the  teeth  at  this  point.  In  fact, 
this  rule  holds  for  all  spaces  great  or  small ;  the  rubber  should 
be  wide  enoug-h.  In  cuttino;  the  holes  use  a  device  which 
makes  a  perfectly  round  hole,  this  being  the  least  likely  to 
tear.  Make  the  holes  sufficiently  large  ;  don't  force  a  molar 
through  a  hole  wdiich  would  be  just  right  for  a  bicuspid. 
Where  the  teeth  are  in  close  contact,  soap  a  bit  of  waxed 
floss  silk  and  pass  it  between  all  the  teeth  first;  then  soap 
the  edges  of  the  holes  in  the  dam  ;  in  this  manner  there  is 
seldom  any  difficulty  about  forcing  the  rubber  between  the 
teeth.  Occasionally,  even  this  will  not  serve.  Your  prede- 
cessor has  left  a  filling  with  ragged  edges,  which  tear  the 
rubber.  In  this  case  the  teeth  in  question  should  be  w^edged 
with  soaped  w^ood,  as  will  be  described  later.  The  least 
spreading  allows  the  rubber  1o  pass  between,  when  the 
wedges  may  be  removed.  This  is  better  than  trying  to 
force  the  dam  between  the  teeth  with  silk.  That  method 
not  unfrequently  tears  the  rubber,  and  accounts  for  the  mys- 
terious oozing  Avhich  occurs  whilst  the  filling  is  in  progress, 
and  is  largely  responsible  for  the  failure  so  often  reported  at 


USEFUL      HINTS.  11 

the  cervical  border.  If  the  dam  has  been  properly  adjusted, 
it  can  be  removed  in  perfect  condition.  How  often  have 
you  noticed,  after  removal,  that  in  addition  to  the  holes 
made  by  your  punch  there  are  several  others,  satellites,  as  it 
were,  about  the  greater  orbs. — B.  A.  R.  Ottolengui,  D.D.S., 
in  Brooklyn  Dental  Society. 

4.  Applying  Rubber-dam  Clamps. — Select  the  one  to 
be  used  before  applying  the  dam.  Choose  one  which  will 
grip  the  teeth  tightly.  Throw  away  all  clamps  which  would 
not  hurt  you  if  put  on  your  finger.  A  clamp  without  a 
spring  is  no  better  than  a  clock  in  the  same  condition.  In 
applying  the  clamp  to  a  molar  in  the  upper  jaw  a  little  trick 
is  found  to  be  most  valuable.  We  begin  by  slipping  the 
rubber  over  a  central  incisor,  then  over  the  lateral  cuspid 
and  bicuspid,  and  finally  over  the  first  molar,  let  us  say. 
We  endeavor  to  apply  the  clamp  and  find  little  room,  and 
the  patient  flinches.  The  cause  is  this :  The  middle  finger 
is  the  one  we  use  to  adjust  the  dam ;  it  protrudes  into  the 
mouth,  and  as  we  work  toward  the  molar  region  we  gradu- 
ally fold  the  angle  of  the  mouth  inward  so  that  at  last  it  is 
held  back  b}^  the  tip  of  the  finger,  and  it  is  diflicult  to  find 
room  for  the  clamp. 

Just  at  this  point,  take  the  handle  of  a  burnisher  or 
other  instrument  and  free  the  cheek,  so  that  the  finger  passes 
into  the  mouth,  the  cheek  slipping  forward  ;  then  it  will  be 
found  that,  not  being  crowded  back,  its  elasticity  gives  us 
sufiicient  room  to  apply  the  clamp  without  pain.  This  one 
point  has  been  of  inestimable  value  to  me,  and  to  mj^  patients 
in  saving  pain. 

Where  the  gum  has  receded  and  a  large  festooned  cavity 
is  present,  tiie  space  on  either  side  of  the  hole  which  is  to 
embrace  the  tooth  to  be  filled  should  be  wider  than  ordina- 
rily made ;  otherwise,  when  stretched  so  far  up  on  the  gum, 
there  will  be  leaking  about  the  edges. — B.  A.  R.  Ottolengui, 
D.D.S.,  in  Brooklyn  Dental  Society. 

5.  Ligation  of  Rubber-dam. — Ligatures  should  be  dis- 
pensed with  as  much  as  possible.     They  are  frequently  the 


12  DEPARTMENT     A. 

cause  of  more  pain  than  any  other  part  of  an  operation. 
It  is  rarely  necessary  to  ligate  more  than  two  teeth,  and  fre- 
quently no  ligature  at  all  is  needed.  The  trick  is  done  by 
inverting  the  edge  of  the  rubber  so  that  it  slips  under  the 
maro-in  of  the  ffum  ;  if  the  root  is  at  all  conical,  the  elasticity 
will  cause  the  rubber  to  crawl  up  and  tuck  itself  under  nicely. 
If  a  ligature  must  be  used,  a  little  cocaine  is  useful.  There 
will  come  to  us  cases  where  the  ligature  is  absolutely  neces- 
sary, and  where  it  seems  almost  impossible  to  place  it  so  that 
it  will  not  ride  up  around  the  crown  rather  than  remain  at 
the  gum  margin.  Let  us  suppose  such  a  case  in  connection 
with  an  upper  lateral  incisor.  The  cavity  is  in  the  palatal 
sulcus,  therefore  the  ligature  must  be  forced  up.  The  trick 
is  to  tie  a  good  knot  in  your  silk  first ;  placed  about  the 
tooth,  this  knot  must  come  at  the  center  on  the  palatal  side ; 
it  makes  a  good  point  of  resistance  for  the  instrument,  and 
is  pressed  up  under  the  margin  of  the  gum,  carrying  the 
rubber  with  it ;  the  gum  contracting  holds  it,  and  when 
tightly  tied  on  the  labial  side  holds  securely.  This  is  the 
first  point  I  ever  picked  up  at  a  clinic,  and,  as  I  have  never 
seen  it  at  one  since,  I  would  have  lost  a  great  deal  of  satis- 
faction which  it  has  brought  me  had  I  been  absent  from  that 
clinic. 

I  alluded  to  leaking.  In  a  very  wet  mouth,  after  the 
best  precautions,  ligatures  well  placed,  it  will  sometimes 
happen  that  moisture  will  creep  in  around  the  neck  of  the 
tooth.  Take  a  piece  of  spunk,  dip  it  in  gum  sandarach, 
being  careful  not  to  get  an  excess,  and  i3ack  it  in  a  rope 
around  the  neck  of  the  oflPender.  Then  apply  a  second  liga- 
ture which  shall  tie  the  spunk  in  place.  The  leak  will  be 
stopped.  If  an  instrument  has  slipped  and  torn  a  small 
hole,  it  may  be  stopped  with  a  bit  of  sponge  dipped  in  sand- 
arach. Where  the  leak  is  about  a  clamp,  the  clamp  should  be 
taken  off  carefully,  a  fairly  large  piece  of  spunk,  treated  as 
described,  placed  along  the  edge  of  the  rubber,  and  the  clamp 
reapplied  so  that  it  bites  the  middle  of  the  spunk  holding  it 
in  place.  As  to  the  slipping  of  a  clamp,  it  sometimes  occurs 
because  the  dam  is  held  too  tight  by  the  rubber  strap  which 


USEFUL     HINTS.  13 

passes  around  the  head,  or  there  is  a  strain  from  the  diin\ 
weights. — B.  A.  R.  Ottolengui,  D.D.S.,  in  Brooklyn  Dental 
Society. 

6.  Napkins  for  Excluding  Moisture. — In  some  cases  it 
will  be  found  impossible  to  apply  the  dam  at  all.  There  is  a 
way  of  using  the  napkin  which  may  not  have  occurred  to  all. 
A  small  mouth  napkin  is  rolled  into  a  narrow  fold,  and 
placed  about  the  tooth  in  the  shape  of  the  letter  "  U,"  the 
ends  forward.  It  is  so  arranged  that  the  folds  extend  slightly 
upon  the  sides  of  the  tooth,  where  it  is  firmly  held  in  place 
with  a  clamp.  There  is  a  special  clamp  made  for  this  pur- 
pose by  Dr.  Ivory,  but  any  clamp  of  suitable  form  will 
answer. — B.  A.  R.  Ottolengui,  D.D.S.,  in  Brooklyn  Dental 
Society. 

7.  To  Quiet  Nervous  Patients. — In  casting  about  for 
means  to  effectually  and  safely  quiet  the  disagreeable  nerv- 
ousneps  of  many  patients,  without  taking  up  t«o  much  time, 
I  began  to  try  nitrous  oxid  gas.  After  having  used  it  more 
or  less  for  about  four  years,  I  have  adopted  the  following 
method  :  After  having  opened  cavity  with  chisel,  get  instru- 
ments I  wish  to  use  all  ready,  dry  cavity  with  an  absorbent, 
administer  from  three  to  six  inhalations  of  gas  ;  this,  as  you 
know,  is  a  very  small  dose  or  almost  no  dose  at  all,  yet  it  is 
sufficient  to  have  a  very  quieting  and  delightful  effect  upon 
the  nervous  system.  The  patient  does  not  lose  conscious- 
ness, but  seems  to  lose  that  nervous  dread  or  apprehension  so 
often  described  by  saying  that  the  tooth  felt  as  it  the  instru- 
ment was  going  clear  through  to  the  pulp.  When  asked  if 
they  felt  any  pain,  the  patient  will  usually  say  no;  or  per- 
haps it  may  be  as  a  lady  said  to  me  a  few  days  since,  when 
I  inquired  if  she  felt  any  pain,  she  replied,  "Yes,  a  little,  but 
I  felt  so  calm  and  restful  that  I  did  not  mind  it  in  the 
least." 

The  gas  should  not  be  given  in  sufficient  quantities  to 
produce  anfesthcsia,  but  simply  enter  the  first  stage,  called 
by  Professor  Guilford,  the  exhilarating  system.    Two  admin- 


14  DEPARTMENT     A. 

istrations  as  described  will  enable  the  operator  to  prepare  the 
sensitive  portion  of  an  ordinary  cavity.  IVfany  people  refuse 
to  take  it,  being  afraid  of  the  gas.  I  never  insist  on  it 
except  in  the  case  of  very  nervous  persons.  If  there  be  any 
danger  in  the  use  of  nitrous  oxid  gas  as  here  proposed,  I 
have  been  unable  to  find  either  from  the  history  of  the  anees- 
thetic  or  from  practice  ;  if  there  is  any  let  us  hope  it  may  be 
made  apparent  in  the  discussion  of  the  demerits  of  this  rather 
disconnected  and  incomplete  paper. — Dr.  W.  H.  Dwindle, 
in  Cosmos. 

8.  Mixing  Cements. — Many  times  in  using  oxyphos- 
phate  there  was  difiiculty  in  letting  go  the  patient's  mouth 
to  mix  the  filling.  He  had  found  such  a  contrivance  as  he 
now  showed  very  useful  in  overcoming  the  difiiculty.  It 
consisted  of  a  glass  bottle  with  a  large  mouth,  the  stopper  of 
which  consisted  of  a  glass  bulb  and  tube,  the  powder  being 
in  the  bulb  of  the  stopper  instead  of  in  the  bottle,  and  the 
bulb  being  open  at  the  top  and  covered  over  with  India-rub- 
ber, so  that  by  pressure  of  the  rubber  the  desired  quantity  of 
powder  was  forced  through  the  tube.  A  similar  arrange- 
ment contained  the  liquid,  so  that  the  whole  operation  of 
mixing  the  phosphate  could  be  easily  conducted  with  one 
band. — Dr.  Ilumby,  in  British  Journal-. 

9.  To  Prevent  a  Slip  in  Dental  Operations. — 1st. 
Almost  always  the  rubber-dam  should  be  applied  before 
operations  are  begun.  There  are  exceptions  where  the  diffi- 
culty of  its  application,  and  the  pressure  of  clamps  on  the 
gum,  more  than  balance  the  benefits  to  be  derived  from  its 
use,  when  it  should  be  discarded. 

2d.  It  is  essential  that  the  head  of  the  patient  be  steadily 
supported.  He  will  be  less  likely  to  move  his  head,  volun- 
tarily or  involuntarily,  if  his  position  be  made  fairly  easy 
and  comfortable. 

3d.  The  position  and  height  of  the  chair  should  be  ad- 
justed to  the  easiest  and  freest  movement  on  the  part  of  the 
operator.     The  "arm"'  is  a  necessary  adjunct  to  the  chair. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  15 

that  one  forearm  and  the  hand  may  be  firmly  supported 
while  steadying  the  head  or  lower  jaw  of  the  patient.  With 
tliese  precautions,  the  possibilities  of  a  "slip"  are  greatly 
reduced. 

4th.  For  the  engine,  a  poor  hand-piece,  one  which  fails 
to  grasp  and  hold  the  bit  firmly,  should  not  be  tolerated. 

5th.  All  cutting  instruments  should  be  sharp — they 
can  be  used  more  accurately,  delicately  and  speedily. 

6th.  The  operator,  while  lie  may  work  rapidly,  should 
never  be  in  baste,  but  rather  deliberate  ;  making  sure,  espe- 
cially, that  each  instrument  he  selects  be  adapted  to  the 
work  in  hand.  Of  all  things,  he  should  avoid  the  habit  of 
jerkiness  or  fussiness  in  the  handling  of  tools. — Dr.  G.  New- 
kirk,,  m  Review. 

10.  Pericemental  Inflammation. — The  peridental 
membrane  being  so  abundantly  supplied  with  vitality  is  fre- 
quentl}'  subject  to  inftammation,  and  I  know  of  no  disease 
presented  to  the  dental  practitioner  that  is  so  annoying  and 
perplexing  as  the  one  under  consideration. 

The  peridental  membrane  is  an  elastic,  velvet-like  cush- 
ion, entirel}"  lining  the  alveolar  cavity  of  each  root  of  the  tooth. 
It  has  just  enough  of  elasticity  to  allow  the  tooth  a  slight 
movement  in  any  direction,  when  it  resumes  its  normal  posi- 
tion as  the  pressure  is  removed.  This  peculiar  membrane  is 
supplied  with  blood-vessels  and  nerves,  as  is  the  pulp  of  the 
tooth  at  the  apical  foramen  just  before  entering  the  pulp 
canal,  these  vessels  separate,  and  a  branch  continues  along 
the  side  of  each  root,  or  ftmg,  of  the  tooth,  supplying  the  per- 
icemental membrane.  By  the  aid  of  this  membrane  we  are 
enabled  to  distinguish  the  touch  of  the  tooth,  and  Professor 
Black  sa3's,  "  This  is  the  onl}^  organ  of  touch  possessed  by 
the  tooth,  and  this  is  so  delicate  that  the  least  pressure  of  the 
tongue  conveys  the  sensation  to  the  tooth."  By  means  of 
this  delicate  membrane  we  are  enabled  to  distinguish  this 
disease  (pericementitis)  from  pulpitis  and  other  diseases  of 
the  tooth  that  come  to  our  notice — percussion  producing 
pain  and  flinching,  which  is  not  the  case  in  pulpitis. 


16  DEPARTMENT    A. 

Inflammation  of  the  peridental  membrane  is  ushered  in 
and  distinguished  by  redness  of  the  gums,  heat,  pain  and 
tumefaction  or  swelling.  In  diseases  of  this  membrane  we 
are  in  a  measure  confined  to  local  applications  to  the  gums — 
after*  removing  the  cause  of  disturbance,  and  here  let  me 
state  that  all  inflammations  are  caused  by  an  irritant  in  per- 
icementitis, the  irritant  may  be  a  putrescent  pulp — may  be 
from  a  blow,  or  some  irritant  around  the  gingival  border  of 
the  alveolus-salivary  calculus,  for  instance;  and  I  have  seen 
considerable  inflammation  of  the  membrane  by  the  overlap- 
ping of  an  amalgam  filling — probably  inserted  by  myself — 
impinging  on  the  peridental  membrane  at  the  neck  of  the 
tooth.  ]^ow,  before  any  therapeutic  treatment  will  avail 
much,  the  cause  of  the  irritation  must  be  removed. 

The  treatment  most  relied  on  for  jDcricementitishas  been 
counter-irritation  and  stimulating  the  absorbents.  Aconit 
and  iodin  have  been  largely  depended  on  for  this  purpose, 
and  I  have  always  used  the  aconit  and  chloroform  as  a  local 
application  applied  by  means  of  a  napkin,  at  frequent  inter- 
vals, followed  b}^  painting  the  gums  with  iodin  ;  the  iodin 
seems  to  be  more  readily  absorbed  and  carried  to  the  place 
where  most  needed,  when  the  chloroform  and  aconit  is  first 
used ;  aconit  paralyzes  the  sensory  nerves,  arterial  tension 
is  lessened,  the  inflammatory  process  being  thus  held  in  check 
until  resolution  ensues.  Iodin  acts  also  as  a  counter-irri- 
tant, and  excites  the  absorbents,  thus  whipping  up  these  lit- 
tle scavengers,  enabling  them  to  carry  off  any  eftete  matter 
accumulating  in  any  local  part  of  the  body  and  diffusing  it 
through  the  system  ;  it  has  been  extensively  used  in  inflam- 
mation of  the  peridental  membrane  and  of  the  gum.  tissue. 

But  it  maybe  inquired,  "  How  are  these  external  reme- 
dies brought  to  bear  upon  deep-seated  and  internal  inflam- 
mations?" I  answer  that  the  beneficent  author  of  our 
existence  formed  us  so  that  there  exists  an  intimate  relation, 
a  close  sympath}'  between  internal  parts  and  the  external  sur- 
face immediately  opposite  or  over  them,  and  physicians  have 
all  along  availed  themselves  of  its  advantages  in  treatment 
of  internal  or  deep-seated  diseases.     This  treatment,  to  be 


USEFUL      HINTS.  17 

effective,  may  liave  to  be  repeated  for  several  days  to  secure 
control  of  the  conditions.  In  my  own  practice  I  have  found, 
in  addition  to  the  local  applications,  great  benefit  in  adminis- 
tering aconit  in  one  to  two-drop  doses,  every  hour,  for  six 
or  eight  hours;  or  in  the  use  of  gelseminum  in  tive-drop 
doses.  These  are  great  depressors  of  the  heart's  action,  and 
should  not  be  administered  by  ignorant  or  careless  prac- 
titioners.— Dr.  W.  H.  Sedgwick,  in  Dental  Register. 

11.  Protecting  Teeth  While  Erupting. — For  many 
years  it  has  been  my  habit  with  soft  teeth,  that  are  just  erupt- 
ing to  wash  out  the  fissures  and  put  a  pat  of  oxyphosphate 
in  them,  even  if  they  are  not  softened  at  all.  If  they  are 
dried  out,  the  filling  will  usually  stay,  even  if  no  cutting  has 
to  be  done.  This  serves  as  a  protection  while  the  gums  lie 
over  the  ends  of  the  teeth,  and  while  they  are  still  unused  in 
mastication.  When  the  tooth  gets  well  through,  and  is  an- 
tagonized and  used,  the  danger  of  softening  of  fissure  is 
greatly  lessened.  When  the  upper  molars  are  through,  they 
are  treated  in  the  same  way. — Dr.  Perry,  Ohio  Dent.  Jour. 

12.  Pyorrhea  Alveolaris  and  its  Treatment. — What 
is  it  ?  iSTo  one  knows  definitely,  but  it  is  a  disease  of  frequent 
occurrence,  and  when  advanced  to  the  stage  of  pus  discharge 
requires  speedy  and  heroic  treatment.  A  cure  can  be  efiected 
in  a  large  majority  of  cases  when  the  disease  has  not  ad- 
vanced so  far  as  to  cause  the  teeth  to  be  loose  in  their  sockets. 
The  first  step  in  treating  a  case  well  advanced,  is  to  test  well 
the  condition  of  the  alveola  support  of  the  teeth.  As  a  rule, 
it  is  a  good  practice  to  advise  patients  to  have  all  teeth  ex- 
tracted that  have  lost  two-thirds  of  their  alveolar  support; 
as  not  one  time  in  twenty  can  a  tooth  be  retained  with  satisfac- 
tion, if  as  much  as  two-thirds  of  the  process  has  been  destroyed 
by  the  disease.  The  next  step  in  treatment  (and  very  import- 
ant) is  to  remove  from  the  teeth  all  accessible  deposits,  when 
deposits  are  so  located  on  roots  of  teeth  as  not  to  be  reached 
and  dislodged  with  scalers ;  the  tooth  or  teeth  containing 
such  should  be  extracted ;  a  cure  cannot  be  efiected  so  Ions 


18  DEPARTMENT     A. 

as  deposits  (however  small  in  quantity)  remain  on  roots  of 
teeth.  To  remove  deposits  successfully  and  without  detri- 
ment to  surface  of  cementum  with  ultimate  injury  to  gum 
tissues,  and  to  make  a  cure  possible  and  sure,  smooth  edge 
scalers  must  be  used.  Success  in  treatment  of  the  disease 
depends  very  much  upon  the  style  of  scalers  used,  and  how 
used ;  the  chief  consideration,  the  thorough  removal  of  all 
deposits  possible  to  be  reached;  after  which,  the  application 
of  sulphuric  acid  (dilute)  to  suit  respective  cases.  In  old 
subjects,  with  disease  far  advanced,  one  of  acid  to  six,  eight, 
or  ten  of  water  is  not  too  strong ;  with  younger  persons,  and 
disease  not  advanced  to  medium  stage,  one  of  acid  to  fifteen, 
twenty,  or  thirty  of  water  is  suitable  strength.  The  acid  is 
always  beneficial  and  never  injurious. 

The  patient  can  now  take  charge  and  conduct  trpatment 
until  a  normal  state  of  the  gums  is  restored,  which  ordinarily 
can  be  accomplished  to  satisfaction  in  a  week  or  a  fortnight, 
according  to  extent  of  disease,  age  of  patient,  prosecution  of 
manipulative  treatment  as  advised  ;  free  use  of  tooth-brush, 
tooth-pick  (quill)^  and  finger  pressure  on  gums  after  meals, 
daily  for  a  week  or  two,  or  until  cure  is  definite. 

When  a  cure  has  been  accomplished  and  treatment  dis- 
continued, patient  must  be  instructed  to  use  tooth-brush  and 
pick  systematically,  and  with  regularity,  after  meals.  It  is  a 
cleanly,  wholesome  practice,  and  should  be  regarded  an 
agreeable  privilege,  and  if  freely  indulged  will  prove  a  safe- 
guard against  return  of  the  disease  in  a  very  large  majority 
of  cases. 

My  experience  justifies  the  assertion  that  the  disease  is 
curable,  and  it  can  be  easily  cured  when  treated  as  above  indi- 
cated and  instructions  to  patients  are  respected  and  faithfully 
practiced. 

The  disease  is  well-defined  and  easy  to  diagnose,  no  need 
mistaking  it  for  any  other  disease.  There  has  been  much 
speculative  theory  on  the  subject  of  cause,  but  so  far  nothing 
definite  is  known.  The  disease  always  commences  at  the 
margin  of  the  gum,  and  gradually  advances  toward  the  alve- 
olar process;  if  treated  early,  cure  is  speedy  and  permanent. 


USEFUL      HINTS.  19 

If  not  treated  and  checked,  tlie  advance  is  to  the  apex  of"  the 
roots  of  the  teetli  involved  (sometimes  slow  and  sometimes 
rapid),  causing  loss  of  the  teeth ;  then  the  disease  ahates,  and 
the  soft  tissues  assume  a  normal  state. 

Tlie  disease  dates  far  back,  and  very  probablj^  has  never 
changed  type.  The  idea  that  splinters  from  tooth-picks  or 
other  foreign  substances  imbedded  in  the  gum  tissue  can  and 
do  produce  the  disease  (as  some  contend)  is  too  absurd  to 
be  entertained.  Less  theory  as  to  cause  of  the  disease  and 
more  conservative  treatment  for  cure  would  be  best  for  suf- 
fering patients. 

In  the  treatment  of  pyorrhea,  as  in  most  diseases  pertain- 
ing to  the  dental  structure,  but  few  remedies  are  requisite. 
With  less  than  a  dozen  well  selected  remedies  successful  prac- 
tice can  be  conducted,  and  Avith  them  all  can  be  accomplished 
for  the  check  and  cure  of  disease  possible  or  deservable. 

Our  safest  and  best  teacher  and  guide  in  practice  is  ex- 
perience and  careful  observation  of  results.  Pj^orrhea  alveo- 
laris  is  a  curable  disease. — B,  F.  Arrington,  D.  D.  S. 


13.  Inflammation  After  Extraction.  With  exostosis, 
and  large  and  divergent  roots,  the  force  necessary  for  their 
removal  is  sometimes  equal  to  all  the  strength  the  operator 
can  bring  to  bear,  and  it  is  unreasonable  to  suppose  that  this 
amount  of  strain  can  be  aj^plied  without  some  inflammation 
following.  Here  is  where  the  systemic  condition  of  the 
patient  must  be  considered.  There  are  many  so  constituted 
that  any  wound  heals  readilj^  by  first  intention.  If  no  broken 
or  displaced  process  has  been  allowed  to  remain  to  cause  irri- 
tation, the  place  will  soon  heal,  and  will  be  materially  aided 
by  the  use  of  antiseptic  and  astringent  lotions.  But  in  a 
great  number  of  people  local  disturbance  so  severe  as  the 
extraction  of  a  tooth  of  this  kind  is  sure  to  be  followed  by 
an  exhibition  of  the  inflammatory  process,  more  or  less  seri- 
ous, according  to  the  severity  of  the  operation  and  the 
systemic  condition  of  the  patient. — Dr.  Thomas,  Ohio  Deii. 
Jour. 


20  DEPARTMENT     A. 

14.  Silk  for  Squeezing  Mercury  from  Amalgam. — 
Dr.  C.  E.  Kells  uses  China  silk  in  which  to  squeeze  out  mer- 
cury from  amalgam.  It  leaves  no  fibers  adhering  to  the 
material,  as  from  the  use  of  chamois  skin. — Ohio  Journal. 

15.  Gold-capped  Cement  Fillings. —  *  *  *  j 
prepare  beforehand  a  piece  of  gold  of  the  size  and  proxi- 
mate shape  of  the  opening  of  the  cavity,  by  condensing  a 
few  cohesive  cylinders  on  a  serrated  steel  plate.  I  then 
fill  two-thirds  of  the  cavity  with  an  oxyphosphate  cement, 
place  the  prepared  piece  of  gold  on  the  cement  while  it  is 
yet  soft^  and  finish  the  filling  by  putting  on  more  cohesive 
gold,  until  the  desired  fullness  is  arrived  at,  I  claim  to  have 
good  results  with  these  fillings  and  to  save  a  great  deal  of 
labor. — Dr.  Oltramore,  Swiss  Odontological  Society. 

16.  Useful  Right  Angle  Points. — A  very  serviceable 
addition  to  right  angle  points  of  the  engine  is  a  number  of 
small  screw-pointed  mandrels  mounted  with  the  smaller 
wheels  and  cones.  In  grinding  to  fit  bands  these  mounts 
will  enable  the  operator  to  turn  many  an  angle  with  ease 
that  otherwise  would  be  an  afiliction  to  the  patient  and  him- 
self.—Dr.  F.  E.  Battershell,  Ohio  Ben.  Jour. 

17.  Necrosis  of  Superior  Maxillary. — About  three 
months  ago  a  young  woman  applied  to  me  for  treatment, 
and  I  found  her  suflering  from  an  alveolar  abscess.  After 
the  usual  symptoms  being  manifested,  fluctuation  was  de- 
tected. A  free  incision  was  made  with  a  scalpel,  and  quite  a 
quantity  of  pus  flowed  through  the  opening,  much  to  the 
patient's  relief. 

The  superior  left  central  incisor,  which  was  the  oflending 
cause,  was  then  extracted,  and  the  patient,  who  was  in  an 
extremely  anasmic  condition,  was  put  on  tonic  treatment. 

The  opening  made  by  the  scalpel  quickly  healed,  and 
the  patient  seemed  entirely  well.  About  four  weeks  later 
she  again  applied  to  me  for  treatment,  complaining  of  severe 
pain  about  the  seat  of  the  former  abscess. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  21 

A  horribly  offensive  odor  was  issuing  from  the  mouth, 
and  on  making  an  examination  a  sinus  was  discovered.  On 
probing,  necrosed  bone  was  found.  Fearing  that  unless 
treatment  was  decided  upon  the  patient  would  again  suffer 
with  alveolar  abscess,  I  decided  to  operate. 

All  the  instruments  to  be  used  were  boiled  and  placed 
in  a  solution  of  carbolic  acid.  The  patient's  face  and  mouth 
were  washed  with  a  solution  of  bichlorid  of  mercury.  My 
own  hands  were  disinfected  with  a  similar  sohition. 

The  patient  was  then  anaesthetized  with  chloroform 
By  means  of  a  circular  engine-saw  and  a  surgical  engine  a 
free  opening  was  made  on  the  outer  side  of  the  right  central 
and  the  left  lateral  incisor  teeth  almost  an  inch  deep.  The 
bone  and  tissue  were  then  cut  away  by  means  of  bone-forceps. 

The  wound  was  then  washed  out  and  disinfected  with  a 
solution  of  bichloride  of  mercury.  A  dressing  of  carbolized 
lint  was  then  packed  into  the  opening  and  secured  by  liga- 
tures to  the  adjacent  teeth.  This  dressing  was  changed 
twice  daily  for  one  week,  when  it  was  removed  entirely. 

A  mouth-wash,  consisting  of  boracic  acid,  ten  grains 
to  the  ounce  of  water,  was  given,  to  be  used  every  hour.  In 
two  weeks  after  the  operation  the  wound  had  healed,  and 
there  was  little  or  no  soreness. 

An  impression  of  the  mouth  was  then  taken  and  a  plate 
made,  with  a  left  superior  central  incisor  attached  to  it,  to- 
gether with  a  piece  of  rubber  running  up  into  the  space  left 
by  the  removal  of  the  necrosed  bone. 

So  far  the  patient  has  felt  no  uneasiness,  and  I  have 
every  right  to  believe  that  the  operation  has  been  a  success. 
— B.  D.  Friedenwald,  D.D.S.,  in  Ohio  Journal. 

18.  Vascular  Growths  on  the  Gums. — A  very  un- 
comihon  affection  is  a  npevoid  or  vascular  tumor  of  the  gum. 
Such  usually  occur  in  adult  or  middle  life,  and  are  most 
commonly  situated  in  the  upper  jaw,  between  the  incisors 
and  canines.  They  are  generally  of  small  size,  about  as  large 
as  a  pea,  and  are  often  more  or  less  pedunculated.  They  tend 
to  increase  in  size  ;  they  are  compressible,  and  can  thus  be 


22  DEPARTMENT     A. 

reduced  to  the  level  and  color  of  the  gums.  They  are  of  a 
bright  red  color,  and  bleed  readily  on  pressure,  etc.  Hemor- 
rhage is  indeed  their  most  important  symptom  ;  it  usually 
occurs  at  night,  when  in  the  recumbent  posture,  and  consists 
in  a  general  oozing  from  the  whole  surface  of  the  growth. 
In  rare  cases  this  may  be  very  severe,  and  on  this  account 
they  may  require  removal,  though  they  are  perfectly  inno- 
cent, and  do  not  return  when  carefully  eradicated.  This  is 
best  done  by  freely  excising  with  the  knife,  iucluding,  at  the 
same  time,  a  small  portion  of  the  subjacent  vascular  and 
spongy  bone.  Cold  and  pressure  will  usually  check  any 
hemorrhage.  Any  subsequent  sprouting  granulations  should 
be  touched  with  nitrate  of  silver.  Before  resorting  to  exci- 
sion, you  might  first  try  the  effects  of  ligating  the  growth,  or 
of  destroying  it  by  caustics. — Frank  Lankester,  L.R.C.P., 
M.R.C.S.,  L.D.S.,  in  Ohio  Journal 

19.  Gold  Backing  Eroded  Teeth. — Upon  examination, 
I  found  that  not  only  had  the  cutting  edges  of  the  four  incis- 
ors been  much  broken  down,  but  that  the  enamel  was  also 
eroded  or  dissolved  from  the  entire  lingual  surfaces  of  the 
four  incisors  (excepting  a  small  part  of  the  right  lateral), 
most  of  the  lingual  surface  of  the  left  cuspid  was  stripped 
of  enamel,  and  the  right  cuspid  had  also  suffered  from  the 
same  cause,  but  to  a  slight  degree  only. 

Whatever  may  have  been  the  etiology  of  the  case,  the 
treatment  was  as  follows :  Rubber-dam  being  applied  to  the 
incisors  and  forced  well  under  the  gum  so  as  to  effectually 
exclude  all  moisture,  a  narrow  groove  was  drilled  along  the 
cutting  edge  of  the  right  central  and  extended  around  the 
lingual  surface  of  the  tooth,  as  near  as  possible  to  its  periph- 
ery. Several  similar  grooves  were  next  cut  across  the  lin- 
gual surface  parallel  with  the  long  axis  of  the  tooth,  but  not 
connected  with  the  circumvallating  groove. 

The  grooves  were  made  as  deep  as  circumstances  would 
permit,  and  were  slightly  undercut.  They  were  then  care- 
fully filled  with  Williams'  cylinders  of  cohesive  gold  foil, 
thoroughly  condensed  by  hand  pressure.    When  the  grooves 


USEFUL     HINTS.  23 

were  all  filled,  gold  was  built  across  trom  one  groove  to  an- 
other till  all  of  the  interstices  were  bridged,  and  the  pol- 
ished surfixce  of  dentine  entirely  covered.  This  golden  surface 
Avas  then  built  on  till  a  sufficient  and  uniform  thickness 
was  attained.  The  gold  on  the  cutting  edge  was  carried 
over  a  short  distance  on  the  labial  surface  and  also  built 
down  sufticiently  to  give  the  tooth  a  somewhat  natural  out- 
line, but  not  enough  to  endanger  the  stability  of  the  work 
or  to  disfigure  the  mouth  with  an  unpleasant  gleam  of  gold. 
The  gold  extended  also  in  those  small  proximal  cavities 
from  which  the  remains  of  soft  gold  fillings  had  been  re- 
moved. The  Avhole  was  then  carefully  finished^  making  a 
strong  but  delicate  armor  for  the  defenseless  tooth. 

The  operation  was  repeated  the  next  day  on  the  left 
central,  and  at  subsequent  sittings  both  laterals  were  similar- 
ly treated.  The  pulps  of  these  teeth  were  alive,  but  that  of 
the  left  cuspid  was  dead.  The  root  of  this  tooth  therefore, 
after  treatment,  was  filled  with  gutta-percha,  the  cavity  of 
decay  with  gold,  and  the  whole  of  the  lingual  surface 
sheathed  with  gold  in  the  manner  before  described.  The 
appearance  of  the  lingual  surfaces  after  treatment  is  shown 
in  the  accomj)anying  figure. 


\^^ 


I  have  recently  examined  these  teeth  and  replaced  some 
smaller  portions  of  gold  about  the  cutting  edges  and  one 
corner  of  a  lateral.  Once  before,' since  the  primary  opera- 
tion, were  some  very  slight  additions  of  gold  needed,  but, 
as -a  whole,  the  work  has  remained  intact  for  eleven  years. 
During  this  time  the  teeth  have  been  subjected  to  the  severest 
tests  of  mastication,  the  patient  being  a  New  York  business 


24  DEPARTMENT     A. 

man  now  in  robust  health.  Time  is  the  crucial  test  of  den- 
tistry, and  it  has  proved  the  usefulness  and  permanence  of  this 
operation. — Dr.  Henry  jST.  Dodge,  in  International  Journal. 

20.  Securing  Loosened  Incisors. — On  one  occasion 
the  temptation  to  attempt  the  retention  of  such  teeth  was- 
increased  by  the  pleadings  of  the  patient,  a  gentleman  about 
seventy  years  of  age,  in  good  health,  and.  of  good  physique, 
who  had  more  than  the  usual  horror  of  artificial  teeth,  assur- 
ing me  that  he  would  bear  any  fatigue,  put  up  with  any  dis- 
comfort, if  I  would,  but  save  his  natural  teeth. 

The  teeth  had,  as  nsual,  elongated,  considerably,  and. 
when  the  jaws  were  closed,  the  four  inferior  incisors  would 
sometimes  shut  inside  and  sometimes  outside  the  upper  ones, 
though  the  roots  were  long  and  still  had  quite  an  attachment 
to  the  gum. 

The  first  step  was  to  grind  down  the  elongated  teeth 
with  corundum  stones  until  they  would  clear  the  upper  ones 
when  closed.  An  impression  was  taken,  and  upon  the  dies 
obtained  a  cap  of  pure  gold,  about  number  30,  was  swaged 
to  fit  the  upper  two-thirds  of  the  lingual  surfaces  of  the  six 
teeth,  and  extending  over  the  tops  of  the  teeth  to  a  point, 
perhaps,  one-fourth  of  the  distance  down  the  labial  surface. 
This  cap,  being  carefuUj''  fitted,  was  cemented  in  place  June, 
1891,  with  zinc  phosphate,  and  the  edges  of  the  cap  burn- 
ished to  the  teeth  wherever  possible.  The  teeth  were  then 
thoroughly  scaled  and  cleaned. 

This  pure  gold  cap  has  become  loose,  I  think,  twice 
since  it  was  put  on,  but  it  is  easily  readjusted,  and  has  in 
every  way  fulfilled  my  expectations,  for  the  teeth  are  pre- 
served, and,  I  think,  can  be  indefinitely. — S.  E.  Davenport, 
Ext.  International. 

21.  Hints  on  Giving  Gas. — It  would  be  better  for  the 
profession  if  dentists  would  use  gas  more  than  they  do,  and 
not  talk  heart,  lungs,  etc.,  to  scare  patients  when  they  do  go 
to  a  dentist  who  uses  it. 

Get  the  confidence  of  your  patient,  then   be   sure  the 


USEFUL     HINTS.  25 

clothes  are  loose,  to  give  free  play  to  the  diaphragm.  Tell 
the  patient  to  rest  the  hands  on  arms  of  chair,  and  be  sure 
that  they  don't  take  hold  tight;  then  there  will  not  be  the 
tired  and  exhausted  feeling  from  nerve  and  muscular  ten- 
sion. "Don't  try  to  get  too  many  teeth  during  one  adminis- 
tration ;  better  administer  it  three  or  four  times  at  one  sit- 
ting.    Some  use  a  mouth  prop;  but  I  never  do. 

I  find  that  the  gas-bags  that  have  the  outlet  at  end  of 
bag  is  the  cause  of  checking  the  free  flow  of  gas,  when  it 
bends  by  pulling  on  outlet  tubing,  at  the  small  point  of  the 
bag.  To  overcome  this  trouble,  I  have  had  a  six-gallon  bag 
made,  with  outlet  coupling  put  on  the  side  of  the  bag,  which 
surely  gives  a  free  flow  of  gas. — Wm.  C.  C.  Ball,  in  Items. 

22.  Repairing  Bicuspids  with  Porcelain. — A  young 
lady  patient,  having  broken  ofi:'  the  buccal  cusp  from  her  first 
upper  bicuspid,  had  it  built  out  by  a  brother  operator  with 
OS-artificial,  which  had  failed  to  stand  the  force  of  mastica- 
tion. I  advised  her  to  have  it  built  out  with  gold.  But, 
on  removing  the  filling,  I  found  that  decay  had  made  such 
ravages  On  the  proximal  surfaces  that  it  was  impossible  to 
put  the  rubber-dam  on  sufliciently  close  to  keep  off"  the  secre- 
tion or  to  prevent  hemorrhage  during  the  necessarily  tedious 
operation.  Thinking  of  Dr.  Bonwill's  suggestion,  I  took  an 
artificial  bicuspid,  ground  it  down  flat,  and,  removing  the 
pins,  cut  it  oft"  and  fitted  it  nicely  ;  then  cut  a  deep  dove- 
tailed groove  lengthwise  in  its  lingual  surface ;  then  warmed 
gutta-percha,  and  fitted  it  so  as  to  perfectly  replace  the  miss- 
ing cusp.  ]!Text  I  took  an  impression  and  fitted  a  band  very 
closely  around  the  whole  tooth  ;  removed  the  band  and  gutta- 
percha ;  made  good  retaining  points  in  the  remaining  cusp ; 
placed  the  porcelain  cusp  in  position,  and  again  forced  the 
band  over  the  tooth  ;  kept  it  firmly  in  position,  and  packed 
the  cavity  between  the  cusps  with  the  best  amalgam,  allow- 
ing it  to  harden  for  forty-eight  hours.  I  then  removed  the 
band  and  polished  the  amalgam.  The  young  lady  has  eaten 
every  meal  on  it  since,  and  it  would  take  an  expert  to  tell  the 
artificial  from  a  natural  cusp. — E.  G.  Smith,  D.D.S.,  in  Cosmos. 


26  DEPARTMENT     A. 

23.  To  Make  Gold  Stick.— Dr.  Storey,  of  Dallas,  Tex., 
said  when  bis  sold  would  not  stick  he  passed  it  through 
tincture  of  iodin  and  then  the  flame,  and  it  would  stick  like 
ISTorth  Carolina  resin. —  West.  Dent.  Jour. 

24.  Mirrors  and  Lamps  for  the  Forehead. — I  hav6 
found  a  mirror  attached  to  the  forehead  by  a  tight  elastic 
band  a  convenience  in  working.  Many  dentists,  the  writer 
among  the  number,  work  much  with  the  chair  tipped  ba<3k, 
and  depend  upon  the  image  reflected  from  a  small  mouth 
mirror.  The  surface  of  this  mirror  being  turned  from  the 
window  frequently  does  not  get  enough  light  to  make  the 
cavity  as  bright  as  might  be  wished,  and  if  an  attempt  is 
made  to  reflect  light  on  its  surface,  from  a  mirror  placed 
above  and  behind  the  patient,  the  operator's  head  frequently 
prevents  this  from  being  eflicient,  as  it  comes  between  and 
cuts  oft"  the  light. 

Ey  placing  a  light  mirror  on  the  forehead  increased 
illumination  can  be  obtained,  either  by  throwing  the  light 
directly  upon  the  cavity  or  reflecing  it  upon  the  small  mouth 
mirror. 

A  small  electric  lamp  worn  in  the  same  position,  though 
somewhat  warm,  answers  well  enough  for  this  purpose,  where 
the  electricity  can  be  taken  from  the  street,  but  is  entirely 
out  of  the  question  where  the  ibrce  must  come  from  a  factory ; 
and  beside  is  rather  bright  for  the  patient's  eyes. 

I  think  if  some  of  the  readers  of  the  Practitioner  will 
try  this  simple  device  they  will  like  it.  Many  flllings  fail 
because  the  cuttino-  was  done  in  a  light  which  failed  to  show 
that  the  decay  was  not  entirely  removed. — William  Herbert 
Rollins,  D.D.S.,  The  Dental  Practitioner. 

25.  Care  of  the  Engine. — To  obtain  the  best  results 
from  our  encrine,  and  other  dental  machinerv,  it  must  be 
properly  oiled  and  cared  for.  .  ISTo  engine  or  other  delicate 
mechanism  will  be  at  its  best  unless  properly  oiled  and  cleaned 
when  needed.  Few  dentists  have  any  idea  of  the  injury  done 
their  machinery  by  neglect.    The  engine,  plugger,  lathe-head, 


USEFUL     HINTS.  27 

fan,  and  all  other  machines  used,  should  he  oiled  frequently 
with  the  finest  of  oil,  and  only  a  little  quantity  put  on  at  a 
time,  as  often  as  once  a  week.  The  engine  hand-piece, 
plugger,  etc.,  should  be  taken  apart,  wiped  off  and  fresh  oil  put 
on.  Do  not  use  enough  oil  so  it  will  overflow,  causing  dirt 
and  dust  to  collect,  which  not  only  soils  the  hands,  but  in- 
terferes with  the  working  of  the  machine.  A  little  attention 
to  these  matters  will  be  well  repaid. — Wm.  PI.  Steele,  D.D.S. 

26.  Extracting  to  Implant. — In  extracting  teeth  which 
are  to  be  replanted,  or  implanted,  the  crown  should  always 
be  protected  with  sheet  lead  or  sheet  tin. — L.  G.  Bryan,  in 
Ohio  Dental  Journal.  ^ 

27.  To  Stop  Holes  in  Rubber-dam. — In  case  holes  are 
made  in  rubber-dam  by  accident,  use  short  cylinders  of  cork, 
a  little  larger  than  the  tear  in  the  rubber.  A  groove  is  cut 
round  the  circumference  of  the  cork,  so  that  the  edges  of  the 
rubber  slip  into  it  and  hold  in  position. — D.  Y.  Beacock,  in 
Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

28.  Filling  Undercuts. — Difficulties  often  occur  with 
proximal  cavities.  You  will  frequently  find  extensive  caries 
under  the  enamel  cusps.  You  will  have  large  undercuts,  and 
such  undercuts  are  difficult  to  fill  with  gold.  It  is  good  prac- 
tice to  fill  these  spaces  first  with  oxychlorid  or  oxyphosphate 
of  zinc,  and  I  prefer  the  former,  making  the  cavity  more  sim- 
ple for  the  gold. — Dr.  Grouse,  Illinois  Society. 

29.  Contouring  with  Amalgam. — I  have  been  able  to 
get  as  good  proximal,  contour  fillings  in  the  molars  and 
bicuspids  with  amalgam  as  I  often  see  of  gold,  hy  using  for  a 
matrix  a  piece  of  metallic  finishing  strip,  held  in  place  by  the 
Booth  matrix  clamp,  which  consists  of  a  steel  wedge  hol- 
lowed out  so  as  to  fit  the  contour  of  the  crown,  one  of  which 
is  at  each  end  of  a  strong  clamp.  This  applied  outside  the 
strip  matrix  holds  it  solid  and  wedges  the  teeth  apart  at  the 
same  time. 


28  DEPARTMENT    A. 

Use  a  good  amalgam  as  dry  as  possible,  pack  solid,  wip- 
ing out  the  excess  of  mercury  with  pellets  of  cotton  or  bibu- 
lous j^aper,  finishing  with  amalgam  that  is  hot  enough  to 
expel  the  mercury. 

Remove  the  clamp  and  draw  the  strip  out  sidewise,  and 
finish  with  a  thin  strip  between.  The  result  is  a  beautiful" 
contour,  knuckling  as  close  to  the  other  tooth  as  though  it 
had  been  built  of  gold,  thus  preserving  the  interdental  space. 
Though  I  do  not  claim  that  amalgam  is  as  good  as  gold,  yet 
with  care  good  results  can  be  accomplished. —  C.  II.  West,  in 
Denial  Review. 

30.  Treatment  of  Fractured  Roots. — In  the  treatment 
of  fractured  roots  I  first  tie  a  ligature  around  the  pot,  bring- 
ing the  parts  closely  together ;  then  make  an  application  of 
compound  tincture  of  benzoin  to  the  inflamed  gums,  and 
wait  twenty-four  to  forty-eight  hours.  As  soon  as  the  sore- 
ness has  sufliciently  subsided,  I  drill  a  small  hole  through 
the  fractured  portions  of  the  root  near  the  gum  and  insert  a 
gold  screw.  If  there  is  a  filling,  it  is  replaced  with  Weston's 
cement,  and  care  is  taken  that  the  opposing  tooth  does  not 
strike  the  fracture  in  the  act  of  mastication.  The  ligature 
can  then  be  removed.  After  the  parts  are  held  together  awhile 
by  the  screw  and  cement,  the  inflammation  ought  to  entirely 
subside.  The  crown  or  remaining  portion  can  then  be  re- 
moved or  so  shaped  as  to  receive  a  band  or  cap.  This 
method  applies  to  fractures  extending  some  distance  above 
the  gum.  If,  however,  the  fracture  does  not  extend  too  far 
above  the  gum,  I  remove  it,  and  in  fitting  the  band,  cut  it  so 
as  to  completely  enclose  the  space  made  by  the  removal  of 
the  fractured  piece. — Dr.  Banfield,  in  International. 

31.  Burning  the  Holes  in  Rubber-dam. — Burning  the 
holes  in  the  rubber-dam  makes  it  less  liable  to  tear.  An  old 
broken  excavator  answers  the  purpose,  and  by  using  a  taper 
ing  point  the  holes  can  be  made  any  size. — Dr.  Thompson. 

32.  Getting  Mold  for  Inlays. — Taking,  for  example,  a 
neck  cavity  in  an  upper  central  incisor,  it  is  first  necessary 


USEFUL     HINTS.  29 

to  prepare  the  margin  of  the  cavity,  that  is,  to  carry  this 
back  till  an  unbroken  line  of  healthy  tissue  is  obtained  ;  for 
till  this  is  effected  it  cannot  be  expected  a  perfect  adaptation 
between  the  cavity  wall  and  the  glass  inlay  will  result,  for 
after  the  inlay  has  been  fused,  no  alteration  of  the  margin 
line  must  be  made.  Having  obtained  this,  a  small  quantity 
of  the  deeper  caries  should  be  removed  ;  but  in  no  instance 
should  any  sensible  undercuts  exist,  as  they  are  likely  to 
prevent  the  mold  being  withdrawn.  To  obtain  a  mold,  gold 
foil,  or  platinized  gold,  of  twelve  grains  should  be  employed, 
and  I  may  here  mention  a  difference  that  exists  between  the 
two  metals.  Platinized  gold  does  not  fuse  at  the  same  tem- 
perature as  ordinary  gold  foil,  and  it  does  not  apply  itself  so 
readily  to  the  margins  of  the  cavity,  having  a  tendency  to 
spring  from  its  increased  hardness.  Having  cut  a  square 
piece  of  foil  large  enough  to  exceed  the  cavity  to  a  consider- 
able extent,  it  is  folded  hito  four  and  then  opened  ;  by  this 
means  we  obtain  an  apex  which  will  j^ass  to  the  bottom  of 
the  ciavity.  "With  the  index  finger  of  the  left-hand,  the  foil 
is  held  at  the  margin  of  the  cavity,  and  with  a  small  pellet 
of  cotton  wool  held  in  the  dressing  forceps  in  the  right-hand, 
the  wool  is  firmly  pressed  against  the  gold,  and  continued 
till  it  has  been  adapted  completely  to  the  margin  of  the 
cavity.  The  index  finger  of  the  right-hand  may  then  be 
freely  pressed  against  the  wool  and  the  overlapping  gold  foil, 
till  it  applies  itself  against  the  entire  cavity,  part  of  the  gum, 
and  surrounding  tooth.  If  the  gold  is  not  previously  folded, 
it  is  liable  to  burst  by  the  pressure  of  the  cotton  wool,  thus 
affording  a  leakao;e  when  the  glass  is  beino;  fused. — Journal 
British  Association. 

33.  Broken  Instruments  as  Plugger  Points. — Broken 
cone  socket  excavators  make  the  vevy  best  plugger  points  for 
the  Snow  and  Lewis  automatic  pluggers.  They  just  fit,  and 
the  newly  fractured  points  are  better  than  serrations. — Geo. 
M.  Merritt. 

34.  Abscess  Evacuator. — Dr.  R.  Walter  Starr's  device 
for  evacuating  an  alveolar  abscess  by  means  of  a  flanged  glass 


30  DEPARTMENT     A. 

tube  and  a  compressible  bulb  was  an  improvement  in  the 
right  direction,  and  I  liave  supplemented  and  simplified  it 
])y  adapting  Dr.  J.  B.  Wood's  patented  polishing-cups  to  the 
like  uses.  My  method  is  to  take  one  of  these  cups,  say  No. 
2  (see  illustration),  and  plug  the  mandrel  hole 
with  a  piece  of  gutta-percha,  which  must  not  pro- 
ject on  the  inside  of  the  cup.  Then  wet  the  inside 
of  the  cup,  and  place  it  Over  the  gum  so  as  to  cover  the 
opening  into  the  abscess.  Gently  press  the  cnp  flat  on 
the  gum,  and  on  removing  the  finger,  the  elasticity  of 
the  cup  will  cause  sufficient  suction  to  fill  the  cup  with  the 
contents  of  the  abscess,  which,  by  repeatedly  applying  the 
cup,  may  be  completely  evacuated.  Medicaments  placed  in 
the  tooth-cavit}^  may  likewise  be  drawn  through  the  sac  and 
sinus,  and  immediate  root-filling  be  practiced  with  greater 
prospect  of  success  than  by  any  other  means. — Thomas  M. 
Hunter,  D.D.S.,  in  Cosmos. 

35.  Root  Canal  Treatment. — The  canal  is  prepared, 
the  rubber-dam  applied,  and  thoroughly  dried ;  as  for  an}' 
other  method.  IS'ow  place  some  bi-chlorid  of  mercury  on  a 
glass  slab,  add  carbolic  acid  to  form  a  thin  paste  ;  roll  a  small 
canal  probe  in  it  and  thoroughly  smear  the  entire  length  of 
the  canal.  Heat  one  of  the  home-made  canal  driers'^  hot  and 
pass  up  into  the  canal,  and  carefully  sear  all  parts  of  it.  The 
root  should  be  wiped  out  with  absorbent  paper  cones,  and 
the  process  repeated. — H.  S.  West,  D.D.S. 

36.  To  Remove  Broken  Points  From  Root  Canals. — 

To  remove  broken  instruments  from  root  canals,  pump  euca- 
lyptus oil  into  the  canal,  which  so  softens  its  walls  that  the 
instrument  can  be  readil}"  removed. — T.  P.  Williams,  in 
Catching' s  Compendiam. 

37.  A  Temporary  Filling. — Heat  red  or  white  gutta- 
percha on  a  porcelain  disk  or  slab  till  sufficiently  soft  to 
be  kneaded  full  of  zink  fillings;  this  will  make  excellent 
temporary  fillings. — Archives  of  Dentistry. 

*  Described  on  another  page. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  31 

38.     A  New  Matrix  — T  consider  the  matrix  one  amono- 

& 

our  greatest  time,  labor,  and  patience  (patient's)  savers,  and 
do  not  think  any  one  who  has  become  accustomed  to  using 
them  would  like  to  do  without  their  aid  ;  yet  many  of  those 
now  in  use  are  not  what  they  should  be.  A  matrix  that 
presents  a  flat,  unyielding  surface  to  the  tooth  is  useless,  as 
is  also  a  band  matrix  that  encircles  the  tooth  and  only  has 
one  or  two  points  of  contact.  A  matrix  to  be  a  success 
should  hug  firmly  all.  icalls  of  the  cavity  to  be  operated  on; 
and  should  yield  enough  to  allow  of  giving  the  tooth  its 
natural  contour,  Avithout  being  displaced.  For  years  I  have 
used  thin  German  silver,  such  as  is  used  by  stencil  cutters  for 
making  linen  markers.  Take  a  piece  of  the  metal,  double  it, 
and  cut  in  shape 
shown  in  cut  A. 


Take  a   strip   of 

rubber-dam,   and  "^  fig.  i. 

fold  as  many  thicknesses  as  will  pass  tightly  between  the 
teeth ;  open  the  two  plates  of  the  metal  and  put  the  strip 
of  dam  between,  as  shown  in  B,  and  bring  a  single  thick- 
ness under  the  lip  C.  To  adjust  the  matrix,  take  hold  of 
each  end  of  the  rubber  and  stretch  it,  at  the  same  time  care- 
fuUj^  force  the  matrix  down  between  the  desired  teeth, 
till  the  lower  edge  of  the  metal  is  below  the  bottom  of  the 
cavity;  when  through  with  the  filling,  cut  off  the  lingual 
part  of  dam  close  to  the  metal ;  grasp  the  other  end  of  the 
rubber  with  one  hand,  hold  the  matrix  in  place,  stretching 
the  rubber,  carefully  withdraw  it ;  it  can  be  removed  with- 
out displacing  the  metal;  and  with  a  little  care  this  can  be 
done  without  injury  to  the  softest  amalgam  filling. — Wm. 
IT.  Steele,  D.D.S.,  in  Ohio  Deiiial  Journal. 

39.  "Warm  Instruments. — No  dental  instrument  should 
be  used  at  a  lower  temperature  than  the  blood.  This  may 
seem  a  small  matter,  but  constant  daily  use  has  shown  me 
that  it  is  a  source  of  comfort  to  patients.  It  is  necessary 
that  the  means  used  to  warm  the  instruments  sl^ould  be  sim- 
ple and  automatic,  otherwise  it  will  not  be  done.     I  have  a 


32  DEPARTMENT     A. 

closed  copper  vessel  with  flat  top,  measuring  twenty  by  thirty 
inches,  by  one  inch  in  depth.  In  one  corner  of  the  upper 
surface  is  a  small  upright  pipe  like  the  neck  of  a  bottle,  which 
is  closed  with  a  cork.  This  fiat'  vessel  covers  the  top  of  my 
operating  case,  one  end  projecting  enough  to  allow  a  gas- 
burner  to  be  placed  under  it  without  risk  of  burning  the 
wood-work  of  the  case. 

Before  use,  the  vessel  is  half  filled  with  water  and  the 
cork  put  in.  A  simple  automatic  regulator  turns  down  the 
gas  when  the  temperature  has  reached  the  proper  point,  and 
maintains  it  there  all  day.  I  select  the  instruments  to  be 
used,  and  jDut  them  on  the  pan,  where  they  warm  in  a  few 
minutes.  In  addition  to  the  instruments,  six  small  glasses 
of  water  are  kept  on  the  closed  pan ;  in  one  of  these  is  a 
small  chemical  thermometer,  which  shows  that  the  temper- 
ature is  right ;  in  another  I  keep  the  syringe  for  washing 
out  the  decayed  cavities.  The  other  glasses  are  for  the  use 
of  patients  in  rinsing  the  mouth. .  If  for  no  other  purpose, 
it  would  be  worth  while  to  have  such  an  apparatus  to  furnish 
a  supply  of  properly  warmed  water  without  any  care  or  atten- 
tion. There  is,  moreover,  not  the  least  doubt  that  properly 
warmed  instruments  hurt  less  than  when  used  at  the  tem- 
perature of  the  operating-room.  My  warming  vessel  was 
made  by  Peter.  Gray,  12  Marshall  street,  Boston. — -Rollins, 
in  International  Journal. 

40.  To  Rotate  a  Tooth. — Dr.  R.  B.  Adair  has  a  plati- 
num band,  to  which  is  soldered  a  little  cylinder ;  one  end  of 
a  coil  of  very  fine  piano-wire  is  placed  in  the  cylinder ;  the 
other  is  flattened  and  passed  between  the  teeth.  Almost 
any  tooth  can  be  thus  rotated  in  two  or  three  days  with  very 
little  soreness  or  annoyance. — International  Journal. 

41.  Vent  Fillings. — Exigencies  in  practice  sometimes- 
require  the  adoption  of  methods  not  consonant  with  what 
would  be  esteemed  the  correct  modes  if  time  or  other  cir- 
cumstances would  permit.  For  example,  a  patient  will, 
within  a  few  hours,  take  train  or  steamer,  to  be  absent  sev- 


USEFUL     HINTS. 


33 


eral  months.  A  lower  molar  has,  by  the  patient's  neglect, 
become  pulpless.  In  such  a  case  it  has  been  the  practice  of 
the  writer  to  properly  prepare  the  cavity  for  filling,  as,  for 
instance,  in  Fig.  1.  From  a  box  of  common  cooking  gela- 
tin select  or  cut  a  strip  like  A,  Fig.  2 ;  slightly  warm  it, 
and  bend  it  into  the  bow-shape  of  B,  Fig.  2.  Insert  the  end 
of  one  such  bow  in  the  distal  and  put  another  bow  in  the 
mesial  root-canals,  as  shown  in  Fig.  3.  Out  of  the  larger 
pieces  of  gelatin  bows  may  be  cut  to  suit  the  operator's  pur- 
pose in  any  given  case.  It  is,  of  course,  assumed  that  proper 
preparation  means  drying  as  well  as  shaping  the  cavity,  be- 
ing careful  to  keep  from  the  root  canals  anything  that  would 
obstruct  them.  The  cavity  is  then  filled  with  cement  or 
amalgam,  taking  care  not  to  displace  the  gelatin  bows  from 
the  canals.  So  soon  as  the  filling  becomes  hard  enough  to 
allow  the  admission  of  saliva,  the  gelatin  will  quickly  soften 
so  that  the  filling  on  that  side  may  be  finished  flush,  and  the 
edges  of  the  prospective  openings  be  very  slightly  smoothed 
with  a  suitable  round  bur.  The  completed  filling,  as  in  the 
present  instance,  will  appear  as  represented  in  Fig.  4,  wherein 
B  B  indicate  the  vent  openings. 


Fig.  1.       Fig.  2.  Fig.  3. 

A 


Fig.  4. 


The  patient  may  be  at  once  dismissed,  and  the  dentist 
be  confident  that  in  a  few  hours  the  gelatin  plugs  will  have 
been  completely  dissolved,  and  the  root-canals  have  free  vents 
through  the  sinuses  thus  made,  as  is  clearly  shown  by  the 
section  through  the  crown,  filling,  and  mesial  root  represented 
by  Fig.  5.  It  is  remarkable  that  by  this  simple  method  the 
artificial  sinus  maybe  given  a  flattened  or  a  curved  form, 
and  have  its  entire  course  through  the  filling,  thus  avoiding 


34  DEPARTMENT     A. 

any  danger  of  decay  by  contact  of  the  outflow  with  the  crown 
•or  with  the  root,  as  in  the  Hullihen  operation.  Another 
noteworthy  advantage  is  that  in  whatever  tooth  a  vent  may 
be  thus  provided,  the  discharge  can  be  directed  downward 
so  that  the  opening  will  not  be  liable  to  become  choked  by 
the  gravitation  of  food  debris.  The  opening  may,  moreover, 
be  located  at  any  desired  point  on  the  face  of  an}^  filling. 
There  is  also  a  certainty  that  the  internal  mouth  of  the  arti- 
ficial sinus  will  open  directly  into  the  canal. 

By  the  described  method  all  the  risks  and  uncertainties 
of  ordinary  rhizodontrypy  are  avoided,  and  the  positive  ad- 
vantages before  mentioned  obtained. 

In  cases  of  this  kind  the  patient  should  always  be  plainh^ 
told  that  the  operation  is  but  an  expedient  for  the  temporary 
preservation  of  the  tooth,  which  is  at  the  first  opportunity  to 
be  subjected  to  painless  treatment  and  the  roots  and  crown 
permanently  filled.  The  precise  nature  of  the  temporary 
fillino"  should  in  every  case  be  so  carefully  explained  that 
the  patient  will  be  able  to  exactly  describe  it  to  the  dentist 
who  may  be  called  on  to  complete  the  operation. — W.  S.  H., 
171  Cosmos. 

42.  To  Remove  Stains  From  Teeth. — ^Peroxid  of  hy- 
droo-en  made  into  a  solution  of  the  strength  of  five  per  cent, 
mixed  with  powdered  pumice  and  well  rubbed  over  the  teeth 
removes  most  stains.  The  teeth  should  afterward  be  well 
cleansed  with  tepid  water,  but  the  application  given  above 
is  harmless. — British  Journal  Dental  Science. 

43.  Finishing  Gold  Fillings. — The  finishing  of  gold 
fillings,  especially  of  proximal  surfaces,  is  very  easily  ac- 
complished after  they  have  been  properly  prepared  with 
abrasive  disks.  Take  strips  of  Japanese  bibulous  paper,  from 
a  half  to  an  inch  in  width,  by  four  or  five  inches  in  length ; 
sprinkle  the  surface  with  precipitated  chalk,  fold  the  material 
two  or  three  times  to  retain  the  chalk  in  place ;  then  twist 
the  folded  paper  into  a  string,  and  use  the  same  as  finishing 
tape.     This  makes  one  of  the  finest  finishing  materials,  and 


USEFUL     HINTS.  •  85 

can  be  used  even  when  the  teeth  are  in  close  proximity, — 
Gustavus  North,  D.D.S.,  in  Cosmos. 

44.  Pumice    Carrier. — Dr.  G.  B.  Clement   says,  take 
■  any  shape  wood  point  and,  when  inserted  and  revolving  in 

the  engine,  wrap  it  tight  w^ith  a  piece  of  absorbent  cotton. 
This  dampened  makes  a  splendid  carrier  of  pumice  stone  or 
powders. — Southern  Journal. 

45.  Capping  Teeth. — A  gentleman  whose  upper  molars 
and  second  bicuspids  were  gone,  called  to  consult    me   in 
regard  to  the  eight  remaining  anterior  teeth.     I  found  them 
worn   down   about    3^2"  of  ^^  inch,  and  very  sensitive.     I 
repaired  them   as   follows:     With   a   retain  in  g-point  drill 
I  made  a  hole  on  each  side  of  the  pulp  in  the  cuspids  and 
incisors,  and  about  one-quarter  of  an  inch  deep.     A  piece  of 
24-karat  plate  was  burnished  to  fit  the  worn  and  irregular 
surface  of  the  tooth.     The  position  of  the  holes  showing  in 
the  gold,  a  pointed  instrument  was  forced  through,  and  pins 
made  of  platinum  wire,  long  enough  to  project  a  little,  were 
inserted.     The  gold  remaining  in  place,  a  piece  of  stiff  wax 
was  made  to  adhere,  and  trimmed  to  exactly  represent  the 
tip  to  be  supplied.     This  was  removed  with  the  gold  and 
invested  in  Teague's  Compound, gold  down;  the  investment 
covering  the  wax  up  to  the  cutting  edges.     Melting  out  the 
wax,  I  fused  the  plate  scrap  in  mold  till  it  was  a  little  more 
than  full,  and,  while  it  was  in  a  molten  state,  pressed  it 
quickly  with  the  blade  of  a  spatula.     This  caused  it  to  take 
the  exact  shape  of  the  wax  model.     With  but  little  dressing 
it  was  a  perfect  fit.     I  prepared  six  of  these,  and  for  the 
bicuspids  I  made  shell  crowns.     Placing  each  piece  and  the 
crowns  in  position,  I  took  an  impression,  and  transferred 
them  to  a  plaster  and  asbestos  model.     With  20-karat  solder 
I  tacked  them  all  together  on  the  palatine  surface.     The 
piece  was  set  with   gutta-percha ;    so  far  it  seems  perfect. 
The  work  looks  as  though  it  had  been  built  up  in  the  usual 
manner,  and  it  took  but  five  hours  to  do  it. — Dr.  S.  F.  Gil- 
more,  in  Items. 


36 


DEPARTMENT     A. 


46.  Hand-piece  Protector. — In  the  use  of  mandrels 
carrying  abrading  materials,  especially  when  wet  powders 
are  employed,  the  gritty  substances  are  apt  to  work  along 


the  shank  and  into  the  nose  of  the  hand-piece,  which  thereby 
becomes  worn  out  of  true.  To  avoid  this  injury,  and  also  to 
keep  out  the  saliva  when  using  burs  on  lower  teeth  not 
inclosed  by  the  rubber-dam,  I  slip  over  the  bur  or  mandrel 
shank  one  of  the  small  (No.  1)  rubber  caps  used  for  polishing 
purposes,  and  find  it  to  perfectly  protect  the  hand-piece,  as 
is  made  apparent  by  the  illustrations. — J.  D.  Ennis,  in  Cosmos. 

47.  Palm  for  Separating  Teeth. — Take  a  handle  of  a 
palm-leaf  fan ;  cut  into  wedge  shape  ;  insert  the  wedge  be- 
tween the  teeth,  gradually  increasing  the  size  of  the  wedge 
inserted  every  two  or  three  days,  till  the  desired  space  is 
obtained,  which  will  be  accomplished  without  soreness  or 
pain. — Herald  of  Dentistry. 

48.  New  Treatment  for  Abscess. — There  can  be  no 
alveolar  abscess  unless  there  is  absorption  of  the  alveolus, 
and  that  this  absorption  makes  a  cavity  which  must  be  dis- 
posed of,  to  effect  a  cure.  The  plan  of  procedure  the  writer 
recommends  in  such  cases  is  :  As  soon  as  there  is  an  abscess 
formed,  it  will  be  found  that  the  root  of  the  tooth,  after  ex- 
traction, has  become  denuded  of  its  periosteum  where  the 
sac  is  attached.  The  point  is  to  get  rid  of  the  abscess,  and 
restore  to  a  healthy  condition. 

The  writer  recommends  the  plan  of  filling  the  whole  of 
the  abscess  cavity  and  root  canal  with  a  solution  of  gutta- 
percha in  chloroform.  To  make  this,  take  a  portion  of  gutta- 
percha; cut  in  small  pieces  and  put  in  a  bottle  containing 
chloroform,  enough  to  make  a  paste  of  the  consistency  of 
thin  cream.    Clean  the  pulp  chamber,  root  canal  and  abscess 


USEFUL     HINTS.  37 

cavity  thoroughly — exhausting  all  the  pus  from  the  sac  at 
and  around  the  roots — wash  with  alcohol  and  water,  equal 
parts,  or  with  peroxid  of  hj^drogen  ;  dry  as  well  as  possible. 
Then  with  one  of  Donaldson's  little  bristles,  made  for  cleans- 
ing root  canals,  with  cotton  fibers  wrapped  around  it,  dip 
in  the  gutta-percha  solution  and  introduce  in  the  pulp 
chamber  and  roots,  using  the  cotton-wrapped  broach  as  a 
piston  to  pump  the  solution  through  the  root  canal  into  the 
cavity  of  the  abscess,  continuing  to  force  the  solution  through 
the  root  till  it  makes  its  appearance  at  the  sinus  opening.  If 
it  is  found  coming  too  freely,  lay  the  finger  on  the  opening, 
thus  causing  the  solution  to  be  forced  into  any  and  every 
place  around  the  root  where  the  sac  is,  in  this  manner  strangu- 
lating it  and  preventing  the  gathering  of  lymph,  to  be  sub- 
sequently decomposed  into  pus.  The  abscess  is  thus  destroyed. 
The  gutta-percha,  being  an  inert  substance,  becomes  encysted  ; 
nature,  thus  assisted,  goes  on  and  closes  up  the  sinus  ;  and 
you  will  have  no  more  fear  than  if  there  had  never  been  an 
abscess.  It  has  one  more  recommendation — to  the  patient, 
at  least, it  is  painless. — Dr.  D.  E..  Jennings,  in  Dental  Register. 

49.  Root  Canal  Dryer. — One  of  the  latest  and  best  in- 
ventions for  use  in  dentistry  has  recently  been  gotten  out  by 
Dr.  J.  H.  Woolley,  of  Chicago.  It  is  a  root  canal  dryer, 
and  consists  of  a  handle,  similar  to  that  of  a  plugger.  To 
the  end  of  this  is  screwed  a  cone  of  copper,  to  which  a  copper 
broach  of  any  size  can  be  attached.  The  cone  is  heated  in 
the  flame  till  quite  hot,  then  the  instrument  is  ready  for 
use ;  the  heat  being  steadily  conducted  from  the  cone  to  the 
end  of  the  broach.  "With  it  a  root  can  be  thoroughly  dried 
to  its  apex.  The  instrument  acts  also  as  a  disinfectant,  de- 
stroying, as  it  does  by  heat,  any  microbes  within  the  cavity. 
It  has  been  highly  indorsed  by  prominent  dentists. —  Office 
and  Laboratory. 

50.  Twisted  W^ire  for  Regulating  a  Protruding  Upper 
Jaw. — The  teeth  articulated  well  with  the  lower  as  far  for- 
ward as  the  first  bicuspid,  and  the  lower  arch  in  the  bicuspid 


38  DEPARTMENT     A.  . 

region  was  broad  enough  to  conform  to  and  jDermit  the 
teeth  to  articulate  with  those  of  the  upper  jaw.  An  appli- 
ance was  made,  consisting  of  a  rubber  plate,  which  covered 
the  upper  back  teeth.  In  the  right  side  of  the  plate  was 
vulcanized  one  end  of  half-round  platinum  wire,  which  was 
passed  around  in  front  of  the  incisors  and  terminated  at  a 
loop  in  the  free  end.  Two  little  hooks  were  soldered  to  the 
front  of  the  band  in  such  a  way  as  to  catch  over  the  ends  .of 
the  centrals  when  the  plate  was  in  the  mouth,  and  prevent 
the  wire  slipping  up  against  the  gums.  In  the  left  side  of 
the  plate  a  staple  was  vulcanized. 

When  the  plate  was  in  position  a  copper  wire  was  passed 
through  both  the  loop  and  staple,  and  had  its  ends  brought 
together  and  twisted,  this  producing  pressure  on  the  cen- 
trals, laterals  and  cuspids. 

From  time  to  time  another  twist  was  given  to  the  cop- 
per wire,  till  at  the  end  of  seven  weeks  the  teeth  were  in 
the  desired  position, 

A  retaining  fixture  was  then  placed,  consisting  of  a  strip 
of  pure  gold,  ISTo.  5  to  No,  6  Stubbs,  and  French  gauge,  so 
bent  and  soldered  as  to  form  a  loop  at  each  end. 

Having  previously  separated  the  teeth  with  linen  tapes ; 
the  looped  strips  were  covered  inside  with  thick  chloro- 
percha  and  passed  around  the  anchor-teeth,  allowing  the 
loops  to  be  on  the  outer  side. 

Copper  wire  was  passed  through  these  loops,  and  the  ends 
of  the  wire  were  brought  together  and  twisted  till  the  pure 
gold  bands  were  perfectly  s wedged  to  the  convexity  of  the 
crowns,  forcing  the  superfluous  chloro-percha  out  at  all  points 
and  making  an  accurate  fit,  (These  bands  did  not  move 
till  taken  off"  four  months  later,) 

Copper  wires  were  fastened  to  the  loops  left  in  the  baud 
at  the  buccal  surfaces  of  the  teeth,  and  brought  around  the 
front  teeth,  from  both  sides,  and  twisted  together  at  the  cen- 
trals. This  drew  the  six  front  teeth  to  their  exact  places. 
The  twisted  ends  were  then  bent  over  the  cutting-edges  of 
the  centrals,  to  protect  the  gums  from  the  wire.  All  rough 
places  on  the  sides  were  then  covered  with  gutta-percha. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  39 

The  patient  was  instructed  to  remove  the  plate  while 
eating,  and  by  so  doing  a  very  good  articulating  of  the  finish 
Avas  secured. 

Positive  and  intermittent  force  is  secured  by  such  a  use 
of  twisted  wires  as  above  indicated.  The  principle  involved 
is  that  of  the  inclined  plane,  which  is  also  the  principle 
made  use  of  in  the  screw. 

Appliances  dependent  on  twisted  wire  for  the  appli- 
cation of  force  are  easily  made  and  applied,  and  possess 
many  obvious  advantages  over  the  screw  in  very  many 
cases.  Wire  of  silver,  galvanized  iron,  or  copper,  owing  to 
their  pliability,  strength,  and  cheapness,  will  be  found  very 
easily  applied  and  successful. — W.  S.  Davenport,  in  Cosmos. 

51.  Hint  on  Treating  Pulp  Canals. — Properly  to  treat 
pulp  canals  requires  that  the  saliva  should  be  kept  out  of 
them,  and  this  is  sometimes  very  difficult  when  the  cavity 
of  decay  occurs  above  the  gum  line.  In  such  instances  it  is 
impossible  to  so  adjust  the  rubber-dam  that  moisture  will 
not  creep  in.  These  troublesome  cases  have  caused  to  many 
much  trouble  and  annoyance. 

When  the  cavity  is  dried  thoroughly — and  it  will  re- 
quire some  time  and  patience  to  do  this — warm  a  piece  of 
gutta-percha  of  suitable  size,  and  pack  it  in  the  bottom  of 
the  cavity  till  it  fills  the  whole  to  a  point  above  the  line  of 
the  gum  margin.  Apply  the  rubber-dam  as  soon  as  it  is 
cold,  and  with  a  hot  instrument  remove  that  part  which  fills 
the  pulp  chamber  and  obstructs  the  entrance  to  the  canal. 
It  will  require  care  to  do  this  without  disturbing  the  rest 
of  the  filling,  but  it  can  be  done  if  the  instrument  is 
used  hot. 

This  will  form  an  effectual  barrier  against  the  intrusion 
of  saliva  when  the  rubber-dam  is  in  place.  The  gutta-percha 
is  to  be  left  in  position  till  the  treatment  is  d6ne.  If  it  is 
necessary  to  put  in  more  gutta-percha  to  seal  up  the  cavity, 
during  the  periods  between  visits,  adherence  to  the  gutta- 
percha barrier  is  ]3revented  by  anointing  the  latter  with 
vaseline. — Practitioner  and  Advertiser. 


40  DEPARTMENT     A. 

52.  Phosphor-Necrosis. — About  one-seventieth  grain 
phosphorus  is  contained  in  each  match-head.  In  the  dipping 
and  packing  rooms  is  where  the  danger  of  phosphor-necrosis 
is  greatest.  Here  they  are  handled  more,  and  in  damp 
weather  fumes  are  given  oft*.  The  effects  of  phosphorus  are 
local.  In  my  ten  cases,  all  started  from  unsound  teeth. 
Gums  kept  from  the  teeth  by  tartar  is  also  a  cause.  It  is 
generally  thought  that  the  patient  must  have  been  exposed 
for  a  long  time  to  the  fumes  of  the  phosphorus.  I  know  one 
girl  who  was  exposed  only  two  years.  The  physician  rarely 
sees  it  in  the  initial  stage.  Generally  the  patient  comes  a 
few  days  after  having  a  painful  carious  tooth  extracted.  He 
wishes  to  know  why  he  still  has  pain. 

Treatment. — Tincture  of  myrrh  is  good.  Deep  incisions 
liave  not  been  so  successful  in  my  hands.  I  am  a  firm  be- 
liever in  the  early  operation. 

Prevention. — First,  allow  none  to  work  in  the  dipping 
and  packing  departments  who  have  not  sound  teeth.  Second, 
good  ventilation.  Third,  operators  not  allowed  to  eat  din- 
ner in  their  work-rooms,  and  compelled  to  keep  their  hands 
clean.  Fourth,  keep  a  solution  of  the  alkaline  carbonates 
near,  as  a  mouth-wash. — W.  C.  Jacobs,  M.D.,  in  Report  in 
3fedical  and  Surgical  Reporter. 

53.  Effect  of  Hot  Air  on  Cements. — I  have  noticed 
that  when  a  jet  of  heated  air  is  directed  on  a  filling  of  oxy- 
phosphate  which  is  undergoing  the  process  of  crystallization, 
the  resulting  mass  becomes  friable,  with  a  tendency  to  gran- 
ulate, owing  to  the  increased  rapidity  brought  about  by  the 
high  temperature.  It  would  seem  better,  therefore,  to  use  a 
current  of  cold  air  or  that  of  ordinary  room  temperature  on 
such  fillings  rather  than  a  hot  blast. — H.  G.  Register,  in 
Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

54.  Before  Introducing  Syringe  Needle. — Before  in- 
troducing the  syringe  needle  into  the  gums,  it  should  be 
dipped  into  a  strong  solution  of  carbolic  acid,  then  washed 
in  a  five  per  cent,  solution  of  the  same,  which  should  not  be 


USEFUL     HINTS.     '  41 

wiped  off;  but  if  a  drop  remains  on  the  point  when  it  touches 
the  gum,  it  will  paralyze  the  tissue  so  that  the  needle  will 
not  hurt  when  inserted. — N.  S.  Hoff,  in  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

65.  Nitrate  of  Silver  in  Canal. — If  it  is  desirable  to 
introduce  silver  nitrate  into  a  root  canal,  heat  a  platinum 
wire  and  the  crystals  will  adhere  to  it,  and  may  be  carried 
anywhere. — A.  M.  Holmes,  in  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

56.  Amalgam  Finisher. — In  many  places  a  narrow 
strip  of  rubber-dam,  used  as  a  tape,  will  serve  admirably  for 
the  purpose  of  smoothing  down  to  the  borders  and  polishing 
amalgam  fillings  on  proximal  surfaces  of  the  bicuspids  and 
molars,  and  is  especially  good  for  removing  any  particles  that 
may  adhere  to  the  gum  between  the  teeth. — Dental  Office  and 

.  Laboratory. 

57.  To  Splice  a  Broken  Tooth. — Some  five  years  ago 
a  lady  had  the  labial  surface  of  an  upper  bicuspid  split  en- 
tirely ofif,  from  the  central  depression  to  just  below  the  gum. 
The  pulp  was  alive  and  well,  but  the  tooth  presented  a  most 
unsightly  appearance.  The  means  adopted  for  remedying 
the  difiiculty  were  suggested  by  the  case  itself.  I  have  used 
the  same  device  a  number  of  times  since  with  great  satisfac- 
tion, sometimes  even  instead  of  pivot  teeth.  A  cuspid  plate 
tooth  with  long  pins  was  chosen.  With  a  minim  corundum 
stone,  a  socket  was  ground  into  the  broken  tooth  just  above 
the  margin  of  the  gum,  in  which  socket  the  thin  upper 
edge  of  this  porcelain  tooth  could  fit.  After  the  porcelain 
tooth  was  fitted  to  its  place  and  properly  shaped,  a  strip  of 
gold  plate  one-sixteenth  of  an  inch  wide  was  soldered  across 
from  pin  to  pin  like  a  bridge,  leaving  about  one-sixteenth  of 
an  inch  between  it  and  the  tooth.  (See  Fig.  1.)  The  loop 
thus  formed  was  fitted  over  a  projecting  portion  of  the  den- 
tine, and  a  slot  was  ground  into  the  dentine  to  receive  it. 
{See  Fig.  2.) 

A  little  dovetailing  slot  was  also  ground  in  on  either 
side  of  the  remaining  dentine.    A  ring  of  very  thin  platinum 


42 


DEPARTMENT     A. 


was  then  made,  nearly  as  broad  as  the  length  of  the  tooth 
crown,  Thi^  ring  was  j)laced  around  the  broken  natural 
tooth,  the   upper  edge  passing  just  beneath  the  gum.     The 


Fig.  1. 


Fig.  2. 


Fig. 


Fig.  4. 


porcelain  tooth  was  then  placed  inside  the  ring,  w^hich  held 
it  steadily  in  position,  the  loop  passing  over  the  projection 
of  dentine.  The  pressure  exerted  by  the  porcelain  tooth  was 
sufficient  to  fill  out  the  ring  in  all  parts  and  adapt  its  thin 
edges  to  the  varying  size  of  tooth  and  root. 

This  ring,  serving  as  a  matrix,  was  then  filled  with 
amalgam,  malleted  in  around  the  pins  and  dovetails  in  the 
natural  tooth.  On  cutting  the  ring  off  the  next  day  and 
polishing  the  filling,  I  found  all  sensitiveness  had  disap- 
peared, and  with  the  restoration  of  a  perfectly  natural  ap- 
pearance of  the  tooth  and  its  contour,  I  had  a  serviceable 
organ,  which  has  continued  to  do  duty  ever  since.  In  cases 
of  pulpless  teeth  I  have  inserted  a  gold  and  platinum  or 
platinum  screw  firmly  in  the  root,  and  passed  the  loop 
formed  by  the  two  pins  and  the  cross-bar  over  the  screw, 
thus  adding  greatly  to  its  strength.  (See  Fig.  3.)  The  amal- 
gam, properly  mixed,  has  no  surplus  mercury  to  attack  a 
gold  and  platinum  screw.  I  have  replaced  in  this  manner 
quite  a  number  of  teeth  that  were  broken  off  level  with  or 
below  the  gum.  By  passing  the  drill  through  the  loop  of 
the  porcelain  tooth  held  exactly  in  the  desired  position, 
when  drilling  the  hole  for  the  screw,  a  most  accurate  adapta- 
tion can  be  obtained.  An  incisor  can  be  made  irregular  to 
lap  over  its  neighbor,  and  be  varied  otherwise  to  simulate 
the  freaks  of  nature.  A  bicuspid  root  can  be  dovetailed 
inside  the  flattened  pulp  chamber.     The  amalgam  driven 


USEFUL     HINTS.  43 

in  this  dovetail  not  only  helps  to  retain  the  screw  in  posi- 
tion, but  prevents  its  unscrewing,  and  assists  in  supporting 
the  crown,  and  all  this  in  a  cleanly  and  inoffensive  man- 
ner. In  cases  where  the  break  in  the  natural  tooth  is  not 
extensive,  especially  where  it  does  not  pass  below  the  gum, 
phosphate  of  zinc  may  sometimes  be  used  with  advantage  in 
this  process.  But  this  is  seldom  advisable,  on  account  of 
the  unreliable  character  of  the  material. 

The  bridge  from  pin  to  pin  may  also  be  shaped  to  lock 
in  the  dovetail  slots  previously  mentioned,  employing  like- 
wise the  ring  as  a  matrix  for  the  amalgam  investment.  See 
Fig.  4,  in  illustration  of  the  plate  tooth  and  natural  tooth 
thus  prepared. — E.  A.  Bogue,  M.D.,  D.D.S.,  in  Cosmos. 

58.  To  Keep  Cavities  Dry. — "While  filling,  it  is  neces- 
sary to  resort  to  a  great  many  expedients,  according  to  the 
situation  and  other  circumstances.  With  many  small  cavi- 
ties, a  piece  of  spunk  or  string,  or  a  roll  of  paper,  crowded 
under  the  free  margin  of  the  gums,  will  serve  the  purpose 
admirably ;  cut  the  gums  loose  a  little  way,  if  necessary. — 
Items  of  Interest. 

59.  Diamond  Powder  for  Polishing. — A  year  or  two  ago 
I  commenced  practicing  with  diamond  powder  for  a  variety  of 
purposes.  A  little  diamond  powder  goes  a  good  way.  I  use 
a  very  little  of  it  mixed  with  Hindoostan  powder,  and  find 
it  very  effective.  I  use  it  with  a  copper  point,  or  take  an  old 
bur,  heat  and  soften  it,  and  take  oft'  the  bur  part  so  I  have 
simply  a  rounded  part,  dip  it  in  oil  of  cloves  or  oil  of  winter- 
green,  and  use  it,  and  it  is  astonishing  how  rapidly  it  works, 
and  what  a  bright,  clean  surface  it  gives.  It  is  cheaper  than 
you  think,  because  you  mix  it  with  the  other  powder,  and 
that  saves  it  to  a  great  extent,  and  it  saves  time  enough  to 
make  the  value  of  the  diamond  dust  a  very  small  matter. 
The  ordinary  Hindoostan  powder  will  scratch ;  but  the  S.  S. 
White  Company,  at  my  suggestion,  have  made  two  or  three 
grades  by  precipitation,  and  the  finer  ones  will  cut  and  polish 
without  scratching.     Believe  me,  it  is  a  matter  of  no  small 


44  DEPARTMENT    A. 

moment  to  finish  oiFa  filling  or  roughened  tooth-surface  with- 
out scratching.  I  believe  these  diiFerent  grades  of  Hindoo- 
stan  powder  are  the  best  powders  in  the  market  for  dental 
use. — Dr.  George  Evans,  in  International. 

60.  Celluloid  Top  Bracket-table. — I  have  used  a  cellu- 
loid sheet,  instead  of  a  towel  or  cloth,  for  the  top  of  mj  table 
and  my  bracket.  It  is  absolutely  clean,  is  wiped  off  without 
the  slightest  difficulty,  and  it  seems  to  meet  all  the  require- 
ments for  a  covering  of  that  kind.  The  greatest  objection 
to  it  is,  that  if  you  happen  to  let  a  match  fall  on  it,  it  will 
burn  very  rapidly.  It  will  warp  a  little  if  the  sun  shines 
on  it ;  but  practically  it  has  no  serious  objection,  and  I 
would  not  be  without  it.  It  is  cheap  and  economical,  and  a 
sheet  will  last  two  or  three  years.  If  you  let  sulphate  of 
iron  or  iodin  fall  on  it,  it  will,  of  course,  stain ;  but  for 
neatness  and  cleanliness  I  know  of  nothing  that  is  its  equal. 
I  think  enough  to  cover  a  bracket  would  cost  about  sixty 
or  seventy  cents.  It  comes  by  the  yard  or  by  the  sheet,  in 
all  sizes,  shapes  and  colors.  You  can  get  it  at  the  Celluloid 
Company  in  Newark. — George  Evans,  in  Internaiional. 

61.  To  Detect  Dead  Teeth. — To  distinguish  a  livinar 
from  a  dead  tooth  we  have  a  very  simple  test  in  ammoniacal 
carmine  stain.  A  dead  tooth,  or  dead  portions  of  the  tooth, 
such  as  remnants  of  the  pulp  of  the  crown  and  the  zone  of 
dentine  bordering  the  pulp-chamber,  will  never  assume  our 
carmine  stain. — Carl  Heitzmann,  in  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

62.  To  Fill  Roots  with  Chloro-percha. — To  fill  a  root 
with  chloro-percha  or  any  liquid,  dip  the  points  of  a  pair  of 
Dr.  Flagg's  dressing  tweezers,  while  closed,  in  the  liquid. 
Carry  them,  charged  with  the  liquid,  well  up  the  root.  If 
they  are  then  carefully  withdrawn,  and  at  the  same  time  are 
allowed  to  open,  the  liquid  will  be  left  in  the  root. — W.  E. 
Royce,  in  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

63.  Setting  Inlays  Hot.— Dr.  Green,  New  Albany,  sug- 
gests that  in  setting  a  porcelain  inlay  in  cement,  the  piece 


USEFUL     HINTS.  45 

of  tooth  be  made  as  hot  as  can  be  held  in  the  fingers  before 
pressing  home  in  the"  cement.  The  cement  will  set  much 
harder. — International  Journal. 

64.  Oil  Dressing  for  Root  Canals. — Oily  dressing  in  a 
root  canal,  as  the  essential  oils  of  cajeput,  caraway,'  pepper- 
mint, etc.,  are  pleasant  to  taste  and  smell,  are  both  disinfect- 
ant and  anodyne,  are  not  dissipated  by  fluids,  and  do  not 
impair  the  efl&ciency  of  cementum  or  pericementum. — Harlan, 
in  Office  and  Laboratory. 

65.  Polishing  Teeth  After  Cleaning. — If  the  pumice 
or  other  polishing  material  used  for  polishing  the  teeth  after 
removing  calculary  deposits,  be  mixed  with  peroxid  of 
hydrogen  instead  of  water,  it  will  be  found  much  better. — 
Wm.  IL  Steele. 

QQ.  Injecting  Alveolar  Abscess. — Dr.  E.  C.  Brownlee 
gives  his  method  of  treatment  as  follows  :  First  fill  the  cavity 
of  a  pulpless  tooth  with  a  packing  of  common  vulcanizable 
rubber ;  charge  the  hypodermic  syringe  with  carbolic  acid 
and  alcohol ;  push  the  pipe  through  the  rubber,  and  inject 
the  abscess  without  any  leakage  around  the  pipe. — Cosmos. 

67.  Amalgam  That  Will  Not  Shrink  or  Tarnish. — I 
am  confident  that  many  of  our  young  practitioners  jDlace  too 
much  confidence  in  the  claims  of  makers,  for  these  qualities. 
Any  one  who  has  thoroughly  investigated  the  manufacturing 
of  alloys,  knows  very  well  that  the  best  combination  of 
metals,  most  thoroughly  prepared,  can  be  made  to  shrink, 
expand,  or  quickly  tarnish,  under  some  conditions.  I  would 
advise  the  young,  starting  out  in  practice,  to  select  one  of 
the  best  alloys,  then  learn  its  peculiarities,  and  always,  under 
all  circumstances,  work  it  just  as  carefully  and  thoroughly 
as  though  it  were  gold. — Wm.  II.  Steele. 

68.  Using  the  Electric  Mallet. — If  in  using  the  electric 
or  Bon  will  mallet  on  teeth  that  are  sore  from  wedg-ino;  or 


46  DEPARTMENT     A. 

any  other  cause,  operators  (wlio  have  not  before  practiced 
it)  would  press  firmlj  against  the  tooth  or  filling,  in  the  di- 
rection of  the  hloii\  while  condensing  the  gold,  they  would  in 
many  instances  save  their  patients  unnecessary  pain,  and  be 
enabled  thereby  to  make  better  fillings,  because  of  the  greater 
amount  of  thoroughness  the  patient  would  be  able  to  endure 
with  comparative  comfort.  Try  it,  and  your  patients  will 
bless  you  for  the  relief  that  thoughtfulness  in  this  and  like 
trifles  will  bring  them. — H.  D.  H.,  in  Cosmos. 

69.  Operating  on  Labial  Cavities. — Labial  cavity  in  a 
lower  cuspid,  the  gums  and  alveolar  border  had  receded  so 
that  the  cavity  extended  nearly  one-eighth  of  an  inch  below 
the  margin  of  the  alveolar  border  on  the  opposite  side  of  the 
tooth.  This  is  perplexing  to  fill  with  gold.  But  take  a 
piece  of  hard  w^ood,  shape  it  like  a  wood-carver's  gage,  only 
let  each  corner  project  that  it  may  pass  between  the  teeth, 
fitting  it  to  the  position  on  the  tooth.  Before  applying  the 
dam,  saturate  a  thin  piece  of  spunk  with  a  20  per  cent  solu- 
tion of  cocain,  and  lay  it  on  the  gums  for  five  or  ten  minutes  ; 
do  not  have  too  much  of  the  solution,  lest  it  mix  with  the 
saliva.  ISow  apply  the  rubber-dam ;  also  the  ligature,  tied 
loosely  for  the  present.  Pull  the  rubber  and  ligature  down- 
ward in  front  of  the  tooth,  so  as  to  expose  the  entire  cavity 
and  margin  of  the  gums  above  the  rubber.  Place  the  stick 
in  position  and  hold  the  rubber  below  the  cavity -firmly ;  let 
loose  the  rubber,  and  Avith  a  thin  instrument  carefully  work 
the  rubber  to  its  place.  In  this  an  assistant  may  be  of  great 
service  by  tightening  the  ligature  gently  while  holding  the 
stick  firmly  in  place  with  the  left-hand.  The  cavity  may 
now  be  prepared  and  filled  entirely  with  the  right-hand. — I. 
Douglas,  in  Ohio  Journal. 

70.  White's  Plate  for  Regulating. — Dr.  S.  A.  White, 
in  regulating,  uses  the  same  shaped  plate  for  every  kind  of 
irregularity,  a  vulcanite  plate  having  a  band  running  outside 
of  the  incisors  and  covering  the  bicuspids  and  molars,  and 
also  a  band  on  the  palatine  surface. — International  Journal. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  47 

71.  Rubber  Overcoat  for  Sensitive  Teeth. — A  patient 
came  complaining  of  hypersensibility  of  the  second  right 
upper  molar.  It  stood  alone,  occluding  with  its  fellow  below, 
was  slightly  loose,  had  no  decay,  but  so  sensitive  to  heat  and 
cold — on  account  of  the  roots  being  denuded — that  eating 
and  drinking  were  simply  misery.  I  tried  all  the  means  I 
knew  to  reduce  the  sensibility,  but  without  avail.  Killing 
the  pulp  or  extracting  the  molar  were  means  I  hesitated  to 
employ  except  as  a  last  resource. 

The  suggestion  of  wearing  artificial  teeth  did  not  meet 
with  his  approval,  by  which  means  the  tooth  would  have 
been  covered  with  the  plate,  and  would  have  no  doubt  im- 
proved the  situation.  I  took,  as  an  experiment,  cotton-wool 
and  mastic,  and  tied  a  strand  around  the  molar ;  the  result 
being  satisfactory,  I  took  an  impression  of  the  molar  with 
wax — being  preferable  to  modeling  compound,  on  account 
of  the  temperature  necessary — and  made  a  very  thin  shell  of 
vulcanite,  perfectly  fitting  the  tooth  to  the  margin  of  the 
gums,  leaving  the  crown  exposed  for  the  purpose  of  articula- 
tion. 

The  shell  or  overcoat,  cemented  on  with  oxyphosphate, 
has  been  in  wear  a  month,  and  has  completely  frustrated 
contact  with  heat  or  cold.  I  may  say  it  has  proved  a  success. 
By  such  simple  means  I  have  been  enabled  to  save  the  molar 
alive  and  receive  the  thanks  and  confidence  of  my  patient. — 
H.  H.  Edwards,  in  International. 

72.  Extracting  for  Nervous  Persons. — In  extracting 
teeth  for  very  nervous  perso7is,  I  find  that  sulfuric  ether,  used 
on  a  small  piece  of  sponge,  and  rubbed  on  the  face,  near  the 
lobe  of  the  ear,  quiets  them,  and  appears  to  lessen  the  pain. 
This  is  good,  in  conjunction  with  electricity;  but  don't  use 
it  too  often  on  the  same  person. — Dr.  Penny,  in  Southern 
Journal. 

73.  Regulating  Studs. — Vulcanite  and  other  fixtures 
for  regulating  teeth  often  require  the  attachment  or  inser- 
tion of  studs  or  hooks,  from  which  rubber  rings  may  be 


48 


DEPARTMENT     A. 


stretched  on  the  teeth  that  are  to  be  put  in  place.  I 
have  made  such  studs  of  celluloid  or  hard  rubber  in  form 
like  that  shown  in  Fig.  1,  drilled  and  tapped  through  its 
center  as  shown  in  the  section,  Fig.  2.  This  stud  I  readily 
fix  on  the  plate  or  bar  by  means  of  the  screw,  and  a  section 
through  the  stud,  screw,  and  plate  (see  Fig.  3)  makes  evi- 


© 


Fig.  1. 


Fig.  2. 


Fig.  3. 


Fio.  4. 


dent  the  security  of  the  attachment.  In  Fig.  4  is  seen  a 
plate  in  place,  and  a  rubber  ring  stretched  from  the  stud  to 
the  lateral,  which  is  being  pulled  into  position.  The  size  of 
the  stud-shank  is  such  that  the  ligature  will  not  be  cut  by 
the  strain,  and  the  stud-head  is  round  and  smooth,  and  over- 
laps the  ligature,  so  that  the  tongue  will  neither  be  chafed  nor 
interfered  with  to  any  appreciable  degree  during  the  pro- 
gress ■  of  the  regulating  operation. — S.  J.  Shaw,  Boston, 
Mass.,  in  Cosmos. 


74.  Gas  Cylinders  Exploding. — It  ought  to  be  gener- 
ally known,  if  it  is  not,  that  nitrous  oxid  gas  cylinders  are 
liable  to  explode  by  undue  expansion  of  their  contents  if 
exposed  to  heat.  All  who  use  or  handle  these  cylinders 
should  be  careful  to  keep  them  at  as  low  a  temperature  as 
possible,  and  never  allow  their  exposure  to  the  direct  action 
of  the  sun.  The  bursting  force  of  compressed  gas  under  too 
high  a  temperature  is  tremendous — equal  to  a  bombshell. — 
I.  C,  in  Cosmos. 


USEFUL      HINTS.  49 

75.  Use  of  the  Burnisher. — The  barnislier  is  one  of 
the  most  important  instruments  in  gold-filling.  However 
well  the  filling  has  been  inserted,  the  thorough  burnishing 
of  the  surface  is  of  prime  importance.  "But  it  makes  the 
surface  uneven."  Yes,  in  proportion  to  the  faulty  packing. 
"  But  severe  burnishing,  especially  with  a  globe-point,  makes 
necessary  much  filing,  and  thus  the  destruction  of  contour." 
Better  have  no  contour  than  leave  pits  and  parts  of  softly- 
packed  gold.  Do  even,  thorough,  solid  work  throughout, 
and  you  will  not  have  much  filing  away  as  the  result  of  very 
severe  burnishing;  and  there  is  nothing  like  this  for  pro- 
curing a  long-lived  filling. 

76.  Celluloid  Matrix  for  Cement.  —As  a  matrix  for 
cement  fillings  there  is  nothing  like  celluloid.  It  is  the  only 
thing  that  is  fit  for  a  matrix  w^hen  you  are  using  phosphate 
of  zinc.  You  can  fill  one  side,  or  put  the  matrix  in  between 
and  throw  the  cement  in  on  both  sides ;  let  the  cement 
harden  with  that  matrix  in  there,  then  slip  it  out  and  you- 
have  got  a  perfectly  polished  surface ;  it  is  just  as  smooth  as 
glass. — Dr.  Shulze,  in  Ohio  Denial  Journal. 

77.  Cotton,  to  Remove  from  Pliers. — A  device  for 
cleaning  pliers  of  refuse  cotton  balls,  which  I  have  found 
convenient,  is  a  small  square  of  carding  wire  mounted  on  a 
ball  of  wood.  I  keep  it  on  my  bracket  table,  and  when  I 
wish  to  remove  cotton,  simply  touch  the  wire,  and  pliers  are 
at  once  freed,  thus  doing  away  with  throwing  the  balls  of 
cotton  on  the  floor,  or  reaching  across  patient  to  deposit  them 
in  the  cuspidor.  It  is  but  an  instant's  work  to  clean  the 
wire  after  each  operation  is  finished. — Dr.  Alice  Jarvis,  in 
Items  of  Interest. 

78.  Mirror  for  Reflecting  Light. — I  Avant  to  show  here 
a  device  I  have  had  made  for  holding  a  little  mirror,  which 
is  to  be  used  as  a  mouth-mirror,  or  for  the  purpose  of  reflect- 
ing light  in  an  obscure  cavity.  It  is  attached  to  a  pedestal 
which  is  to  stand  on  the  0]3erating  tray,  and  has  a  projecting 


50  DEPARTMENT     A. 

arm  about  seventeen  inches  long.  In  height  it  is  adjustable, 
and  can  be  made  to  vary  from  live  to  nine  inches. 

It  has  also  a  hinge-joint,  which  makes  it  still  more 
?idjustable.  Inside  of  the  projecting  rod  or  arm,  which  is 
liollow,  runs  a  smaller  rod,  to  which  is  attached  a  ratchet, 
which  tightens  or  loosens  the  ball-and-socket  joint  at  the 
other  end.  To  this  ball  the  mirror  is  attached.  The  move- 
ment of  the  glass  is  very  free,  and  it  can  be  placed  at  any 
ano"le  and  securely  held  there  by  clamping  with  the  ratchet. 
By  this  device  the  cavity  may  be  seen  by  looking  in  the 
mirror,  or  light  can  be  reflected  to  any  given  point,  and  yet 
both  hands  can  be  free. 

The  liberation  of  the  left-hand  is  a  great  point  gained. 
This  gives  the  opportunity  for  the  use  of  instruments  for 
holding  the  dam  above  the  cervical  edge  of  cavities,  and  for 
the  holding  of  matrices  and  rubber-dam  depressors,  and  for 
holding  in  place  the  first  pieces  of  gold  in  filling. — E.  A. 
Bogue,  in  International  Journal. 

79.  Use  of  Screw  in  Extracting  Roots. — Having  latel}" 
had  rather  a  stubborn  customer  to  deal  with,  in  the  shape  of 
an  upper  bicuspid  root,  we  propose  to  relate  how  we  accom- 
plished its  removal  with  a  small  wood  screw,  when  all  our 
eftbrts  with  th,e  forceps  failed. 

The  root  was  almost  covered  by  the  gum,  and  though 
w^e  took  the  precaution  of  passing  a  gum  lancet  entirely 
around  the  root,  so  that  there  would  be  no  impediments  to 
the  insinuation  of  the  beaks  of  the  forceps,  still  there  was  so 
little  sound  substance  on  the  root  to  grasp  that  the  forceps 
kept  chipping  oft"  pieces  of  the  root  at  each  etibrt  at  extrac- 
tion, besides  inflicting  considerable  pain.  Feeling  sure  that 
we  would  fail  with  these  eftbrts,  we  searched  for  the 
nerve  canal  with  a  probe.  This  being  found,  we 
o-radually  increased  its  size  with  dift'erent  sized  spear 
drills  in  the  dental  engine,  after  which  we  introduced 
a  small  screw  in  the  enlarged  canal  b}^  holding  this 
"^'^"  ^'  Avithin  the  beaks  of  a  pair  of  incisor  forceps. '  When 
the  screw  was  well  inserted  in  the  root,  we  seized  the  head 


USEFUL     HINTS. 


51 


of  the  screw  with  the  same  pair  of  forceps,  when  the  root 
came  away  with  little  effort  or  force.  Fig.  1  illustrates  the 
screw  inserted  in  the  root. — Theodore  F.  Chupein,  D.D.S., 
in  Office  and  Laboratory. 

80.  Cutting  Off  Roots  with  Saws. — When  a  tooth  is 
so  broken  that  it  is  desirable  to  level  down  the  remainder  to 
the  gum,  there  are  several  ways  of  doing  this, — grinding, 
filing,  and  incising.  If  a  saw  could  be  arranged  to  do  this 
work  it  would  save  time  and  some  jar  to  the  root.  To  pro- 
vide a  saw  for  this  purpose  has  been  an  object  with  me,  and 
the  one  here  figured  answers  the  purpose.  It  differs  from 
the  ordinary  saws  used  in  the  mouth  in  having  the  blade  so 
arranged  that  it  can  be  revolved  around  the  longitudinal 
axis  of  the  instrument  and  fixed  at  any  angle.  A  cheaper 
form  of  blade-holdei-  for  amputating  roots  can  be  made  by 


turning  the  ends  of  one  of  Dr.  Clapp's  saw-frames  to  an  angle 
of  ninety  degrees.  The  frame  figured  is  made  to  take  saws 
of  almost  a  fixed  length,  but  to  make  it  adjust  itself  to  saws 
of  varying  lengths  it  is  only  necessary  to  continue  one  end 
of  the  gripping  attachment  through  the  handle  and  adjust 
the  distance  by  means  of  a  nut.  This  increases  the  cost  of 
the  instrument,  and  so  the  frame  is  figured  in  a  simple  form. 
— William  Herbert  Rollins,  Boston,  Mass.,  in  Cosmos. 

81.  Extracting  Imprisoned  "Wisdom  Teeth  in  Low^er 
Jaw, — My  method  is  when  the  face  of  the  tooth  is  looking 
toward  and  pressing  against  the  posterior  part  second  molar, 
80  it  is  considered  hazardous  to  use  the  elevating  forceps,  to 
split  the  gum  back  of  the  wisdom  tooth,  take  the  dental  en- 
gine and  with  a  sharp  drill  remove  the  bone,  so  the  tooth  can 


52  DEPARTMENT     A. 

be  raised  upward  and  backward.  You  will  find  the  bone 
easier  cut  than  to  cut  tooth  one-fourth  away  with  disks  in 
separating  it  from  the  molar,  though  it  is  sometimes  best 
to  separate  with  disks.  By  combining  both  methods  we  can 
extract  such  teeth  without  breaking  jaw  bones. — A.  Eubank. 

82.  Copper  Pulp-Caps. — The  essayist  said  that  in  his 
search  for  a  pulp-capping  that  should  possess  the  qualities  of 
a  non-conductor,  an  unyielding  protector,  and  that  should 
cause  no  irritation  ;  he  had  adopted  a  concave  cap  of  copper, 
varying  in  size  to  meet  the  indications.  Such  a  cap,  if  prop- 
erly adjusted,  came  nearest  to  his  ideal  of  what  a  pulp-cap 
should  be  than  anything  else  he  had  ever  used.  The  method 
he  employed  is  as  follows:  After  thoroughly  cleansing  the 
cavity  he  wiped  it  out  with  eucalyptol  and  cotton  to  disinfect, 
and  then  with  oil  of  cloves  to  soothe  the  pulp.  Then,  select- 
ing a  cap  of  proper  size,  he  dips  it  in  a  thick  solution  of 
sandarac,  which  makes  it  adhere  to  the  place  where  it  is  ap- 
plied. He  then  mixes  a  paste  of  oxid  of  zinc  and  oil  of 
cloves,  which  he  w^orks  down  around  the  edges  and  over  the 
cap,  which  makes  it  non-conducting.  He  makes  the  caps  by 
roiling  down  a  strip  of  copper  or  copper  wire  to  the  thick- 
ness of  thick  writing-paper,  and  with  a  hollow  punch,  the 
copper  strip  being  laid  on  a  block  of  lead,  strikes  up  the  cap, 
which  takes  the  concave  shape  of  the  punch.  He  had  been 
using  this  method  for  about  a  year,  and  the  results  had  been 
entirely  satisfactory. — Dr.  A.  J.  Parker,  in  Cosmos. 

83.  Crouse's  Method  of  Treating  Abscess. — Dr.Crouse's 
method  of  treating  alveolar  abscess  is  as  follows:  Prepare 
your  cavity ;  it  is  not  necessary  to  give  the  details,  except 
that  care  must  be  taken  not  to  force  the  broach  in  the  pulp- 
canal,  or  get  the  cavity  clogged  with  foreign  matter  ;  take  a 
piece  of  soft  India-rubber ;  cut  it  as  near  the  size  and  shape 
of  the  cavity  as  you  can ;  fill  the  cavity  with  carbolic  acid  ; 
place  the  India-rubber  in  the  cavity,  and  with  it  force  the 
carbolic  acid  out  through  the  fistulous  opening.  This  is 
readily  done  with  a  blunt  instrument  and  sudden  force  against 


USEFUL     HINTS.  58 

the  rubber,  such  as  is  used  in  packing  gold  by  hand  pressure. 
One  such  treatment  is  generally  suflicient,  to  eftect  a  cure. — - 
Items  of  Interest. 

84.  Pain  Caused  by  Biting  on  Fillings. — The  pain 
caused  hy  biting  on  a  filled  tooth  when  eating,  whether  the 
filling  be  gold  or  amalgam,  comes  from  the  hypersensitive 
condition  of  the  dentine  itself.  My  practice  is  to  remove 
the  filling,  clean  the  cavity  thoroughly,  swabbing  it  out  with, 
carbolic  acid — ninety-five  per  cent — and  then  refilling  the 
tooth. — Dr.  Marshall,  in  Items  of  Interest. 

85.  Teeth  Sensitive  to  Changes. — Exposure  of  the 
dentine  causes  an  irritation  of  the  dentine  febrils,  as  indi- 
cated by  an  uncomfortable  sensation  in  the  use  of  cold  and 
warm  drinks.  To  counteract  this,  use  a  stimulating  anti- 
septic.— Items  of  Interest.   , 

86.  For  Inflammation  of  the  Pulp. — Use  bicarbonate 
of  soda,  applied  to  the  cavity  on  a  loose  pledget  of  cotton, 
and  covered  with  sandarac.  The  surrounding  parts  to  be 
saturated  with  chloric  ether. — Dr.  Williams,  in  Items  of 
Interest. 

87.  Burnishing  Cement  Fillings. — Cement  fillings  after 
having  set,  can  be  very  much  improved  ;  rubbing  a  burnisher 
over  with  white  wax,  and  then  burnishing  the  filling. — Items 

OF  Interest. 

88.  Polishing  Cement  Fillings. — I  have  found  by  ac- 
tual experience  that  cement  fillings  finished  as  follows  are 
more  impervious  to  moisture,  and  take  a  better  polish,  and 
are  more  durable,  than  by  any  other  method  I  have  ever 
tried:  Give  the  cement  time  enough  to  fully  harden,  then 
dress  it  down  with  strips  or  fine  sandpaper  disks.  jS'ow  to 
polish,  put  on  a  fine  cuttle-fish  disk,  run  the  edge  of  the  disk 
against  a  piece  of  white  wax  till  coated ;  hold  this  against 
the  filling  lightly,  and  run  at  a  vei^y  high  speed,  to  heat  the 


54  DEPARTMENT    A. 

wax  into  the  surface  of  the  cement.     While  polishing,  lastly 
finish  with  agate  burnisher. — William  H.  Steele. 

89.  Packing  Amalgam  in  Frail  Teeth.— One  of  the 
best  ways  I  have  found  to  pack  amalgam,  especially  where 
the  tooth  is  frail,  is  to  use  an  engine  burnisher  of  proper 
size,  rotating  quite  rapidly  ;  this  not  only  packs  the  amalgam 
harder  but  draws  the  excess  of  mercury  to  the  surface,  where 
it  can  easily  be  taken  up  with  a  piece  of  tin-foil. — William 
Jennings,  D.D.S. 

90.  Determining  Curve  of  Root  Canals. — If  you  take 
a  jSTo.  5  fine  Donaldson  nerve-canal  cleanser,  and  pass  it  up  a 
buccal  root,  and  it  simply  goes  half  an  inch,  you  may  know 
it  has. not  reached  the  apex;  we  know  there  are  few  buccal 
roots  that  are  not  more  than  half  an  inch  long.  Then  3^ou 
are  confronted  directly  with  a  crooked  root.  If  the  instru- 
ment does  not  go  three-quarters  of  an  inch  before  meeting  an 
obstruction,  and  if,  after  a  gently  vigorous  turn,  it  does  not 
go  further,  you  know  that  you  have  a  curved  root.  You 
could  not  turn  the  instrument  very  much  before  it  would 
catch  in  the  curve,  and  you  would  know  there  was  something 
wrong.  But  what  is  the  direction  of  that  curve?  The  root 
is  liable  to  turn  in  any  direction ;  some  branch  out,  others 
come  together.  How  do  you  know  which  way  it  turns  ? 
Insert  a  No.  5  instrument,  and  it  catches  a  little  bit  at  a 
slight  turn.  The  instrument  being  round,  you  can  turn  it 
without  danger  of  breaking  it  ofi".  A¥hen  you  turn  it,  hold 
the  instrument  between  your  thumb  and  forefinger  verj^ 
tightly,  and  remove  it.'  When  the  point  is  visible,  you  find 
a  slight  turn  in  the  end  of  the  instrument,  and  that  turn 
will  be  e:j^actly  in  the  direction  of  the  curve  of  the  root,  if 
you  have  held  the  instrument  firmly.  Then  put  the  instru- 
ment in  the  root,  and  use  an  upward  and  downward  motion, 
and  the  instrument  enters  in  the  curve ;  press  it  gently  in 
the  direction  of  the  curve,  and  you  will  find  the  instrument 
going  farther  and  farther  up.  That  curve  is  determined 
most  positively  by  the  instrument  catching  when  j^ou  first 


USEFUL      HINTS.  55 

"begin  to  turn  it.  When  you  tind  it  catching,  turn  it  gently, 
and,  holding  the  instrument  firmly,  remove  it,  and  you  will 
see  the  direction  of  the  curve.  Putting  it  back  in  the'  root 
in  the  same  position,  and  moving  it  gently  up  and  down,  it 
Avill  go  farther  and  farther. — JSF.  T.  Shields,  in  Cosmos. 

91.  Applying  Rubber-dam  to  Labial  Cavities. — In 
applying  the  rubber-dam  to  labial  cavities  under  the  gum, 
take  a  small-sized  sewing  needle,  at  the  distance  of,  say, 
three-quarters  of  an  inch  from  the  point,  and  bend  it  in  the 
form  of  an  S,  the  point  of  the  needle  forming  the  long  leg ; 
stick  the  point  in  the  neck  of  the  tooth  below  the  rubber- 
dam,  just  above  the  edge  of  the  cavity;  lift  the  upper  edge 
of  dam  over  the  eye  end  of  the  needle,  and  the  resiliency  of 
the  rubber  will  keep  the  needle  in  place,  and  the  cavity  dry. 
It  is  far  ahead  of  any  clamp  for  the  above  purpose.  To  pre- 
vent the  eye  of  the  needle  penetrating  the  dam,  put  a  little 
bead  of  shellac  on  the  end. — D.  V.  Beacock,  in  Dom.  Journ. 

92.  Failure  of  Fillings  from  Frail  Walls.— -The  fault 
of  many  a  bad  filling  is  in  tlie  frailty  of  some  part  of  its  wall. 
By  pressure  of  the  i:>lugger,  or  by  blows  from  the  mallet  in 
filling,  or  by  after-service,  a  check  may  be  made  in  the 
enamel.  It  may  not  show  till  discolored,  but  it  is  almost 
sure  to  increase  and  loosen  the  filling,  or  make  a  break  that 
cannot  be  successful!}^  repaired.  The  tooth  which  is  frail, 
either  from  thin  or  brittle  walls,  should  be  nearly  filled  with 
oxyphosphate,  and  finished  with  gold  or  alloy.  But  even  if 
it  is  to  be  thus  filled,  it  is  better  to  break  down  such  parts 
of  the  wall  liable  to  become  afterward  defective.  And  yet, 
thouo'h  we  should  be  thus  cautious  not  to  leave  such  faultv 
walls,  we  should  be  equally  careful  not  to  cut  away  strong 
enamel  that  would  be  a  protection  to  the  filling,  and  prevent 
the  unnecessary  display  of  gold. — Dr.  T.  B.  Welch. 

93.  Replacing  Dislocated  Lower  Jaw. — Hoth  {Lancet, 
No.  3626,  1893)  describes  the  following  method  of  reducing 
luxation  of  the  lower  jaw  : 


56  DEPARTMENT     A. 

The  patient  is  seated  in  an  ordinary  cane-bottomed 
chair ;  the  operator  stands  before  him  with  one  foot  placed 
slight!}'  to  the  right  side  and  the  other  just  in  front  of  the 
23atient  and  in  the  middle  line.  The  operator  is  thus  on  a 
lirm  basis,  with  the  legs  well  apart  and  fully  extended.  He 
then  Ilexes  himself  at  the  hips,  and  asks  the  j^atient  to  le.an 
forward  and  to  place  his  forehead  in  the  middle  of  the  ster- 
num of  the  operator's  chest  (but  this  position  varies  with  the 
size  of  the  patient's  head).  The  operator  now  flexes  his  head 
so  that  his  chin  grips  the  patient's  head  about  the  upper 
part  of  the  occipital  bone ;  he  thus  acquires  a  firm  hold,  and 
has  the  head  well  under  control  between  his  chin  and  chest. 
The  thumbs,  protected  in  the  usual  manner,  are  placed  in 
the  patient's  mouth,  and  the  fingers  of  both  hands  grasp  the 
lower  jaw.  In  this  position  reduction  is  facilitated,  and  the 
advantages  over  the  ordinarj^  methods  are  as  follows:  1,  the 
operator  has  the  head  under  perfect  control  and  perfectly 
fixed  ;  2,  the  line  of  force  exerted  by  the  operator's  hands 
acts  in  the  same  line  as  the  resisting  force  exerted  by  the 
operator's  chin ;  3,  the  operator's  elbows  being  well  flexed,  he 
can  exert  a  greater  p)ower  by  the  force  acting  through  the 
thumbs  being  close  to  the  shoulders,  and  it  will  be  found 
that  he  has  greater  power  of  muscular  action  in  the  terminal 
p)halanges  of  the  same ;  4,  the  patient's  head  is  also  in  a  bet- 
ter position  for  replacing  a  dislocated  jaw  ;  5,  the  operator 
needs  no  assistant,  and  does  not  inconvenience  his  patient  by 
the  excessive  pushing  and  pulling  about  of  the  head  during 
the  reduction. —  Therajpeuiic  Gazette. 

94.  Napkins  in  the  Office. — Always  keep  a  good  assort- 
ment of  nice  clean  napkins ;  they  are  not  needed  as  much  at 
the  chair  as  they  were  before  the  introduction  of  rubber- 
dam,  but  can  be  found  very  useful  in  many  operations,  and 
often  will  be  found  preferable  to  the  dam  in  short  opera- 
tions.— Wm.  H.  Steele. 

95.  Operating  Stool. — If  you  have  never  knoAvn  the 
comfort  and  luxury  of  an  operating  stool  do  not  go  without 


USEFUL     HINTS.  57 

one  another  clay;  mine  cost  about  $1.90,  and  here  it  is: 
Buy  of  the  furniture  dealer  an  ordinary  book-keeper's  stool, 
€ut  oft'  the  legs  to  the  required  height.  ISTow  huy  of  a 
music  dealer  a  cheap  piano  stool ;  bore  a  hole  through  the 
top,  or  seat,  of  the  first  stool,  and  attach  the  adjusting  screw 
^nd  seat  of  the  piano  stool.— Wm.  H.  Steele. 

96.  Tooth  and  Gum  Protector. — A  useful  device  for 
protecting  an  adjoining  tooth,  or  filling  in  the  same,  when 
■cutting  out  a  proximal  cavity  or  removing  a  filling  may  be 
.  easily  made  as  follows : 

Take  an  old  mouth  mirror,  remove  the  o;lass  and  holder 
iind  with  a  fine  saw,  or  thin  flat  file,  slit  the  metal  shank, 
joining  handle  and  mirror,  about  one-eighth  of  an  inch,  and 
in  this  slot  solder  a  piece  of   thin  flexible  steel  about  one 


inch  long  and  one-third  of  an  inch  wide,  with  corners  nicely 
trimmed  and  rounded.  Press  between  the  teeth  and  hold  in 
jiosition  while  shaping  cavity  next  to  adjoining  tooth.  Or 
use  the  shanks  of  broken  burs,  solder  the  thin  strips  at  differ- 
>ent  angles  to  facilitate  holding  easily  in  various  locations, 
^nd  use  the  Kaeber  engine-bur  holder  as  a  handle ;  or  use 
for  a  handle  a  slit  broach  holder  or  a  jeweler's  slit  pin  vise, 
insert  and  clamp  thin  steel  at  any  angle  desired  without 
soldering.  This  instrument  will  be  found  useful  in  many 
ways.  May  be  used  as  a  matrix  for  plastics,  and  also  for 
smoothino-  oft'  the  material  at  cervical  mar2;in  or  removing' 
any  pieces  that  may  be  left  beneath  the  gums,  between  the 
teeth,  etc. — W.  M.  Jennings,  D.D.S. 

97.  To  Prevent  Finishing  Burs  Clogging. — In  finish- 
ing a  gold  filling  you  can  prevent  the  plug  finishing  bur 
from  clogging  up  with  the  metal  by  dipping  in  a  little 
sweet  oil.  It  also  makes  it  cut  better. — W.  M.  Jennings, 
D.D.S. 


58  DEPARTMENT     A. 

98.  Restoring  Articulation  of  Tipping  Molars.'-' — The 
observing  dentist  must  repeatedly,  in  his  daily  practice,  be 
reminded  of  how  acceptable  such  an  operation  will  be,  and 
why  he  should  continue  to  pound  gold  into  cavities  of  teeth 
so  tipped  out  of  position  as  to  be  useless,  without  attempting 
to  better  their  articulation,  is  hard  to  understand.  With- 
this  operation,  as  in  all  contour  work,  anchorage  is  of  first 
importance.  Without  ample  anchorage,  smooth,  strong  mar- 
gins and  clean  surroundings  count  for  nothing. 

In  most  mouths  where  the  first  molars  have  been  out 
long  enough  for  the  consequent  changed  position  of  the  second 
molars  to  offer  an  excuse  for  this  operation,  you  will  find 
cavities  already  existing.  If  none  offer  a  welcome  anchor- 
age, then  with  engine  drill  and  bur  make  liberal  retaining 
grooves,  commencing  in  fissures  and  cutting  with  a  heroic 
hand.  It  is  better  to  bring  these  teeth  into  service  at  such 
a  cost  than  permit  them  to  remain  of  no  use  themselves^ 
and  in  the  way  of  any  appliance  that  might  be  serviceable. 
In  the  preparation  of  the  crown  surface  use  the  corundum 
wheels  freely  on  cusps,  or  to  prevent  thin,  over-lapping  edges 
anywhere.  Before  beginning  the  operation,  notice  whether 
other  movements  besides  tipping  have  taken  place  in  either 
upper  or  lower  molars.  Aim  to  have  the  upper,  as  a  rule^ 
articulate  one-quarter  or  one-third  its  surface  outside  the 
lower  to  prevent  biting  the  cheek.  The  articulation  of  the- 
other  teeth  must  determine  whether  the  articulating  surface- 
of  the  contour  is  to  be  a  flat  surface  parallel  with  the  general 
line  of  articulation,  or  an  inclined  plane.  Shape  these  grind- 
ing surfaces  so  they  may  be  constantly  in  contact  in  the  act 
of  masticating  as  the  lower  jaw  moves  from  side  to  side- 
Cut  out  and  fill  any  depression  in  a  molar  that  may  be  in 
position,  if  necessary,  to  give  a  good  articulation  to  an  oppos- 
ing contour.  Attempt  only  to  secure  the  millstone  effect. 
Do  not  attempt  the  restoration  of  cusps,  for  though  they 
are  ideal,  the  material  we  use  is  faulty,  and  no  amount  of 
good  wishes  will  add  to  its  strength  or  wearing  qualities. 


Read  before  the  Michigan  State  Dental  Society,  June,  1SS9. 


USEFUL      HINTS.  59 

In  filling  the  excavation  nse  any  method  or  style  of  gold 
"with  Avhich  you  succeed  best.  My  preference  is  for  heavy 
foil  when  strength  is  of  importance,  folding  back  and  forth 
ribbons  of  No.  60,  and  making  most  of  the  contour  at  least 
of  gold  and  platinum  foil,  shade  2.  Anneal  carefully;  con- 
dense thoroughly;  finish  well. — Dr.  J.  C.  Walton,  in  Ohio 
Journal. 

99.  Facial  Fistula. — When  a  fistula  has  opened  on  the 
outside  of  the  face,  on  account  of  poulticing  or  from  other 
cause,  do  not  extract  the  ofl[ending  tooth  till  you  make  an 
artificial  fistula  inside  the  mouth.  The  outside  fistula  will 
heal  by  granulation.  If  you  extract  the  tooth  before  doing 
so,  the  tissue  certainly  will  be  greatly  depressed,  and  an 
uglier  scar  result. —  Office  and  Laboratory. 

100.  Hint  on  Mixing  Cements. — I  have  noticed  opera- 
tors put  the  powder  on  the  slab  first,  then  use  the  cork  of  the 
liquid  bottle  to  dip  the  liquid  to  the  mixing  slab.  In  doing 
this  a  little  of  the  powder  gets  on  "the  cork  and  is  carried  to 
the  bottle  containing  the  liquid,  and  will  ruin  the  cement 
for  future  use. — William  H.  Steele. 

101.  On  the  Use  of  Pluggers. — A  dentist  who  is  going 
to  make  use  of  non-cohesive  gold  is  not  likely  to  make  use 
of  a  broad  foot-shaped  plugger.  He  should  use  a  wedge- 
shaped  plugger  to  carry  the  gold  toward  the  wall  of  the  cav- 
ity. And  if  he  is  going  to  use  cohesive  gold,  he  can  obtain 
the  best  results  by  the  use  of  a  fine-serrated,  broad  plugger, 
in  proportion  to  the  size  of  the  cavity.  If  a  dentist  is  going 
to  fill  a  large  cavitj^,  his  plugger  ought  to  be  correspondingly 
large;  if  he  wants  to  fill  a  small  cavity,  his  plugger  ought, 
to  be  suitable  for  such  a  cavity,  and  his  instruments  should 
be  selected  in  some  general  forms,  and  various  sizes  of  these 
forms.  By  doing  this  he  will  be  able  to  accomplish  that 
which  he  desires  much  more  rapidly,  satisfactorily  and  skil- 
fully than  he  can  by  using  pluggers  made  without  any 
special  reference  to  their  size  and  form.     It  is  painful  to  see 


60  DEPARTMENT     A. 

a  good  operator  take  a  little  fine  pointed  plugger  and  plug 
away,  using  cohesive  gold,  and  taking  an  hour  and  a  half  to 
do  what  he  ought  to  accomplish  in  half  an  hour  if  he  used 
proper  instruments  and  proper  gold,  and  pluggers  of  the 
proper  size. — -Extract  Review. 

102.  Detecting  Pulp-stones. — How  can  pulp-stones  be 
detected,  and  what  is  the  cause  of  the  trouble  ?  You  can- 
not advise  the  extraction  of  a  tooth  if  you  can  find  nothing 
about  it  to  give  trouble ;  but  there  is  one  thing  I  have  used 
in  my  practice  to  satisfy  my  own  mind,  and  that  is,  if  3'ou 
will  take  the  finger-nail  and  scratch,  producing  a  vibrating 
sensation,  it  will  produce  pain  in  the  tooth  ;  or  use  an  exca- 
vator to  scratch  with,  and  if  there  be  irritation  by  pulp-stones, 
it  will  respond  to  the  vibration  produced  on  the  outside  of 
the  tooth. — Dr.  Thomas,  in  International. 

103.  Amalgo-gold  Fillings. — Steurer's  plastic  gold, 
worked  in  the  surface  of  a  soft  amalgam  filling,  in  large 
proximal  cavities,  gives  the  appearance  and  edge  strength  of 
gold,  with  the  care  of  manipulation  of  gold. — D.  M.  Clapp, 
in  Office  and  Laboratory. 

104.  To  Sterilize  Softened  Dentine. — Dry  thoroughly 
and  apply:  Carbolic  acid,  1 ;  oil  of  cassia,  2  ;  and  oil  of  cloves, 
3  parts.  Insert  permanent  filling  at  once. — Dr.  II.  A.  Smith, 
in  Items  of  Interest. 

105.  How  to  Dry  a  Cavity. — After  applying  absolute 
alcohol  to  the  cavity,  use  a  solution  of  sandarac  and  ether, 
line  the  cavity ;  dry  this  with  hot  air,  which  forces  it  in 

.the  ends  of  the  tubules,  completely  sealing  them;  then 
proceed  with  the  filling. — Dr.  J.  C.  Templeton,  in  Items  of 
Interest. 

106.  Patching  Gold  Fillings  with  Alloy. — I  remember 
performing  some  very  extensive  operations  with  JSTos.  60  and 
120  gold  for  one  patient  who  was  undergoing  a  good  many 


USEFUL     HINTS. 


61 


constitutional  changes,  and  these  conditions  manifested  them- 
selves in  the  teeth.  He  came  to  me  in  1880  or  188 1  with  gold 
fillings  on  the-  buccal  surfaces  of  the  teeth  and  decay  had 
recurred.  I  thous-ht  the  best  thins:  I  could  do  was  to  cut 
out  and  fill  with  amalgam.  I  did  so.  After  a  year  I  found 
extensive  decay  on  the  proximate  and  lingual  surfaces.  I 
cut  that  out  and  filled  in  the  same  way,  following  right 
around  at  difierent  times,  till  now  I  have  gone  entirely 
around  the  teeth.  I  saw  the  gentleman  four  or  five  weeks 
ago,  and  he  spoke  particularly  of  the  manner  in  which  I  had 
saved  his  teeth.  I  consider  it  was  due  to  the  combination 
of  metals. — Dr.  Geo.  A.  Mill,  in  N.  Y.  Odontological  Society. 


107.  Anchor-Pins  for  Fillings. — Dr.  L.  West,  of  Mar- 
ionville,  Mo.,  suggests  the  use  of  double-headed  platinum 
pins  as  anchoring  bolts  for  proximal  fillings;  that  further- 
more form  more  or  less  of  the  o-rindino;  surfaces  of  some 
molars  and  bicuspids,  and  are,  therefore,  liable  to  be  dis- 
lodged by  hard  usage  in  mastication.  The  illustrations  ex- 
emplify cases  of  that  kind  which  have  been  made  secure  by 
buildiilg  anchor-pins  into  the  fillings,  as  suggested  by  Dr. 
West.  The  crown  view  and  section  of  a  bicuspid,  Fig.  1, 
make  clear  the  character  of  the  operation;  the  anchor-pin 
being  also  shown  separately,  and  magnified  for  more  perfect 
representation.  Fig.  2  is  a'  similar  illustration  of  the  use  of 
the  anchor-pin  in  a  filling  which  extends  from  side  to  side 
over  the  crown. 

It  is,  however,  a  some- 
what difficult  matter  to 
j)roperly  place  the  anchor- 
pin,  because  pressure  on 
one  hand  in  packing  the 
material  around  it  is  likely 
to  lift  the  other  head  from 
its  bed,  and  this  is  espe- 
cially liable  to  occur  when 
the  filling-material  is  amalgam.  Instead  of  the  headed  pin, 
therefore,  it  is  suggested  that  a  section  of  platinum  anchor- 


FlG.  1. 


Fig. 


Fig. 


Fig.  4. 


62  DEPARTMENT     A. 

screw  wire  may  be  more  readily  built  in  and  more  securely 
bolt  the  matrices  together.  This  is  made  evident  by  Fig.  3, 
the  detached  screw-bolt  being  shown  magnified  for  its  better 
definition.  A  curved  section  of  screw-wire  may  likewise  be 
employed,  as  seen  in  Fig.  4.  It  is  obvious  that  the  screw- 
wire,  unlike  the  smooth  pin,  will  resist  a  parting  strain  at 
every  point  of  its  length,  and  special  forms  may  be  given 
the  wire  sections  to  meet  any  peculiar  case. 

The  examples  given  will  serve  to  place  the  several  sug- 
gestions fairly  before  the  profession  as  means  for  meeting 
emergencies  in  the  class  of  dental  operations  for  which  they 
will  probably  be  found  occasionally  useful. — S.  H.  W.,  in 
Cosmos. 

108.  Disks  and  Strips,  Soap  on, — In  separating  teeth, 
or  cutting  down  fillings  with  sandpaper  disks,  first  run  both 
sides  against  a  piece  of  dry  soap.  You  will  be  surprised  and 
pleased  to  see  how  nicely  they  will  go  between  the  teeth,  and 
how  much  better  they  will  cut  the  gold.  Sandpaper  and 
emerj^  strips  treated  in  the  same  way  will  cut  better,  and 
never  catch  or  tear  the  dam.  It  is  also  more  pleasant  for  the 
patient. 

109.  To  Protect  Cement  or  Percha  Fillings. — Cut  and 
file  a  piece  of  gold  plate  of  the  size  and  shape  of  the  surface 
of  the  cavity.  Now  solder  to  its  under  surface  the  center  of 
a  narrow  strip  of  gold  and  bend  up  the  ends.  As  soon  as 
the  filling  is  placed  in  the  tooth  and  while'  it  is  soft,  press 
this  cap  on  the  surface.  A  gutta-percha  filling  maybe  made 
quite  durable  in  this  way,  though  of  course  the  cap  must  be 
pressed  on  while  hot. — Dr.  Welch,  in  Items  of  Interest. 

110.  For  Offensive  Cuspadores. — Dr.  E.  0.  Peck,  of 
Morristown,  N.  J.,  uses  a  tablespoonful  of  copperas  to  coun- 
teract the  ofiensiveness  of  liis  cuspador.  This  has  been  our 
practice  for  many  years.  We  are  not  sure  but  we  got  our 
idea  from  Dr.  Peck  some  fifteen  years  since. — Items  of  In- 
terest. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  03 

111.  Gutta-percha  Heater.  —  To  heat  gutta-percha, 
make  a  little  oven  of  soapstone.  When  in  use,*  you  light 
the  spirit-lamp  and  place  it  under  the  end  of  the  stone ;  at 
the  same  time  the  instruments  to  be  used  are  passed  through 
the  opening  at  the  end  of  the  oven,  over  a  wire  loop,  a  wire 
netting  inside,  to  the  flame  of  the  lamp,  so  that  the  instru- 
ments to  be  used  and  the  gutta-percha  will  be  warming  at 
the  same  time.  The  slab  is  hollowed  out,  so  that  the  small 
pieces  of  gutta-percha  will  not  roll  off.  The  stone  heats 
gradually,  and  the  amount  of  heat  required  can  be  regulated, 
to  a  nicety  by  the  size  of  the  flame  on  the  portion  of  the 
stone  the  gutta-percha  is  placed  on.  A  piece  of  mica  on  the 
side  enables  you  to  see  the  flame  and  tell  where  you  place 
jour  points,  and  get  them  as  near  the  flame  as  you  desire. 
The  mica  also  prevents  the  flame  from  blowing  out,  if  you 
are  working  in  summer  with  the  cloors  open  and  are  in  a 
draft.  There  is  no  danger  of  overheating  the  gutta- 
i:)ercha,  and.  I  find  dry  heat  better  than  wet.-^Dr.  Geo.  S. 
Allen,  in  Items  of  Interest. 

112.  For  Drying  Root  Canals. — Use  a  solution  of 
bichlorid.  of  mercury  and  ether  for  drying  out  root  canals ; 
it  is  better  than  alcohol. — L.  J.  Mitchell,  in  Ohio  Dental 
Journal. 

113.  Treatment  for  "Wounded  Pulps. — Where  the 
pulp  has  been  wounded,  I  should  simply  touch  it  with 
camphor;  the  alcohol  in  the  camphor  will  evaporate,  leaving 
the  camphor  itself,  which  is  very  healing  and  cleansing. 
One  may  follow  the  camphor  treatment  with  a  little  oxy- 
phosphate,  or  cover  it  with  gutta-percha,  and  go  on  with  his 
filling. — Dr.  Spaulding,  in  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

114.  Dressing  Down  Inlays. — Those  who  practice 
porcelain  inlaying  have  no  doubt  often  found  how  diflicult 
it  is  to  grind  down  and  smoothly  finish  inlays  on  the  proxi- 
mal surfaces  of  the  teeth,  when  the  space  is  too  small  to 
admit  even  the  thinnest  corundum  disk.  The  ordinarv  emcrv 


64  DEPARTMENT     A. 

paper  disks  cut  them  down  wonderfully  fast  indeed,  almost 
as  fast  as  'tliey  do  gold.  They  are  even  to  be  preferred  to 
the  corundum  wheel  on  labial  and  some  buccal  surfaces  when 
a  great  deal  of  grinding  is  not  required,  and  for  fine  finish- 
ing are  superior.  For  the  final  polish  I  use  the  ordinary 
cuttle-fish  bone. — J.  Girdwood,  in  Cosmos. 

115.  Splint  for  Supporting  Teeth. — As  the  planting  of 
teeth  is  now  becoming  so  common  an  operation,  and  probably 
destined  to  become  more  so,  the  importance  of  furnishing 
some  means  whereby  a  planted  tooth  may  be  firmly  held  and 
supported  while  it  is  becoming  firm  in  its  new  position  can- 
not be  over-estimated.  Lack  of  proper  support  is  probably 
the  cause  of  a  large  percentage  of  failures. 

Fig.  1  illustrates  a  very  simple  and  efiicient  splint  for 
this  purpose.  It  is  easily  and  quickly  applied,  and  may  be 
worn  any  length  of  time  without  inconvenience  to  the  patient. 
On  each  side  of  the  space  in  which  the  tooth 
is  to  be  planted  is  selected  a  suitable  tooth. 
A  strip  of  band  material  is  made  in  the 
form  of  a  loop,  slipped  over  the  tooth  and 
drawn  tightly  about  the  same  with  a  pair  of 
fiat-nosed  pliers.  It  is  then  removed  and  soldered  at  the 
point  of  union,  and  the  ends  clipped  ofi".  Delicate  pipes  are 
now  soldered  to  each  of  these  bands,  on  the  labial  side  and 
parallel  to  the  axis  of  the  tooth.  After  carefully  drying  the 
teeth,  the  bands  are  cemented  in  position.  This  may  be  done 
several  hours  or  even  days  in  advance  of  the  operation  of 
planting. 

The  tooth  to  be  planted  is  banded  and  piped  in  the  same 
manner  already  described,  only  the  pipe  is  soldered  to  the 
band  at  right  angles  to  the  tooth.  A  piece  of  the  gold  wire 
of  suitable  length  is  cut  to  exactly  fit  these  pipes.  It  is 
slipped  through  the  pipe  on  the  tooth  to  be  planted,  and 
each  end  is  bent  at  right  angles.  The  tooth  is  slipped  in 
the  socket  already  prepared,  the  ends  of  the  wire  are  slipped 
through  the  pipes  on  the  anchor  teeth,  and,  as  they  pass 
through,  are  nipped  off  w^ith  a  pair  of  wire  cutters.     This 


USEFUL     IIIKTS.  65 

will  also  llutteii  the  ends  slightly,  ■which  will  prevent  the 
splint  from  coming  out  of  the  pipes. 

I  have  freqnentlj  dispensed  with  the  band  and  pipes 
which  encircle  the  planted  tooth,  using  instead  a  silk  ligature, 
tying  the  same  tightly  around  both  tooth  and  splint.  This 
simplifies  the  operation,  and  in  most  instances  is  quite 
sufficient. 

Dr.  John  II.  Martindale,  of  this  city,  has  used  this  form 
of  splint  with  success  in  a  number  of  cases  for  the  support  of 
teeth  which  have  been  loosened  by  alveolar  necrosis  or  pyor- 
rhea.— Dr.  Edward  II.  Angle. 

116.  How  to  Use  Matrix  Metal. — In  filling  proximal 
cavities  with  amalgam  I  use  a  matrix  made  of  matrix  metal 
or  silver  composition  strip.  Cut  ofi'a  piece  of  sufficient  length 
and  wide  enough  to  extend  from  cervical  border  of  cavity  to 
coronal  surface  ;  cut  ofi"  corners  and  shape  as  shown  in  Fig.  1. 

The  cavity  being  ready  to  fill,  place 
the  matrix  in  position  as  shown  in 
Fig.  2,  being  sure  the  lower  edge 
extends  below  the  cervical  border 
of  the  Cavity.  To  hold  it  in  place 
push  in  a  small  orange  wood  wedge,  shaped  like  a  pen-knife 
blade,  thin  on  the  upper  edge  and  the  lower  edge  thick 
enough  to  fill  the  space.  Use  two  matrices  with  a  wedge 
between  them  where  two  cavities  are  to  be  filled  in  adjoin- 
ing teeth.  When  through  with-  the  operation,  draw^  out  the 
wedge  and  the  metal  can  be  easily  removed  without  disturb- 
ing the  filling. — T.  A.  Gormly. 

117.  To  Prevent  "Wedges  Slipping. — To  prevent  a 
wedge  slipping  or  working  loose  wliile  filling  or  separating 
teeth,  dip  it  in  sandarac  varnish  just  before  tapping  it  in 
place.— D.  ^y.  Barker,  ^[.D.S. 

118.  Substitute  for  Floss  Silk. — A  good  and  cheap 
substitute  for  floss  silk  is  harness  maker's  linen,  thread  Xo. 
3.     It  is  as  strong  as  silk,  has  very  little  twist,  so  that  it 


66  DEPARTMENT     A. 

passes  between  the  teeth  easily  and  only  costs  8  cents  per 
ball.— D.  W.  Barker,  M.D.S. 

119.  Incompatibility  of  Gold. — It  has  been  maintained 
by  many  operators  that  gold  is  absolutely  incompatible  with 
soft  tooth-structure,  but  that  teeth  of  hard  structure  can  be 
filled  with  gold,  and  satisfactory  and  permanent  results 
obtained.  According  to  ray  practice,  the  first  assertion  is  a 
great  mistake.  For  example,  take  a  large  proximal  cavity 
in  a  bicuspid.  I  always  combine  a  large  proximal  cavity 
v^ith  the  grinding-surface  fissure,  because  if  3^ou  leave  the 
fissure  or  fill  it  separately  you  place  the  thin  structure  be- 
tvreen  the  two  fillings  in  a  fine  condition  to  break,  which 
will  make  one  or  both  fillings  defective,  and  decay  will 
surely  follow.  Leave  no  frail  overlapping  edges,  but  break 
them  in  from  the  grinding-surface,  and,  when  finished,  the 
space  between  the  teeth  will  necessarily  be  Y-shaped;  like- 
wise break  in  the  frail  edges  on  the  grinding-surface,  and 
leave  not  a  trace  of  the  fissure,  because  if  the  filling  should 
end  in  a  fissure  a  pit  is  compelled  to  result,  and  this  pit  will 
hold  acids,  and  decay  will  follow.  When  the  cavity  is  thus 
prepared,  the  whole  cavity  will  likewise  be  V-shaped,  which 
is  exactly  the  reverse  of  the  usual  mechanism.  N^ow  make 
retaining  points  at  the  cervical  margin  and  in  the  grinding- 
surface,  then  with  great  care  build  up  with  cohesive  gold. 
Build  up  this  tooth  exactly  to  its  anatomical  contour,  which 
will  restore  the  grinding  surface.  This  filling,  if  properly 
done,  will  finish  without  a  flaw,  and  the  adaptation  of  the 
gold  to  the  tooth  will  be  perfect. — N,  T.  Shields,  in  Cosmos. 

120.  To  Remove  Deciduous  Teeth. — If  you  wish  to 
remove  a  deciduous  tooth,  and,  through  fear,  the  child  will 
not  permit  it,  slip  a  piece  of  rubber  tubing  over  the  crown 
down  to  the  neck  of  the  tooth,  and  in  a  few  days  the  tooth 
will  be  so  loose  that  it  can  be  extracted  with  the  fingers. — 
Dr.  W.  H.  Eames. 

121.  Large  Compound  Filling. — Large  compound  cav- 
ities involving  the  proximal  and  crown  surfaces  of  molars 


USEFUL     HINTS.  67 

and  bicuspids:  Prepare  the  cavity  and  set  a  screw  post  as 
shown  ill  cut ;  put  on  the  matrix  and  fill  two-thirds 
with  alloy,  leaving  about  one-third  the  screw  pro- 
"  jecting  above  the  tilling.  At  a  subsequent  sitting 
complete  the  operation  with  gold, and  finish  nicely, burnish- 
ing all  the  edges  down  smooth. — Wm,  H.  Steele,  in  Items 
OF  Interest. 

122.  Facing  Alloy  Fillings  with  Gold. — My  general 
practice  is  to  restore  the  normal  contour  of  the  tooth  with 
amalgam,  at  the  first  sitting,  and  subsequently  cut  away  such 
portions  of  the  amalgam  as  may  be  deemed  desirable,  re- 
placing the  same  with  gold,  so  that  when  finished,  especially 
with  the  anterior  teeth,  nothing  but  gold  shall  appear  to 
ordinary  observation.  This  is  not  a  difficult  task  in  any  save 
the  most  extreme  cases.  Good  anchorage  may  be  secured  in 
and  around  the  amalgam.  A  sort  of  chemical  union  takes 
place  between  the  gold  and  amalgam,  so  that  from  a  com- 
paratively slight  point  of  anchorage  the  gold  may  be  built 
up  and  carried  Avell  over  a  slightlj^-rounded  edge  of  amalgam, 
thus  hiding  it  from  view. — Dr.  C.  T.  Tockwell,  in  Cosmos. 

123.  Welding  Gold  and  Alloy. — Occasionally  it  occurs 
that  gold  must  be  added  to  or  built  over  amalgam  previously 
inserted.  It  is  very  important  that  all  surfaces  which  come 
in  contact  with  gold  be  touched  with  mercury,  so  that  the 
gold  may  be  soldered  to  the  amalgam  ;  the  two  metals,  thus 
united,  never  show  the  joint  by  wear  or  chemical  action, 
because  the  mercury,  thin  as  the  coating  is,  becomes  an 
amalgam  containing  gold  of  higher  potential  or  finer  than 
the  body  of  the  plug.  Practically,  the  gold  element  passes 
over  the  line  of  union  in  the  body  of  the  amalgam. — Dr. 
S.  B.  Palmer,  N.  Y.  Odontological  Society, 

124.  Points  on  Nitrous  Oxid  Gas. — There  is  a  stage 
Avhen  patients  refuse  to  inhale  more  gas.  There  is  a  convul- 
sion of  respiratory  muscles  and  deep  stertorous  breathing. 
It  is  dangerous  to  go  farther,  for  the  patient  is  in  what  may 


68  DEPARTMENT     A. 

be  considered  an  asphyxiated  state.     I  begin  operations  here 
regardless  of  other  symptoms.    Some  patients  will  take  more, 
others  less,  before  this  stage  is  reached,  and  I  get  out  as  many 
teeth  as  possible  during  the  period  of  unconsciousness.    Some- 
times it  may  be  but  one  tooth,  again  it  may  be  the  whole 
upper  set.     The  appearance  of  patient  is  usually  as  follows: 
Jaws  set,  eyes  protruding  and  rolled  back  (when  not  closed), 
and  a  bluish  or  purple  color  about  lips  and  face,.     Respiration 
is  at  first  shallow,  then  deep  and  stertorous.     There  is  always 
a  very  alarming  and  death-like  appearance,  which  usually 
frightens  the  novice,  and  especially  the  friends  of  the  patient 
who  may  be  standing  near;    but  this   appearance   usually 
passed  away  before  the  operation  is  completed.     I  consider 
nitrous  oxid  perfectly  safe.     Have  administered  it  hundreds 
of  times  and  have  never  seen  an  alarming  symptom,  though 
I  have  had  my  share  of  "  fun  "  with  fractious  patients.     I 
am  satisfied  the  effects  produced  on  different  patients  is  due 
entirely  to  individual  temperaments  and  idiosyncrasies.     The 
most  troublesome  patients  are  of  highly  nervous  organisms 
and  excitable  dispositions.     Many  possess  a  mortal  dread  of 
pain,  and  they  come  in  with  their  nerves  worked  up  to  a 
concert  pitch  of  excitement.     Many  can  make  themselves  do 
what  is  required  of  them,  if  they  have  a  strong  will  power, 
but  soon  as  this  will  power  is  overcome  by  the  effects  of  gas, 
their  terrible  dread  of  pain  gains  the  mastery,  and  imme- 
diately produces  an  involuntary  resistance;  hence  the  degree- 
of  anesthesia  is  usually  in  proportion  to  hoAv  much  the  patient 
dreads  pain. — ^Malcolm  W,  Sparrow,  D.D.S.,  in  Items  of  In- 
terest. 

125.  Using  Elevating  Forceps. — In  using  the  elevating 
forceps  in  extracting  under  third  molars,  a  piece  of  sheet  tin 
or  other  substance  should  cover  the  back  edge  of  the  second 
molar  to  prevent  its  fracture. — American  Journal  cf  Dental 
Science. 

126.  Contour  Fillings.— It  may  be  laid  down  as  the 
rule  that  the  contour  of  all  fillings  which  will  be  subjected 


USEFUL     HINTS.  69 

to  great  strain,  should  be  such  as  to  most  fully  protect  them 
from  any  force  of  impact  that  would  tend  to  dislodge  them, 
or  to  drive  them  away  from  the  walls  of  the  cavity. 

This  rule,  of  course,  only  applies  after  the  restoration  of 
such  natural  contour  as  may  be  essential  for  hj^gienic  or 
esthetic  reasons,  and  ma}^  be  more  profitably  followed  in 
proximal  and  crown  surfaces  in  molars  and  bicuspids. 

In  these,  where  the  decay  extends  below  the  point  of 
natural  contact  of  the  proximal  sides,  it  is  essential  to  repro- 
duce the  natural  contour  to  such  an  extent  that  the  fillings 
may,  when  finished,  touch  again  at  the  same  point.  This  is 
necessary  to  preserve  the  interproximal  space  toward  the 
necks  of  the  teeth,  and  also  to  prevent  food  from  crowding 
between  the  teeth  and  on  the  gums,  where  it  sometimes  causes 
serious  disturbance. 

Beyond  this  point  a  restoration  of  natural  contour  is 
rarely,  if  ever,  to  be  tolerated. 

From  the  point  at  which  restoration  of  the  natural  con- 
tour on  the  proximal  sides  ceases  to  be  essentially  up  to  the 
termination  of  the  filling  in  the  crown,  the  surface  should 
gradually  slope;  or,  to  reverse  the  statement,  the  surface  of 
the  filling  should  slope  downward  from  its  most  remote  edge, 
either  mesiall}^  or  distally,  to  the  point  at  which  it  is  desir- 
able to  commence  the  restoration  of  the  original  contour  on 
the  proximal  surfaces. 

The  anchorage  of  such  fillings  should  be  made  as  strong 
as  possible  without  weakening  the  tooth.  There  should  be, 
if  possible,  a  strong,  square  base  at  the  cervical  portion  of 
the  tooth — a  firm  seat,  that  shall  be  at  a  right  angle  with  a 
perpendicular  line  drawn  on  the  proximal  surface,  and  the 
walls  should  be  made  as  nearly  parallel  as  possible. 

Unless  the  walls  are  extremely  thick  and  the  dentine 
very  firm,  it  is  better  not  to  make  an}-  undercuts  or  grooves, 
but  to  rel}^  entirely  on  the  proper  seat  and  thorough  anchorage 
in  the  crown.  If  they  are  thin,  or  the  dentine  of  poor  quality, 
grooves  and  undercuts  must  not  be  made.  If  the  square 
seat  cannot  be  obtained,  as  large  retaining  pits  should  be 
drilled  as  can  be  done  without  endangering  the  pulp.     Of 


70  DEPARTMENT     A. 

course,  this  is  only  a  general  rule,  and  subject  to  such  modi- 
fications as  the  peculiarity  of  each  may  render  necessar3^ 

Where  such  shapes  as  have  been  described  are  given  to 
fillings  of  this  character,  the  force  of  impact  tends  to  slide 
over  the  surface  and  not  to  drive  the  filling  away  from  its 
seat. 

If,  on  the  contrary,  the  filling  is  built  up  so  that  its 
grinding  surface  presents  a  horizontal  plane,  even  the  force 
of  mastication  will  tend  constantly  to  drive  it  outward  from 
the  center  of  the  tooth.  If  the  restoration  of  the  original 
contour  is  carried  still  further,  and  the  marginal  ridge  is 
raised  in  the  normal  form,  the  strain  on  the  filling  will  be 
much  greater,  and  its  value  correspondingly  impaired. 

Now,  in  many  cases,  where  the  cusps  of  the  natural 
teeth  which  antagonize  the  gold  filling  are  very  long,  it  is 
necessary  to  grind  them  off',  as  well  as  to  shape  the  surfaces 
of  the  fillings  as  above  described.  Without  thus  o-rindino; 
oft'  the  cusps,  it  would,  in  some  instances,  be  impossible  to 
get  sufficient  thickness  of  gold  to  insure  any  stability  of  the 
filling. 

It  will  undoubtedly  be  urged  by  some  that  such  extreme 
precautions  are  not  necessary,  if  cohesive  gold  is  solidly  built 
up,  as  it  can  be,  from  a  secure  anchorage  made  at  all  possible 
points. 

Such  a  defense  of  the  practice  of  restoring  the  natural 
contour  in  situations  that  have  been  considered,  can  only 
come  from  a  want  of  knowledge  of  the  materials  we  have  to 
deal  with  and  the  principles  on  which  our  operations  are 
based. 

If  two  fillings  could  be  placed  in  precisely  corresponding 
situations  by  the  same  hand,  one  contoured  as  laid  down  in 
the  above  rule,  and  the  other  contoured  proximately  to  the 
original  shape  of  the  tooth,  and  we  could  be  assured  there 
would  be  no  recurrence  of  decay,  of  the  first  it  might  be 
predicted  with  assurance  that  it  would  last  indefinitely ; 
while  of  the  second,  it  could  positively  bo  asserted  that  it 
Avould  fail.  The  latter  might,  under  favorable  conditions, 
last  for  some  years,  but  it  would  eventually  be  certain  to 


USEFUL     HIXTS.  71 

give  way  simply  through  the  agency  of  mechanical  force. 
Yet  it  has  heen  my  experience  that  the  tooth  is  exceedingly 
sensitive  around  and  under  that  filling.  I  have  had  a  differ- 
ent experience  from  some  of  the  gentlemen,  inasmuch  as  in- 
stead of  finding  the  fillings  soft,  so  they  could  be  taken  out 
with  a  spoon  excavator,  they  seem  to  me  to  be  as  hard  as 
steel.  It  is  difiicult  to  make  the  two  things  agree.  I  have 
come  to  one  conclusion  in  reo;ard  to  this  amalo-am,  and  that 
is,  never  to  use  it  except  in  cases  where  we  have  very  soft, 
white  teeth,  where  the  saliva  is  inclined  to  be  acid.  Take, 
for  instance,  teeth  which  are  pearly  white,  and  in  which  the 
deca}^  is  rapid.  I  have  seen  many  where  it  has  been  in  such 
mouths  for  several  years,  and  doing  beautifully,  as  black  as 
ink,  the  lines  perfect,  no  sign  of  decay.  I  met  a  case  of  that 
kind  a  few  days  ago,  and  I  was  pleased  to  see  how  beauti- 
fully the  teeth  were  being  saved,  but  I  think  such  are  ex- 
ceedingly rare. 

The  cases  thus  far  considered  are  the  most  important, 
and  those  most  likely  to  fail  from  improper  contouring,  but 
there  are  others  where  the  observance  of  this  same  principle 
wijl  prove  of  great  value,  though  it  can  be  carried  out  to 
only  a  limited  degree. 

In  the  building  down  of  incisors  where  a  considerable 
portion  of  the  labial  wall  has  been  lost,  it  is  desirable  to 
slightly  slope  the  cutting  edge  of  the  filling  from  its  most 
distant  mesial  or  distal  proximal  corner  up  to  the  point  of 
contact  with  the  tooth.  This  would  unquestionably  lengthen 
the  usefulness  of  such  fillings  as  compared  with  those  that 
were  absolutely  restored  to  their  original  contour.  In  all 
such  restorations — sharp  corners  should  always  be  slightly 
rounded. 

With  regard  to  the  anchorasfcof  suchfillino;s — the  same 
rule  holds  good  as  given  before. 

There  is  one  other  situation  in  whicli  the  restoration  of 
natural  contour  would  be  undesirable,  and  that  is  in  proximal 
fillings  in  the  upper  incisors,  where  the  palatal  angle  of  the 
filling  should  be  cut  away  so  as  to  leave  a  self-cleansing  sur- 
face.— J.  W.  Corman}",  in  JReview. 


72 


DEPARTMENT    A. 


127.  Fillings  Below  Gum  Margin. — I  have  never  found 
a  process,  or  material,  that  gives  as  good  satisfaction  in  these 
cases  as  combinations  of  alloy  and  gold.  These  cavi- 
ties nearly  always  occur  on  the  proximal  or  labial 
surfaces.  My  method  is  to  remove  the  decay  ;  get 
smooth  edges  to  the  cavity ;  put  on  a  band  matrix,  reach- 
reaching  from  the  lower  edge  (or  part  under  the  gum) 
of  the  cavity,  half  way  to  the  crown  of  the  tooth,  ^ow  adjust 
the  rubber-dam  and  fill  the  cavity  one- third  fall — or  to  a  point 
a  little  above  the  gum  line — with  white  gold  and  platina 
alloy;  and  plug  the  balance  of  the  cavity  with  gutta-percha. 
At  a  subsequent  appointment,  adjust  the  rubber-dam,  smooth 
off  the  filling,  drill  two  or  three  retaining  pits;  and  com- 
plete the  operation  with  felt  gold  and  hand  pressure. 
The  whole  filling  should  be  nicely  smoothed  and  polished. 
Fig.  3,  shows  a  labial  cavity  in  a  bicuspid  complete. — Wm. 
H.  Steele. 


128.  Capping  Exposed  Nerves.  - — In  order  to  attain  suc- 
cess in  an  operation  w^hich  has  for  its  object  the  preservation 
of  vitality  in  an  exposed  tooth  pulp,  it  is  necessary  that  the 
pulp  be  healthy,  and  that  it  be  so  protected  as  to  maintain 
this  condition.  Place  the  rubber-dam  on  the  tooth  to  be  ope- 
rated on,  and  one  or  two  adjacent  teeth,  in  order  to  have 
plenty  of  room  and  light  to  work.  The  rubber  being  in 
place,  and  the  cavity  properly  prepared,  take  a  piece  of  very 
thin  copper,  place  it  on  a  block,  and  with  the  round  end  of 
a  small  instrument,  or  a  suitable  size  ball  burnisher,  press  it 
down  into  the  wood,  making  a  shallow  cup  like  disk.  IsText, 
take  a  general  view  of  the  cavity  and  exposure,  to  determine 
the  size  and  shape  to  cut  the  disk,  the  diameter  of  which 
should  be  such  as  to  permit  the  edges  of  the  disk  to  rest  on 
the  sound  dentine  that  forms  the  border  of  the  exposed 
orifice. 

Mix  fine  powdered  asbestos  with  carbolized  resin,  to 
form  a  thin  paste ;  put  a  small  quantity  of  this  on  the  sunken 


*  Extract  from  paper  read  before  the  Iowa  State  Dental  Society,  May,  1894. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  73 

side  of  the  disk,  and  [)lace  quick!}'  and  carefully  in  position 
over  the  exposed  nerve. 

Now,  with  some  good  cement,  till  in  around  the  sunken 
edges  of  the  disk,  building  up  even  with  the  highest  part, 
making  as  nearly  as  possible  a  level  bottom  to  the  cavity, 
and  holdino-  the  cap  firmly  in  position.  It  is  very  imjjortant 
that  the  cavity  of  decay  should  be  cleared  of  all  loose  parti- 
cles before  setting  the  cap.  This  should  be  done  by  gently 
syringing  out  the  cavity  with  warm  water,  containing  a  few 
drops  of  listerin,  before  setting  the  cap. — William  H.  Steele. 

129.  Preparing  and  Using  Tin  for  Filling. — Tin  may 
be  worked  in  various  forms.  When  the  cohesive  properties 
are  to  be  relied  on,  there  is  perhaps  no  better  method  than 
rolling  the  foil  in  a  loose  rope,  and  cutting  in  pieces  of 
various  lengths.  In  cavities  surrounded  by  strong  walls,  the 
tin  should  be  folded  into  tape  or  made  in  cylinders,  and  time 
will  be  saved  by  introducing  it  in  the  cavity.  Shavings  of 
tin  turned  from  a  revolving  ingot  of  the  metal  in  the  lathe 
work  with  a  softness  which  makes  it  a  pleasure  to  use  them. 
I  have  only  a  word  to  say  about  tin  shavings  and  the  wheel 
from  which  they  are  turned. 

An  ordinary  corundum  wheel,  one-half  inch  thick  and 
two  inches  in  diameter,  is  used  as  a  model,  and  is  molded  in 
sand.  The  tin  is  melted  in  a  ladle  and  poured  in  the  sand, 
after  which  a  hole  is  drilled  in  the  center  of  it,  so  that  it 
can  be  mounted  on  an  arbor  and  turned  in  the  lathe.  A 
chisel  on  the  side-rest  is  used  as  the  tool,  and  these  shavings 
are  turned  otf  the  thickness  desired. 

Pure  tin  freshly  cut  from  the  wheel  in  the  form  of  shav- 
ings is  quite  cohesive,  and  packs  beautifully.  When  tin  and 
gold  are  combined  in  the  same  filling,  I  think  there  should 
be  at  least  two  leaves  of  gold  to  one  of  tin. 

My  habit  is  to  put  one  leaf  of  ISTo.  4  tin  between  two 
leaves  of  jSTo.  5  soft  gold  foil,  then  fold  it  and  cut  into  nar- 
row pieces. 

I  am  not  particular  what  kind  of  an  instrument  I  use  to 
pack  the  tin  with.     An  ordinary  excavator  with  the  point 


74  DEPARTMENT     A. 

dulled  or  broken  is  as  good  as  anything.  The  tin  is  so 
cohesive  that  it  works  as  well  as  cohesive  gold  foil. — Dr.  E. 
T.  Darby,  in  Cosmos. 

130.  Extracting  Third  Molar.* — When  once  the  de- 
cision is  made  that  the  comfort  and  well-being  of  the  patient 
would  be  favored  by  the  absence  of  one  of  these  bad  third 
molars,  it  should  be  removed  with  such  heroism  of  operation 
as  the  case  requires.  If  the  ordinary  instruments  and  pro- 
cedures for  extracting  teeth  cannot  be  brought  to  bear,  or 
will  not  answer,  it  should  be  made  a  surgical  operation 
w^ith  such  appliances  as  will  suffice.  The  extent  and  diffi- 
culty of  these  operations  are  not  out  of  proportion  to  the 
seriousness  of  the  troubles  to  be  relieved  ;  and  dentists  are 
the  ones  to  operate.  The  instruments  and  the  details  of 
the  operation  are  to  be  determined  by  the  peculiarities  of 
each  case.  Ordinarily,  the  more  difficult  of  these  operations 
are  not  to  be  undertaken  Avithout  that  deliberation  and  con- 
trol which  are  commanded  by  full  etherization.  N"otwith- 
standing  the  patient's  inability  to  open  the  jaws  more  than  a 
small  fraction  of  an  inch,  full  opening  of  the  mouth  is  rarely 
difficult  to  accomplish  under  ether  with  lever-  or  screw- 
power,  and  a  firmly  fixed  prop  seems  to  retain  the  opening. 

For  a  third  molar,  tipped  forward  and  impinging  firmly 
agairist  the  distal  surface  of  the  second  molar,  a  most  helpful 
next  step  is  the  freeing  all  of  that  contact  by  grinding  from 
the  third  molar  with  a  corundum  disk  with  the  engine. 
This  very  greatly  facilitates  the  extraction  of  the  third 
molar,  and  efiiectually  guards  against  the  dejDlorable  accident 
— which  has  occurred — of  extracting  both  second  and  third 
molars  in  the  eflibrt  to  remove  tlie  third.  The  frequent 
backward  curve  of  the  roots  of  the  lower  third  molar  is  to 
be  remembered.  With  the  anterior  surface  free  simple 
lever-power,  cautiously  applied  with  a  suitably-shaped  ele- 
vator, may  suffice  to  dislodge  the  tooth,  or  to  so  break  up 
its  attachment  that  the  after-removal  is  easy.  Sometimes 
the  process  at  the  sides  and  overlying  the  back  of  the  tooth 

*  Kead  at  the  meeting  of  the  Academy  of  Dental  Science. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  75 

is  so  thick  and  strong  as  to  hinder  grasping  the  tooth  with 
a  forceps  or  to  prevent  its  being  lifted — a  condition  of  things 
particularly  embarrassing  when  the  tooth  is  frail,,  dee^)!}'- 
decayed,  tunneled,  and  brittle.  In  such  instances,  after 
suitable  dissection  of  the  soft  tissues,  the  bone  should  be  cut 
away  with  sharp  engine-burs  till  the  difficulty  is  overcome. 
Considerable  experience  has  confirmed  the  conviction  that 
ingenuity  and  an  earnest  persistence  on  the  part  of  the  ope- 
rator, with  co-operation  on  the  part  of  the  patient,  may  sur- 
mount the  difficulties  attendant  on  the  removal  of  almost 
any  third  molar.  —Dr.  C.  A.  Brackett. 

131.  Papillary  Growths  on  the  Gums  come  next  on 
our  list.  These  may  occur  on  the  gums,  but  are  exceedingly 
rare.  They  consist  simply  of  hypertrophied  papille,  and  are 
really  unimportant.  Caustics  sometimes  arrest  or  cure  the 
growths,  but  a  free  excision  is  usually  the  best  treatment, 
though  even  after  this  they  sometimes  tend  to  recur. — Frank 
Lankester,  L.R.C.P.,  M.R.C.S.,  L.D.S.,  in  Ohio  Journal 

132.  Warty  Growths  on  the  Gums  are  also  very  rarely 
met  with,  but  they  do  occur,  and  much  resemble  the  ordi- 
nary cauliflower  excresences  so  frequently  seen  on  the  hands, 
etc.  They  are  quite  innocent,  but  there  is  often  very  consid- 
erable difficulty  experienced  in  getting  rid  of  them,  just  as 
is  the  case  when  they  occur  on  the  hands.  At  the  same 
time,  there  is  the  liability  for  them  to  take  on  a  malignant 
character.  They  are  of  a  pale  whitish  color,  and  contrast 
very  strongly  with  the  surrounding  red  gum. — Frank  Lan- 
kester, L.R.C.P.,  M.R.C.S.,  L.D.S.,  in  Ohio  Journal 


DEPARTMENT  B. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  79 


DEPARTMENT  B. 


133.  Suggestions  about  Plaster. — Plaster  will  set  more 
rapidly  if  tepid  (not  hot)  water  is  used,  than  if  we  take  cold. 
A  clean  smooth  cup  is  the  most  convenient  vessel  in  which 
to  mix  plaster,  rubber  bowls  being  especially  unsatisfactory 
to  one  who  has  become  accustomed  to  the  thin  cups.  'New 
cups  should  be  obtained  as  often  as  the  surfaces  become 
checked  so  that  the  plaster  is  difficult  to  remove.  If  an  excess 
of  material  has  been  used,  scrape  it  out  in  the  waste  box, 
and  what  little  there  is  left  in  the  cup  will  easily  come  away 
when  hard,  by  filling  the  cup  with  water. 

To  mix  plaster,  put  in  the  cup  at  the  outset  about  as 
much  w^ater  as  judgment  indicates  will  be  needed.  To  add 
water  later  is  a  mistake.  Drop  in  the  plaster  a  little  at  a 
time,  allowing  it  to  disappear  below  the  surface  before  adding 
any  more ;  repeat  this  till  the  plaster  protrudes  above  the 
water,  which  refuses  to  take  up  any  more.  Then  stir  vigor- 
ously with  a  smooth  clean  knife,  and  a  mixture  moderately 
stiff  and  perfectly  smooth  will  reward  you.  The  more  it  is 
stirred  the  more  quickly  it  will  set,  and  the  stitfer  it  gets. 
Use  it  for  the  purpose  in  hand  when  it  has  reached  the  re- 
quired consistency.  If  on  mixing  it  is  found  that  a  miscal- 
culation has  been  made,  as  the  mass  is  thin,  do  not  add  more 
plaster ;  such  a  step  will  ruin  everything.  Pour  off  any  excess 
of  water,  and  then  stir  till  stiffening  begins.  Mix  enough 
plaster  at  the  outset,  because  to  mix  a  second  batch,  especially 
in  flasking,  gives  a  mass  one  part  of  which  will  set  sooner 
than  the  other,  wdiich  is  often  very  undesirable.  In  taking 
an  impression  of  a  large  surface,  this  sometimes  becomes 
necessarj^  Then  mix  the  first  batch  quite  thin  and  flow  it 
over  the  entire  surface  of  the  object  of  which  a  duplicate  is 
desired.     Then  add  other  plaster  till  the  impression  is  as 


80  DEPARTMENT     B. 

thick  as  needed.  By  the  time  the  last  lot  has  set,  the  first 
will  usually  be  hard,  and  all  will  be  well. 

In  mixing  for  impressions  of  the  mouth,  use  fine  plaster, 
add  a  little  salt  and  a  little  powdered  pigment;  Venetian  red 
or  Spanish  brown  serve  admirably.  This  will  produce  a 
quick  setting  tinted  impression  material,  which  can  be  read- 
ily detected  from  the  model  which  is  to  be  poured  in  it. 
The  plaster  must  be  mixed  as  described,  care  being  taken 
not  to  have  it  too  thick.  Do  not  stir  till  in  the  presence  of 
the  patient. 

Then  stir  till  it  can  be  felt  that  the  mass  has  begun  to 
stiften.  Fill  the  cup  rapidly,  carry  it  to  place  firmly  and 
hold  it  there  motionless.  If  there  is  a  high  roof  put  some 
plaster  in  the  vault  with  the  knife.  If  it  is  feared  that  the 
buccal  portions  of  the  molar  teeth  may  not  be  reached,  place 
plaster  there  also,  before  inserting  the  tray.  As  soon  as  the 
plaster  begins  to  set  in  the  cup,  chop  it  up  so  that  it  may  be 
more  readily  removed  when  the  cup  is  to  be  cleaned.  As 
soon  as  the  material  in  the  cup  will  fracture  sharply,  remove 
tbe  impression  regardless  of  possible  fracturing.  If  this  does 
occur,  collect  all  of  the  pieces  from  the  mouth  ;  they  may  be 
replaced  so  as  to  form  a  practically  perfect  model.  I  have 
made  up  an  impression  from  thirty  odd  pieces  and  secured 
good  adaptation. 

To  procure  a  lower  impression,  put  but  little  plaster  in 
the  tray,  place  plaster  around  the  teeth  in  the  mouth  with 
the  knife,  being  sure  to  cover  all  surfaces  of  the  teeth  ;  then 
quickl}^  insert  the  tray  and  let  the  mass  harden,  and  remove 
as  before.  In  very  difiicult  cases,  where  the  teeth  are  long 
and  perhaps  loose,  dispense  with  the  tray  altogether.  When 
the  material  is  sufliciently  set,  split  it  into  sections  with  a 
sharp  pen-knife,  and  afterward  join  the  fractured  pieces  to- 
gether as  before. 

To  pour  a  model,  use  a  shaving  brush,  and  with  soap- 
lather  thoroughly  soap  the  surface  of  the  impression,  espec- 
ially in  the  pits  for  the  teeth,  and  be  careful  to  wash  all  the 
suds  off  afterward  ;  otherwise  the  surface  of  the  model  will 
be  pitted.     Mix  the  plaster  moderately  thin.     Have  the  sur- 


USEFUL     HINTS.  '  8L 

face  of  the  impression  saturated,  aiid'a  little  water  in  the  pits 
for  the  teeth.  Start  the  plaster  in  the  last  molar  and  let  it 
fill  up  and  run  over  in  the  other  pits,  forcing  out  the  water 
ahead  of  it  till  all  are  filled.  Then  turn  the  impression 
over  and  shake  the  plaster  oat  of  the  impression  back  in 
the  cup.  This  insures  a  thin  film  of  plaster  over  the  entire 
surface.  If  the  process  is  now  repeated  and  the  impression 
slowly  built  up  without  turning  it  over,  the  result  will  be  a 
most  accurate  model. 

Where  the  model  is  to  be  used  for  gold  work,  and  dies 
must  be  made ;  if  there  are  any  teeth  present,  a  pin  should  be 
placed  in  each.  In  doing  this  cut  the  heads  oii',  and  later 
the  plaster  teeth  ma}^  all  be  broken  otf,  the  pins  withdrawn, 
the  dies  made,  and  the  teeth  readilj'  returned  to  position, 
where  they  may  be  again  fastened  by  using  a  camel's-hair 
brush  and  plaster  very  thin.  In  repairing  models  in  this 
way,  take  a  saucer  with  a  little  water  and  drop  in  a  little 
plaster,  but  do  not  stir  it.  The  j^h^^ter  may  be  taken  up 
with  the  brush;  placed  along  the  joint  between  tooth  and 
model,  and  as  it  soaks  in,  the  excess  must  be  wiped  away 
with  the  brush  filled  with  water. 

When  it  becomes  desirable  to  trim  a  model,  after  it  has 
lain  around  a  day  or  two,  and  so  become  quite  hard,  dip  it  in 
water  for  a  few  minutes,  and  it  may  be  readily  cut  with  a 
sharp  pen-knife.  If  an  impression  is  filled  and  allowed  to 
stand  over  night,  drop  it  in  hot  water,  and  the  steam  gen- 
erated will  make  separation  more  easy.  Models  should  al- 
Avays  be  well  soaked  before  more  plaster  is  added  to  them. 
If,  however,  it  is  desired  to  preserve  a  model,  on  which  a 
plate  is  to  be  vulcanized,  it  may  be  readily  done  by  soaping 
it  slightly  and  flasking  it  as  dry  as  possible.  With  care,  after 
vulcanization,  the  investment  may  be  removed  without  injury 
to  the  model,  which,  if  then  allowed  to  dry,  may  be  separated 
from  the  plate. 

■  To  mix  plaster  and  sand  for  investment  of  gold  pieces^ 
drop  sand  in  water,  and  without  stirring  pour  ott'  as  much 
water  as  will  run  out.  If  now  half  the  quantity  of  plaster 
be  added,  vigorous  stirring  will  produce  a  mass  of  the  proper 


82  DEPARTMENT     B. 

•consistency.  At  first  it' will  appear  stift",  but  by  stirring,  the 
■sand  will  soon  yield  enough  water  to  saturate  the  plaster, 
when  the  whole  will  become  incorporated. 

Never  varnish  plaster  under  any  circumstances,  except  for 
moulding  in  sand. — Rodrigues  Ottolengui,  in  Dental  Mirror. 

134.  Axioms  of  Prosthetic  Dentistry. — 1.  If  many 
teeth  have  been  lost,  and  the  patient  has  reached  that  con- 
dition when  an  artificial  denture  must  be  worn,  the  first 
thing  to  be  considered  is:  "  "What  must  be  done  to  make  the 
denture  as  useful  and  comfortable  as  possible  ?"  If  the  ex- 
traction of  other  teeth  will  secure  this  result,  extract  them. 

2.  AVhen  artificial  teeth  are  required,  there  is  nothing 
in  which  skill  is  so  important  to  personal  appearance,  health 
and  comfort.  Remind  your  patient  of  this  when  she  is  "  shop- 
ping "  for  them. 

3.  The  more  difficult  it  may  be  to  secure  an  impression, 
the  greater  the  necessity  for  the  use  of  plaster. 

4.  There  are  more  failures  from  faulty  articulation  than 
from  misfits. 

5.  Never  allow  the  front  teeth  to  meet,  except  in  the 
rare  cases  where  the  protrusion  of  the  lower  jaw  brings  the 
upper  teeth  inside. 

6.  Never  allow  a  lower  second  or  third  molar,  which 
has  been  thrown  forward,  so  its  crown  stands  at  an  angle  of 
about  45°,  to  be  met  on  its  face  by  an  upper  tooth. 

7.  When  the  cuspids  have  been  extracted  a  year,  there 
is  always  room  and  necessity  for  the  plate  to  be  w^orn  higher 
and  the  gum  fuller,  to  restore  the  contour  of  the  lip. 

8.  There  is  no  necessity  for  vacuum  cavities  in  full  upper 
dentures,  whatever  the  shape  or  condition  of  the  alveolar 
ridge  and  palate. 

9.  The  nearer  the  karat  of  the  solder  to  that  of  the 
plate,  the  more  satisfactory  will  be  the  results.  No  lower 
karat  than  18  need  be,  nor  should  be,  used. 

10.  A  full  set  of  single  gum  teeth,  soldered  to  a  gold 
plate,  in  these  days  of  rubber  attachments  and  continuous 
gum  wH^rk,  is  an  abomination  from  every  point  of  view. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  83 

11.  "  Combination  "  dentures  of  any  kind  which  can. 
not  be  repaired  without  making  almost  a  new  denture  (and 
there  are  such)  are  an  imposition  on  the  patient. — Dr.  L.  P. 
Haskell,  in  Items  of  Interest. 

l:-^5.  Gas-fitting  in  Laboratories. — In  these,  the  gas  sup- 
ply pipes  should  always  be  very  much  larger  than  is  ever 
required.  It  is  not  a  question  of  the  possibility  of  obtaining 
sutficient  gas,  but  that  the  supply  shall  be  large  enough  to  ad- 
rait  of  great  variations  in  the  demand  without  interfering 
with  operations  in  progress,  and  the  area  of  pipes  given  for 
specific  supplies  must  be  at  least  doubled  for  laboratory  use. 
In  addition  to  this,  a  good  governor  of  ample  size  is  a  prime 
necessity,  as,  without  it,  exact  work  is  impossible.  Few  lab- 
oratories are  properly  arranged  for  precision  in  the  gas  sup- 
ply, and  this  entails  not  only  a  very  great  waste  of  time,  but 
prevents  exact  work  being  done.  A  laboratory  with  a  defi- 
cient and  ungoverned  gas  supply  lacks  the  one  element  of  pre- 
cision, without  which,  experimental  work  is  of  little  value. 

Atmospheric  Burners. — All  atmospheric  buuners  de- 
pend on  three  parts,  which  must  be  in  definite  proportion  to 
each  other;  any  alteration  which  reduces  the  capacity  or 
power  of  any  one  of  these  parts,  reduces  the  whole  power  of 
the  burner  in  proportion.  These  points  are:  The  size  of 
the  gas  outlet,  the  diameter  and  length  of  the  mixing  tube, 
and  the  area  of  outlet  for  burning  the  mixture.  Approxi- 
mately, the  diameter  of  the  outlet  in  the  gas  nipple  must 
not  exceed  one-eighth  of  the  diameter  of  the  burner  tube 
for  16-  or  18-candle  gas ;  the  length  of  blank  tubes  for  mix- 
ing must  not,  in  horizontal  burners,  be  less  than  five  times 
the  bore,  and  in  vertical  burners  eight  times  the  bore.  The 
total  area  of  outlets,  either  of  holes  or  area  between  the 
meshes  of  gauze,  must  not  exceed  the  area  of  the  tube 
itself. 

Burners  Lightin(J  Back. — If  a  burner  which  has  once 
been  satisfactory  commences  to  light  back  at  the  jet,  the 
cause  will  probably  be  found  in  an  obstruction  of  the  gas  jet, 
which  alters  the  proportion  of  gas  and  air,  or  if  the  burner 


84  DEPARTMENT     B. 

is  a  gauze  one,  a  perforation  or  imperfection  in  the  gauze. — 
Thos.  Fletcher,  in  Items  of  Interest. 

136.  Artificial  Dentures. — -To  secure  good  results  in 
an  artificial  denture,  a  correct  impression  is  first  in  order 
and  first  in  importance.  Plaster  of  Paris  is,  in  our  estima- 
tion, the  only  material  with  which  a  normal  impression  can 
be  obtained.  The  various  other  materials  used  for  the  pur- 
pose force  the  muscles  and  soft  tissues  out  of  position,  result- 
ing in  an  inaccurate  cast.  Having  secured  a  normal  impres- 
sion— the  negative  fi'om  which  a  positive  is  to  be  obtained — 
it  should  be  considered  as  representing  merely  the  outlines ; 
the  conditions  to  be  noted  after  a  carefal  study  of  the  parts. 
With  the  patient  in  the  chair  and  the  cast  in  hand,  the  con- 
ditions may  be  indicated  by  a  series  of  characters  and  fig- 
ures penciled  on  the  cast.  For  instance,,  the  thickness  of 
the  tissues  may  be  represented  by  figures  64,  32,  16,  8  ;  the 
sixty-fourth,  the  thirty-second,  the  sixteenth,  and  the  eighth 
of  an  inch  in  thickness.  F,  will  indicate  flexible ;  R, 
rigid,  etc.  With  such  a  record  an  intelligent  idea  can  be 
formed  of  the  requirements  in  the  particular  case,  and  the 
necessary  modifications  will  be  easily  comprehended  and 
accomplished ;  the  adaptation  to  the  hard  and  soft,  rigid  and 
fle;xible,  parts  secured  ;  the  pressure  obtained  just  where 
wanted — most  in  the  soft  parts,  and  least  in  the  rigid.  In 
order  to  trim  a  cast  judiciously,  one  must  have  a  thorough 
understanding  of  the  individual  mouth.  A  very  important 
consideration  is  to  so  conform  the  plate  to  atmospheric 
pressure  principles,  that  in  its  use  the  soft  parts  of  the  mouth 
will  be  moulded  by  the  denture.  The  movements  of  the 
tongue  and  the  direct  pressure  of  the  lower  jaw  contribute 
largely  to  bring  about  this  result.  The  fact  that  the  mouth 
does  thus  conform  to  the  denture  shows  the  importance  of  a 
careful  preparation  of  the  cast,  in  order  that  pressure  may 
be  brought  to  bear  where  it  is  most  efiicient  and  least  dis- 
tressing, and  to  secure  atmospheric  pressure  in  establishing 
adaptation  and  retaining  the  plate. 

The  surface  of  the  plate  should  always  be  finely  finished ; 


USEFUL     HIJ^TS. 


85 


a  rough  and  uneven  surface  prevents  nice  adaptation, 'and  is 
unclean  and  unhealthy.  "With  air  or  any  foreign  substance 
between  the  denture  and  the  surface  of  the  mouth  covered 
by  it,  perfect  contact  is  prevented.  If  both  rubber  and 
celluloid  plates  were  more  highly  finished  before  insertion 
in  the  mouth,  there  would  be  less  complaint  of  these  vege- 
table bases  for  artificial  dentures. 

At  the  level  of  the  sea  the  atmospheric  pressure  is  said 
to  be  fifteen  pounds  to  the  square  inch,  but  no  such  amount 
of  pressure  is  required  to  retain  a  properly  fitting  artificial 


denture.  The  saliva  or  fluids  of  the  mouth  are  also  of  srreat 
importance  in  retaining,  a  denture  in  position.  If  the  plate 
and  mouth  were  made  perfectly  drj^,  it  would  not  be  easy  to 
secure  such  adaptations  as  would  be  required  to  hold  the  plate 
in  position.  The  utilit}^  of  the  atmosphere  is  not,  however, 
fully  demonstrated  in  the  retention  of  a  plate  till  an  air- 
space is  created  by  means  of  an  air  chamber.  This  air- 
chamber  should  cover  at  least  four-fifths  of  the  palatine  arch, 
and  include  certain  parts  of  the  aveolar  walls.  AYith  this 
provision  and  a  judicious  trimming  of  the  plaster  cast  on 


86  DEPARTMENT     B. 

the  outer  portion  of  the  alveolar  ridge,  a  large  part  of  the 
denture  is  made  to  act  as  an  air-chamber,  and  this  should  be 
understood  as  but  a  temporary  means  in  assisting  the  mouth 
to  conform  more  readily  to  the  denture ;  the  result  will  be 
vacuum  by  complete  contact,  which  does  not  take  place 
till  all  the  air  is  excluded,  and  the  air-space  filled  up  by 
the  mouth  conforming  to  it. 

To  insure  a  comfortable  adaptation,  the  pressure  must  be 
so  equalized  that,  as  the  alveolar  ridge  recedes,  undue  stress 
will  not  be  brought  on  the  hard  palate.  For  this  reason  an 
air-space,  covering  almost  the  entire  surface  of  the  palatine 
arch  is  desirable,  as  thus  the  pressure  is  better  distributed 
and  brought  to  bear  directly  on  the  alveolar  ridge,  where 
there  will  be  the  least  danger  of  injuring  the  mouth,  and 
thus  avoiding  the  riding  or  rocking  of  the  plate  on  the  hard 
palate.  The  conventional  air-chamber,  with  its  acute  angles 
invariab]}'  placed  on  the  most  rigid  portion  of  the  hard 
palate,  soon  outlines  itself  in  the  tissues,  demonstrating  a 
failure  to  properly  utilize  atmospheric  pressure,  and  injuring 
the  mouth  by  inducing  absorption  unnecessarily. 

The  illustration  is  an  exact  copy  of  a  mouth  for  which 
I  am  now  preparing  a  set  of  continuous-gum  teeth.  The 
conditions  may  be  indicated  by  letters  A,  A,  A,  64,  4,  mean- 
ing that  within  these  outlines  the  tissue  is  about  the  sixty- 
fourth  part  of  an  inch  in  thickness  atone  end  and  one-fourth 
of  an  inch  at  the  other ;  R,  R,  R,  very  rigid ;  C,  C,  C,  16, 
the  one-sixteenth  of  an  inch  in  thickness ;  B,  B,  B,  very 
sensitive  to  pressure  ;  32,16,  32,  mean  parts  of  an  inch  in 
thickness.  On  the  side  A,  A,  A,  a  large  piece  of  the  process 
had  been  torn  away  in  extracting  the  first  molar,  which 
accounts  for  its  peculiar  condition. — C.  H.  Land,  in  Cosmos. 

137.  Insertion  of  Impression  Tray. — The  insertion  of 
the  tray  in  taking  an  impression  may  seem  a  trifle  to  the 
operator,  but  is  frequently  not  so  to  the  patient.  Few  lips 
will  admit  an  impression-tray  direct  without  an  amount  of 
stretching,  at  once  inconvenient  and  painful ;  and,  in  some 
cases,  to  secure  a  correct  impression  without  subjecting  the 


USEFUL      HINTS.  87 

patient  to  serious  discomfort  will  require  no  little  care  and 
expertness  on  the  part  of  the  operator.  Unusual  width  of 
the  jaw  is  not  infrequently  associated  with  a  contracted  com- 
missure, and,  in  addition,  the  muscles  of  the  mouth  may  be 
rigid  and  unyielding.  Another  ditKculty  is  in  the  common 
attempt  of  the  patient  to  open  the  mouth  wide  in  an  effort 
to  assist  the  operator.  The  patient  should  he  directed  to 
guard  against  this  by  allowing  the  jaw  and  the  lips  to  be 
entirely  under  the  control  of  the  operator,  who,  standing  to 
the  right  of,  behind  and  over  the  patient,  should  present  the 
tray  obliquely  to  the  mouth ;  one  side  resting  against  and 
pressing  outward  the  corner  of  the  mouth,  while  the  oppo- 
site corner  should  be  extended  with  the  lirst  and  second 
lingers  of  the  left-hand ;  the  tray  should  then  be  passed  in 
with  ii  rotatory  movement  to  bring  it  in  line. — Dr.  J.  W. 
White,  in  Cosmos. 

138.  Perfect  Plaster  Partial  Impressions. — To  take  an 
accurate  impression  of  the  mouth  for  a  partial  upper  set  of 
teeth,  smear  plaster  over  the  roof  of  the  mouth  with  the 
finger ;  take  a  string  about  one  foot  in  length  ;  tie  the  ends 
together ;  put  the  tied  end  of  the  loop  in  the  plaster  on  the 
roof  of  the  mouth,  and  add  more  plaster  to  thoroughly  imbed 
the  knot,  leaving  the  loop  of  string  hanging  down.  In 
placing  the  plaster  in  the  mouth,  care  should  be  taken  to 
have  it  come  full  half-way  over  the  grinding  surfaces  of 
molars  and  bicuspids  and  cutting  edges  of  the  front  teeth ; 
then  trim  the  plaster  and  varnish  the  trimmed  surfaces. 
The  plaster  should  be  so  trimmed  that  it  will  fill  up  fully 
one-half  of  all  spaces  between  the  teeth ;  then  cover  all  the 
remaining  surface  of  the  mouth  and  teeth  with  plaster,  being- 
very  careful  to  have  the  teeth  well  covered  and  spaces  filled 
in,  putting  on  plaster  for  the  buccal  and  labial  surfaces. 
When  set,  the  plaster  impression  readily  parts  where  it  has 
been  varnished,  the  palatal  portion  is  dislodged  with  the 
help  of  the  string  used,  and  the  pieces  are  then  placed  to- 
gether and  model  made.  If  a  tooth  is  irregular,  use  model- 
ing compound  about  it  and  trim  suitably  ;  then  apj^ly  the 


»»  DEPARTMENT     B. 

plaster.  When  removing,  it  breaks  where  joined  ;  then  re- 
move compound,  place  in  position  in  the  impression,  and 
pour  the  model. — J.  G.  Templeton,  D.D.S.,  in  Ohio  Dental 
Journal. 

139.  To  Remove  Impression  from  Tray. — Directly 
after  removing  the  impression  from  the  mouth,  trim  away 
all  surplus  plaster  which  will  bind  the  impression  to  the 
tray,  place  a  Bunsen  burner  on  the  center  of  a  folded  towel, 
and  over  the  flame  of  the  burner  move  the  impression,  cup 
down,  till  it  pops  loose.  This  result  is  efi:ected  by  the  gen- 
eration of  steam  between  the  tray  and  the  impression,  and 
is  accomplished  in  less  than  a  minute's  time.  The  impres- 
sion falls  off  unbroken  on  the  folds  of  the  towel. — Dr.  F.  E. 
Battershe'll,  in  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

140.  To  Finish  High-arch  Plates.— Dr.  M.  D.  Bush, 
Canton,  uses  a  tuft  of  cotton  tw^isted  on  a  screw  mandrel. 
It  makes  an  effective  finisher,  carries  the  powder  well,  and 
adapts  itself  to  the  surface  of  the  plat^.  It  is  particularly 
useful  in  cases  of  high  and  very  narrow  arches. —  Ohio  Dental 
Journal. 

141.  Articulating  Artificial  Teeth. — In  articulating  an 
upper  set  to  lower  natural  teeth,  the  impression  is  taken  with 
plaster  and  model  made  from  it  ii*  the  usual  way ;  then  soften 
modeling  composition,  flatten  it  out  till  it  is  about  a  quarter 
of  an  inch  thick,  press  it  on  the  model  while  warm,  cut^and 
trim  to  make  a  trial  plate  on  which  to  take  the  bite,  being 
careful  to  have  it  fit  the  model  accurately ;  melt  a  little  wax 
around  on  the  ridge,  then  press  a  roll  of  softened  wax  so 
that  it  covers  all  the  alveolar  part  of  trial  plate ;  the  wax  is 
then  trimmed  to  give  artistic  or  natural  expression,  which 
may  be  changed  after  trying  in  the  mouth  and  a  satisfactory 
expression  of  the  features  obtained,  always  being  careful  to 
have  the  wax  show  the  desired  length  of  the  front  teeth. 
The  wax  should  be  so  cut  on  its  articulating  surface  that  all 
the  lower  natural  teeth  will  strike  it  at  the  same  time  when 


USEFUL     HINTS.  89 

tried  in  the  mouth;  then  remov^e  and  soften  articulating 
surface  of  wax  slightly  over  a  flarae  and  replace  in  the 
mouth,  and  do  not  let  the  patient  bite  in  it  till  you  have  the 
head  drawn  well  hack,  so  as  to  put  the  anterior  muscles  of 
the  neck  to  a  full  stretch ;  then  have  the  patient  bite  a  little 
on  the  wax,  to  get  a  slight  impression  of  the  cutting  edges 
and  cusps  of  the  lower  teeth,  l^ext,  take  an  accurate  im- 
pression of  the  lower  teeth,  from  which  make  a  plaster  model 
that  will  fit  in  the  slight  impressions  of  the  teeth  made  in 
the  bite  taken  ;  then  place  in  any  good  articulator  that  can 
be  set  to  maintain  its  relative  positions  (the  best  articulators 
are  those  made  of  plaster).  ISTow  remove  the  bite  and  you 
are  ready  to  set  the  teeth  to  a  correct  articulation,  and  if 
all  has  been  carefully  done,  the  teeth,  when  finished,  will 
properly  articulate  in  the  mouth  without  any  subsequent 
grinding. 

For  a  double  set  (upper  and  lower)  make  plates  of  mod- 
eling composition  to  take  the  bite  on,  putting  a  piece  of  stifl:" 
wire  in  the  lower  to  strengthen  it ;  wax  the  ridges  as  previ- 
ously described ;  place  a  roll  of  softened  wax  on  the  upper 
trial  plate;  place  the  lower  plate  in  the  mouth,  being  careful 
to  see  that  it  is  in  proper  place,  and  hold  it  there  while  put- 
ting in  the  upper  plate  with  the  wax  on  it.  Do  not  allow 
the  patient  to  bite  till  the  head  is  drawn  back  as  previously 
directed;  then  have  the  patient  bite  and  keep  the  jaws 
closed ;  press  the  wax  well  against  the  trial  plate,  and  mark 
the  center  or  median  line  ;  then  have  patient  close  the  lips, 
and  with  a  small,  straig-ht  instrument  mark  the  heio;ht  of 
lower  lip ;  this  mark  should  extend  from  one  angle  of  the 
mouth  to  the  other,  and  will  show  the  length  of  upper  lip, 
also  serves  as  a  guide  in  making  the  wax  expression  plates 
or  models.  After  taking  the  bite,  place  the  plaster  model 
in  the  trial  plates  and  slightly  fasten  in  any  articulator. 
You  are  now  ready  to  make  the  antagonizing  models.  The 
writer's  method  of  doing  this  is  to  press  a  lump  of  soft  wax 
on  the  upper  model  in  such  a  way  that  an  accurate  fit  is  ob- 
tained of  all  the  parts  the  artificial  plate  is  to  cover;  then 
trim,  first  the  height  the  rim  is  to  be,  leaving  it  as  high  as 


90  DEPARTMENT     B. 

possible  over  the  region  ot'  the  canine  teeth,  frsenum,  and 
over  the  bicuspids;  also  have  that  portion  over  second  molar 
as  high  as  the  model  will  permit;  then  cut  the  wax  to  the 
desired  length  for  the  teeth,  taking  as  a  guide  the  mark 
made  on  the  bite,  to  show  the  line  of  lip  closure,  Next, 
trim  labial  and  buccal  surfaces,  the  general  contour  of  which 
when  trimmed  should  conform  with  the  outer  portion  of  the 
alveolar  ridge  of  lower  plaster  model ;  then  cut  a  portion  of 
the  wax  out  of  the  center,  leaving  an  articulating  surface  all 
around  the  riclge,  which  need  not  be  so  wide  in  front  as  at 
each  side.  We  now  have  the  wax,  antagonizing  model  and 
plate  all  in  one  piece.  The  lower  antagonizing  model  is 
easily  and  quickly  made ;  having  upper  wax  on  plaster 
model,  oil  its  articulating  surface,  and  press  a  roll  of  soft 
wax  to  the  ridge  of  lower  plaster  model;  then  press  upper 
model  down  against  it  as  far  as  the  set  of  the  articulator 
will  allow;  trim  the  lower  wax  to  the  contour  of  upper  wax, 
and  w^e  have  the  antagonizing  models  ready  for  trial  in  the 
patient's  mouth,  which  we  always  do  before  proceeding  fur- 
ther, carefully  noting  and  making  any  changes  thought  nec- 
essary to  give  a  natural  expression  to  the  face,  being  very 
particular  to  have  the  articulating  surfaces  come  together  at 
the  same  time  all  the  way  around,  and  also  that  our  models 
give  the  proper  length  to  the  lower  third  of  the  face,  lohich 
must  be  ill  exact  proportion  with  the  upper  two-thirds. 

After  being  satisfied  that  we  have  obtained  the  best 
results  possible  with  the  case,  we  mark  the  medium  line, 
and  make  other  marks  across  the  line  of  closure;  so  that  we 
can  put  them  together  again  in  the  same  position  out  of  the 
mouth.  ]^ow  an  exact  articulator  becomes  a  necessity,  one 
that  will  not  vary  a  hairs  breadth,  and  to  get  that  we  must 
make  it  of  plaster,  using  our  antagonizing  models  to  get 
the  proper  relation  of  its  parts.  We  now  scarify  back  end 
of  the  plaster  models,  and  place  the  upper  antagonizing 
model  on  upper  plaster  model ;  fill  the  concave  space  betw^een 
articulating  surfaces  with  wet  paper;  spread  plaster  on  a 
piece  of  glass ;  set  upper  plaster  model  in  the  soft  plaster, 
and  build  the  plaster  extension;  which  should  be  about  nvo 


USEFUL      HINTS.  91 

inches  in  length  from  back  end  of  model,  and  built  as  high 
as  the  articulating  surface  of  wax  antagonizing  model.     Now 
then  trim  plaster  and  cut  two  V-shaped  grooves,  crossing  at 
right  angles  in  the  center  of  extension ;  coat  lightly  with 
thin   varnish   and    oil,  or,  what  is  better,  apply  a  coating 
of  soap  with  camel's-hair  pencil.     Next  place  lower  antago- 
nizing model  in  position,  as  indicated  by  marks  made. in  the 
mouth,  and  fasten  together  with  two  or  three  small  staples, 
cut  from  tin  plate;  then  put  lower  plaster  model  in  its  place, 
make  the  plaster  extension  attachment  a 'id  trim  to  upper 
extension.     When  plaster  has  well  set,  separate  the  parts ; 
then  place  lower  antagonizing  model  on  lower  plaster  model ; 
fill  inside  space  with  wet  paper,  not  allowing  any  of  it  to 
cover  articulating  surface;   soap  the  extension   and  spread 
plaster  over  all,  which  should  be  about  one-fourth  of  an  inch 
thick  on  articulating  surface  and  a  little  thicker  on  exten- 
sion ;  then  trim  to  the  contour  of  the  wax,  and  the  center 
line  marked  to  correspond  with  that  on  the  wax ;  we  now 
have  what  we  call  a  lower  articulating  plate,  which  has  an 
impression  of  the  articulating  surface  of  lower  antagonizing 
model,  against  which  the  lower  teeth  are  to  be  set ;  following 
the  order  of  nature,  we  always  set  the  lower  teeth  first,  set- 
ting the  front  teeth  a  little  in,  about  a  line  and  a  half  from 
front  edge  of  lower  articulating  plate,  at  the  medium  line, 
having  the  cuspids  and  all  those  back  of  them  come  nearly 
to  the  edge  of  articulating  plate  ;  then  the  upper  teeth  when 
set  will  not  stand  out  further  than  the  contour  of  the  upper 
antagonizing    model.      After   setting   the   lower   teeth   the 
lower  articulating  plate  is  laid  aside,  and  the  upper  plaster 
model  is  placed  in  position ;  the  upper  teeth  articulated  to 
the  lower  ones  already  set. 

If  the  pfates  are  to  be  of  vulcanite,  saw  otf  the  articu- 
lating extensions,  when  ready  for  flasking.  If  all  these  di- 
rections are  carefully  carried  out,  the  teeth,  when  finished, 
will  articulate  in  the  mouth  perfectly  icUhoiU  any  grinding 
to  make  them  come  together  ;  such  has  been  our  experience 
with  this  method  for  twenty-five  years.  The  best  results ;  in 
fact  the  whole  science  of  constructing  double  or  upper  and 


92  DEPARTMENT    B. 

lower  sets  of  teeth,  lies  in  the  proper  adjustment  of  the  an- 
tagonizing models ;  to  do  this  artistically,  a  knowledge  of 
the  physical  law  of  forces  is  absolutely  necessary ;  hence, 
when  preparing  these,  the  dentist  must  always  keep  in  mind 
that  they  should  be  made  so  that  when  the  teeth  are  set  in 
accordance  with  them,  the  force  of  mastication  should  come 
against  the  center  of  the  alveolar  ridges^  in  order  to  have  them 
remain  firmly  in  place  when  in  use. — J.  G.  Templeton  D.D.S. 

142.  Obtaining  Even  Plates. — The  ordinary  way  of 
bending  up  wax  by  w^arming  and  pressing  it  on  the  model 
with  the  thumb,  is  open  to  the  objection  that  the  thumb, 
being  harder  and  more  unyielding  than  the  soft  wax,  tends 
to  press  it  very  thin  over  the  rugse,  and  not  at  all  in  the 
interstices  of  the  teeth.  This  may  be  avoided  and  the  rugae 
brought  prominently  and  evenly  on  the  surface,  by  heating 
some  modeling  composition  in  water,  rendering  the  wax  pli- 
able by  dipping  it  for  an  instant  in  the  water  with  the  com- 
position, then  placing  the  wax  roughly  in  position  on  the 
model,  and  with  the  soft  composition  knead  it  well  down  in 
place ;  on  parting  the  composition  from  the  wax,  the  latter 
will  be  found  to  represent  on  the  surface -almost  a  duplicate 
of  the  surface  of  the  model. 

The  composition  has,  of  course,  a  tendency  to  stick  to 
the  wax,  if  too  hot.  Should  this  give  trouble,  dry  the  com- 
position first,  and  smear  the  surface  of  it  with  a  little  French 
chalk.  In  subsequently  setting  up  the  teeth  and  preparing 
for  the  flask,  care  should  be  taken  that  the  surface  of  the 
wax  is  not  cut  or  scratched  ;  when  finally  ready  for  the  flask, 
the  surface  of  the  wax  should  be  polished  by  lightly  rubbing 
it  with  the  finger  tip  or  cotton  wool. — British  Journcd. 

143.  To  Make  Gold  Plates  Without  Dies.— Dr.  W.  G. 
Browne  describes  his  greatly  simplified  method  of  making 
gold  plates  with  rubber  attachments  without  dies.  He  uses 
]M"o.  30  gauge  pure  soft  gold,  burnishing  it  directly  on  the 
plaster  model,  and  stifiening  by  soldering  a  platinum  wire 
all  around  the  pieces,  and  flowing  solder  over  to  make  a 


USEFUL      HINTS.  93 

smooth  surface.  In  a  lower  parital  plate,  when  the  eight 
anterior  teeth  were  in  position  in  the  mouth,  he  makes  the 
portion  of  the  plate  extending  across  the  anterior  teeth  of  a 
double  plate  of  gold,  with  bits  of  platinum  between  the  two 
gold  plates,  soldering  the  two  plates  only  at  the  points  where 
he  placed  the  aluminum  pieces.  The  rubber  covering  the 
lingual  surface  of  the  piece  entering  between  the  two  thick- 
nesses of  gold  made  a  very  strong  piece,  without  SAvaging  or 
using  dies  in  its  construction. — Dr.  W.  G.  Browne,  in  Items 
OF  Interest. 

14-4.  Model  Plates  for  Partials. — In  mounting  anterior 
teeth, on  partials,  where  they  are  to  be  mounted  without 
gums,  it  is  very  necessary  to  have  a  strong,  rigid  material 
for  the  model  plate,  that  can  be  made  thin,  and  yet  hold  the 
teeth  permanently  in  place,  no  matter  how^  close  they  are 
made  to  hug  the  natural  gum.  I  have  been  using  the  red 
vulcanite  gutta-percha  for  this  lately,  and  "find  it  the  best 
for  the  purpose.  The  model  should  be  hard,  then  rubbed 
over  with  soapstone,  the  gutta-percha  softened  in  water, 
pressed  to  place,  and  held  till  set.  If  properly  worked,  the 
plate  will  come  out  ready  for  sandpaper  and  polish. — Wm. 
H.  Steele. 

145.  To  Restore  Color  to  Black  Rubber  Plate. — Often 
after  a  black  rubber  plate  is  polished  it  presents  a  very  in- 
ferior color,  a  grayish-black.  This  may  be  removed  by  the 
application  of  carbon  bisulphide.  Dampen  a  cloth  with  the 
solution,  and  rub  the  plate  vigorously  wherever  required. 
It  is  Avell  to  wash  the  plate  thoroughl}'^  after  the  use  of  this 
solution,  as  there  might  otherwise  be  a  tendency  to  nausea. 
— S.  Burns,  in  Items  of  Interest. 

146.  Care  of  the  Vulcanizer. — The  occasional  reports 
of  dental  vulcanizers,  accompanied  as  they  are  by  damage  to 
property,  and  imminent  risk  of  personal  injury,  make  the 
question  of  their  avoidance  one  of  considerable  interest. 
Their  entire  prevention  is  an  impossibility,  so  long  as  the 


94  DEPARTMENT     B. 

management  of  the  vuleanizer  is  entrusted  to  boys,  or  per- 
sons who  know  nothing,  and  care  less,  about  the  properties 
of  steam,  or  the  rules  on  the  observation  of  which  depend 
the  safety  and  proper  operation  of  the  boiler  committed  to 
their  charge.  It  is  seldom,  that  an  inquiry  into  the  circum- 
stances attending  a  vuleanizer  exploding,  fails  to  elicit  the 
fact  that  it  was  the  consequence  of  gross  carelessness  or 
ignorance.  The  safety  apparatus  is  often  deliberately  put 
out  of  order,  and  all  the  chances  of  an  accident  which  may 
happen  from  a  few  moments"  forgetfulness  are  taken  by  the 
operator,  who  probably  knows  about  as  much  of  the  proper- 
ties of  steam  as  a  Christian  scientist  does  of  human  physiology. 

It  is  projiosed,  in  the  present  article,  to  touch  on  a  few 
points  of  the  proper  care  of  vulcanizers,  and  more  especially 
to  show  how  and  when  they  become  unsafe  by  use.  It  seems 
to  be  the  opinion  of  some  dentists  that  a  vuleanizer  should 
remain  good  indefinitely ;  but  often  one  returned  to  the 
maker,  for  supposed  trivial  repairs,  is  found  to  be  in  such  a 
condition  that  its  further  use  would  be  attended  with  great 
risk. 

Vulcanizers,  as  they  leave  the  manufacturer's  hands, 
may  be  depended  on  as  strong  enough  to  withstand  a  press- 
sure  three  or  four  times  as  great  as  that  incident  to  the  vul- 
canizing process,  l^o  house,  having  any  care  for  its  reputa- 
tion, can  afford  to  put  out  one  unless  it  is  of  undoubted 
strength.  They  are  also  provided  with  ample  safeguards, 
by  means  of  which  they  will  be  relieved  from  over-pressure, 
if  it  should  occur.  But  no  such  appliance  can  be  made  that 
cannot  be — either  ignorantly  or  designedly — put  out  of 
order;  neither  can  a  vuleanizer  be  made  so  strong  that  it 
will  be  safe  under  any  attainable  pressure.  It  must  be  care- 
fully and  intelligently  managed  to  insure  safety. 

Vulcanizers  are  gradually  weakened,  and  eventually 
destroyed,  by  corrosion  and  strain. 

When  the  sides  of  the  vuleanizer  are  weakened  by  cor- 
rosion to  any  great  extent,  the  fact  is  easily  ascertained  by 
tapping  them  lightly  with  a  small  hammer.  If  the  metal  is 
thick  and  strong,  it  will  be  elastic,  and  the  hammer  will 


USEFUL      HINTS.  95 

rebound  from  a  light  blow  ;  though,  of  course,  copper  would 
yield  to  a  heavy  one.  When  the  metal  is  quite  thin,  the 
sensation  will  be  as  though  the  blow  was  delivered  on  lead. 
There  v/ill  be  little,  if  any,  rebound,  and  the  metal  will  be 
driven  in  and  dented  by  a  very  light  blo\A'. 

Corrosion  occurs  to  some  extent  from  exposure  of  the 
vulcanizer  to  air  and  moisture.  Indeed,  it  is  by  no  means 
sure  that  the  greater  part  of  it  does  not  thus  take  place.  It 
is  good  practice  to  clean  the  vulcanizer  pot,  and  wipe  it  dry, 
before  laying  it  away  after  use. 

Another  cause  of  failure  in  vulcanizers,  one  which 
happil}"  occurs  but  seldom,  is  the  cracking  of  the  metal  near 
the  corner  of  the  bottom.  As  the  bottom  is  usuallj^  covered 
with  scale,  it  may  crack,  and  even  give  way,  before  the  ex- 
istence of  any  defect  is  suspected.  This  fact  forms  another 
argument  for  keeping  the  vulcanizer  clean,  as  before  men- 
tioned. 

When  a  screw  fastening  like  that  of  the  Whitney  vul- 
canizer is  employed,  mischief  is  often  done  by  the  inordinate 
use  of  black  lead  or  soapstone  powder  on  the  packing  joint, 
and  incidentally  on  the  screw.  The  particles  of  which  either 
of  these  powders  are  composed  are  hard  enough  to  wear 
away  metal  if  placed  between  two  rubbing  surfaces,  and  in 
consequence  the  screw  threads  of  vulcanizers  are  sometimes 
so  worn  that  they  have  not  sufficient  hold  on  each  other  .to 
retain  the  cover,  which,  on  some  fine  day,  mounts  to  the 
ceiling,  and  disappears  in  the  lath  and  plaster,  much  to  the 
surprise  and  disgust  of  the  owner. — George  B.  Snow,  D.D.S., 
in  Dental  Advertiser. 

147.  Use  of  the  Blow-pipe. — Dentists  who  come  to  our 
school  often  remark  that  they  have  found  it  difficult  to  use 
the  mouth  blow-pipe,  but  very  soon  learn  to  use  it  successfully 
with  proper  instruction  ;  and  the  new  beginner  can  succeed 
better  with  it  than  with  the  automatic  blow-pipe. 

The  primary  difficulty  lies  in  the  instrument  itself.  The 
blow-pipes  sold  at  the  dental  depots,  and  which  are  used  uni- 
versally, are  made  for  jewelers'  use,  who  use  low  grades  of 


96  .  DEPARTMENT     B. 

solder  and  do  not  have  to  heat  up  and  keep  hot  plaster  invest- 
ments. The  dentist  using  18-,  20-  and  22-karat  solders,  and 
needing  to  keep  hot  investments,  needs  a  larger  blow-pipe. 

The  mouth-piece  of  the  small  pipe  has  1o  be  taken  inside 
the  lips,  and  the  eftect  to  use  it  tires  the  muscles.  The  large 
mouth-piece  is  pressed  against  the  lips.  The  aperature  at  the 
other  end  needs  to  be  sufficiently  large  to  take  in  the  large 
flame  of  a  proper  soldering  burner,  either  gas  or  alcoliol. 

For  many  years  I  constructed  a  soldering  burner  by 
Avinding  fine  wire  over  the  end  of  a  gas-pipe,  to  the  size  of  a 
hen's  egg.  This  gave  a  flame  like  the  wick  of  a  lamp.  A 
few  years  since  Dr.  Mcintosh,  of  this  city,  constructed  for 
me  an  excellent  burner,  consisting  of  a  brass  bulb  filled  with 
fine  wire  gauze.  These  can  be  screwed  on  to  the  end  of  the 
ordinary  gas-pipe,  which  should  be  of  two  twelve-inch  pieces 
with  a  universal  joint,  so  as  to  be  placed  in  a  convenient 
position  on  the  bench. 

The  blow-pipe  must  be  held  in  such  position  as  to  control 
the  entire  flame,  always  remembering  that  the  flame  must  be 
made  blue,  or  sufficient  heat  will  not  be  secured.  Do  not 
blow  too  hard,  only  enough  to  control  the  flame  as  it  comes 
from  the  burner.  In  order  to  keep  a  steady  blast,  do  not 
allow  all  the  air  to  escape  from  the  lungs,  but  keep  the 
diaphragm  constantly  distended;  and  using  the  cheeks  for  bel- 
lows and  the  tongue  for  a  valve,  the  process  is  an  easy  one. 

A  blow-pipe,  such  as  I  have  described,  is  furnished  b}^ 
some  of  the  dental  depots,  and  is  known  as  the  "  Haskell 
blow-pipe."  If  the  curved  end  is  more  than  two  inches 
long,  cut  it  off"  to  that  length,  and  see  that  the  hole  is  one- 
sixteenth  inch  in  diameter.  . 

The  solder  should  be  cut  small,  and  laid  where  it  is 
needed,  so  as  not  to  have  to  "  draw  "  it  from  one  place  to- 
another.  The  borax  and  solder  should  be  applied  before  the 
case  is  heated  up,  so  there  may  be  no  delay  when  ready  for 
the  blow-pipe.  Of  course,  I  am  referring  to  the  soldering  of 
teeth  on  plates  or.  bridges.  Heat  up  the  case  over  a  large 
gas-burner  as  hot  as  possible ;  a  convenient  soldering  pan 
for   such  cases  can  be  made   of  sheet   iron ;   a  half  circle,. 


USEFUL      HINTS.  97 

three-inch  diameter  upon  the  straight  side,  with  rim  three- 
fourths  inch  wide  ;  handle,  twelve  inches,  fastened  diagonally 
to  the  straight  side. 

Place  the  case  so  the  heat  shall  be  thrown  from  front  to 
rear,  in  order  to  heat  the  plate  first,  so  it  shall  be  hot  as  the 
backings  when  the  heat  is  thrown  upon  the  solder. — L.  F. 
Haskell,  in  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

148.  Swedging  with  Screw  Press. — I  think  for  the 
past  eighteen  years  I  have  never  struck  a  blow  on  a  gold 
plate  to  swedge  it.  The  press  I  use  is  made  of  wrought  iron, 
except  the  base.  It  is  made  with  a  screw  of  steel,  engine- 
turned.  In  swedging  a  gold  metal  plate  you  cannot  be  as 
sure  of  results  in  any  other  way  as  with  the  press  that  carries 
it  home  without  rebound,  there  being  no  resistance.  On  the 
last  pressure  place  a  thin  piece  of  cotton  cloth  underneath 
your  plate,  as  yonr  first  work  will  expand  your  counter-die, 
and  the  cloth  makes  up  for  expansion  and  makes  a  perfectly 
tight  counter-die;  your  plate  will  be  driven  home,  and  a 
perfect  adaptation  the  result. — Dr.  E.  G.  Leech,  in  Odonto- 
logical  Society  cif  Pennsylvania. 

149.  Clasps  on  Rubber  Plates. — The  use  of  clasps  of 
gold  on  rubber  plates,  when  properly  made,  I  most  heartily 
recommend.  My  method  is  to  make  an  impression  of  the 
tooth  or  teeth  to  be  clasped,  pour  the  impression  with  Mel- 
lotte's  or  other  easy  flowing  metal ;  this,  when  separated  from 
the  impression,  will  give  you  the  tooth  to  be  clasped,  in 
metal ;  over  this  metal  die  bend  your  clasp  until  it  fits  the 

•  largest  diameter ;  now  remove  and  bed  or  push  the  clasps 
in  charcoal,  or  pumice  and  plaster,  about  half  the  width ; 
now  solder  a  good  strong  lug  on  this  band  by  laying  the 
lug  against  the  band,  using  at  least  14-karat  solder ;  remove 
and  place  the  clasp  on  the  tooth  in  the  mouth ;  see  that  it 
does  not  bear  upon  the  gums  ;  remove  and  flow  a  little  hard 
wax — a  little  resin  added  to  beeswax  will  make  it — on  the 
inside  of  the  clasp  ;  and  while  warm  place  it  over  the  tooth  ; 
be  sure  it  is  placed  and  held  where  you  want  it  to  remain  in 


98  DEPARTMENT     B. 

the  plate ;  on'  this  point  your  success  or  failure  depends,  the 
clasp  must  remain  immovable  when  the  impression  is  being  taken  ; 
now  you  are  ready  for  the  impression.  I  take  it  in  plaster 
alone :  many  use  stiff  wax  first.  Cut  out  around  the  clasp,  fill 
with  plaster  and  reinsert.  I  prefer  plaster  alone;  this  method 
applies  to  all  parts  of  the  mouth.  It  is  simply  incredible, 
what  this  method  will  occasionally  do,  especially  on  lower 
plates. — Gr.  A.  McMillen,  in  Review. 

150.  Preventing  Odor  in  Casting  Dies. — The  odor 
arisino;  from  casting;  a  die  in  sand  mixed  with  oil  can  be 
overcome  by  placing  over  the  molding  ring  a  tin  can,  the 
vapor  of  oil  is  condensed  by  the  cold  can,  and  prevented  from 
escaping  in  the  room. — Dental  Tribune. 

151.  Plate  Springing  in  Swaging. — Sometimes  in 
swaging  a  partial  or  full  plate  there  will  be  a  spring  in  the 
plate,  which  it  seems  almost  impossible  to  get  out,  and  after 
spending  half  a  day  in  vain  to  remove  it,  one  is  often  tempted 
to  throw  it  away  and  commence  anew.  Should  you  ever  get 
a  spring  in  a  case  of  this  character,  all  the  pounding  you  can 
give  it  in  a  day  will  not  remedy  it.  I  treat  such  cases  in  the 
following  manner :  Take  the  plaster  model  which  is  used  in 
making  the  dies,  and  set  the  plate  on  it,  and  in  as  nearly  a 
correct  position  as  possible,  and  on  the  side  of  the  model,  cut 
some  small  grooves  at  different  points.  Force  the  plate  down 
in  the  face  of  the  model,  in  the  desired  position,  and  at 
the  same  time  pass  over  it  a  piece  of  copper  wire  (size  21  of 
standard  gage),  carry  the  ends  of  this  wire  around  the 
model,  bringing  them  together  and  twist  them  until  the  wire 
binds  down  the  plate  to  the  model.  Use  as  many  wires  as 
are  necessary  to  bring  down  the  plate  all  around.  Then  heat 
the  plate  to  cherry-red,  and  allow  it  to  cool  slowly.  After 
removing  the  wires,  you  will  find  that  the  spring  has  de- 
parted. This  same  method  can  be  applied  to  plates  with 
teeth,  by  investing  in  sand  and  plaster  after  having  applied 
the  wires,  and  then  slowly  heat  the  mass  upon  a  lamp  or 
furnace  before  using  the  blow-pipe. — Dr.  Bartlett,  in  Archives. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  99 

152.  Mending  Cracked  Plates. — In  repairing  a  cracked 
plate  I  use  what  is  known  to  jewelers  as  ear-ring  wire  (brass 
wire  gold  plated),  and  after  proceeding  the  usual  way  till  about 
to  pack  in  the  new  rubber,  when  I  make  a  hole  sufficiently 
large  to  receive  the  wire  on  each  side  of  the  crack,  bending 
each  end  of  the  wire  at  right  angles,  placing  it  through  the 
holes,  sometimes  through  the  plate,  cutting  ofi'the  ends  after 
vulcanization, — Dr.  Abbott. 

153.  To  Prevent  Borax  Frothing. — When  soldering, 
the  addition  of  a  minute  quantity  of  gum  arable  rubbed  up 
with  borax  and  water  on  a  slate  will  prevent  the  borax  from 
frothing. — Carl  J.  Gramm. 

154.  Burnishing  Aluminum. — -A  mixture  of  equal 
parts  of  olive  oil  and  rum  is  recommended  for  the  burnishing 
of  aluminum,  after  which  it  is  buffed. — Dr.  Haskins,  in  Re- 

view. 

155.  To  Line  Plates  with  Black  Rubber. — Plates  can 
be  lined  with  black  rubber,  without  its  showing  through  the 
red,  by  dissolving  black  rubber  in  chloroform,  and  painting 
the  model  two  or  three  good  coats.  Wait  a  few  minutes  be- 
fore packing  other  rubber  on  the  black. — G.  A.  Yant,  in 
Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

156.  Celluloid  Blanks  for  Countersunk  Teeth. — Dr. 
M.  II.  Cryer  devised  the  filing  of  notches  in  celluloid  blanks 
as  in  Fig.  1,  when  the  countersunk  tooth-crowns  are  to  be 
mounted  in  this  material.  The  suggestion  is  a  practical  one, 
and  obviates  the  defects  which  "I  have  found  to  attend  the 
mounting  of  these  teeth  in  the  usual  way,  for  the  confined 
air  in  the  cups  commonly  prevents  the  celluloid  from  enter- 
ing far  enough  to  more  than  half  fill  them,  and  thus  the  pins 
are  left  untouched.  As  a  consequence  one  is^ disagreeably 
surprised  by  the  teeth  coming  off  in  the  process  of  finishing; 
or,  what  is  worse,  by  the  return  of  the  patient  with  one  or 
more  detached  teeth  in  the  hand.     This  has  not  occurred 


100 


DEPARTMENT     B. 


since  tryinsj  Dr.  Cryer's  method,  and  an  experimental  case 
from  which  the  teeth  were  purposely  broken  showed  all  the 
cups  or  countersinks  perfectly  filled,  as  seen  in  the  cut, 
Fig.  2,  copied  from  that  case.  That  was  a  demonstration  of 
the  effectiveness  of  the  plan  which  provides  for  the  escape  of 


Fig.  3 


Fig.  4. 


the  air,  while  the  plastic  promontories  enter  the  counter- 
sinks and  surround  the  pins,  by  means  of  which  the  teeth 
are  firmly  secured  to  the  plate,  on  which  they  thus  have  so 
strong  a  grip  that  the  labial  necks  of  the  crowns  may,  for 
conformity  to  the  adjacent  natural  teeth,  be  quite  uncovered 
by  the  celluloid  (see  Fig.  3),  and  the  mount  be  yet  a  strong 
one,  as  is  evidenced  by  the  section  through  plate  and  crown. 
Fig.  4.  In  this  instance  the  short  celluloid  festoons  (see  Fig 
3)  lie  close  on  the  gum,  which  they  much  more  nearly  re- 
semble than  the  dark  vulcanite. — H.  S.  W.,  in  Cosmos. 

157.  Shaping  Plates  When  Muscles  Interfere. — The 
very  fact  that  the  tissues  and  the  muscles  tend  to  drop  toward 
the  maxilla  after  it  has  become  absorbed  and  occupy  these 
spaces,  make^it  ofttimes  quite  a  difficult  thing  to  retain  that 
place  for  any  length  of  time.  I  think  this  is  largely  due  to 
the  fact  that  dentists  do  not  shape  the  borders  and  the  buccal 
and  labial  surfaces  of  the  artificial  dentures  properly.     We 


USEFUL     HINTS.  101 

find  in  almost  every  instance  in  which  artificial  dentures  are 
constructed,  instead  of  taking  the  natural  shape  of  the  origi- 
nal gums,  that  they  take  or  assume  a  shape  that  is  entirely 
unnatural — a  bulging  out,  if  you  please,  of  the  surface  of 
the  plate,  both  anteriorly  or  along  the  border.  You  take 
any  lower  denture  and  insert  it  in  the  mouth,  if  the  mus- 
cles have  been  in  the  habit  of  dropping  in  that  surface  in- 
stead of  hitting  the  plate,  the  tendency  of  the  muscles  is  to 
drop  underneath  the  plate  and  lift  it  up  ;  whereas,  if  it  had 
a  depression  at  that  point  the  muscles  would  fold  in  on  it 
and  tend  not  only  by  their  influence  in  holding  it  in  position, 
but  would  produce  an  atmospheric  force  that  tends  always 
to  hold  a  plate — because  the  air  does  not  extend  beyond. — 
C.  S.  Case,  in  Dental  Review. 

158.  To  Prevent  Air-holes  in  Flasking. — When  filling 
the  upper  ring  of  a  flask,  in  repairing  vulcanite  work,  it 
will  generally  be  found  that  a  large  air-hole  is  frequently 
formed  in  the  plaster  just  poured  in.  This  is  caused  by  the 
plaster  in  the  lower  ring  being  dry,  and  the  air  escaping 
from  it  forms  the  air-hole.  To  avoid  this,  after  the  case  is 
invested  in  the  lower  part  of  the  flask,  trimmed  and  varn- 
ished ready  for  the  investment  of  the  upper  ring,  grease  the 
whole  surface  and  place  in  a  bowl  of  water  while  you  mix 
the  plaster  for  the  upper  ring.  By  this  manipulation  you 
will  avoid  what  at  times  is  very  tantalizing  in  repair  cases. 
The  same  procedure  may  be  observed  for  new  as  well  as  re- 
pair cases. — Chupein,  in  Dented  Office  and  Laboratory. 

159.  Skeleton  Plates. — I  send  you  herewith  a  sketch 
of  a  skeleton  plate  that  I  made  a  short  time  ago,  it  being 
the  second  one  that  I  have  made,  and  as  they  proved  so 
satisfactory  to  both  patients  and  myself,  I  concluded  that 
I  would  be  jiistified  in  giving  the  profession  the  benefit  of 
my  method  of  making  such  plates.  The  cuts  are  good  illus- 
trations of  the  last  plate  made. 

The  patient,  a  lady,  extremely  nervous,  and  having  lost 
the  left  cuspid,  second  cuspid  and  first  molar,  applied  to  me 


102 


DEPARTMENT     B. 


Full  view  of  palate  surface. 


to  have  them 'inserted.     Having  had  some  experience  with 
her,  I  feared  she  could  not  tolerate  a  plate  in  the  roof  of  the. 

mouth,  and  I  did 
not  deem  it  advis- 
able to  attach  the 
teeth  by  banding, 
hence  I  concluded 
to  make  the  skele- 
ton plate.  The  pro- 
cess is  very  much 
the  same  as 
making  an  ordi- 
nary gold  plate. 
After  you  have 
your  dies,  cut  a 
narrow  strip  of 
gold  or  platinum 
plate  large  enough 
to  form  a  saddle 
where  teeth  are  to 
be  inserted, extend- 
ing up  on  the  buc- 
cal surface  of  the 
gum  as  high  as  you 
want  it  to  make  a 
finish,  and  inside 
on  the  palatine 
urface,  just  far 
nough  to  solder 
\  our  stays  for  fas- 
tening the  teeth  on 
with  rubber.  Next 
take  two  strips  of 
heavy  spring  gold, 
about  N'o.  22  thick, 
and  3-16  to  ^  inch 
wide,  lay  each  one 
on   your  zinc  die 


Diagonal  view  from  left  upper  hand  molar. 

Note.— The  dark  shade  at  the  base  of  the  first  molar 
on  the  buccal  side  is  intended  to  show  vrhere  pink  rubber 
has  been  used  to  meet  the  natural  gum.  The  light  shade 
represents  the  gold  of  the  skeleton  plate  as  well  as  the 
clasps.  The  second  bicuspid  on  the  left  side  of  the  cut 
represents  a  gold  crown,  and  is,  therefore,  not  used  to 
clasp  to. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  103 

from  one  sitle  to  the  other  from  the  teeth  you  intend  to  clasp ; 
then  sweclge  them  up,  each  one  separately ;  then  place  gold 
saddle  and  both  bars  on  zuic  in  their  proper  places;  swedge 
again,  then  by  holding  one  end  of  one  of  the  bars  in  its  proper 
place  on  the  saddle  with  tweezers,  solder  it  there ;  the  other  bar 
the  same  waj^ ;  then  the  ends  of  the  bars  together,  or  to  a 
saddle  on  opposite  side,  if  there  be  one  ;  swedge  lightly  again. 
Xow  place  it  in  the  mouth,  so  that  the  bars  fit  to  roof  of 
mouth  and  the  saddle  to  the  gums,  if  all  is  right.  !N"ow  take 
an  impression  with  plaster  if  you  can,  or  composition  if  you 
must. 

After  obtaining  cast,  cut  and  fit  your  clasps  and  solder 
in  the  usual  way.  After  the  clasps  are  on,  place  the  skeleton 
in  the  mouth  again,  take  the  "bite,"  articulate,  grind  on 
your  teeth,  Iyj  in  the  mouth  again,  to  see  if  there  is  any 
doubt  about  the  bite  ;  if  all  right,  invest  and  vulcanize,  finish 
up  and  polish,  and  you  will  have  the  satisfaction  of  having 
done  a  neat  piece  of  work  and  given  yowY  patient  the  best 
appliance  that  could  be  made,  not  excepting  a  bridge.  Xow, 
I  have  not  written  this  for  the  benefit  of  those  who  have 
made  these  same  skeleton  plates  for  the  last  ten,  twenty  or 
thirty  years  and  kept  it  to  themselves,  but  for  those  who 
may  wish  to  know  that  such  an  appliance  can  and  has  been 
made,  and  has  proven  a  success. — Dr.  H.  H.  Gantz,in  Dental 
Office  and  Laboratory. 

160.  Proper  Fitting  of  Clasps. — The  metal  should  be 
platinized  gold  only,  without  any  lining  of  pure  or  twenty- 
two-karat  gold  soldered  on  it  next  to  the  crown.  The  metal 
should  be  loosely  fitted  to  the  crown  on  the  plaster  cast,  and 
afterward  fitted  in  the  mouth  directly  on  the  tooth  and 
made  to  touch  in  at  least  four  places.  It  should  not  fit 
accurately  every  inequality  of  the  surface. 

If  a  clasp  fits  minutely  all  the  surface  of  the  crown,  it 
makes  of  the  minute  space  between  the  crown  and  clasp  a 
capillary  surface,  and  keeps  the  mucous  secretions,  as  well  as 
the  fine  food,  forever  in  contact  and  with  no  space  for  circu- 
lation of  the  saliva.     AVhereas,  if  the  band  touches  but  a  few 


104  DEPARTMENT     B. 

places  on  the  tooth  crown,  it  will  rest  just  as  firmly,  if  it  has 
been  well  fitted  in  the  mouth  and  allowed  to  take  its  own 
position  when  tried  on  the  crown. 

Capillary  power  made  by  surfaces  very  closely  proxi- 
mated  is  the  surest  means  of  producing  caries.  "Where  a 
space  is  left ;  the  points  that  do  touch  are  in  absolute  contact, ' 
and,  aside  from  a  slight  wear  on  the  tooth,  the  surface  can- 
not decay  as  when  there  is  an  actual  and  close  fitting.  If 
made  of  pure  soft  gold,  there  would  always  be  danger. 

The  width  of  clasp  should  be  as  great  as  can  be  made, 
and  to  steady  the  plate  without  grasping  it  firmly. 

iN'ext  to  the  clasp  in  importance  is  to  know  where  it 
should  be  soldered  to  the  plate;  and  on  which  side  of  the 
crown  to  allow  it  to  go  on  and  off,  where  the  crown  is  very 
much  out  of  perpendicular.  The  gold  amalgam  does  not 
discolor  to  any  considerable  extent. 

I  prefer  to  allow  the  edge  of  the  filling  to  stand  outside  of 
the  clasp  and  not  rest  underneath  it,  at  the  top  or  next  to  the 
grinding-surface ;  and  I  do  not  hesitate  to  use  the  corundum 
wheel  on  the  enamel  where  slight  projections  interfere 
with  a  clasp  resting  securely.  ]^o  harm  can  result  where  the 
cut  surface  is  polished.  If  caries  should  occur  at  any  point 
thereafter  from  accumulation  of  food,  I  should  fill  with 
amalgam.  But  this  need  not  often  result  when  cleansed 
after  each  meal. 

Each  case  must  be  thoroughly  studied  after  the  plaster 
cast  is  made,  or  the  result  will  not  be  satisfactory.  The 
points  on  the  clasp  and  plate  where  the  plate  is  soldered  to 
connect  them  are  the  vital  jmrts^  and,  unless  judiciously  chosen 
and  the  bar  made  of  platinized  gold  wire  and  the  base  plate 
of  two  pieces  of  gold  soldered  together  to  stiften  it,  and  the 
clasp  of  proper  width  and  thickness,  the  strain  placed  on 
the  mechanism  will  break  it.  The  bar  holding  the  clasp 
and  plate  must  always  be  on  the  side  of  the  tooth  where 
there  will  be  least  resistance.  Take  a  second  inferior  molar 
that  has  tipped  forward  very  much  and  also  inclines  to  the 
tongue.  Here  the  solderino;  should  be  done  as  far  back  on 
the  buccal  side  of  the  clasp  as  can  be  accomplished.     Then 


USEFUL     HINTS.  105 

the  spring  of  the  clasp  is  not  needed  for  the  buccal  side,  but 
for  the  anterior  and  lingual  sides,  where  projecting  from  a 
perpendicular.  If  soldered  from  the  lingual  side,  it  would 
be  impossible  to  get  the  clasp  on  or  oft'. 

In  the  upper  cases  it  is  generally  the  reverse,  though 
there  are  many  exceptions,  and  no  rigid  rules  can  be  laid 
down.  Each  one  must  be  especially  studied,  or  no  good 
results.  Nor  can  you  rely  on  fitting  plate  and  clasp  to  the 
plaster-cast  and  soldering  from  that— -no,  never  do  it !  Take 
the  trouble  to  take  impression  of  both  plate  and  clasp  in  the 
mouth,  and  then  solder  from  that. — W.  G.  A.  Bonwill, 
in  International  Journal. 

161.  Flexible  Rubber  Plates. — Herewith  I  give  you 
the  result  of  a  little  experiment  in  thin,  flexible  rubber 
plates :  Wax  up  the  case  in  the  usual  manner.  After  trying 
in  the  mouth  to  see  that  it  is  correct,  fasten  the  outer  rim 
solidly  to  the  cast  with  wax,  then  cut  out  the  wax  from 
palatal  portion  and  burnish  tea  lead  in  its  place,  letting  it 
come  up  well  around  the  teeth.  Flask  as  usual,  and  after 
washing  out  the  wax  and  removing  the  lead,  apply  dry  heat 
to  the  case  to  dry  the  surfaces,  then  paint  with  liquid  silex ; 
the  heat  of  the  case  will  soon  dry  the  silex.  Make  a  good 
large  gate  at  heel  for  surplus  rubber,  and  pack  the  same  as 
for  thick  plate,  using  black  rubber  for  palatal  portion.  Care 
must  be  exercised  in  cutting  away  surplus,  not  to  split  the 
thin  rubber.  The  polishing  can  be  done  with  brush  and 
cotton  wheels.  N'o  scraping  or  sandpapering  necessary.  This 
makes  a  much  pleasanter  plate  to  wear  in  the  mouth,  and  gives 
better  satisfaction  to  the  wearer. — W.  G.  Stowell,  in  Review- 

162.  Replacing  Pinless  Gum  Sections. — We  frequently 
have  a  plate  brought  in,  with  a  front  block  broken  off;  the 
section  being  all  perfect,  but  minus  part  of  the  pins,  or,  per- 
haps, all  of  them.  I  have  found  the  following  method  very 
useful  and  a  success  in  such  cases :  Put  a  rubber  corundum 
disk,  style  D,  in  the  engine,  and  cut  channels  in  the  old 
block, as  shown  in  the  cuts;  keep  the  disk  well  wet;  and  be 


106  DEPARTxMENT    B. 

governed  in  depth  of  the  channels  somewhat  by  the  shape 
and  amount  of  material  in  the  tooth,  or  section.  ]^o\v  cut 
away  on  the  plate  for  the  new 
rubber,  deep  enough  so  that  it  *l  ^/^^~\r-u. 
will  easily  reach,  and  flow  in 
the  channels  ;  replace  block  on 
the  plate,  wax  up,  flask,  pack  and  vulcanize  as  usual. — Wil- 
liam H.  Steele,  D.D.S.,  in  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

163.  Soldering  Small  Pieces. — As  the  saving  of  time 
is  an  object  to  most  dentists,  I  will  describe  a  process  of 
soldering  small  pieces  of  gold  work,  which,  though  not  new 
to  all,  may  be  of  service  to  many.  If  you  have  a  plate  with 
two  or  three  teeth  which  you  wish  to  attach  by  means  of 
solder,  back  the  teeth  and  fasten  in  position  by  means  of 
hard  wax;  then  take  molding-sand  and  wet  it  thoroughly, 
till  it  is  of  the  consistency  of  soft  putty;  place  this  on  your 
soldering  block,  press  the  plate  in  it,  and  bring  the  sand 
well  up  around  the  teeth.  Now  take  your  blow-pipe  and 
throw  a  broad,  gentle  flame  around  the  outer  edges  of  the 
sand,  taking  care  not  to  let  the  flame  touch  the  plate  or  teeth 
till  the  water  is  driven  off"  and  the  wax  begins  to  blaze ; 
then  direct  the  flame  on  the  wax  and  burn  it  ofl*.  Scrape 
well  the  parts  on  which  you  wish  the  solder  to  flow;  then 
place  on  the  solder  and  borax,  and  proceed  as  usual.  Partly 
till  a  sauce-pan  with  water,  and  place  it  over  a  gas  or  oil- 
stove,  and  when  it  boils  hold  the  case,  wrapped  (investment 
and  all)  in  a  cloth,  over  the  steam  for  half  a  minute  close  to 
the  water ;  then  drop  it  in,  remove  and  take  out  the  piec'e. 
Clasps  and  small  regulating  pieces  are  held  together  and  sol- 
dered by  this  process  very  quickly. 

I  have  yet  to  crack  my  flrst  tooth  by  soldering  in  this 
manner,  which,  I  think,  is  due  to  the  fact  that  the  expansion 
by  steam  heat  is  more  uniform  than  by  dry. 

Sand  which  has  been  used  for  molding  purposes  is 
dangerous  to  use,  as  particles  of  zinc  or  lead  may  be  present^ 
and  thus  become  alloyed  with  the  gold. — J.  Bond  Littig,  in 
International  Journal. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  107 

164.  Uses  for  Mellotte's  Moldine. — I  have  found  mold- 
ine  very  useful  in  repairing  gold  and  silver-plate  and  bridge- 
work.  The  tooth  or  teeth  and  plate  can  he  invested  by 
moldino;  the  moldine  over  and  around  the  parts  to  be  sol-- 
dered,  and  the  work  at  once  heated  up,  thus  saving  much 
time  and  trouble  usually  resulting  from  the  use  of  wet  mix- 
tures as  investients.  Impromptu  crucibles  for  small  melts  of 
any  kind  can  also  be  made  of  moldine.  A  thick  gold  collar 
or  ring,  or  cross-bar,  or  any  small  article,  can  be  cast  in  a 
moldine  mold,  which  is  easily  and  quickly  formed  from  a 
suitable  model,  and  is  ready  for  use  as  soon  as  made. — F.  B., 
in  Cosmos. 

165.  Rubber  Head  for  Riveting  Hammer,  —  Slip  a 
rubber  tip,  such  as  is  used  on  the  little  glass  drop  tubes,  over 
point  or  face  of  your  small  riveting  hammer,  tie  it  fast  with 
a  piece  of  wire  twisted  round ;  you  can  hammer  away  at  a 
plaster  model  without  defacing  it,  when  fitting  in  an  air- 
chamber  pattern  or  any  piece  of  gold,  or  other  metal,  to  the 
model. — D.  V.  Beacock,  in  Dam.  Jour. 

166.  Watt's  Metal  Cusps  for  Short  Bites. — I  saw  re- 
cently in  The  Items  an  article  by  Dr.  Ticknor  on  this  point, 
and  will  give  my  method  of  making  them:  Cut  out  a  piece 
of  thick  base-plate  wax,  as  large  as  will  go  in  a  Watt's  flask  ; 
warnina  piece  of  thick  glass  and  lay  the  warm  wax  plate  on 
it ;  press  in  it  plain  single  bicuspids  and  molars  of  the  sizes 
and  shapes  desired,  as  close  together  as  practicable  all  over 
the  wax.  Now,  with  a  warmed  spatula  make  a  little  channel 
from  crown  to  crown,  for  gates ;  place  bottom  half  of  the 
flask  on  the  glass ;  slightly  oil  the  wax,  and  fill  the  flask  with 
Teague's  Impression  Compound.  When  set,  remove  the  wax; 
varnish  and  oil  the  surface  ;  put  on  the  other  half  of  the  flask 
and  fill  with  the  compound.  Separate  when  set,  and  with 
a  sharp,  straight-edged  plaster  knife  remove  all  the  project- 
ing cusps  and  channels  from  the  first  half  of  the  flask  ;  close 
and  clamp ;  dry  out  all  moisture,  and  pour  with  Watt's 
metal.     Old  tooth-pins  can  be  put  in  by  setting  them  in  the 


108  DEPARTMENT     B. 

plaster,  opposite  the  crowns  desired,  before  pouring  the 
metal ;  or  the  crowns  can  be  roughened  with  a  graver  for 
attaching  to  rubber  plate.  As  many  as  desired  can  be  made 
from  one  mold. — William  H.  Steele,  D.D.S.,  in  Ohio  Dental 
Journal. 

167.  To  Duplicate  Models  and  Impressions. — Take 
printers'  roller  composition,  melt  in  a  water-bath  till  dis- 
solved. Grease  the  model  slightly  with  lard,  and  place  it 
the  same  as  if  to  mold  a  met9,l  die,  cover  with  a  metal  ring, 
(a  tin  can  opened  at  both  ends  will  do)  and  pour  the  melted 
composition  over  the  model.  Let  this  stand  over  night.  By 
morning:  the  material  is  hardened  and  the  model  can  be  with- 
drawn.  The  composition  being  elastic  it  retains  its  shape, 
and  a  hundred  models  ma}^  be  poured  if  necessary.  Impres- 
sions may  be  duplicated  in  the  same  manner,  by  using  im- 
pression instead  of  model. — J.  G.  Templeton,  D.D.S.,  in  Ohio 
Dental  Journal. 

168.  Thin  Rubber  Plates. — To  secure  the  maximum 
strength  without  increasing  the  thickness  of  vulcanite  plates, 
it  is  necessary  to  make  the  mold  so  smooth  that  the  rubber, 
when  removed  from  the  plaster,  needs  only  the  brush  wheel 
to  finish  it.  To  accomplish  this,  first  saturate  the  model 
with  water,  then  dip  it  in  a  vessel  of  clean  melted  base-plate 
wax,  and  lift  it  out  in  such  a  way  as  to  allow  the  wax  to 
flow  oft'  easily.  I  find  that  it  is  best  to  dip  the  back  of  the 
model  downward.  The  surface  of  the  wax  in  the  vessel 
should  be  free  from  bubbles.  If  the  first  dip  should  not  se- 
cure a  smooth  surface,  the  wax  may  be  peeled  oft',  and  the 
process  repeated  till  it  is  satisfactory.  After  which  repeat 
the  dipping  process  till  the  deposit  has  the  desired  thickness. 
It  is  well,  however,  to  leave  it  thinner  than  the  desired  plate 
till  after  the  set  is  articulated,  then  after  waxing  up  care- 
fully, so  that  one  more  dip  will  give  the  desired  finish  to  the 
base-plate,  dip  it  in  water  so  that  the  teeth  shall  be  wet  be- 
fore immersing  it  in  the  melted  Avax.  The  wax  deposited  on 
the  teeth  will  peel  off"  easily.     Cool  the  wax,  and,  with  a 


USEFUL     HINTS.  109 

sharp  instrument,  trim  around  the  teeth  and  the  edges  of  the 
hase-plate,  and  it  is  ready  for  the  flask.  With  a  little  care 
the  surface  of  the  hase-plate  may  he  made  as  smooth  as  glass, 
and  the  lahor  of  finishing  the  rubber  will  be  much  reduced. 
A  little  practice  in  dipping  a  model  will  give  one  all  the 
skill  that  is  necessary  to  perform  the  work  quickly  and 
easily. — A.  N".  Dick,  in  Items  op  Interest. 

169.  To  Remove  Teeth  From  Plate. — To  remove  teeth 
from  a  rubber  plate,  lay  it  teeth  down  on  a  piece  of  asbestos 
board,  then  hold  the  board  over  a  flame  till  the  rubber 
softens. — Odontological  Journal. 

170.  Manilla  Paper  for  Swaging. — Thin  manilla  tissue 
wrapping  paper,  about  two  thicknesses,  will  be  found  to  an- 
swer admirably  in  causing  a  metal  plate  to  leave  the  lead 
counter  die  after  swaging,  and  if  used  in  from  four  to  six 
folds  an  extra  counter  die  will  be  unnecessary,  its  use  pro- 
ducing a  sharp  definition  not  excelled  by  either  tin  or  Bab- 
bitt metal. — Ex. 

171.  Three  Rules  for  Articulation. — Three  rules  cover 
essentially  the  ground.  Never  allow  pressure  on  the  six  an- 
terior teeth  ;  never,  in  full  upper  plates,  allow  the  pressure 
to  be  greater  on  one  side  than  the  other ;  never  allow  a  second 
or  third  lower  molar  which  has  projected  forward  so  that  its 
face  shows  to  meet  an  artiflcial  tooth  at  that  angle,  as  it  will 
surely  crowd  forward  the  upper  plate,  the  same  as  the  meet- 
ing of  the  anterior  teeth. 

As  a  rule,  a  full  lower  plate  is  more  comfortable  and 
useful  than  a  partial,  because  the  pressure  is  distributed 
equally  over  the  whole  jaw. — Dr.  L.  P.  Haskell,  in  Office  and 
Laboratory. 

172.  Strengthening  Rubber  Plates. — After  the  flask 
is  separated,  cut  a  piece  of  rolled  gold  wire,  No.  60,  to  reach 
the  bicuspids  on  either  side,  indent  slightly  with  plate 
shears,  and  bend  so  it  will  lay  on  top  of  pins  of  the  anterior 


110  DEPARTMENT     B. 

teeth,  then  soft-solder  the  wire  to  the  camins  if  single  teeth 
are  used,  or  to  the  bicuspid  blocks  if  gum  teeth ;  also,  to  the 
central  incisor  pins  if  thought  necessary.  The  wire  can  be 
used  in  any  place  where  there  is  a  weak  point ;  for  instance, 
when  there  is  but  one  tooth,  a  piece  of  the  wire  should  be 
bent  to  fit  closely  to  the  model,  and  soldered  to  the  pins  of 
the  teeth.  I  anneal  the  wire  and  brighten  it  with  powdered 
pumice-stone  before  using.  Different  sizes  of  wire,  60  to  70, 
to  be  had  of  jewelers. — J,  M.  Ovenshire,  in  Dental  Mirror. 

173.  Oil  for  Flasking. — It  is  a  useless  waste  of  time 
:and  material  to  varnish  and  oil  a  plaster  investment,  besides, 
I  am  sure  in  almost  every  case  where  rubber  crawls  away 
from  the  teeth  or  pins,  during  vulcanizing,  it  is  always  trace- 
:able  to  the  presence  of  oil.  It  does  not  matter  if  but  little 
is  used  in  the  flasking ;  this  little  will  reach  out  and  cover  a 
^ood  deal  of  surface,  when  the  flask  is  heated  for  closing. 
"When  the  lower  half  of  the  flask  is  filled,  set,  and  made 
smooth,  wet  a  small  brush  in  soft  water,  rub  it  on  a  cake  of 
of  castile  soap  till  lathered  ;  coat  the  plaster  investment  with 
the  soap  ;  put  on  the  top  half  of  the  flask,  pour  as  usual. — 
'Wm.  H.  Steele,  D.D.S. 

174.  A  New  Molding  Material. — A  nice  molding 
material  for  making  dies,  casting  plates,  and  various  cast- 
ings, can  be  made  :  Mix  pumice-stone  with  a  suitable  quan- 
tity of  glycerin,  this  material  is  always  ready  for  use  and 
will  stand  the  heat  of  melted  steel. — H.  P.  Osborne,  D.D.S. 

175.  Useful  Hints  on  Rubber  Plates. — Sometimes,  par- 
ticularly with  a  partial  rubber  denture,  the  plate  will  be  as 
snug  as  desirable  part  of  the  time,  but  sometimes  very 
loose.  To  avoid  this,  before  casting  your  model  make  the 
grooves  in  the  impression,  caused  by  the  ruge  of  the  mouth, 
much  larger,  as  in  some  mouths  these  vary  in  size  at  inter- 
vals.— I.  Douglas,  in  Items  of  Interest. 

176.  Soldering  Tubes  and  Nuts. — In  soldering  tubes 
or  nuts  to  receive  screws  to  their  attachment,  chuck  the  end 


USEFUL      HINTS.  Ill 

of  your  Icacl-pencil  in  the  holes  and  solder  ^vill  be  kept  out. 
—  Western  Journal. 

177.  Imperfections  in  Metal  Dies. — To  prevent  imper- 
fections or  bubbles  in  the  palatal  portion  of  metallic  dies,  it 
is  not  necessary  to  dry  the  mold  after  it  is  formed,  or  to  use 
more  than  ordinary  precaution  as  to  the  heat  of  the  metal. 
I  find  the  best  result  is  obtained  when  the  plaster  model  is 
quite  thick  and  the  mold  consequently  deep.  This  is  then 
tipped  forward,  raising  the  back  part  of  condyles  to  the  high- 
est point  possible  ;  pouring  the  metal  in  at  the  front  slowly, 
and  lowering  the  mold  at  the  same  time  till  the  palatal 
portion  is  covered,  and  the  mold  filled  to  the  top.  I  have 
advised  the  above  in  many  cases,  and  have  not  yet  seen  a 
failure. — F.  E.  Sprague,  in  Cosmos. 

178.  A  Lathe  "Drip." — Having  tried  several  appli- 
ances for  keeping  corundum  wheels  Avet,  all  of  which  were 
more  or  less  annoying,  I  hit  on  the  following  plan,  which 
may  be  of  service  to  others:  Take  a  Squibb  ether  can  (there 
are  usuallj^  plenty  of  them  lying  about  the  office),  and  solder 
to  it,  near  the  bottom,  a  tin  tube,  about  one-quarter  of  an 
inch  in  diameter;  then  perforate  the  can  through  the  tube 
with  an  old  excavator,  pointed  so  as  to  make  a  hole  about 
the  size  of  a  pin.  Fill  the  tube  lightly  with  absorbent  cot- 
ton or  sponge,  allowing  it  to  protrude  so  as  to  rub  against 
the  stone ;  then  fill  the  can  with  water  and  cork  it  with  a 
good,  soft  cork,  and  it  is  complete.  AVhen  it  is  tightly 
corked  there  will  be  no  flow ;  loosen  the  cork,  and  the  water 
will  flow,  much  or  little,  as  you  desire.  Mine  works  very 
nicely,  and  is  always  ready  for  use.  Of  course,  the  appliance 
should  have  legs  to  raise  it  to  the  proper  height. — A.  Mors- 
man,  in  Cosmos. 

179.  Bowl  for  Mixing  Plaster. — A  smooth  glazed  bowl 
is  best  for  mixing  plaster.  If  some  of  the  plaster  dries  in 
the  bowl,  it  will  come  oft'  easilv  when  water  is  poured  in. — 
Items  of  Interest. 


112  DEPARTMENT     B. 

180.  Lower  Gold  Plates. — In  making  gold  plates  for 
the  lower  jaw  where  one  or  more  teeth  remain,  the  following 
plan  may  not  be  generally  known  : 

We  will  suppose  the  case  to  be  minns  the  bicuspids  and 
molars,  the  six  front  teeth  remaining.  Instead  of  cutting  a 
pattern  in  one  piece,  let  there  be  two ;  one  to  extend  on  one 
side  around  in  front  to  where  the  lirst  bicuspid  would  be  on 
the  opposite  side,  and  vice  versa  for  the  other  pattern.  Use 
1^0.  30  plate,  and  20-karat  gold  looks  the  best,  used  with 
the  same  fineness  in  solder.  This  will  give  a  plate  that  can 
be  easily  swaged.  Swage  separately  with  each  half  on  a 
good,  sharp  zinc  die.  Select  one-half  to  go  next  the  teeth, 
and  the  other  to  lap  over  it.  Drive  the  under  one  sharply 
around  and  between  the  teetli  with  a  softened  nail,  having 
its  point  prepared  for  the  purpose.  Anneal  and  place  both 
on  the  zinc,  and  swage  again.  Now  notice  how  nicely  they 
tit  one  to  the  other.  Catch  them  with  a  bit  of  solder  and 
swage  again.  Then  apply  clean,  creamy  borax  thoroughly 
between  the  plates  (and  perhaps  the  best  way  is  with  a 
camel's-hair  pencil),  then  put  on  solder  and  run  them 
together.  This  will  give  a  sharp,  strong  plate,  and  more 
strength  may  be  added  by  placing  a  gold  wire  (No.  18)  at 
the  lower  inner  edge.     It  also  relieves  the  sharpness. 

Whether  plate  or  rubber  teeth  be  used,  this,  if  finished 
handsomely,  will  give  a  most  desirable  plate,  providing  the 
minor  details  have  received  their  due  attention. — Theodore 
Ledyard,  in  Archives. 

181.  Stamping  Plates  by  Hydraulic  Pressure. — A  de- 
scription of  a  case  in  hand  will  be  the  best  means  of  giving 
my  method.  In  the  present  instance  an  impression  was 
taken  with  Stent's  material,  and' all  the  rest  of  the  work  was 
done  by  my  friend  and  assistant,  Mr.  Fred.  Collett.  The 
impression  was  chilled  with  cold  water,  and  sculptor's  clay 
was  built  up  around  the  margins  to  the  height  of  one-half 
inch.  A  paper  could  have  been  wrapped  around  equally 
well.  The  impression  then  was  coated  with  a  solution  of 
soap  and  water.     In  this  impression,  thus  prepared,  Spence 


USEFUL     HINTS.  113 

metal,*  just  before  the  point  of  solidification,  was  poured. 
This  Spence  metal  was  chilled  immediately  on  touching  the 
Stent's  composition,  so  that  all  contraction  took  place  from 
the  top  of  the  center  downward. 

The  small  die  thus  made  was  then  provided  with  three 
legs  made  of  pins  heated  and  pressed  in  the  metal.  These 
pins  held  it  at  just  the  required  height,  so  that  the  die,  being 
placed  in  the  middle  of  the  iron  ring  in  which  the  pressure 
was  to  be  given,  stood  at  the  height  required  for  an  additional 
quantity  of  Spence  metal  to  be  poured  in  the  concavity  and 
around  this  little  die  up  to  the  required  level.  This  die, 
being  quite  cold,  is  covered  with  whiting,  and  a  counter-die 
of  "Wood's  fusible  alloy  f  is  poured  over  it.  This  fusible  alloy 
melts  at  a  still  lower  temperature  than  Spence  metal,  and  it 
is  poured  over  the  male  swage  by  using  the  heavy  iron  rino- 
in  which  the  counter-die  must  remain  during  the  swao-ing 
process.  This  first  set  of  swages  being  completed,  duplicates 
are  made,  if  required,  by  taking  the  impression  of  the  male 
die  and  repeating  the  process  of  casting  the  swages  as  often 
as  may  be  required. 

The  Spence  metal  is  exceedingly  brittle,  so  nothing  but 
steady  pressure  must  be  permitted.  If  it  should  be  found 
necessary  to  strike  blows  on  the  swage,  others  must  be  made 
of  some  other  material.  In  the  present  instance  a  Bab- 
bitt's metal  swage  with  a  tin  counter-die  w^as  made  on 
which  to  break  up  the  plate.  The  flat  plate  may  be  placed 
between  the  dies  with  a  bit  of  glove-kid  or  rubber-dam 
between  the  plate  and  the  counter-die,  and  the  flask  contain- 
ing it  placed  directly  in  the  press.  The  screw  at  the  top  of 
the  press  being  turned  down  to  give  such  pressure  as  is  pos- 
sible from  above,  the  second  screw  connected  with  the  plunger 
at  the  side  is  then  gradually  turned  inward  by  means  of  the 
large  driving-wheel.     The  manometer  is  watched,  as  indi- 

*This  substance  is  sulphur  and  iron.  It  melts  at  about  the  boiling-  point  of  water, 
and  in  process  of  cooling  a  stage  is  reached,  just  before  solidification  takes  place,  at 
which  the  mass  becomes  exceedingly  fluid.  At  this  stage  it  can  be  poured  in  an  impres- 
sion of  plaster,  or  even  Stent's  composition. 

t  Composed  of  fifteen  parts  of  bismuth,  eight  of  lead,  four  of  tin,  and  three  of  cad- 
mium. This  forms  a  silvery-white,  granular  alloy,  which  becomes  soft  at  135°  F.  =  570 
C,  and  fuses  at  about  145°  F.  =  63°  C. 


114 


DEPARTMENT     B. 


eating  the  amount  of  pressure  that  is  being  given;  four 
hundred  pounds  to  the  square  centimetre  is  generally  enough, 
though  I  have  as  an  experiment  run  it  up  to  twelve  hundred. 

During  the  swaging  process  the  plate  should  he  fre- 
quently annealed.  When  filially  down,  close  to  the  duplicate 
swao-es,  it  receives  its  last  trimming,  its  last  annealing,  and 
is  then  put  on  the  original  die  that  was  made  directly  from  the 
impression.  When  taken  from  the  press  after  this  final  pres- 
sure, the  fit  is  more  perfect  than  any  struck  swages  can  make  it. 

For  suction  plates  it  is  generally  necessary  to  scrape  the 
center  of  the  plaster  impression  and  not  to  put  in  an  air- 
chamber,  the  fit  of  the  hydraulic  press  plates  seeming  to  be 
as  o-ood  as  the  impressions  from  which  they  are  made. — Dr. 
E.  A.  Bogue,  in  International  Journal. 

182.  Self-closing  Flask  Clamps. — JSTearly  every  oflice 
has  one  or  more  of  these  useless  appliances  standing  around, 
representing  from  two  to  five  dollars'  worth  of  misplaced  con- 
fidence. The  self-closing  flask  press,  for  closing  the  flask 
either  by  steam  pressure  or  by  spring  pressure,  is  a  failure. 
The  most  reliable  machine  for  the  purpose  is  the  direct  pres- 
sure screw  clamp,  to  be  used  with  the  flask  in  a  water  bath. — 
Wm.  H.  Steele. 

183.  To  Make  a  Plate  Hold. — The  cut  will  show  how 
I  managed  a  ease  in  a  mouth  which  presented  difiiculties  in 
the  way  of  holding  a 
plate.  The  case  was  that 
of  a  patient  fifty-five 
years  old,  whose  teeth 
had  been  out  for  years 
That  part  of  the  mouth 
shown  at  A  was  a  perfect 
callus.  Over  this  part 
on  the  cast  I  laid  four 
sheets  of  tin,  so  that 
when  removed  it  would  prevent  a  bearing  on  the  callus,  with 
chambers  on  the  sides  and  back  part  of  the  plate,  as  shown 


USEFUL     HINTS.  115 

in  cut.  I  made  a  failure  three  times,  but  finally  succeeded 
in  this  way  in  getting  a  good,  snug-holding  plate.  This  was 
eight  years  ago. — S.  M.  Oviatt,  D.D.S.,  in  Cosmos. 


184.  Colored  Soap  Suds  for  Impressions.  —  Colored 
soap  suds  can  be  easily  made  by  adding  a  little  red  analine 
dye  to  the  water  used  in  making  the  lather.  A  very  convenient 
arrangement  is  to  take  a  beer  mug  and  place  a  piece  of  cas- 
tile  soap  in  it  and  use  an  ordinary  lather  brush ;  brush  the 
impression  with  the  soap  suds,  let  stand  a  few  minutes, 
then  wash  oiF.  This  will  give  a  smooth  pink  surface.  Also 
treat  the  model  with  the  suds,  which  will  give  it  a  smooth 
colored  exterior. — H. 


185.  Investment  for  Soldering. — In  using  sand  and 
plaster  to  invest  soldering  cases,  I  find  three  of  sand  and 
one  of  plaster  does  better  than  if  less  sand  be  used  ;  it  is  not 
so  liable  to  crack  and  warp,  especially  if  the  plaster  be  very 
coarse  and  the  sand  sharp.  It  is  only  necessary  to  have 
sufficient  plaster  to  hold  the  particles  of  sand  together. 
More  than  this  is  too  much  and  leads  to  cracking. — Theo. 
Ledyard. 

186.  To  Repair  Soldering  Investment. — Occasionally, 
in  soldering,  a  portion  of  our  investment  breaks  off,  exposing 
a  part  of  a  tooth.  "We  can  ill  afibrd  the  time  to  patch  the 
break  and  wait  for  the  plaster  to  harden  again.  The  exposed 
portion  of  the  porcelain  may  be  perfectly  protected  by  cover- 
ing it  with  a  thick  paste  of  chalk  and  water.  This  mixture 
may  also  be  used  to  fasten  small  pieces  of  gold  to  the  solder- 
block  while  soldering.  — B.  A.  R.  Ottolengui,  in  Interna- 
tional. 

187.  Englarging  the  Holes  in  Artificial  Teeth. — I  fre- 
quently find  it  convenient  to  alter  the  shape  of  the  holes  in 
pivot  and  porcelain  teeth.     At  first  I  used  a  piece  of  copper 


Il6  DEPARTMENT     B, 

wire  with  emery-powder,  getting  the  idea  from  the  SI 
glass-cutters.  Now,  however,  I  find  that  the  time  re- 
quired can  be  reduced  to  one-third  by  using  a  piece  of 
hardened  steel  of  an  oval,  square,  or  half-round  shape 
(see  illustration),  made  to  revolve  rapidly  in  the  oflB.ce 
lathe,  and  kept  covered  with  coarse  corundum  moistened 
with  glycerin.  To  show  how  rapidly  this  will  cut,  it  is 
only  necessary  to  say  that  a  common  Bonwill  crown  can 
have  the  hole  enlarged  enough  to  admit  of  two  pins  as 
for  a  bicuspid  in  ten  minutes. — "W.  II.  Rollins,  in  Cosmos. 

188.  To  Prevent  Modeling  Compound  from  Sticking 
to  the  Teeth. — In  taking  impressions,  take  a  large  pellet  of 
cotton,  dip  it  in  glycerin  and  thoroughly  oil  the  teeth ;  then 
take  impression  before  the  patient  closes  the  mouth. — Abiel 
Bowen,  Medina,  N.  Y. 

189.  To  Renew  Plaster. — Don't  throw  away  your  old 
plaster  that  has  become  air-slacked  and  slow  setting.  Pat  it 
in  a  pan,  and  put  in  the  oven  or  over  a  slow  fire,  stirring  it 
thoroughly  till  heated  all  through ;  put  in  a  can,  cover  air- 
tight. Plaster  treated  in  this  way  will  often  be  stronger 
and  quicker  setting  than  when  first  received  from  the  de- 
pot.—Wm.  H.  Steele. 

190.  Clean  Joints. — I  have  seen  many  inquiries  and 
suggestions  in  our  journals  in  regard  to  making  sightless 
joints  in  putting  up  sets  of  section  teeth  on  rubber,  or  when 
rubber  is  used  as  an  attachment,  but  in  all  I  have  never  seen 
any  suggestion  to  the  following  method,  which  I  have  adopted 
with  success,  and  give  for  the  benefit  of  the  readers  of  the 
Archives :  When  the  case  is  flasked  and  ready  for  packing,  I 
first  cover  each  joint  with  a  strip  of  No.  30  gold  foil,  one- 
fourth  of  an  inch  in  width,  burnishing  it  down  evenly,  and 
holding  it  in  position  with  a  small  piece  of  pink  rubber.  I 
then  pack  as  usual,  and  find,  after  vulcanizing,  the  joints 
perfectly  clean,  as  no  rubber  can  be  forced  through  the  gold 
strips  in  them. — Dr.  B.  Q,  Stevens,  in  Archives. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  117 

191.  Resetting  Pinless  Teeth  on  Gold  Plate. — Occa- 
sionally a  gold  plate  is  brought  to  us  with  a  tooth  broken 
off,  the  pins,  of  course,  remaining  in  the  backing.  It  may 
be  that  a  good  match  cannot  be  found,  or  you  may  be  in  a 
hurry,  so  that  you  wish  the  same  tooth  could  be  used.  Pro- 
ceed as  follows :  Boil  the  tooth  in  acid,  to  get  the  stump  of 
the  pins  remaining  as  clean  as  possible ;  invest  it  as  for  a 
backing ;  lay  a  bit  of  pure  gold  over  each  broken  pin,  and 
point  a  fine  iiame  with  the  blow-pipe  till  a  tiny  gold  ball  is 
made  on  each  broken  pin.  These  may  be  filed  up,  and  will 
be  sufficiently  long  to  allow  backing  the  teeth,  using  plati- 
num foil  and  gold  of  a  lower  karat. — Dr.  B.  A.  R.  Ottolengui, 
in  International  Journal. 

192.  Hint  on  Sandpapering  Plates. — Cut  a  piece  of 
felt  the  size  of  your  paper  disks,  and  use  them  together  to 
sandpaper  a  plate.  You  will  be  surprised  at  the  result. — 
H.  H.  Buck. 

193.  Vulcanite  and  Gelluloid  Combined. — When  it  is 
desirable  to  employ  plain  teeth  placed  on  the  natural  gum 
in  front  partial  pieces,  and  at  the  same  time  to  take  advan- 
tage of  the  clasping  qualities  of  vulcanite,  the  objection  to 
such  a  combination  which  lies  in  the  unnatural  appearance 
of  the  interdental  spaces  may  be  overcome  by  simply  using 
a  little  celluloid  in  these  spaces ;  select  some  of  the  right 
pinkness  ;  run  wax  in  the  spaces,  continuing  it  in  conformity 
with  the  natural  interdental  gum  of  the  adjoining  teeth, 
allowing  no  wax  on  the  palatal  surface  of  the  plate ;  invest 
in  flask,  separate,  remove  wax,  and  also  cut  away  the  vul- 
canite from  between  the  teeth,  so  as  to  form  a  "  dove-tail  " 
to  retain  the  celluloid  ;  heat,  etc.,  as  usual.  If  it  is  desired 
that  the  celluloid  gum  sink  slightly  in  the  natural  mem- 
brane, this  may  be  best  produced  by  paring  the  original 
model  so  that  the  wax,  rubber,  and  celluloid  will  each,  in 
turn,  assume  the  desired  shape. — S.  J.  S.,  in  Cosmos. 

194.  A  Method  of  Flasking. — How  to  flask  a  full  upper 
and  lower  set,  and  two  or  three  partial  sets  in  one  flask. 


118  DEPARTMENT     B. 

Directions. — After  having  prepared  the  upper  and  lower  sets 
for  the  flask  in  the  ordinary  way,  cut  the  lingual  portion  of 
the  lower  set  out  somewhat  like  the  letter  U,  also  the  pala- 
tal portion  of  the  upper  set  a  very  little ;  then  place  one 
condyle  of  the  upper  set  as  near  as  possible  in  the  U-shaped 
gap  of  the  lower  set.  JSTow  put  them  into  the  flask  in  this 
position,  so  that  the  centrals  of  the  upper-set  point  to  or  near 
the  top  corner  of  the  flask,  and  the  centrals  of  the  lower-set 
point  to  the  right  lower  corner  of  the  flask ;  then  flask,  let- 
ting the  plaster  come  up  to  the  wax  in  the  lower  part  of  the 
flask  in  the  same  manner  as  is  usual  with  an  ordinary  full  set. 
The  rest  of  the  procedure  is  the  same  as  in  any  other  method. 

An  upper  and  lower  partial  set  may  be  flasked  by  this 
method,  by  allowing  the  plaster  to  come  over  the  teeth,  and 
then  proceeding  as  usual. 

Slight  fractures  of  partial  sets,  when  the  rubber  can  be 
packed  on  with  a  hot  knife,  can  be  placed  in  the  lid  of  the 
same  flask,  while  the  plaster  is  soft.  In  this  wa}''  four  or 
five  cases  may  be  vulcanized  in  one  flask.  A  little  practice 
is  required. — L.  Arndt,  D.D.S.,  in  The  Dental  Practitioner. 

195.  To  Mend  a  Rubber  Plate.— Put  a  thin  film  of 
wax  over  the  broken  surface  of  one  piece,  hold  the  parts  . 
above  the  flame  of  a  small  spirit  lamp,  and,  when  the  wax  is 
melted,  press  the  parts  together,  and  cool  a  moment.  This 
forms  a  cement  that  holds  the  broken  plate  in  perfect  posi- 
tion. The  lingual  surface  may  be  strengthened  with  melted 
wax,  and  a  cast  obtained  in  the  usual  way. — W.  L.  Reed. 

196.  Shellac  for  Felt  Wheels  and  Cones. — How  many 
find  their  felt  cones  and  wheels  get  out  of  shape,  and  wear 
out  and  break  in  a  short  time  ?  If  they  are  soaked  in 
shellac  varnish  that  is  about  as  thin  as  water,  and  then 
allowed  to  dry  thoroughly  before  being  used,  they  will  keep 
their  shape,  and  last  a  long  time.  This  is  specially  advis- 
able with  the  cones  as  they  are  very  apt  to  break  in  two 
before  they  are  worn  out.  It  is  not  so  necessary  for  wheels. 
— Dr.  J.  H.  Beebee,  in  Items. 


USEFUL      HINTS.  119 

197.  Adding  New  Teeth  to  Old  Plates.— Dry  the 
plate  and  stick  on  a  piece  of  soft  wax  opposite  where  each 
tooth  is  to  be  added.  Replace  the  plate  in  the  mouth.  If 
the  case  be  one  Avhere  the  teeth  to  be  added  are  to  replace 
some  which  have  been  extracted,  press  the  soft  wax  up  over 
the  gum.  This  gives  you  an  impression  of  the  part  with 
the  plate  in  place.  "While  the  wax  is  still  soft  have  the 
patient  close  the  mouth.  This  gives  you  an  articulation 
opposite  where  the  teeth  are  to  be  added.  While  the  mouth 
is  shut,  see  that  the  wax  is  not  forced  away  from  the  gum 
by  the  occlusion.  Then  with  a  pledget  of  cotton,  dipped  in 
cold  water,  the  wax  can  be  hardened  in  a  moment.  You 
may  now  dismiss  the  patient.  Remove  the  plate  and  run 
cast.  As  soon  as  hard,  turn  over,  and  run  a  little  plaster  in 
the  articulation,  letting  it  extend  to  a  couple  of  the  teeth  on 
the  plate.  "When  this  is  hard,  lift  off,  and  remove  the  wax. 
The  teeth  may  now  be  ground  and  articulated.  This  method 
saves  much  time  for  patient  and  operator  and  ensures  ac- 
curacy, and  may  all  be  done  by  the  laboratory  assistant,  ex- 
cept the  taking  of  the  impression  and  articulation. — R.  E. 
Sparks,  in  Dominion  Journal. 

198.  Rubber-dam  in  Closing  Flasks. — In  closing  flasks, 
either  by  simple  pressure  or  by  boiling,  use  rubber-dam  wet 
with  soap  water  instead  of  muslin,  and  you  will  be  delighted 
with  the  result. — Geo.  M.  Merritt,  in  Items. 

199-  Cores  for  Casting  Undercut  Models. — To  prepare 
cores  for  undercuts  of  models,  when  making  dies ;  a  good 
method  consists  in  thoroughly  mixing  common  flour  in  the 
proportion  of  about  ten  per  cent,  to  ninety  per  cent  of  mold- 
ing sand ;  or,  what  is  better,  marble  dust.  This  is  first  mixed 
dry,  and  then,  on  being  moistened  with  water  somewhat 
more  freely  than  the  sand  alone  is  moistened,  placed  in  the 
undercuts,  and  while  the  model  is  being  prepared  the  paste 
has  sufliciently  hardened  to  be  gently  removed  and  placed  in 
an  oven,  or  otherwise  exposed  to  gentle  heat.  When  these 
cores  are  dry  they  can  be  safely  handled,  and  on  withdrawing 


120  DEPARTMENT     B. 

the  model  they  can  be  readily  replaced  in  their  position. — 
Dental  Review. 

200.  Starting  Amalgam  in  DifBcult  Cavities. — Fillings 
in  cavities  difficult  of  access  can  be  nicely  started  by  saturat- 
ing a  pellet  of  cotton  with  sandarac  varnish  and,  touching 
to  a  piece  of  amalgam,  carry  it  in  the  cavity,  wipe  off  the 
surface  with  alcohol,  condense  with  pellet  of  cotton  or  bibu- 
lous paper  and  continue  as  desired. — Off.  and  Lab. 

201.  What  an  Impression  Should  Embrace. — ^The  nec- 
essary condition  to  be  obtained  in  the  adaptation  of  the  den- 
ture to  the  tissues,  is  to  have  it  embrace  the  alveolar  ridge 
and  extend  backward  on  the  palate  to  an  extent  that  the 
entire  periphery  will  impinge  on  and  slightly  displace  lax 
soft  tissue.  This  can  only  be  definitely  accomplished  by 
securing  an  accurate  impression  of  the  surfaces  of  these  lax 
soft  tissues,  which  calls  for  an  impression  of  more  of  the 
surface  of  the  mouth  than  it  is  ordinarily  considered  neces- 
sary to  obtain. 

It  is  important  that  the  impression  material  should  pass 
upward  between  the  alveolar  ridge  and  the  lip  and  cheeks  to 
the  greatest  extent  possible,  without  putting  the  lip  and 
cheeks  on  more  than  a  slight  tension.  It  must  be  carried 
accurately  to  the  extreme  height  of  the  space  at  the  outer 
side  of  the  tuberosity,  when  such  a  space  exists;  and  it 
should  extend  on  the  tissue  posterior  to  the  tuberosity  for  a 
short  distance,  and  on  the  soft  palate  for  a  sufficient  distance 
to  allow  of  locating  on  the  model ;  the  line  of  attachment  of 
the  soft  palate  to  the  posterior  margin  of  the  hard  palate. 
— W.  B.  Ames,  in  Review. 

202.  Engraving  the  Ruge. — The  manner  of  producing 
the  ruge  on  the  surface  of  an  artificial  denture  is  as  follows : 
First  take  off  the  wax  from  the  flasked  case,  then  draw  lines 
on  the  part  of  the  investment  which  is  to  be  at  the  lingual 
aspect  of  the  roof  of  the  mouth  when  the  cover  and  the  receiver 
of  the  flask  fit  together,  and  engrave  the  lines  with  a  suitable 


USEFUL     HINTS. 


121 


knife,  then  fill  in  the  rubber,  and  vulcanize.  Thus  we  can 
get  the  projections  as  we  desire.— I chigoro  Nakahara  (Japan), 
in  Cosmos. 


203.  Copying  Models. — In  copying  a  model  in  sand  or 
marble  dust,  when  it  is  difficult  to  remove  it  and  leave  a 
perfect  impression  on  account  of  undercuts,  or  any  other  rea- 
son. Dr.  A.  W.  Freeman  recommends  covering  the  model  with 
heavy  tin  foil.  The  model  can  then  readily  be  withdrawn, 
leaving  the  foil  in  the  sand  or  marble  dust,  and  thus  enabling 
one  to  secure  a  good  copy. —  The  Dental  Review.  We  have 
•done  this  long  ago,  often,  and  know  it  to  be  a  good  plan.— 
Ed.  in  Office  and  Laboratory. 

204.  Combination  Celluloid  Aluminum  Plate.— Take 
the  impression  ;  make  the  cast  and  metal  die  as  usual.  Make 
the  die  and  counter  in  such  shape  as  to  leave  a  depressed  mar- 
gin, with  raised  rim  aboutone-quarter  inch  from  outside  edges 
■of  the  alveolar  ridge  of  the  plate.  JSTow  cut  the  aluminum 
for  plate  one-quarter  inch  larger  than  the  pattern  all  around, 
-except  at  the  posterior  margin.  In  swaging  keep  well  an- 
nealed and  gradually  turn  the  gum  margin  rim  as  shown  in 
the  cut  (1  and  1).  When  the  plate  is  swaged,  cut  an  alum- 
inum collar  (2  and  2).  Put  it 
on  the  die  and  swage  so  it  will 
fit  the  plate,  and  reach  close 
up  to  the  palatine  surfaces  of 
the.teeth  (when  mounted) ;  fit 
to  place  and  solder.  ISText 
take  the  bite,  place  in  articu- 
lator and  mount  the  teeth  on 
wax  as  usual.  Invest  in  a 
large  size  celluloid  flask ; 
when  fully  set,  open  and  wash 
out  the  wax;  take  a  lower 
celluloid  blank,  of  as  near  the 

size  as  possible,  and  trim  it  with  lathe  bur  till  about  right 
to  fill  the  place  of  the  wax  gums.     Put  in  place,  and  care- 


t^.2 


122  DEPARTMENT     B. 

fully  close  in  a  dry  or  moist  air  celluloid  machine.  When 
cool,  open  up  and  finish  as  usual.  In  setting  the  teeth,  if  the 
collar  (2  and  2)  should  interfere,  trim  away  with  hur  or  file 
to  let  the  teeth  go  to  place.  This  method  gives  a  beautiful 
aluminum  plate,  with  just  sufficient  celluloid  for  gums  and 
attachments ;  the  rim  and  collar  (1  and  2)  firmly  holding 
the  celluloid  edges  to  place ;  when  the  ridge — that  part  of 
the  plate  between  the  collar  and  rim — is  properly  roughened 
it  is  impossible  to  remove  the  celluloid  or  rubber  attachments 
from  the  metal  plate.  This  plate  can  be  made  with  vulcan- 
ite base  and  pink  rubber  giim  facings,  or  the  swaged  base- 
plate can  be  made  of  gold,  platinum  or  silver. — William  H. 
Steele,  in  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

205.  Sandpapering  Plates. — An  excellent  device  for 
holding  the  sandpaper  when  smoothing  off"  the  rubber  plate 
is  a  piece  of  rubber-tubing  about  an  inch  and  a  half  long  and 
three-eighths  of  an  inch  thick,  the  sandpaper  rolled  around 
the  tubing.  The  rubber  holds  the  sandpaper  with  just 
sufiicient  firmness,  and  allows  the  paper  to  fit  and  accommo- 
date itself  to  the  contour  and  depressions,  or,  to  use  a  mining 
phrase ;  dips,  spurs  and  angles  to  a  nicety. — L.  A.  Teagu'e^ 
in  Pacific  Coast  Dental. 

206.  Second  Soldering. — When  it  is  desired  to  solder 
a  piece  that  has  been  soldered  in  another  place,  most  gold 
workers  consider  it  necessary  to  use  a  softer  solder,  which 
shall  flow  at  a  lower  temperature  than  that  first  used,  that 
the  unsoldering  of  the  previous  work  may  be  avoided.  This 
is  needless,  if  the  solder  used  in  the  second  case  be  placed  in 
mercury  till  the  surface  is  slightly  amalgamated.  If  it  be 
then  used  it  will  fiow  very  readily,  while  the  appearance  of 
the  finished  piece  is  not  injured,  as  the  mercury  is  sublimated 
in  the  heating,  leaving  the  solder  as  it  originally  was. — Bar- 
rett, in  Office  and  Laboratory. 

207.  Practical  Cheoplastic  Plate. — Proceed  as  usual 
with  impression  ;  model  may  be  poured  of  plaster,  but  plas- 


USEFUL     HINTS.  123 

ter  with  asbestos  or  whiting  is  safe.  To  this  fit  accurately  a 
piece  of  piano  wire,  No.  14  or  ISTo.  16,  standard  gage,  along 
the  arch,  so  as  to  leave  the  arch  about  opposite  the  first 
molar;  after  fitting  this  wire  to  the  arch,  bend  each  end 
inward  at  right  angles  with  the  body  of  the  wire ;  then  about 
one-quarter  inch  from  first  bend  make  a  second,  by  bending 
wires  upward,  forming  an  obtuse  angle.  This  is  done  so  that 
the  wire  will  be  held  firmly  in  the  plaster  of  the  upper  half 
of  the  flask  ;  take  a  file  and  make  a  notch  on  each  side  of 
the  wire  in  the  first  bend  of  each  end ;  this  is  done  so  that 
the  wire  will  break  in  the  proper  place  and  easily,  when 
wanted  ;  sandpaper  the  wire,  to  remove  all  dirt  from  surface, 
and  dip  first  into  muriate  of  zinc,  then  into  melted  tin ;  this 
is  done  so  that  the  metals  used  for  the  plate  will  flow  along 
and  become  attached  to  the  wire.  The  wire  prepared,  cover 
the  model  to  just  the  extent  that  you  wish  the  plate  to  cover 
the  ridge  when  done.  It  is  now  necessary  to  decide  whether 
to  use  a  solid  plate  of  metal  or  a  rubber  attachment.  In 
nearly  all  cases,  if  full  lower,  and  if  partials,  with  much 
absorption,  I  use  the  latter,  and  have  taken  such  a  case  for 
description. 

"Warm  the  tinned  wire,  and  press  in  place ;  cover  the 
scar  with  new  wax ;  the  case  is  now  ready  to  flask.  For 
this  I  find  the  Watt's  flask  most  convenient.  In  flasking,. 
care  must  be  used  to  have  sufiicient  plaster  under  the  ends 
of  the  wire  to  hold  them  firm,  and  without  breaking,  in  the 
upper  part  of  flask.  With  sharp  knife  make  a  groove  around 
the  edge  of  plate  in  upper  part  of  flask,  just  where  edge  of 
rubber  will  finish  to ;  this  is  done  so  as  to  furnish  a  more 
secure  attachment  for  the  rubber,  and  a  larger  surface  of 
metal  next  to  the  mouth. 

For  a  more  secure  attachment,  especially  in  full  cases,  I 
make  several  pits,  about  one-half  inch  deep  in  full  cases,  in 
upper  part  of  flask,  over  the  ridge ;  these  can  be  made  with 
an  old  excavator  sharpened  like  a  screw-driver.  Now  cut 
a  gate  from  each  angle  ;  this  I  make  ample,  as  it  can  do  no 
harm,  and  proves  a  great  convenience. 

The  two  halves  of  flask  are  now  dried  separately  in  a 


124  DEPARTMENT     B. 

temperature  that  will  not  calcine  the  plaster ;  the  oven  of  an 
ordinary  heating  stove  is  a  convenient  place.  When  a  mirror 
held  over  a  warm  flask  will  not  gather  the  slightest  moisture, 
they  will  do  to  pour.  When  dry,  the  surface  of  the  model 
should  be  rubbed  with  a  piece  of  base  plate  wax,  to  smooth 
the  surface  and  also  act  as  a  flux  for  the  metal.  The  mold 
should  be  warm,  and  the  metal  but  little  above  melting  point 
when  pouring;  it  should  be  cooled  slowly,  to  obtain  a 
smooth  casting.  After  separating,  the  wire  should  be  broken 
ofl:'  with  the  finger.  It  will  break  just  below  the  surface,  if 
the  notches  were  made  as  described.  The  small  hole  where 
wire  is  broken  off  is  to  be  filled  with  same  metal  as  that  of 
which  the  plate  is  made,  with  a  soldering  copper  (not  tinned). 
To  do  this,  moisten  the  surface  of  plate  about  the  hole  with 
H  C^  or  chlorid  of  zinc,  and  place  a  piece  of  metal  over  it 
and  melt  in  place  with  warm  copper.  iTow,  with  a  file, 
smooth  off  plate  in  a  rough  form,  and  fit  to  mouth ;  after  fit- 
ting, take  the  antagonism,  using  plate  you  have  just  made 
as  a  base  plate,  then  proceed  as  usual  with  rubber  attachment. 
Should  you  wish  to  make  a  solid  plate  after  fitting  the  wire, 
proceed  as  usual  with  cheoplastic  plates,  excepting  that  after 
the  case  is  on  the  articulator  the  wire  is  to  be  put  in  place 
before  the  teeth  are  ground.  Any  of  the  alloys  of  tin  in  use 
may  be  used  for  construction  of  this  plate.  While  I  have 
tried  them  all,  I  like  fifteen  parts  silver  to  eighty-five 
of  tin,  though  the  addition  of  three  per  cent  of  bismuth 
makes  a  good  plate. — C.  W.  Staples,  D.D.S.,  in  Ohio  Dental 
Journal. 

208.  Holding  a  Broken  Plate. — To  hold  in  place  the 
broken  pieces  of  a  denture  preparatory  to  mending,  fill  a 
lower  impression  cup  with  softened  modeling  compound  as 
to  take  an  impression.  Press  the  teeth  of  plate  in  this, 
and  bring  the  edges  of  the  fracture  together  accurately. 
When  the  compound  has  become  hard,  dip  the  plate  in 
water,  and  fill  as  when  making  a  model.  As  soon  as  the 
plaster  is  hard  soften  the  compound  and  remove  it,  and  pro- 
ceed as  the  case  requires. — W.  D.  Tickner,  in  Items. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  •    125 

209.  English  Pinless  Teeth  on  Rubber. — Dr.  H.  C 
Boyd  uses  these  teeth  with  rubber,  running  gold  pins  through 
the  holes  in  the  teeth,  allowing  the  ends  to  project  far  enough 
to  solder  a  continuous  band  to  the  ends  of  the  pins,  investing 
in  plaster  and  asbestos  for  soldering.  The  teeth  are  then 
waxed  up  and  the  piece  invested,  well  vulcanized  as  usual, 
making  a  strong  but  not  cumbersome  piece. — Items  of 
Interest. 

210.  For  Leaking  Vulcanizers. — To  prevent  leakage 
of  vulcanizers,  take  plaster  of  Paris,  mix  it  thin  and  run  it 
around  the  inside  of  the  cover,  and  while  soft  screw  it  to 
place,  letting  it  stand  a  short  time  before  putting  over  the 
heat. — Dr.  E.  A.  Schillinger,  in  Items. 

^» 

211.  Sandpaper  Mandrel  for  Plates. — Take  a  quarts 

taper  cork ;  trim  up  in  cone  shape  on  the  lathe ;  make  a  slit 
through  apical  end  of  cone,  half-way  down,  with  a  dental  saw  ; 
insert  in  this  a  piece  of  sandpaper  a  little  wider  than  the 
opening;  bend  back  at  one  end  for  retention,  and  you  have  a 
hand  sandpaper  for  use  on  rubber  plates  which  conforms 
with  the  depressions  and  works  admirably. — Dr.  Barnes.    • 

212.  Teeth  Changing  Color  in  Soldering. — The  chang- 
ing of  color  in  solderino-  teeth  is  due  to  not  knowins;  how  to 
use  the  blow-pipe  properly.  We  will  find  that  every  man 
who  is  not  accustomed  to  the  use  of  the  blow-pipe  puts  on  a 
fine  flame  blow-pipe,  because  he  is  afraid.  When  you  use  the 
blow-pipe  for  the  full  force,  heat  it  till  it  flows  of  itself, 
then  you  need  not  be  afraid  of  the  teeth  changing  color. 
The  changing  of  color  is  because  you  put  too  much  strain  on 
a  certain  place. — Dr.  Nels  l^elson,  in  Review. 

*213.  Soldering  "Without  Investment. — I  observe  in  the 
article  by  Dr.  Essig,  in  the  April  number  of  the  Dental  Cos- 
mos^ that  he  speaks  of  investing  bands  for  the  purpose  of 
soldering  thereon  hooks  and  short  tubes.  With  me  there  is 
a  much  easier  and  simpler  plan.  I  join  all  bands  in  the  mak- 
ing with  high-grade  solder — 20  or  22k.     To  attach  a  hook 


126  DEPARTMENT     B. 

or  tube  to  a  band,  first  hold  the  latter  with  a  pair  of  mod- 
erately thick  pliers  at  the  point  of  union.  That  this  may 
be  kept  below  melting  point  and  from  danger  of  unjointing, 
place  a  little  flux  and  18k.  (or  lower)  solder  on  the  spot 
where  attachment  is  to  be  made,  and  melt  with  a  fine  flame 
of  the  blow-pipe.  If  a  bit  of  tubing  is  to  be  placed,  take  a 
piece  of  M'ire  six  or  eight  inches  long,  or  any  slender  instru- 
ment, the  point  of  which  will  fit  within,  having  this  covered 
with  a  thin  coating  of  a  thin  mixture  of  whiting  (or  rouge) 
with  water,  to  prevent  a  flow  of  solder  inside  the  tube  or 
possible  sticking  to  the  wire  or  point  which  we  are  to  use 
as  a  holder  in  making  the  attachment.  .  Il^ow,  with  a  rea- 
sonably steady  hand,  holding  the  band  as  before  with 
pliers,  the  tube,  fluxed  on  the  joint  side,  may  be  quickly  and 
accurately  fastened  to  the  band  over  a  small  gas  flame ;  a 
piece  of  wire  may  be  attached  in  the  same  manner,  leaving 
it  long  enough  to  serve  for  its  own  handle,  and  cutting  off  to 
proper  length  after  soldering,  or  the  hook  may  be  held  with 
jewelers'  fine  pliers. 

Another  method,  and  a  good  one,  is  to  punch  a  hole  in 
the  band  just  large  enough  for  the  close  insertion  of  the  end 
of  the  wire,  which  should  be  fluxed,  when  it  may  be  securely 
fastened  with  a  bit  of  solder.  This  is  an  excellent  way  to 
attach  screws  of  the  '"  Angle  "  jackscrew  sort. 

Speaking  of  this  reminds  me  that  the  so-called  "  pipes  " 
of  the  "  Angle  set "  are  identical  with  those  kept  in  stock 
by  the  wholesale  jewelers  under  the  name  of  "joint  wire,"  in 
three  or  more  sizes,  and  sold  at  about  a  cent  an  inch,  German 
silver.  The  large  size  is  available  for  jackscrew  and  traction 
purposes,  with  No.  18  gage  wire  screws ;  the  smaller  for  use 
in  connection  with  spring  wire  for  rotating  teeth  in  mal-tort. 
This  "joint  wire  "  is  also  available  for  tubular  posts  in  crown- 
work, — being  very  strong  and  made  with  absolute  accuracy. 
— Garrett  iN^ewkirk,  in  Cosmos. 

214.     Retaining    Lower   Plates  with    Gold    Posts. — 

Extract  the  teeth,  being  very  careful  not  to  break  the  labial 
or  buccal  plates  of  the  alveolar  process,  for  if  this  should 


USEFDL      HINTS.  127 

happen  you  will  ultimately  have  shorter  pins  than  where 
the  process  is  preserved  in  its  entirety.  ISText  make  pivots 
of  gold  (pivot  wire),  a  trifle  shorter  than  the  roots  of  the  ex- 
tracted teeth,  which  have  been  kept  for  measurement.  The 
following  day  take  the  impression,  modeling  your  case  in 
wax,  and  see  that  all  is  right  after  the  bite  has  been  prop- 
erly adjusted ;  then  add  the  two  gold  pins,  one  on  each  side 
where  most  suitable,  that  they  may  enter,  not  the  center  of 
the  sockets  (as  I  said  in  my  first  paper),  but  rather  toward 
the  posterior  walls  of  the  sockets  of  two  of  the  extracted 
teeth — the  first  bicuspids  or  canines  are  the  most  suitable. 
The  pins  should  be  as  long  as  possible,  because  if  too  short 
they  cause  irritation,  and,  consequently,  absorption.  Having 
fixed  the  pins  to  the  wax  denture,  again  try  in  the  mouth, 
to  make  sure  the  pins  do  not  hurt,  and  that  they  run  paral- 
lel to  each  other ;  then  cut  a  slit  in  the  model  wide  enough 
not  to  disturb  them,  fasten  them  with  plaster,  and  proceed 
to  vulcanize  in  the  ordinary  way. 

When  repairing  a  denture  with  pins  attached,  place  a 
small  hickory  pin  in  each  of  the  holes  in  the  jaw.  These 
can  easily  be  removed,  either  by  yourself,  when  replacing 
the  denture,  or  by  the  ]3atient,  if  it  is  sent  home. 

You  will  notice  particularly  that  absorption  does  not 
take  place  so  rapidly  when  you  adopt  this  method,  as  it  keeps 
the  denture  steadily  in  position ;  and,  as  you  know,  wherever 
there  is  friction  there  is  always  more  absorption. — W".  Dall, 
in  Jour.  British  Asso. 

215.  To  Obtain  a  Correct  Articulation. — It  is  not  only 
essential,  but  absolutely  necessary,  that  we  should  have  a 
perfectly  natural  close  of  the  mouth,  and  a  correct  articula- 
tion, when  constructing  an  artificial  denture ;  otherwise  it 
will  be  worse  than  useless  to  the  wearer.  It  is  almost  im- 
possible to  get  a  natural  close  of  the  mouth  if  one  depends 
on  a  first  bite  (or  any  number  of  bites)  and  wax  rims  only. 
I  have  followed  the  method  given  here  for  ten  years  with- 
out failure.  For  illustration :  We  will  take  a  full  upper. 
Get  a  perfect  impression  ;  make  a  cast  and  pattern  plate,  as 


128  DEPARTMENT     B. 

usual ;  try  the  plate  in  the  mouth,  and  trim  till  it  fits  easily 
to  place  ;  remove  and  put  on  it  a  rim  of  softened  wax ;  have 
just  sufficient  to  receive  the  remaining  natural  lower  teeth. 
Put  the  plate  and  wax  in  the  mouth ;  have  the  patient  throw 
back  the  head,  swallow,  and  close  the  teeth  in  the  wax ; 
remove  the  bite,  pour  the  teeth,  and  mount  in  an  articulator ; 
that  will  allow  of  the  bite  being  changed  in  all  directions ; 
when  the  plaster  is  set,  open  up  and  remove  the  wax ;  now 
mount  the  six  anterior  teeth  in  the  correct  positions,  and  try 
in  the  mouth  ;  have  the  patient  laugh,  talk,  and  smile,  get- 
ting the  different  expressions ;  if  the  teeth  are  not  correctly 
mounted,  reset  and  try  till  they  are  right.  Now  build  up 
with  wax  on  each  side  where  the  lower  bicuspids  will  strike, 
also  extending  behind  the  upper  cuspids,  so  the  lower  cus- 
pids will  touch  it ;  build  the  wax  high  enough,  so  the  lower 
bicuspids  will  bed  the  cusps  in  w^hen  the  mouth  is  closed ; 
smooth  the  top,  and  put  in  the  mouth.  After  the  plate  has 
been  in  position  a  few  minutes,  tell  the  patient  to  swallow, 
at  the  same  time  gently  close  the  mouth  till  the  lower  ones 
dent  in  the  wax  ;  remove  the  plate  and  put  it  on  the  cast. 
Now  close  the  articulator  carefully  ;  if  the  lower  bicuspids 
and  cuspids  close  exactly  in  their  proper  places  in  the  wax 
there  is  no  need  of  a  change,  but  if  they  do  not,  try  the  plate 
in  the  mouth  till  sure  of  having  corrected  the  bite ;  then . 
loosen  the  set  screws  of  the  articulator,  adjust  the  plaster 
teeth  in  their  proper  places  in  the  wax,  and  tighten  the 
screws.— Wm.  H.  Steele,  in  Items. 

216.  Clicking  of  Artificial  Teeth. — Clicking  and  rattling 
of  full  sets  of  artificial  teeth  is  caused  by  poor  articulation, 
by  ill-fitting  plates,  and  by  the  teeth  being  too  long.  In 
nearly  all  full  sets,  when  first  tried  in  mouth,  the  molars  and 
bicuspids  are  found  to  be  too  long  ;  and  to  bring  the  incisors 
near  enough,  the  cusps  are  ground,  making  them  flat  and 
smooth,  with  no  indentations,  thus  allowing  them  to  slide 
about.  To  prevent  this,  preserve  the  cusps  or  points  un- 
ground,  thus  allowing  them  to  interlock,  and,  therefore,  less 
liable  to  "  clatter."    Another  great  benefit  of  this  method  is. 


USEFUL    IIII^TS.  129 

that  uneven  surfaces  coming  together  cut  or  divide  food 
better. — A.  A.  Hazeltine. 

217.  To  Prevent  Plaster  from  Adhering  to  Flask. — 
Dr.  A.  W.  Buckland  paints  the  inner  surface  of  flasks  for 
vulcanite  work  with  a  solution  of  whiting,  which  allows  the 
plaster  to  be  removed  easily  and  protects  the  flask  from  cor- 
rosion. 

218.  Soldering  Bands  to  Plates. — A  great  saving  of 
time  iseflfected  by  using  casting  sand,  as  an  embedding  ma- 
terial, instead  of  sand  and  plaster.  It  is  also  claimed  for  this 
that  the  relative  position  of  the  band  to  the  plate  is  better 
maintained.  Mix  your  sand  with  water  to  the  consistency 
of  cream ;  place  the  plate,  with  band  waxed  to  it,  on  a  pum- 
ice or  asbestos  block  ;  drop  the  sand  around  band,  and  a  little 
to  fix  plate,  much  as  you  would  with  plaster  and  sand.  The 
asbestos  soaks  up  the  water,  so  that  the  sand  "sets"  almost 
at  once.  Now  warm  up  the  sand.  This  is  most  important. 
When  that  is  warm,  burn  the  wax  off ;  then  borax  and  solder. 
■ — British  Journal  Dental  Science. 

219.  To  Make  Strong  Partials. — I  have  a  suggestion 
to  make  about  partial  dentures.  It  is  assumed  that  anybody 
can  make  a  rubber  plate,  and  it  seems  like  wasting  time  to 
talk  very  much  of  what  we  should  do  in  the  manufacture  of 
partial  dentures  of  rubber.  I  adhere  to  a  few  general  prin- 
ciples, one  o'f  which  is,  I  always  use  plain  teeth,  when  pos- 
sible. In  partial  plates  of  gold,  I  have  been  very  much 
bothered  in  years  past  about  the  teeth  breaking  off.  The 
correction  of  that  difficulty  is  an  excuse  for  my  talking  at 
this  time.  I  make  the  teeth,  as  I  would  make  a  dummy  in 
a  bridge  case.  I  select  porcelain  facing  the  same  as  I  use  in 
brido-e-work,  then  I  select  an  artificial  tooth,  for  making 
solid  gold  cusps.  You  will  find  the  cusps  of  natural  teeth 
are  so  pronounced  that  they  are  not  practical  to  use ;  but 
take  an  artificial  tooth  and  produce  a  solid  gold  cusp,  back 
up  your  facing,  and  grind  it  to  place  on  the  model,  and  then 


130  DEPARTMENT     B. 

set  it  against  your  gold  cusj).  Invest  it  and  fill  the  space 
behind  as  you  would  a  dummy,  grind  again  up  to  your  plate 
and  solder ;  your  metal  will  never  break,  and  it  will  be  a 
beautiful  case.  There  is  no  danger  of  the  porcelain  break- 
ing off. — Dr.  E.  J.  Perry,  in  Review. 

'220.  Flask  Bolts. — Bo  not  try  to  economize  by  using  old 
worn-out,  or  gummed-up  flask  bolts.  Many  porous  plates, 
faulty  articulations,  etc.,  are  caused  in  this  way. — Wm.  II. 
Steele. 

221.  Flask  Heater. — A  good  rubber  heater  is  easily 
constructed  by  taking  a  shallow,  round  tin  pan  and  soldering 
a  cover  on  it,  leaving  a  water  space  of  less  than  an  inch ; 
through  this  top  make  a  round  hole,  to  which  a  short  tin 
tube  is  soldered  for  the  escape  of  steam. 

It  will  keep  your  rubber  warm  sufficiently  for  packing 
in  the  flask  much  longer  than  on  a  disk  of  tin,  and  there  is 
no  danger  of  burning  it  either. — "W.  "W.  Davisson,  in  Items. 

222.  Aluminum  Hints. — I  agree  with  Dr.  Haskell, 
that  aluminum  is  an  excellent  substitute  for  rubber ;  and  my 
experience  proves  it  to  be  far  superior,  in  every  way,  for 
either  full  or  partial  dentures. 

The  aluminum  plate  used  must  be  absolutely  pure,  and 
must  be  worked  so  as  to  keep  it  pure  during  the  entire  pro- 
cess. 

If  the  plate  contains  the  slightest  traces  of  iron,  or 
silica,  it  is  unfit  for  dental  purposes.  The  die  should  be 
covered  with  thin,  tough  India  tissue,  during  the  process  of 
swaging,  and  a  couple  of  thicknesses  folded  over  the  plate, 
to  keep  it  from  coming  in  contact  with  the  metal  of  the 
counter. 

Do  not  use  salt,  or  anything  of  the  kind  in  the  invest- 
ment ;  and  do  not  have  zinc  in  the  boiler  when  vulcanizing 
the  rubber  attachments. — Wm.  H.  Steele,  in  Ohio  Dental 
Journal. 


USEFUL      HINTS.  131 

223.  Resetting  Pins  in  Artificial  Teeth.— Teeth  or 
blocks  that  have  broken  off  from  plates,  and  the  pins  remain 
in  the  rubber,  can  be  used  again  as  follows :  Remove  the  old 
pins  from  the  plate,  and  if  they  are  perfect  use  them ;  if  not, 
select  from  your  stock  of  old  pins  the  ones  needed  (save  up  all 
old  pins  for  this  purpose),  without  flaws,  and  with  good  heads. 
With  a  small  diamond  drill,  deepen  the  holes  a  trifle,  where 
the  old  pins  broke  out.  Wax  the  new  ones  in  position,  in- 
vest in  asbestos  cement  and  plaster,  or  marble  dust  and 
plaster ;  remove  the  wax.  Select  some  small  pieces  of  opaque 
glass  as  near  the  tooth  shade  as  possible,  and  fuse  around 
the  pins  with  blow-pipe.-r-Wm.  H.  Steele. 

224.  Something  New  in  Rubber  Plates.— One  of  the 
features  introduced  as  a  novelty,  at  the  late  meeting  of  the 
Mad  River  Valley  Dental  Society,  was  a  method  of  making 
vulcanite  plates  without  the  teeth  attached  ;  in  other  words, 
vulcanizing  the  rubber  on  the  plaster  model,  using  the  plate 
or  plates  thus  obtained  instead  of  a  wax  base-plate  for  secur- 
ing a  bite,  and  finally  attaching  the  teeth  by  a  second  process 
of  vulcanizing.  The  idea  is  original,  we  believe,  with  Dr. 
Bradley,  of  Dayton,  Ohio.  The  advantages  claimed  for  the 
method  are  such  as  apply  to  swaged  metallic  plates,  viz. : 
Greater  accuracy  in  securing  a  "  bite  "  in  diflacult  cases  ;  the 
opportunity  of  determining  at  an  early  stage  of  the  operation 
whether  a  good  fit  has  been  secured ;  also  the  advantage  of 
allowing  the  patient  to  wear  and  accustom  himself  to  the 
plate  before  the  teeth  are  attached.  Dr.  Bradley  thinks  the 
method  of  special  advantage  in  all  partial  lower  cases.  The 
narrow  ruT^ber  band  at  the  lingual  base  of  lower  anterior 
teeth  may  be  strengthened  by  cutting  a  groove  with  a  fissure 
or  wheel-bur,  fitting  in  this  a  brass  wire,  and  vulcanizing 
rubber  over  it.  For  attaching  the  teeth,  the  surface  of  the 
plate  is  treated  with  a  solution  of  persulfid  of  carbon, 
after  which,  the  teeth  being  in  position,  more  rubber  is 
applied,  and  the  piece  again  vulcanized. 

Dr.  Adams,  of  Dayton,  stated  to  the  Society  that  the 
packing  of  the  rubber,  when  the  plate  is  first  made,  may  be 


132  DEPARTMENT    B. 

done  as  ordinarily,  with  the  fingers  and  a  blunt  burnisher, 
after  which  the  surface  is  covered  with  tin  foil,  the  case  in- 
vested and  vulcanized.  He  dispenses  with  the  wax  base- 
plate, and  consequently  with  the  various  steps  of  varnishing 
and  oiling,  and  a  second  pouring  of  plaster  in  the  flask.  To 
be  more  explicit,  the  rubber  strips  are  packed  on  the  face 
of  the  model  before  flasking  at  all,  and  then  the  model  is  in- 
vested at  one  operation  and  immediately  vulcanized.  It  will 
be  seen  from  this,  that  no  pressure  is  brought  to  bear  on 
the  rubber  in  closing  the  flask. — Medical  and  Dental  Journal. 

225.  To  Gild  Artificial  Teeth. — Any  dentist  can  stain 
and  gild  artificial  teeth  by  using  the  proper  tube  colors,  such 
as  are  used  by  china  decorators.  A  small  furnace  or  even  a 
good  blow-pipe  may  be  used. — D.  Y.  Beacock,  in  Ohio  Den- 
tal Journal. 

226.  To  Improve  Shaw  Engines. — Cut  ofii"  enough 
from  the  tube  of  your  Shaw  engine  (if  you  use  one)  to  allow 
the  shaft  to  run,  say  three-quarters  of  an  inch  further 
through,  this  will  enable  you  to  put  on  a  small  wire  brush 
to  clean  burs. — D.  Y.  Beacock,  in  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

227.  Use  of  Cores  in  Casting  Dies. — The  making  of 
metal  lowers  where  the  incisors  and  canines  are  standing  is 
one  of  the  most  difficult  things  for  a  mechanic  to  do.  There 
is  nearly  always  a  great  ridge  standing  out  at  the  internal 
alveolar  edge  which  renders  the  casting  of  the  model  a  very 
difficult,  in  fact  almost  an  impossible  task.  I  for  my  part 
always  cast  first  what  is  called  a  core.  Make  the  model  as 
smooth  as  possible,  then  take  some  thin  tin  foil  and  cover 
the  inside  of  the  model,  pressing  the  tin  very  closely  to  the 
plaster ;  then  take  flour  and  casting  sand  in  the  proportion 
of  20  of  flour  to  100  of  sand,  mix  these  well  together  first 
day ;  then  moisten  the  mixture  slightly  to  about  the  same 
extent  one  would  ordinary  casting  sand,  and  press  it  well  on 
to  the  model  with  the  fingers ;  bury  a  piece  of  strong  wire  in 
it,  leaving  a  piece  standing  out  at  the  back  as  a  handle,  if  you 


USEFUL     HINTS.  133 

like,  then  fill  up  to  the  top  of  the  undercut  only ;  then,  when 
this  is  firmly  pressed  together  (leaving  no  bits  overhanging), 
draw  it  out-  in  the  antero-posterior  direction  of  the  mouth  ; 
or,  in  other  words,  draw  it  out  at  the  back,  and  then  place 
the  core  in  the  oven  till  it  is  baked  perfectly  hard  and  dry. 
(Two  or  three  should  be  made,  in  fact  a  fresh  core  should  be 
used  for  every  zinc  casting.)  When  dry,  place  the  core 
(having  cut  off  the  handle  at  the  back  perfectly  level  with 
the  sand)  in  the  model,  and  then  cast  in  the  ordinary  manner ; 
the  undercut  will  lift  out  the  core  when  the  model  is  taken 
from  the  sand ;  it  can  then  be  removed  from  the  plaster  from 
behind  and  placed  back  in  the  sand,  and  then  the  zinc 
poured  in.  The  casting  when  cool  will  require  very  little 
trimming,  and  the  undercut  will  be  found  almost  perfect. 
This  only  requires  a  little  practice  to  produce  an  excellent 
model. — Dr.  D.  W.  Parsons,  in  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

228.  Jumping  Solder. — In  placing  foil  scraps  in  a  crack 
where  you  wish  to  span  solder,  use  scrap  mat  gold,  it  will 
stay  where  put  and  not  ball  but  make  a  satisfactory  joint. — 
Dr.  H.  Prescott  Wilcox. 

229.  New  Method   of  Working  Continuous  Gum. — 

After  glancing  at  the  older  methods  of  supplying  the  deficien. 
cies  of  teeth,  Mr.  Hooten  said  he  had  been  engaged  for  years 
at  great  personal  labor  in  elaborating  a  system  to  make  por- 
celain teeth  on  gum  substance  which  would  neither  shrink 
nor  crack  in  burning.  His  labors  had  resulted  in  the  find- 
ing of  such  a  "  body  "  which  fulfilled  these  requirements. 
The  appliance  which  he  had  to  describe  was  designed  with 
the  object  of  molding  the  teeth  and  gum  substance  in  a 
manner  which  would  be  universally  applicable  to  any  form 
of  teeth  or  gum,  and  with  a  series  of  matrices  of  different 
types  of  teeth  it  was  possible  to  adapt  the  one  to  the  other 
by  one  process.  The  process  was  applicable  alike  to  gold 
plates  and  to  vulcanite,  without  need  of  platinum;  thus 
partial  or  complete  sets  could  be  molded  as  easily  as  vul- 
canite. 


184  DEPARTMENT     B. 

(1)  The  molds  or  matrices  are  made  by  mounting  sets 
of  teeth  of  various  types  and  sizes  in  wax ;  seven  or  eight 
types  being  sufficient  for  ordinary  work.  These  wax  patterns 
are  not  fitted  to  any  gum  outline,  but  are  contoured  to  the 
form  of  an  upper  or  lower  maxilla,  and  are  made  flat  on 
what  would  be  the  gum  surface ;  in  other  respects  they  are 
exactly  what  a  set  of  artificial  teeth  would  be.  These  form 
the  "  male  "  part  of  the  mold,  w^hich  is  cast  in  plaster  of 
Paris  in  two  parts.  These  are  trimmed  in  shape  so  as  to 
be  reproduced  in  brass  or  gun  metal,  so  as  to  be  clamped  to- 
gether by  pins,  and  on  the  upper  surface  a  metal  plate  is  cast 
like  the  lid  of  a  vulcanizing  flask,  except  that  it  has  three 
countersunk  holes  and  a  central  hole  through  which  a  screw 
passes,  and  on  this  a  winged  nut  works  which  clamps  the 
whole.  This  apparatus  is  thus  worked :  A  universal  articu- 
lator is  prejDared,  and  in  it  is  fixed  a  zinc  model  of  the  case 
to  be  treated  ;  on  this  is  placed  a  wax  bite  of  the  dimensions 
of  the  required  plate.  A  soft  brass  plate  is  adapted  around 
outside  of  this,  being  molded  to  take  the  external  outline. 
The  wax  bite  is  removed  and  a  wax  counterpart  of  the  inside 
of  the  brass  mold  made.  This  is  adapted  to  the  zinc  model 
by  heating.  Before  the  zinc  is  heated  the  articulator  is  re- 
moved, but  it  has  to  be  replaced  before  the  wax  counterpart 
is  run  down.  The  wax  bite  is  thus  outlined  with  teeth  and 
gums,  but  with  its  gum  surface  the  counterpart  of  the  zinc 
model,  and  it  is  then  returned  to  the  brass  mold  and  fusible 
metal  melted  and  poured  in  through  one  of  the  three  holes 
in  the  lid,  which  are  countersunk.  The  matrix  is  quickly 
opened  by  withdrawing  the  pin,  and  the  wax  removed.  It 
is  necessary  that  parallel  holes  be  drilled  in  the  lower  part 
of  the  matrix  for  the  pins.  Slits  are  also  sawed  in  the 
mold  behind  the  canines  on  each  side,  so  that  strips  of  thin 
brass  can  be  slipped  in  to  divide  the  mold  in  three  parts. 
In  the  pin  holes  are  inserted  pieces  of  steel  knitting  pins 
of  pivot  wire  gage,  and  on  them  are  fitted  platinum  tubes 
wherewith  to  line  the  pin  holes  in  the  gum  blocks.  A  plate 
of  copper  is  put  under  the  matrix  to  prevent  dropping  out  of 
the  pins.     The  mold  is  now  clamped,  with  the  exception  of 


USEFUL     HINTS.  135 

the  lid,  the  "  body  "  being  packed  in  moist ;  then  the  lid  is 
added  and  hammered  down  and  screwed  home.  The  mold 
is  heated  over  gas  till  the  fusible  metal  runs  out ;  next,  the 
outer  part  of  the  mold  and  the  lid  are  removed,  and  the 
blocks  trimmed  and  removed ;  the  gum  surface  is  then 
painted  and  the  teeth  tinted.  The  blocks  having  been  dried 
for  half  an  hour,  are  then  placed  in  the  muffle,  which  should 
not  be  closed  till  the  oil  and  starch  are  driven  off.  In  ab- 
stract it  is  not  possible  to  give  more  than  an  outline  of  Mr. 
Hooten's  interesting  communication,  which  should  be  read 
in  extenso  in  order  to  do  it  full  justice. — Ex.  Jour.  Brit.  Asso. 

230.  Flasking  Pink  Rubber. — When  investing  a  case 
where  pink  rubber  is  to  be  used  for  the  gums,  be  careful  and 
not  imbed  the  wax  gum  rim  in  the  plaster  below  its  upper 
edge  ;  for  if  the  parting  point  between  the  upper  and  lower 
half  of  the  flask  should  be  anywhere  on  the  gum,  the  surplus 
rubber  of  the  body  of  the  plate  will  be  forced  through  the 
pink,  and  cause  an  unsightly  spot. — -Wm.  H.  Steele. 

231.  Impressions  of  Soft  Pendulous  Gums. — I  have 
seen  many  ingenious  methods  of  taking  impressions  of  the 
mouth  where  the  gums  were  soft  and  pendulous,  but  have 
treated  a  number  of  bad  cases  as  follows :  Take  impression  as 
usual,  with  plaster  a  little  thick.  Press  up  hard  and  in  such 
manner  as  to  force  loose  gum  outward  as  much  as  possible. 
Make  model,  and  you  will  find  the  soft  gum  has  made  a 
ridge  on  the  model,  projecting  outward.  Trim  this  off  boldly 
till  your  model  has  the  shape  it  would  have  if  the  loose 
gum  were  dissected  away.  The  amount  that  can  be  trimmed 
off  without  harm  is  surprising ;  and  we  have  never  failed  of 
a  fit  by  treating  as  above. — Dr.  H.  R.  Keeper,  in  Archives. 

232.  Treatment  of  Broken  Impressions. — That  portion 
of  the  impression  coming  away  with  the  tray  is  placed  on  a 
blotting  pad,  and  the  pieces  as  they  are  removed  are  placed 
by.  the  side  of  the  tray  ;  those  belonging  to  the  right  side  of 
the  mouth  at  the  right  of  the  tray,  and  those  of  the  left  to 


136  DEPARTMENT      B. 

the  left.  This  blotting  pad,  you  will  see,  answers  a  three- 
fold purpose :  of  a  nice  clean  piece  of  paper  on  which  to 
lay  the  impressions,  to  keep  the  instrument  bracket  clean, 
and  something  on  which  to  carry  the  impression  to  the  labo- 
ratory ;  and  it  also  assists  in  the  hardening  of  the  plaster  by 
absorbing  the  moisture,  so  that  in  a  few  minutes  it  may  be 
handled  without  fear  of  breaking  in  the  process  of  putting 
together. — E.  C.  Moore,  in  Dental  Journal. 

233.  Soldering  Bands,  Clasps,  etc. — Split  an  Irish 
potato,  imbed  the  porcelain,  leaving  the  parts  to  be  soldered 
just  above  the  surface  of  the  potato,  close  up  the  split  in  the 
potato,  holding  it  together  with  binding  wire,  proceed  to 
solder,  no  danger  of  cracking  the  teeth.  The  mountings  of 
the  finest  stones  can  be  mended  in  the  same  way  without  in- 
jury to  the  stone. — James  T.  Melton,  in  Items. 

234.  Reswaging  a  Metal  Plate. — The  adage,  "  Neces- 
sity is  the  mother  of  invention,"  proved  itself  true  in  my 
practice  recently. 

I  made  a  gold  plate  for  a  patient.  It  carried  one  central 
incisor  and  the  bicuspids  and  molars.  It  seemed  to  come  out 
of  the  investment  beautifully,  but  when  I  went  to  fit  it  in,  I 
found  it  raised  up  from  the  palate  badly.  I  determined  to 
try  an  experiment.  I  placed  the  plate  on  the  die,  removed 
it  and  marked  the  die  around,  about  where  the  palatal  side 
of  the  artificial  teeth  would  stand.  I  then  cut  away  the 
metal  where  any  of  the  teeth  would  be  likely  to  touch  the 
die.  I  then  built  up  a  ring  of  putty  outside  of  where  I  had 
marked  the  die.  I  ran  a  lead  counter  in  my  putty  ring.  I 
replaced  th«  plate  on  the  die  and  formed  the  counter  to  fit 
the  palate  without  touching  the  teeth.  A  few  blows  with  a 
hammer  on  the  lead,  while  an  assistant  held  the  plate  firmly 
on  the  die,  brought  it  in  very  good  shape. — R.  E.  Sparks,  in 
Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

235.  To   Replace  Broken   Block  on   Rubber  Plate. — 

^here  a  broken  block  is  to  be  replaced  by  a  new  one,  cut 
out  as  much  rubber  as  possible  without  cutting  through, 


USEFUL     HINTS.  137 

make  proper  undercuts,  etc.,  then  fit  your  block  between  the 
others,  and  cement  in  position  with  oxyphosphate  mixed 
thin.  It  is  not  necessary  to  have  a  perfect  fit  above  gum. 
Out  a  piece  of  heavy  tin  foil  large  enough  to  cover  upper 
half  of  block  and  rubber  rim  ;  place  this  in  position  and 
cover  with  cement ;  mix  enough  cement  to  cover  whole  front 
of  block  and  part  of  adjoining  two,  and  hold  in  position  till 
it  has  set.  This  will  support  the  block  while  under  pressure. 
You  can  now  invest,  and  use  plenty  of  rubber  to  force  it  in 
all  interstices.  After  vulcanizing,  you  will  find  a  nicely  pol- 
ished front.  Instead  of  using  wax  to  fill  up  my  undercuts,  I 
fill  with  tissue  paper  moistened.  This  can  be  taken  out 
easily  after  flasking. — J.  E.  Ward,  in  Items. 

236.  Swaging  Plates  for  High  Arches. — In  the  Ala- 
"bama  Dental  Society,  Dr.  Eosser,  spoke  of  the  difliculty  of 
swaging  an  upper  plate  when  the  arch  is  very  high.  He  ad- 
vised swaging  it  in  two  parts,  the  roof  of  the  mouth  and  the 
alveolar  ridge,  and  soldering  them  together  afterward. — 
Items  of  Interest. 

237.  To  Prevent  Teeth  From  Cutting  In  Upper  Plate. 
— A  patient  wearing  an  upper  plate  has  the  anterior  lower 
teeth  in  place,  but  will  not  wear  a  lower  plate,  the  lower 
teeth  often  cut  out  the  rubber,  exposing  the  pins  of  the  upper 
teeth.  To  prevent  this,  fit  small  triangular  pieces  of  gold  or 
aluminum  against  the  lingual  surfaces  of  the  upper  front 
teeth.  The  lower  teeth  striking  against  the  metal  prevents 
exposure  of  the  pins. — Dr.  C.  L.  Boyd,  in  Items. 

238.  A  Plate  Retainer. — The  following  plan  has  been 
in  use  in  my  practice  for  several  years,  and  has  proved  a  per- 
fect success  in  overcoming  those  difiicult  cases  where  we  have 

a  soft  alveolar  ridge  in  connection  with  a 
very  firm,  hard  palate :  Take  the  im- 
pression with  Teague's  compound,  and 
make  cast  as  usual ;  after  the  cast  is  hard 
enough  for  the  base  plate,  examine  the 
mouth  carefully  and  locate  the  margins 


138  DEPARTMENT     B. 

of  the  hard  palate ;  cut  a  pattern  from  heavy  paper,  the 
proper  size  and  shape  to  cover  this  part  of  the  mouth  ;  now 
place  this  pattern  on  a  piece  of  tin  of  the  proper  thickness, 
and  cut  out  Si,  facsimile  of  the  paper  ;  fit  this  on  the  plaster 
cast  exactly  in  the  same  position  that  the  pattern  was  fitted 
to  in  the  mouth ;  press  it  firmly  to  place,  and  fasten  with 
cement,  or  a  couple  of  pins.  ISTow  make  the  base  plate,  and 
mount  in  the  articulator  as  usual ;  in  grinding  up  be  careful 
to  get  a  'perfect  articulation  ;  invest  as  usual,  remove  the  wax 
and  pack  with  best  maroon  or  black  rubber  till  there  is  just 
enough  for  the  plate.  Then  cut  a  piece  of  the  cloth  which 
comes  with  the  rubber  large  enough  to  fully  cover  the  cast^ 
and  lay  over  it  in  order  that  the  flask  may  be  easily  opened ; 
bring  the  flask  entirely  together.  Open,  remove  the  cloth 
and  the  tin  pattern  from  the  cast.  Fold  sheets  of  black 
%oit  ■palate  rubber,  till  it  is  one-half  thicker  than  the  tin  ;  lay 
the  pattern  on  this  and  cut  the  rubber  same  shape  and  size. 
Place  this  piece  of  rubber  in  the  depression  made  in  the  rubber 
by  the  tin  pattern.  Close  and  vulcanize  as  usual.  When  the 
plate  is  all  finished,  pit  the  surface  all  over  as  sbown  in  the 
cut,  with  a  ]^o.  7  round  bur,  while  doing  this,  the  rubber 
and  bur  must  be  kept  wet.  The  soft  rubber  should  follow 
the  hard  ridge  entirely  back  to  the  heel  of  plate,  as  shown  in 
cut.  The  thickness  of  the  soft  rubber  should  be  governed 
by  the  variation  in  difference  between  the  hard  and  soft  tis- 
sues, and  often  the  tin  pattern  should  be  thinned  with  a  file 
in  some  parts  before  fastening  to  cast,  in  order  to  make  the 
soft  rubber  thickest  in  the  hardest  part  of  the  arch.  See  cut. 
— Wm.  H.  Steele. 

239.  Spoon  for  Mixing  Plaster. — If  you  use  a  spoon 
to  mix  plaster,  see  how  much  more  useful  it  will  be  if  you 
place  the  bowl  of  the  spoon  on  the  anvil  and  flatten  it  out. 
It  will  take  up  dry  plaster  just  as  well,  and  will  prove  a  very 
good  spatula. — Dr.  W.  S.  Elliott,  in  Items. 

240.  Burnishing  in  Amalgam. — We  all  believe  amal- 
gam  should  be  burnished   in  the   cavity  for  which    it   is 


USEFUL     HINTS.  139 

iutended  ;  an  absolutely  sure  way  to  accomplish  tins  is  by 
use  of  ball  burnishers  in  the  engine,  the  amalgam  can  thus 
be  forced  in  the  tooth  structure^  rendering  the  filling  very 
perfect. — H.  Prescott  Wilcox,  D.D.S. 

241.  To  Replace  Tooth  in  Gum  Block. — To  repair  a 
broken  gum-block,  grind  out  the  broken  part  and  fit  a  plain 
tooth  neatly. — D.  V.  Beacock,  Ohio  Journal. 

242.  Removing  Impressions. — Referring  generally  to 
all  kinds  of  impressions,  a  difficulty  is  sometimes  experi- 
enced in  removing  them  from  the  mouth  owing  to  suction. 
In  this  case,  request  the  patient  to  cough  slightly.  The 
effort  will  elevate  the  soft  palate  letting  the  air  between, 
rendering  the  removal  no  longer  difficult. — F.  Molloy,  in 
Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

243.  For  Wetting  Corundum  Wheels. — Keep  your 
corundum  wheels  wet  with  water  containing  a  few  drops  of 
alcohol.  If  they  have  become  gummed,  soak  in  a  solution 
of  caustic  potash,  afterward  washing  in  weak  alcohol.  The 
treatment  is  old,  but  none  the  worse  on  that  account. — Odon- 
tological  Journal. 

244.  Lining  Rubber  Plates  with  Metal. — When  you 
have  the  case  in  the  flask  clean  and  ready  to  pack,  cover  the 
male  flask  with  liquid  silex  to  make  it  smooth,  then  lay 
over  the  center  of  the  cast  ISTo.  40  tin  foil  about  one-quarter 
of  an  inch  larger  than  the  "central  cavity."  And  put 
no  other  central  cavity.  ISTow  cover  the  entire  male  cast 
with  jSTo.  4  chemically  pure  tin  foil,  and  rub  it  down  smooth 
with  a  piece  of  cotton  batting,  l^ow  fill  the  other  part  of 
the  flask  with  rubber  and  fill  it  full. 

Take  the  piece  of  cloth  that  comes  between  the  sheets 
of  rubber  and  wash  out  the  starch,  and  lay  it  over  the  rub- 
ber and  press  the  two  parts  together  to  within  one-eighth  of 
an  inch.  Now  take  the  flask  apart  and  wet  the  cloth  and 
take  it  off".     The  cloth  being  woven  open,  will  leave  little 


140  DEPARTMENT     B. 

elevations  on  the  rubber  to  hold  the  fibrous  material.  Trim 
oS  the  surplus  rubber  nearly  to  the  edge  of  the  plate,  then 
lay  Robinson's  Fibrous  Material  on  the  rubber  bed,  lapping 
the  edges  and  it  will  not  move.  ISTow  press  the  flask  to- 
gether with  dry  heat  till  it  is  tight  enough  to  keep  out 
the  water,  make  the  flask  sissing  hot.  Then  boil  it  tight 
together  and  vulcanize  320 — forty-five  minutes,  then  run  the 
thermometer  to  340  and  shut  it  ofi".  When  vulcanized,  wash 
the  plate  in  bicarbonate  of  soda  till  it  is  bright,  and  burnish 
with  a  soft  steel  burnisher ;  now  finish  up  the  rubber  part  of 
your  plate,  and  then  finish  the  lining  with  a  soft  wheel- 
brush  in  a  lathe  with  whiting. 

"We  have  seen  several  cases  pronounced  by  good  dentists 
as  unable  to  wear  rubber,  who  now  rejoice  in  a  healthy 
mouth,  caused  by  using  a  rubber  plate  lined  with  Robinson's 
Fibrous  Material. — Ed.  in  Dental  Review. 

245.  To  Prevent  Weighted  Rubber  Irritating. — To 
prevent  the  metal  in  weighted  rubber  from  irritating  the 
gums,  I  use  ?2ow-weighted  rubber  for  the  last  layer  when 
packing  my  flasks.  Thus  I  get  a  smooth  gum-surface  with 
the  desired  weight. — John  K.  Morse,  D.  D.  S. 

246.  To  Prevent  Flasks  Staining  Hands. — To  prevent 
iron  flasks  from  smutting  the  hands,  put  a  piece  of  un- 
slacked  lime,  the  size  of  a  peanut,  in  the  boiler  while  vul- 
canizing ;  the  spiut  will  be  there  just  the  same  but  has 
undergone  a  chemical  change,  which  keeps  it  from  sticking 
to  the  hands  and  washes  off"  very  easily. — D.  W.  Barker, 
M.D.S. 

247.  \A^hen  Pouring  Impressions. — When  filling  im- 
pressions and  articulating  models  use  a  sheet  of  glass  for  base 
as  the  plaster  does  not  stick  to  it ;  makes  a  smooth  surface 
and  it  may  be  handled  and  turned  around  without  disturb- 
ing the  plaster. — D.  W.  Barker,  M.D.S. 

248.  To  Make  Rubber  Plates  Smooth. — Give  the  cast 
a  heavy  coat  of  liquid  silex  (if  the  cast  is  very  dry  dip  in 


USEFUL     HINTS.  141 

water  first),  then  place  immediately  in  tlie  warming  oven ; 
then  after  a  few  minutes — depending  on  the  temperature — 
cover  the  cast  with  a  piece  of  rubber  and  watch  closely. 
Just  as  soon  as  the  surface  of  the  cast  becomes  hard,  remove 
from  the  oven  and  pack.  Herein  lies  the  secret,  for.  if  the 
silex  becomes  too  dry  it  will  rough  up  and  become  worse 
than  useless,  the  rubber,  however,  prevents  too  rapid,  evapo- 
ration and  avoids  this  mishap. — J.  M.  Overshire,  D.D.S. 

249.  Lower  Partials. — I  have  prepared  these  cases, 
using  gold  for  partial  lower  dentures  where  the  incisors  are  in 
position,  and  sometimes  the  first  bicuspid,  the  object  being 
to  prevent  the  plate  from  pressing  to  the  back  part  of  the 
mouth.  They  are  used  when  there  is  no  molar  to  prevent 
the  plate  being  driven  posteriorly.  The  plate  is  swedged 
in  the  usual  way,  the  band  extending  around  the  ridge  just 
below  the  incisor  tooth,  and  the  whole  put  in  the  mouth 
and  filed  nicely  to  fit.  An  impression  is  then  taken,  and 
the  whole  invested  and  soldered  in  that  way.  The  purpose 
is  to  get  a  band  of  gold  broad  enough  to  prevent  cutting 
in  the  ridge  running  around  the  front  of  the  tooth,  or  the 
ridge  just  below  the  teeth.  One  of  the  advantages  is  to 
prevent  the  necessity  of  using  clasps.  It  is  rarely  that  a 
bicuspid  can  be  clasped  with  satisfaction,  as  it  is  not  adapted 
for  it,  and  I  think  this  method  secures  better  results  than 
clasping.  It  avoids  the  band  that  Dr.  Genese  speaks  of, 
and  makes  a  very  firm  and  substaintial  plate. — Dr.  Kichol, 
in  Odont.  So.  International. 

250.  Vulcanizer  Wrench. — If,  instead  of  the  old 
methods  in  which  perhaps  we  have  jammed  our  hands,  and 
have  felt  like  breaking  a  commandment,  we  have  a  long- 
handled  malleable  iron  wrench,  which  a  village  blacksmith 
can  make,  for  the  top  of  the  boiler,  and  place  this  in  posi- 
tion and  lay  the  vulcanizer  on  its  side  on  the  bench,  and  hit 
the  long  handle  of  the  wrench  a  smart  blow  or  two  with  a 
hammer,  the  work  is  done  without  friction  to  hands  or  feel- 
ing.— W.  H.  Wright,  D.D.S.,  in  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 


142  DEPARTMENT     B. 

251.  Fusion  of  Gum  Sections. — The  teeth  are  ground 
up  and  articulated  the  same  as  any  other  case,  with  this  pro- 
vision, that  they  must  have  wide  V-shaped  joints  to  allow 
for  the  rapid  flowing  of  the  flux  or  enamel.  Then  after  the 
teeth  are  arranged  in  position  and  articulated  properly,  there 
is  an  investment  with  half  plaster,  and  platinum  wire  is  laid 
across  the  platinum  pins,  and  that  is  fused  with  the  blow 
pipe,  which  gives  it  an  added  strength.  Then  take  that  and 
the  skeleton  and  invest  the  joints  with  this  enamel  material, 
putting  it  in  the  oven,  or  rather  on  the  slide.  There  are 
three  different  movements  in  the  gradation  of  the  heat,  as  it 
gradually  comes  to  the  fusing  point.  In  three  minutes  it 
is  raised  one-third  more  of  the  distance,  and  at  the  end  of 
three  more  close  it.  When  you  get  it  in  the  oven  allow  it 
to  remain  there  fifty-five  seconds.  This  same  operation 
with  gas  will  take  about  five  minutes,  so  you  can  see  there  is 
quite  an  item  in  the  amount  of  time  saved.  This  operation 
gives  quite  a  respectable  appearance  to  a  set  of  teeth  on 
rubber.  It  gives  the  plebian  base  quite  a  patrician  appear- 
ance, and  it  has  almost  the  appearance  of  continuous  gum. 
— Dr.  Brimmer,  Extract  Beview. 

252.  Hint  on  Articulating. — It  is  often  difficult  to 
make  a  full  upper  denture  work  satisfactory  when  the 
patient  has  only  the  four  or  six  lower  anterior  teeth.  I 
always  try  to  impress  on  the  patient  the  value  of  a  partial 
lower  plate  to  be  used  in  connection  with  the  upper.  But 
if  only  the  upper  one  is  to  be  made,  in  adapting  the  teeth  to 
conform  to  the  circle  of  the  lower  teeth,  leave  plenty  of  room 
for  the  lower  teeth  to  pass  inside  of  them  without  touching, 
thus  preventing  tipping  at  the  back.  Have  the  lower  teeth 
bite  on  a  floor  or  shoulder  of  rubber  built  on  the  upper  plate 
from  the  pins  of  the  teeth  back  about  one-eighth  of  an  inch 
or  thereabouts.  Also  regulate  the  length  of  the  bite  with 
this  shoulder,  building  it  down  toward  the  points  of  the  teeth, 
as  the  case  admits. — W.  E.  Dadmum,  in  Minn.  So.,  Review. 

253.  Uselessness  of  Air  Chambers. — Air  chambers 
cause  unnatural  formations  in  the  roof  of  the  mouth,  in  pro- 


USEFUL     HINTS.  143 

portion  to  the  size  and  depth  of  the  chamber  used  on  the 
plate ;  and  the  thickness  to  which  a  plate  must  be  made  to 
permit  such  a  depth  of  the  suction,  often  impedes  rather  than 
facilitates  the  enunciation,  to  say  nothing  of  the  unpleasant 
sensation  of  constant  drawing  or  sucking,  till  the  membrane, 
drawn  in  the  chamber,  becomes  callous  and  lifeless.  How 
much  better,  for  humanity  sake,  it  would  be  for  all  dentists 
to  make  their  plates  the  shape  of  the  mouth  and  abandon 
the  useless  air  chamber. 

I  wish  to  say  here  how  every  dentist  can  satisfy  himself 
in  five  minutes  of  the  inutility  of  the  air  chamber. 

When  you  have  fitted  the  teeth  to  the  mouth  you  say 
to  yourself,  "  What  a  good  suction  the  air  makes  to  this 
plate,"  but  remove  the  plate  from  the  mouth  and  fill  the  air 
chamber  with  soft  beeswax  and  have  it  so  it  will  not  bear  on 
the  roof  of  the  mouth,  and  you  will  find,  perhaps  to  your 
satisfaction,  the  same  suction  that  there  was  before.  My 
method  is  to  make  three  or  four  ridges  across  the  back  part 
of  the  roof  of  the  mouth  on  the  plate  by  scratching  gullies 
in  the  model.  If  the  gum  is  soft  I  make  these  from  one  side 
to  the  other,  across  the  entire  model,  but  if  it  is  hard  (as  the 
model  shows)  then  I  do  not  make  them  entirely  across,  but 
only  on  each  side  of  the  median  line. — Lee  Stephen,  in  Ohio 
Dental  Journal. 

254.  New  Lining  for  Vulcanite  Plates. — Rubber-dam 
as  a  lining  for  vulcanite  plates  cannot  be  surpassed.  You 
proceed  as  usual  with  your  case  and  when  ready  for  packing, 
first  pack  round  the  pins  and  flange  ;  then  cut  a  piece  of  red 
rubber  the  shape  and  size  of  your  cast,  large  enough  to  come 
up  as  high  as  you  will  require  your  case  when  finished. 
Then  lay  a  new,  clean,  thin  piece  of  rubber-dam  over  this  and 
cut  out  a  piece  to  fit ;  remove  and  paint  your  red  plate  all 
over  with  good  red  or  black  rubber  solder  or  cement  on  one 
side,  being  careful  that  it  is  all  covered  well  with  the  cement. 
ISTow  take  the  piece  of  dam  and  place  it  smoothly  on  the 
painted  side  of  your  plate  ;  press  well  down ;  make  it  quite 
smooth,  being  sure  that  there  are  no  air  bubbles.     If  your 


144  DEPARTMENT     B. 

dam  has  stretched,  which  it  will,  trim  the  edges  to  the  red 
plate.  Place  your  plate  in  the  flask  so  that  your  dam  will 
come  next  your  cast.  When  you  close  your  flask,  be  sure 
and  see  that  the  plate  comes  well  up  around  the  flange  so  as  to 
hug  close  to  the  model  and  not  allow  any  red  rubber  to  be 
forced  inside.  Close  your  case  by  dry  heat.  Use  paper 
vacuums  and  not  tin,  as  the  dam  will  not  harden  over  tin. 

Rubber-dam  is  better  than  gold  for  a  lining,  as  it  is  a  non- 
conductor, prevents  sore  mouths  and  makes  a  very  tough 
plate  almost  impossible  to  break ;  so  you  can  make  a  thin, 
light  piece  of  work. — L.  Crouther,  in  Aynerican  Journal. 

255.  To     Prevent     Polishing     ^Vheels    Splitting. — 

Brush  wheels,  etc.,  with  wood  center  should  not  be  left  in 
water  longer  than  necessary,  nor  should  they  be  left  on  the 
mandrel.  Being  put  on  dry,  then  soaked,  the  wood  swells 
and  something  must  split  or  warp  out  of  shape.  Many  a 
wheel  is  condemned  when  it  is  not  the  fault  of  the  make-up 
but  of  its  user  and  abuser. — A.  Secor. 

256.  Refitting  Rubber  Plates. — In  rubber  plates,  where 
absorption  has  taken  place  after  the  plate  has  been  worn, 
and  the  articulation  is  still  perfect  refit  them  as  follows : 

Take  a  new  impression,  and  make  the  model  as  usual ; 
heat  the  model  in  hot  water,  place  soft  wax  around  oh  the 
ridge,  and  press  the  plate  firmly  down  over  this.  Now 
invest  the  case  as  usual,  separate,  pack,  and  vulcanize  and 
your  plate  will  come  out  a  perfect  fit  with  but  little  work. 
This  method  can  also  be  used  where  teeth  do  not  articulate 
correctly ;  by  just  cutting  them  out  of  the  rubber,  place  in 
their  proper  position  in  the  w^ax,  and  proceed  as  above. — C. 
L.  Smith,  D.D.S. 

•  257.  Strong,  Thin  Celluloid  Plates.— In  making  cellu- 
loid plates  by  the  Seabury  method,  dry  out  the  case  in  the 
press  for  two  hours,  then  mold  at  300°  F.,  cool  the  press 
down  with  a  sponge  and  cold  water  till  the  thermometer 
indicates  240°  ;  then  close  the  door  of  the  press  and  let  alone 


USEFUL     HINTS.  145 

till  cold.  A  thin  plate  made  in  this  manner  on  a  metal 
cast  will  outlast  a  rubber  one  of  twice  its  thickness. — Dr. 
W.  F.  Johnson. 

258.  Partial  Plate  ^Vith  Bands. — There  is  one  other 
little  point  I  should  like  just  to  mention,  it  is  in  connection 
with  those  very  awkward  cases  in  the  .upper  jaw  where  the 
six  front  teeth  alone  remain  standins;  all  close  tosrether. 
Suction  is  generallj'  difficult  to  obtain,  so  it  becomes  neces- 
sary to  make  a  gold  plate  with  bands  round  the  front  of  the 
canines.  The  patient  very  naturally  complains  of  their 
showing.  A  good  way  to  get  over  the  difficulty  is  to  cover 
the  band,  if  broad,  with  white  rubber ;  or  if  narrow  and  near 
the  gum,  with  pink.  The  band  should  be  nicked  with  a 
very  fine  saw  along  both  borders,  the  cuts  being  made  close 
together  and  not  more  than  one-thirty-second  of  an  inch 
deep.  The  rest  of  the  surface  being  barbed  with  a  sharp 
pointed  graver,  in  alternate  directions,  paint  over  the  band 
with  chloro-rubber  and  press  a  fragment  of  warmed  rubber 
well  down  over  this,  flask  and  vulcanize. 

Should  it  be  afterward  necessary  to  tighten  the  band, 
gently  warm  it  before  doing  so. — N".  Reeve,  Extract  British 
Journal. 

259.  To  Remove  Teeth  From  Rubber  Plates.— When 
it  is  necessary  to  remove  teeth  from  an  old  rubber  plate, 
place  the  case  in  a  small  dish;  cover  with  glycerin  and 
place  over  your  burner  till  quite  hot.  The  glycerin  will 
soon  soften  the  rubber,  so  the  teeth  can  be  easily  removed 
with  but  little  force  and  without  endangering  the  pins  or 
teeth ;  wash  the  teeth  in  water,  which  will  remove  all  traces 
of  the  glycerin.  Should  there  be  stains  on  the  teeth  after 
removal,  or  small  pieces  of  rubber  between  the  pins,  im- 
merse them  in  nitric  acid  for  a  short  time,  which  will 
remove  all  stains  and  rubber. — C.  W.  Sylvester,  D.D.S. 

260.  To  Get  Cast  of  Broken  Lower  Plate.— Hold  the 

pieces  together  so  the  inside  or  the  outside  edges  of  the 


146  DEPARTMENT     B. 

plate  at  the  break  fit  closely  together ;  then  drop  melted 
touffh  wax  over  break  and  let  cool,  Brinsi;  the  other  edares 
together  and  treat  the  same.  Take  a  stiff  bar  of  cold  wax 
just  long  enough  to  reach  across  the  plate,  from  second  molar 
to  second  molar,  fasten  the  bar  to  plate  with  melted  wax. 
When  cold  the  cast  can  be  poured  without  danger  of  dis- 
placing.— A.  Secor. 

261.  To  Strengthen  Poor  Plaster. — If  so  unfortunate 
as  to  have  a  batch  of  plaster  that  will  not  set  hardy  a  little 
fine  ground  common  stucco  mixed  with  it  will  make  it  good 
at  a  cost  of  a  few  cents.  Better  to  mix  them  as  needed,  as 
too  much  stucco  will  make  a  cast  rough,  while  more  can  be 
added  for  flaskino-.— A.  Secor. 


DEPARTMENT  C. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  149 


DEPARTMENT  C 


262.  Articulation  of  Gold  Crowns. — For  the  making 
and  articulation  of  gold  crowns  I  find  no  plan  more  simple, 
or  more  perfect,  than  one  I  have  been  making  for  the  past 
two  years.  After  having  made  the  band  and  contoured  it 
with  pliers,  or  otherwise ;  select  from  a  collection  of  molar 
dies  the  die  nearest  the  size  of  the  band,  and  swage  the 
grinding  surface  of  22-k.  gold  very  thin— 34,  35,  or  36  gage 
on  a  block  of  lead  or  soft  wood.  Now  stick  this  to  the  band 
with  the  smallest  particle  of  solder.  Trim  the  cap,  particu- 
larly proximal  sides,  so  that  it  will  pass  readily  between  the 
teeth.  The  band  is  now  placed  in  position.'  If  force,  suf- 
ficient to  bend  the  grinding  surface,  is  required  to  get  the 
band  in  position,  place  under  the  cap  an  ordinary  foot 
plugger,  and  push  the  band  in  its  place.  The  patient  is 
directed  to  close  the  jaws,  and  owing  to  the  thinness  of  the 
gold  grinding  suface  the  impression  of  the  opposing  tooth 
is  easily  made,  thereby  securing  the  correct  bite.  The  crown 
is  now  removed.  The  cap  and  band  are  held  together  by 
the  ordinary  soldering  pliers,  and  the  cusps  are  filled  with 
2Q  or  18-k.  solder,  which,  of  course,  unites  the  band  and  cap. 
The  crown  is  now  finished  in  the  ordinary  way.  This  is  as 
good  a  crown  as  can  be  made,  and  recommends  itself  because 
it  is  so  quickly  made. — Gordon  White,  in  Items. 

263.  Quick  Method  Making  Counter-Die  for  Gold 
Crowns. — Make  of  sheet  brass,  using  hard  solder,  a  cup 
three-fourths  of  an  inch  in  diameter  and  half  an  inch  deep, 
having  a  spur  on  one  side  by  means  of  which  it  can  be  held 
in  a  pair  of  pliers ;  fill  it  with  Melotte's  fusible  metal. 
Select  a  natural  or  an  artificial  tooth  for  a  model ;  fill  the 
soft  rubber  ring  that  comes  with  Melotte's  Moldine  with 
plaster,  and  invest  the  tooth  so  that  the  cusps  project  out  of 


150  i  DEPARTMENT-   C. 

the  plaster  as  far  as  it  is  desired  to  copy  them  ;  when  dry 
remove  the  riibher  ring.  Melt  the  metal  in  the  cup,  and 
just  before  it  hardens  in  cooling  press  the  cusps  of  the  tooth 
in  it.  The  surplus  metal  will  run  over  the  sides  of  the 
cup,  and  a  sharp  and  perfect  counter-model  will  be  secured, 
in  which  the  gold  plate  can  be  swaged  after  the  method 
of  the  die-plate^  using  the  lead  hubs  or  bullets.  I  also 
use  for  the  purpose  sheet  lead  one-sixteenth  of  an  inch 
thick,  cut  in  strips  two  and  one-half  inches  long  and  one- 
quarter  to  one-half  an  inch  wide,  one  end  of  which  is  folded 
on  itself  two  or  three  times  letter  S  fashion,  the  other  end 
being  long  enough  to  hold  it  by.  As  it  becomes  flattened  in 
swaging,  it  can  be  folded  back  and  forth  over  the  gold  plate. 
By  having  one  or  more  of  these  cups  and  a  sufficient 
selection  of  teeth  already  invested  in  plaster,  it  is  but  a 
moment's  work  to  select  the  size  desired,  and  make  the 
counter-die.  Should  it  lose  its  finer  lines  in  swaging,  it  can 
be  remelted  and  an  exact  duplicate  obtained  in  less  than  a 
minute. — Dr.  C.  H.  Eobinson,  in  Dental  .Review, 

264.  A  Gold  Bicuspid  Crown. — Remove  all  foreign 
substance,  treat  antiseptically,  and  fill  pulp  canal.  Grind 
away  all  bulging  portions  of  crown,  shaping  it  so  that  a 
band  can  be  perfectly  fitted  to  the  gum  margin.  Use  fine 
gold,  gage  26.  Cut  a  strip  a  third  wider  than  the  finished 
crown  will  be.  Make  a  simple  band,  secure  the  joint  with 
20-k.  solder.  Now  build  up  the  root  or  remnant  of  crown 
with  wax  or  modeling  compound  to  the  required  shape,  ex- 
cept that  the  proportions  must  be  thinner  and  shorter  than 
a  proper  occlusion  calls  for.  Eeturn  the  band  to  the  root, 
supposing  it  to  have  been  previously  fitted,  and  be  careful 
not  to  disturb  the  wax.  'Bow  mix  a  little  plaster  to  suit- 
able consistency  and  fill  the  projecting  end  of  the  band, 
pressing  the  plaster  against  and  around  the  wax.  When 
set,  remove  the  band  from  the  root.  If  the  wax  comes  with 
it,  melt  it  out  with  hot  water.  We  have  now  an  impression 
of  the  ideal  tooth  surrounded  by  the  band.  Allow  the  plas- 
ter to  dry  by  holding  it  over  an  alcohol  flame. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  151 

Have  at  baud  an  iron  ring  about  one  incb  in  diameter 
and  an  inch  or  more  deep.  Fill  tbis  with  prepared  molding 
sand ;  take  the  band  and  bury  it  in  the  sand — open  end  up- 
ward— all  but  about  a  thirty-second  of  an  inch  of  the  free 
edge.  Mix  some  whiting  with  alcohol  to  a  thick  creamy 
consistency^  and  with  a  camel's-hair  brush  paint  the  inside 
of  the  band  and  the  outside  of  the  exposed  edge.  Allow  to 
dry.  Over  the  iron  ring  stretch  a  two-inch  section  of  heavy 
rubber  tubing.  (These  appliances  are  known  as  Melotte's 
and  are  sold  at  the  depots.)  We  have  now  a  completed 
matrix  in  which  we  will  cast  fusible  metal.  When  cold, 
Tift  from  the  ring,  and  wash  away  all  sand  and  plaster.  It 
will  be  seen,  now,  that  we  have  a  metallic  tooth  surrounded 
by  the  band,  the  cervical  end  of  which  is  clamped  by  the 
metal,  so  that  no  change  can  result  through  subsequent 
manipulation.  The  cusps  are  formed  by  slitting  the  free 
end  of  the  band  in  three  or  four  places,  and  with  a  suitable 
mallet  folding  the  sections  inward  on  each  other;  at  the 
same  time  the  band  is  contained  on  the  metal  die.  At  this 
juncture  the  crown  can  be  easily  removed  from  the  die  and 
carried  again  to  the  mouth  for  trial.  Before  completion, 
however,  a  few  pieces  of  18-k.  solder  with  flux  should  be 
melted  inside  of  the  crown  to  bind  all  the  folds  tos-ether. 
Then  the  inequalities  of  the  cusps  can  be  finished  with  file 
or  corundum  disks,  and  the  occlusion  perfectly  adjusted.  A 
little  practice  will  show  the  simplicity  of  the  manipulation. 
—W.  S.  Elliott,  D.D.fe.,  in  Items. 

265.     Contouring  Bicuspid  and  Molar  Gold  Crowns. — 

Select  (for  instance)  a  bicuspid  natural  tooth,  perfect  in 
form,  from  your  collection,  fasten  its  root  firmly  in  a  vice — 
saw  the  crown  from  the  root  at  the  neck.  Invest  the  cusp 
surface  of  this  crown  in  a  batch  of  plaster  of  Paris,  allowing 
all  of  the  crown  to  project  from  the  plaster  except  the  cusps 
or  that  part  that  would  correspond  to  a  swaged  or  molded 
cap  (see  Fig.  1). 

From  this  make,  with  the  aid  of  molding  sand,  a  zinc 
die.     A  variety  of  these  dies,  consisting  of  upper  and  lower 


152 


DEPARTMENT    C. 


molars  and  bicuspids  should  be  had.     These  are  to  be  used 
for  contouring  in  the  following  manner: 

Prepare  stump  of  tooth  in  the  mouth  according  to  jour 
accustomed  plan  ;  take  measurement  of  same  with  binding 


Fig, I. 


FiG.  2. 


wire  or  otherwise ;  from  this  measurement  make  a  cylindri- 
cal gold  band ;  then  select  one  of  the  zinc  dies  whose  cir- 
cumference at  the  neck  of  tooth  is  equal  to  or  a  little  less 
than  measurement  of  root  in^  mouth,  then  force  the  band 
slowly  over  that  part  of  the  die,  representing  tooth,  tapping 
and  adjusting  as  it  is  driven  down.  The  band  will  take  the 
exact  form  of  the  cast  of  the  natural  tooth.  It  is  now  ready 
to  adjust  on  the  root  or  stump  in  the  mouth  and  articulate 
in  the  usual  waj'. 

You  will  find  this  a  convenient  and  effective  method  of 
making  a  gold  crown.  Anatomical  m  form,  such  a  result 
can  not  be  brought  about  with  contouring  forceps. 

Another  method  that  I  have  found  to  be  of  almost  equal 
value  is  the  following: 

Place  on  a  semi-conical  j^iece  of  wood  (or  other  material) 
two  inches  long  and  five-eighths  of  an  inch  at  base,  a  natu- 
ural  tooth  crown  by  means  of  hard  wax,  as  seen  in  Fig.  2, 
buccal  surface  of  tooth  upward.  The  fine  lines  in  Fig.  1 
marked  a,  represent  the  part  of  tooth  imbedded  in  plaster^ 


USEFUL     HINTS.  153 

and  a  in  JSTo.  2  the  part  of  tooth  imbedded  in  hard  wax. 
With  zinc  cast  of  No.  2,  stamp  the  band  before  it  is  bent 
in  a  circle  and  soldered. 

The  buccal  surface  is  thus  contoured  as  nature  would 
have  it.  and  the  remaining  portion  of  band  can  be  formed 
with  pliers  and  fitted,  articulated  and  finished  in  the  usual 
way. — H.  S.  Lowry,  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

266.  Enameling  Gold  Crowns. — After  the  gold  crown 
is  made  and  fitted  to  the  tooth  in  the  mouth,  the  sides  prop- 
erly stifiened,  the  cusps  or  incisive  edge  strengthened,  it  is 
boiled  in  acid  and  then  adjusted  in  the  mouth,  and  the  por- 
tion of  the  labial  section  which  is  exposed  is  outlined  on  the 
surface  of  the  gold.  The  crown  is  then  removed,  the 
marked  area  ground  quite  thin,  and  then  perforated  with  a; 
spear-pointed  drill.  The  crown  is  again  adjusted  in  the 
mouth,  and  the  thin  labial  section  depressed  to  make  all  the 
room  required  for  the  inlay.  The  crown  is  then  removed, 
and  glass  filling  material  of  the  proper  shade  is  mixed  with 
water  to  the  consistency  of  paste,  a  small  portion  of  which. 
is  spread  over  the  depressed  surface  of  gold.  The  surplus 
moisture  is  then  extracted  with  a  napkin,  and  any  dry  par- 
ticles of  the  material  which  may  have  fallen  on  the  gold 
remove  with  a  camel's-hair  brush.  The  crown  is  then 
placed  with  the  enamel  upward  in  a  small  platinum  muffie 
having  a  depression  in  its  base  to  hold  the  crown  steadily. 
'The  inside  of  the  muffie  is  coated  with  whiting.  The 
muffle  is  then  placed  on  a  charcoal  soldering-block,  and 
gradually  heated  up  with  a  gas  blow-pipe,  blowing  the 
flame  against  the  closed  end.  A  light  red  heat  will  fuse  the 
enamel.  The  crown  is  then  removed,  sufficient  enamel 
added  to  give  proper  form  to  the  part,  and  the  fusing  re- 
peated. The  surface  of  the  enamel  is  then  ground  level  and 
smooth,  the  edges  finished  and  the  dust  removed,  after 
which  any  pits  or  inequalities  are  filled  in,  the  surface  being 
coated  by  means  of  a  brush  with  enamel  material  mixed, 
quite  thin,  and  the  fusing  again  repeated,  the  heat  being 
carried  to  a  higher  point  than  at  the  previous  fusings.     The 


154  DEPARTMENT    C. 

result  is  a  dense,  smooth  inlay  of  enamel.  The  enamel  is 
applied  in  successive  layers,  and  the  color  is  very  well  con- 
trolled, though  not  perfectly ;  but  the  result  is  not  so  objec- 
tionable in  the  mouth  as  a  gold  crown  or  a  discolored  tooth. 
The  melting  of  the  crown  is  avoided  by  turning  the  open 
end  to  the  operator,  and  directing  the  heat  at  the  back  of 
the  crown.  You  will  probably  melt  a  crown  or  two  at  first 
in  finding  out  just  how  to  manipulate  it,  but  a  little  practice 
makes  perfect.  The  alloy  used  is  three  or  four  per  cent  of 
platinum  to  gold  of  .997  to  .099. — Dr.  George  Evans,  Amer- 
ican Society. 

267.  Crown  Grinder. — Some  one  during  the  meetiug-^ 
of  the  Southern  Dental  Association  at  Old  Point  Comfort,. 
Ya.,  in  August,  1888,  presumably  Dr.  G,  S.  Staples,  of  Sher- 
man, Texas,  described  his  method  of  grinding  Logan  tooth 
crowns  substantially  as  follows  :  Take  a 
hollow  mandrel  like  l^o.  305,  and  while 
in  the  hand-piece  heat  the  end  and 
mount  on  it  a  corundum  wheel  such  as 
No.  00,  beinsr  careful  to  make  its  outer 
face  run  true.  The  neck  of  a  Logan  crown  can  then  be 
ground  without  any  risk  of  grinding  the  post,  which  enters 
and  is  protected  by  the  smooth  socket  of  the  mandrel. — W. 
S.  H.,  in  Cosmos. 

268.  Crown  Dies  of  Watt's  Metal. — Watt's  metal 
makes  an  excellent  die  for  striking  up  gold  crowns  by  Dr. 
Melotte's  method,  using  the  Melotte  metal  for  the  counter. 
— Exchange. 

269.  Double  Backing  for  Richmond  Crowns. — Use 
pure  gold  about  No.  38  to  40,  standard  gage.  After  grind- 
ing the  tooth  to  fit  the  ferrule  cut  out  of  a  piece  of  gold, 
leaving  it  long  enough  to  cover  the  tip  of  the  tooth  at  an 
angle  of  45  degrees  ;  cut  the  second  piece  a  little  longer,  so 
the  solder  will  not  join  the  two ;  do  not  rivet  the  pins,  but 


USEFUL     HINTS.  155 

use  sticky  wax  to  hold  the  backings  in  place  till  the  crown 
is  in  the  investment,  and  then  solder  in  the  usual  way.     This . 
rule  is  found,  when  followed  out,  to  give  good  satisfaction 
after  using  it  over  a  year,  having  had  no  trouble  with  checked 
teeth. — Items. 

270.  To  Prevent  Porcelain  Checking  from  Heat. — Fire 
checking  of  porcelain  facings  has  been  a  great  annoyance  to 
me  ever  since  I  have  undertaken  to  make  a  bridge  or  crown 
with  porcelain  facings.  By  the  following  method  I  have 
overcome  this  difficult}" : 

First,  back  your  facing  with  very  thin  platinum,  gage 
36  (standard);  and  second  backing,  gage  30  (standard). 
i^Tow,  before  placing  this  over  the  pins  in  the  facing,  put  on  a 
thin  piece  of  gold  foil,  three  thicknesses  of  Xo.  4,  then  the 
thinnest  platinum,  ]!s^o.  36,  coat  very  thinly  with  borax,  then 
place  on  the  ^o.  30,  press  tightly  down  to  the  facing  and 
bend  the  pins  over  to  hold  in  position  ;  then  trim  ail  off,  not 
allowing  any  of  the  backing  to  lay  over  the  facing,  but  keep- 
ing them  independent  of  each  other,  and  before  final  backing 
see  that  they  do  not  touch ;  leaving  a  very  small  space  be- 
tween each  backing,  ^ow  invest,  remove  all  wax  around 
the  teeth  and  the  space  left  between  the  first  backing ;  pack 
closely  with  gold  foil ;  be  sure  not  to  let  any  borax  come  in 
contact  with  the  facing,  and  this  is  overcome  by  packing  in 
all  the  space  between  the  caps.  The  foil  being  packed  in 
this  manner,  the  solder  will  flow  all  over  alike  as  it  makes  a 
connection  and  leaves  no  places  for  the  solder  to  jump,  but 
makes  it  nice  and  solid  with  the  gold  foil.  Also  place  a 
small  roll  of  foil  between  the  porcelain  facing  and  the  cusps, 
and  force  it  down  tight,  and  there  will  be  no  space  left  on 
the  top  of  the  facing  after  the  bridge  is  flowed,  and  also 
allows  for  the  expansion  of  the  metals,  as  the  soft  foil  is 
between  the  porcelain  facing  and  the  solid  cusp. — J.  L.  Har- 
kinson,  in  Odoniologkal  Journal. 

Til.  Porcelain  Tooth-Crown  with  Gum. — Fit  a  plat- 
inum collar  and  cap  to  the  root-end,  and  perforate  the  cap 


156 


DEPARTMENT    C. 


to  allow  a  platinum  post  to  be  pushed  through  in  the  root 
and  project  a  little  from  the  cap.  Select  a  pinless,  plate, 
rubber,  or  other  porcelain  crown ;  fit,  articulate  and 
wax  it  to  the  cap  and  post,  and  remove  for  vertical 
investment  in  just  enough  plaster  and  marble-dust 
or  asbestos  to  hold  the  parts  together.  When  set, 
remove  the  wax  and  fill  with  porcelain  body,  dry 
thoroughly,  and  biscuit  about  three  minutes  in  the 
furnace.  So  soon  as  cool  enough  to  handle,  carefully  cut  the 
investment  away  from  the  crown  and  the  cap,  add  body  to 
fill  the  cracks,  and  fuse  in  the  furnace.  If  the  gum  has  re- 
ceded from  about  the  neck  of  the  root,  gum-enamel  can  be 
modeled  over  the  collar,  and  the  final  firing  (with  but  one 
investment)  will  produce  a  very  artistic  restoration  of  both 
crown  and  gum,  to  be  mounted  with  cement  as  usual. — W. 
M.  Sharpe,  in  Cosmos. 


-I  desire  to  sug- 


272.  Tool  for  Bending  Crown  Pivots. 
gest  a  plan  which  I  have  used,  whereby  the  barbed  pivot, 
with  the  screw  on  the  end  (which  had  been  secured  in  the 
root  with  amalgam)  may  be  bent  without  danger  of  defacing 
or  injuring  the  screw.  A  small  instrument  may  be  easily 
made  of  a  piece  of  iron  M'^ire,  as  will  be  better  understood  by 
the  following  figures : 


The  sectional  view  represents  a  screw-thread  cut  on  the 
inside.  The  slot  "A"  is  made  to  facilitate  the  cutting  of  the 
screw-thread  witkin,  which  for  amateurs  is  somewhat  difli- 
cult  without  it,  the  thread  corresponding  to  the  one  used  on 
the  pivot.  When  desirous  of  bending  the  wire  or  pivot  at 
the  proper  angle,  screw  the  instrument  on  to  the  pivot,  and 
the  bending  may  be  done  without  fear  of  bruising  the  threads, 
which,  on  the  platinum  wire  used  for  the  pivot,  is  very  easily 
done,  as  that  metal  is  quite  soft.  Two  of  these,  instruments 
will  be  required,  one  for  the  thread  used  on  large  centrals 


USEFUL     HINTS.  157 

and  cuspids ;  the  other  for  small  centrals  and  laterals. — Theo- 
dore F.  Chupein,  D.D.S.,  in  Cosmos. 

273.  Temporary  Crown. — Grind  broken  stump  of 
natural  tooth  down,  to  near  gum  border ;  take  an  English 
plate  tooth  that  suits  the  space,  and  for  a  post,  a  stiff  piece 
of  roughened  wire  flattened  at  one  end.  At  the  flattened  end 
file  two  small  notches  in  opposite  edges,  for  the  pins  of  the 
tooth  to  be  bent  in  to  hold  the  wire  firm.  This  makes  the 
crown,  and  can  be  set  with  gutta-percha  or  '"  absorbent  cot- 
ton" wrapped  about  the  wire  and  put  up  the  root  canal ;  the 
swelling  of  the  cotton  holds  it  firm  in  the  root,  and  can  be 
easily  removed  and  reset  each  time  we  have  to  treat  the  root. 
Any  of  my  patients  who  have  had  to  wear  this  crown  have 
been  well  satisfied  with  it.  The  first  one  I  used  was  in  the 
case  of  a  gentleman  who  had  just  broken  off  a  dead  root  cen- 
tral. I  set  him  one,  and  in  thirty  minutes  he  was  back  at 
work  in  his  store. — J.  F.  Simpson,  in  Dominion  Journal. 

274.  Rapid  Fitting  Crown  Bands. — After  shaping  end 
of  root  take  the  measure  with  a  loop  of  fine  wire  held  in  pin 
vise  and  twisted  till  tight,  remove  and  slip  it  down  on  an  old 
mirror  handle  or  other  tapering,  elongated,  conical-shaped 
piece  of  wood  or  iron,  working  it  carefully  as  far  as  it  will 
go  ;  mark  its  position  by  scratch  with  a  knife  passing  around  ; 
remove  it,  cut  open,  straighten  ends,  cut  strip  of  gold  slight!}^ 
shorter,  bend  around  and  solder  to  form  band,  and  slip  band 
down  on  the  stick  or  mandrel.  It  should  be  found  a  trifle 
smaller  than  the  circumference  at  the  mark.  If  larger  it 
will,  of  course,  be  necessary  to. cut  open  and  shorten  it.  If 
much  too  small,  slip  over  end  of  your  small  anvil  or  handle 
of  some  instrument,  plugger  for  instance,  and  tap  carefully 
with  riveting:  hammer  till  stretched  to  desired  size.  I  use 
my  gold  29  gage,  23k.,  and  cut  the  strip  from  one-half  to  one 
line  short,  thus  always  permitting  a  little  hammering  to 
stretch  band  to  required  size.  The  band  when  complete  to 
fit  to  root  should  reach  just  above  the  mark,  never  quite  to 
it,  or  past  it,  to  allow  for  stretching  of  wire  in  removing  it 
from  root  and  slipping  on  to  the  mandrel,  and  will  almost 


158 


DEPARTMENT    C. 


always  be  found  to  lit  at  once,  and  tightly,  thus  saving  your 
patient  the  annoyance  and  pain  of  repeated  trials,  and  your- 
self a  considerable  amount  of  time.  The  cap  and  pin  are  com- 
pleted in  the  usual  manner.  It  seldom  requires  more  than  one 
to  one  and  one-half  hours  to  complete  cap  and  pin,  to  the  point 
of  taking  the  impression. — ^Vincent  Fischer,  in  Dental  Review. 

275.  The  Yoke  Crown.— Dr.  George  T.  Baker,  at  the 
American  Academy  of  Dental  Science,  exhibited  a  device 
w^hich  he  uses  to  insert  a  tooth,  temporarily,  when  one  has 
been  extracted.  It  consists  of  a  yoke  of  thin  platina  wire, 
the  two  arms  of  which  bend  over  the  teeth  adjoining  the 
space  to  be  filled.  A  plate  tooth  is  ground  to  fit  the  gum 
and  rest  on  the  yoke  ;  the  tooth  is  backed  with  platina  and 
soldered,  and  finally  tied  in  place  with  floss  silk. — Items. 

276.  To  Repair  Pivot  Crown. — It  sometimes  happens 
that  an  artificial  tooth  crown  mounted  on  a  pivot  breaks  off, 
leaving  the  pivot  firmly  fixed  in  the  root,  from  which  it  may 
be  for  several  reasons  impracticable  to  remove  it.  In  such  a 
case  I  employ  an  engine  trephine  (Fig.  1)  to  bore  a  groove, 
C,  in  the  root  end  A,  Fig.  2,  around  the  pivot,  B,  to  a  depth 
consistent  with  the  strength  of  both  the  pivot  and  the  root. 
A  hole,  D,  is  then  drilled  in  the  palatal  part  of  the  root  end 
to  the  same  depth  as  the  groove  around  the  pivot.  From  a 
gold  or  platinum  tube  of  the  size  of  the  trephine,  a  section. 


Fig. 


Fig. 


Fig.  4. 


C,  Fig.  3,  is  cut  and  soldered  to 
a  piece  of  platinum  wire,  D',  which 
just  fits  the  hole  D  in  the  root  A, 
Fig.  2.  The  tube  and  wire  are 
•then  put  in  place,  and  the  tube 
made  flush  with  the  pivot  and  root 
end,  A  plain  tooth,  E,  Fig.  4,  is  selected, 
ground,  and  backed  with  platinum,  F,  so 


USEFUL     HINTS.  159 

that  a  part  of  the  backing  may  be  bent  and  cut  as  shown  at 
G,  to  the  shape  of  the  root  end,  and  drilled  at  d  to  fit  over 
the  wire  D',  Fig.  3.  Hard  wax  is  then  melted  to  unite  the 
backing  to  the  wire,  so  that  all  may  be  withdrawn  from  the 
root,  invested,  and  soldered  to  form  a  contour  which,  when 
subsequently  finished,  will  make  a  strong,  smooth  crown-back, 
H,  Fig.  5,  which  shows  in  section  the  several  parts  of  the 
crown  as  reset  with  suitable  thin  cement  on  the  pivot  and 
root  before  described.  It  is  obvious  that  such  a  crown  is 
secure  in  its  seat,  and  a  number  of  them  so  set  have  proved 
the  method  to  be  a  success. — Emil  Amend,  D.D.S.,  Metz, 
Germany,  in  Cosmos. 

277.  Making  a  Double  Cap  Crown. — After  adjusting  a 
gold  crown  on  a  tooth  remove  it  and  wind  around  it  a  piece 
of  paper,  which  fasten  with  a  clamp  or  string.  Slipping  the 
paper  band  off,  pour  in  Mellotte's  fusible  metal  and  immerse 
it  in  cold'  water  to  cool  ofi^,  and  have  a  die  on  which  to  ad- 
just a  telescoping  cap.  On  this  wind  ]^o.  30  to  32  pure  gold 
w^ire,  one  piece  being  left  higher  than  the  rest,  and  which 
bind  over  the  top  of  the  crown. 

Remove  this  and  solder,  adjusting  it  to  the  crown- 
like die.  Outside  of  this  solder  a  narrow  strip  of  No.  32. 
If  there  is  any  fear  of  the  solder  getting  inside  of  the 
telescopic  cap,  it  can  be  painted  with  whiting  which  prevents 
the  solder  from  flowing  where  you  don't  want  it.  When  all 
is  ready,  melt  a  little  fusible  metal  in  a  cup,  and  drop  the 
crowned-die  in  it,  and  the  gold  crown  will  float  to  the  sur- 
face. Pick  it  out,  and  if  a  little  of  the  fusible  metal  still 
adheres,  immerse  it  in  nitric  acid,  which  will  remove  the  last 
particle.  It  is  then  ready  to  be  adjusted  to  the  crown  in  the 
mouth.  This  will  be  found  a  clean  and  most  accurate  method.. 
— G.  Evans,  in  Southern  Journal. 

278.  Varnishing  Teeth  Before  Crowning. — Dr.  C.  V; 
Rosser  uses  shellac  varnish  on  live  teeth  to  be  crowned  to 
overcome  sensitiveness. — Items  of  Interest. 


160  DEPARTMENT   C. 

279.  Perfect  Fitting  Gold  Crown. — The  whole  crown 
is  cut  oft'  almost  even  with  the  gum ;  there  will  still  be  a  thin 
portion  of  the  enamel  left  surrounding  the  root,  and  this  can 
easily  be  removed  by  using  the  No.  2  and  No.  3  scalers. 

Around  this  conically  shaped  root  (the  removal  of  the 
enamel  alone  will  generally  shape  it  sutRciently)  fit  a  22k. 
gold  band  so  as  to  come  in  contact  w^ith  all  parts  of  the 
conical  portion  of  the  root,  which  gives  us  a  conical  band. 
To  make  this  band,  make  a  tin-foil  model.  From  this  an 
absolute  shape  in  gold  is  obtained  more  quickly,  and  a  sav- 
ing of  gold  results.  This  band  is  soldered  with  22k.  solder, 
then  placed  in  position  and  its  free  margins  ground  down 
even  with  the  root  end. 

Next  prepare  the  band  for  a  pure  gold  floor  by  taking  a 
Butler  corundum  point  and  hollowing  out  the  upper  or  small 
end  by  beveling  from  the  inside  edge,  so  as  to  allow  room  for 
the  solder.  Though  only  an  infinitesimal  amount  of  solder 
runs  inside,  still  we  must  have  a  place  for  that  little  to  flow ; 
otherwise  the  band  could  not  go  back  in  place,  on  account 
of  the  solder  flowing  inside,  and  we  must  have  the  solder  to 
flow  inside  in  order  to  make  a  complete  cone  externally. 
Now  take  a  piece  of  pure  gold  (No.  34  American  gage)  and 
cut  just  a  little  larger  than  the  band,  anneal  it  and  adapt  it 
perfectly,  then  place  the  two  in  a  No.  7  Melotte  soldering 
clamp,  and  be  sure  they  do  not  move ;  place  borax  all  around 
the  overlapping  edge  of  pure  gold,  place  a  small  piece  of 
22k.  gold  solder  at  the  junction  of  the  band  and  floor. 

Now  make  the  pivots  (of  platinum  and  iridium  wire), 
and  roughen  them  before  placing  them  in  position.  Drill 
holes  corresponding  with  the  root-canals,  place  the  pivots  in 
position  and  fasten  them  to  the  floor  with  prepared  hard 
wax.  Now  remove  carefully  and  invest  pivots,  floor,  and 
band  in  equal  parts  of  plaster  and  marble-dust,  and  after  re- 
moving the  wax  with  boiling  water,  solder  the  pivots  to  the 
floor  with  22k.  gold.  Now  cut  down  the  overlapping  pure- 
gold  floor  exactly  even  with  the  band,  also  cut  down  the 
projecting  ends  of  the  pivots.  This  constitutes  the  foun- 
dation  for  a   solid  gold   crowui     Never  make  pivots  for 


USEFUL     HINTS.  161 

canals  which  cannot  be  thoroughly  filled  with  cement.  It 
is  better  to  shorten  the  pivot  somewhat  and  make  it  thicker, 
and  depend  for  anchorage  only  on  the  lower  part  of  the 
canal. 

!N'ow  put  the  foundation  in  its  position  in  the  mouth, 
(upper  jaw,  for  example),  and  take  an  impression  of  the 
whole  upper  jaw  in  modeling  compound  ;  also  take  an  im- 
pression of  the  whole  lower  jaw.  l^ext  remove  the  foun- 
dation, and  place  it  with  great  care  exactly  in  its  i)roper 
matrix  in  the  impression  just  taken,  then  stay  it  to  the 
modeling  compound  with  wax  in  two  or  three  places ;  be 
careful  not  to  move  it  with  the  wax-knife,  dry  the  pivots 
and  band  on  the  inside,  and  cover  the  pivots  with  a  film  of 
wax ;  also  run  a  film  of  wax  around  the  band  on  the  inside, 
but  be  sure  to  remove  all  Avax  from  the  edge  of  the  band, 
because  we  want  that  to  rest  firmly  on  the  plaster.  Now  fill 
the  impression  with  plaster  to  make  a  model. 

After  separating  the  model,  remove  the  crown-founda- 
tion from  the  model  by  making  a  hole,  usually  on  the  pala- 
tal surface,  with  a  pocket-knife,  through  the  plaster  to  the 
apical  end  of  the  pivot.  ISTow  place  the  model  and  founda- 
tion in  hot  water,  and  with  a  little  pressure  on  the  end  of 
the  pivot  the  whole  foundation  is  easily  removed.  Syringe 
out  all  wax  from  the  model  and  foundation,  and  replace  the 
foundation  on  the  model. 

ISText  make  the  stamp  for  a  grinding  surface ;  use  for 
this  pure  gold,  34  American  gage.  The  molar  or  bicuspid 
stamp  is  made  in  the  usual  way  by  placing  the  pure  gold, 
always  well  annealed,  on  a  piece  of  lead  and  striking  a  few 
light  blows  on  the  die,  which  gives  a  perfect  grinding  surface. 

ISText  trim  ofif  all  surplus  gold.  The  cusps  are  next 
filled  with  22k.  solder.  The  reason  we  use  22k.  solder  is, 
when  we  fill  in  the  whole  space  between  the  grinding-sur- 
face  and  the  foundation  with  20k.  solder,  there  is  no  dauger 
of  the  ■22k.  being  melted  out  of  the  cusps,  and  consequently 
no  dauger  of  having  an  air-bubble  just  under  the  grinding 
surface  of  No.  34  pure  gold,  which,  of  course,  would  make 
itself  visible  after  a  few  days'  use. 


162  DEPARTMENT   C. 

Having  taken  a  full  impression  of  both  upper  and  lower 
jaws,  we  are  able  to  get  an  absolutely  correct  articulation. 
We  now  add  wax  to  the  foundation,  which  can  be  removed 
from  the  plaster,  till  we  get  an  exact  articulation  wdth  the 
pure-gold  grinding  surface.  After  having  gotten  this  with 
hard  wax  so  that  it  may  be  manipulated  without  disturbing  its 
position,  w^e  continue  to  build  out  the  tooth  to  its  anatom- 
ically correct  contour  w4th  wax,  frequently  trying  it  in  place. 
After  the  foundation  is  removed  from  the  plaster,  the  plaster 
is  cut  away  from  between  the  foundation  and  the  adjoining 
teeth  without  disturbing  the  plaster  on  which  the  band 
rests.  When  this  plaster  is  removed,  Avax  is  added  up  to 
the  very  edge  of  the  band,  so  that  the  entire  anatomical 
contour  can  be  restored  with  gold,  including  even  that  of  the 
enamel  chipped  oif  at  the  cervical  margin.  The  w^ax  tooth 
should  always  be  tried  in  the  mouth,  to  be  sure  that  CA^ery- 
thino-  pertaining  to  form,  contour,  and  position  is  just  right. 
This  was  the  object  of  removing  the  foundation  from  the 
plaster  model  at  the  outset,  as  it  is  a  great  advantage  and 
particularly^  so  with  facings,  to  always  just  at  this  time  trj^ 
the  tooth  in  the  mouth. 

Kow  from  a  piece  of  tin  foil  (No.  60)  a  model  is  cut  so 
as  to  fit  the  wax  exactly.  We  cut  the  gold  on  the  palatal 
surface  from  the  height  of  foundation,  thereby  enabling  us 
to  join  the  free  ends  at  the  cervico-palatal  surface.  The 
large  ends  of  gold  we  turn  out  and  back,  so  as  to  stay  it  in 
the  investment  of  plaster  and  marble-dust.  The  gold  can  be 
cut  a  little  long,  so  as  to  allow  of  bringing  the  cervical  ends 
together.  This  cervical  margin  is  very  important.  This 
gold  band  must  fit  just  under  the  edge  of  the  grinding-sur- 
face  stamp,  and  in  perfect  contact  with  it,  so  as  not  to  allow 
the  grinding  surface  to  move.  This  little  thickness  of  pure 
gold,  ISTo.  34  American  gage,  must  be  allowed  for  when  we 
wax  up  the  tooth. 

Now  we  have  the  wax  tooth  thoroughly  boxed  in,  ex- 
cepting the  palatal  surface.  Before  taking  the  next  step,  be 
sure  that  the  pure  gold  band  for  boxing  is  in  contact  with 
the  cervical  margin  of  the  foundation  band.     At  the  point 


USEFUL     HINTS.  163 

of  junction  here,  and  at  the  grmding  surface,  place  a  little 
wax,  and  then  cut  all  possible  surplus  away,  leavino;  only 
the  very  junction  filled ;  also  be  sure  no  wax  gets  on  the  in- 
side of  the  cervical  margin  of  the  foundation  band.  Now 
place  the  tooth  in  water  and  invest  it  in  plaster  and  marble- 
dust,  covering  the  whole  tooth  except  the  palatal  surface  of 
the  crown;  the  plaster  must  just  cover  the  narrow  gold 
joined  at  the  cervical  margin.  After  the  plaster  sets,  boil 
out  the  wax  and  cut  the  investment  as  small  as  possible, 
leaving  the  plaster  only  about  one-eighth  of  an  inch  all 
around.  JSTow  dry  thoroughly,  but  not  in  contact  with  a 
flame;  have  something — a  top  of  a  tin  box  for  instance — 
between  the  flame  and  the  tooth.  After  it  is  dry,  place  it 
in  the  flame  of  a  small  Bunsen  burner.  To  hasten  the  heat- 
ing-up  process,  a  foot  blow-pipe  may  be  used  to  get  it  red-hot 
very  quicklj^,  but,  nevertheless,  the  heating-up  is  to  be  done 
cautiously,  and  during  this  time  we  still  have  the  little 
Bunsen  flame  under  it.  N'ow,  by  applying  the  flame  of  the 
Knapp  blow-pipe,  the  gold  flows  with  the  greatest  ease  in  all 
parts  and  in  all  directions,  like  melted  butter.  Here  we  use 
20k.  solder.  We  about  half  fill  the  molar  with  gold,  usino- 
borax  as  a  flux,  before  we  use  the  Knapp  blow-pipe. 

It  should  be  observed  that  we  have  the  solder  almost  to 
the  melting  point,  everything  is  red-hot,  and  a  hot  flame 
beneath  the  investment,  so  that  when  we  gently  apply  the 
Knapp  blow-pipe  flame  the  gold  simply  drops,  and  while  in 
this  molten  condition  we  add  the  rest  of  the  solder,  never 
allowing  it  to  cool  for  one  moment,  for  if  it  does  air  bubbles 
will  result.  Here  the  gold  boxing  band  at  the  cervico-pala 
tal  margin  does  its  work  beautifully ;  the  gold  flows  freely 
all  around,  with  no  danger  of  solder  running  inside  the 
foundation  from  the  palatal  side.  The  plaster  and  marble- 
dust  should  always  be  worked  as  stifif  as  possible,  so  as  to 
always  have  the  gold  in  contact  with  plaster,  which  will 
not  be  the  case  if  the  investment  is  mixed  thin.  The  ne- 
cessity of  having  everything  firmly  held,  so  that  the  gold 
solder  will  not  pull  it  in  and  change  the  entire  shape  of  the 
crown,  becomes,  evident  when   the  large  amount  of  solder 


164  DEPAETMENT    C. 

used  is  considered.  This  being  a  solid  crown,  we  put  it  in 
water  to  cool  it,  and  next  in  sulfuric  acid  very  dilute,  and 
gently  heat  it  to  remove  adhering  oxid.  IN'ow  we  can  shape 
the  gold  to  anatomically  correct  contour  lines,  and  bring  the 
cervical  margin  down  to  a  feather-edge,  so  that  w^hen  again 
placed  on  the  root  we  have  an  absolute  junction  without  a 
lodging-place  for  acids,  and  the  whole  tooth  restored  to  a 
state  of  perfection. — LeHand  N.  T.  Shields,  in  Cosmos. 

280.  Removable  Bridge. — In  the  anterior  teeth  we 
utilize  only  the  root,  trimming  down  in  the  ordinary  manner 
for  setting  a  Richmond  crown,  Avith  one  exception,  and  this 
is  the  advisability  of  slanting  the  root  frofn  the  labial  to  the 
lingual  surface,  to  allow  of  as  high  a  ledge  in  the  rear  as 
circumstances  will  permit,  trimming  the  band  on  the  labial 
surface  to  almost  the  gum  margin.  ISText  we  solder  a  flat 
cap  over  the  band  and  trim  down  the  edges  accurate]}^  We 
next  enlarge  our  pulp  canal  as  large  as  possible  to  still  retain 
suflicient  strength,  and  turn  our  attention  to  the  pin,  which 
is  made  of  either  gold  clasp  metal  or  platinum  and  gold. 
Taking  a  heavy  wire,  bend  about  double,  and  inverting 
the  loop  end  down,  add  20  or  22k.  gold  to  the  loop  by 
melting  till  we  have  quite  a  ball  or  knob  as  large  as 
the  top  of  our  root  will  admit,  trimming  this  pin  up  to 
loosely  fit  the  root.  We  next  make  a  tube  of  JSTo.  30  plat- 
inum to  fit  the  pin  accurately,  soldering  the  tube  with  pure 
gold.  Puncturing  the  cap  of  one  root  protection  we  drive  the 
pin  and  pin-covering  through  as  far  in  the  root  as  possible. 
We  will  have  a  little  surplus  of  the  platinum  sheath  or  tube, 
which  we  split  in  several  places  and  burnish  down  to  the 
cap.  Next  carefully  removing  the  pin  to  not  displace  the 
tube,  we  remove  the  root  protection  with  the  tube,  and 
invest  upside  down,  being  careful  to  fill  the  tube  with 
the  investment,  and  thereby  keep  the  solder  out,  heat- 
ing up  the  investment  solder  altogether.  We  now  proceed 
to  make  a  Richmond  crown  for  the  platinum  covering  of 
the  root,  being  careful  not  to  let  the  band  impinge  on  the 
gum,  as  its  removal  and  subsequent  replacement  a  number 


USEFUL     HINTS.  165 

of  times  daily  would  start  up  a  serious  gum  irritation.  We 
do  not  consider  the  pin  at  all  in  making  the  crown,  but 
make  it  pinless,  and  when  the  whole  piece  is  complete  trim 
the  top  of  the  pin  to  a  round  center,  and  thread  in  your 
screw  plate,  and  place  in  the  root  tube,  drop  a  piece  of  wax 
in  the  center  of  the  crown,  press  to  place.  This  will  mark 
the  position  of  the  pnn,  and  allow  you  to  take  a  drill  the  size 
of  the  screw  and  drill  a  hole  in  the  crown,  and  then  thread 
the  hole  same  as  the  pin.  "We  can  now  screw  our  pin  in  and 
rivet  at  the  top,  and  an}^  subsequent  repairs  made  with  very 
little  inconvenience. 

In  the  posterior  attachment  we  allow  the  inner  band  of 
platinum  to  extend  nearly  as  high  as  the  natural  tooth  was, 
leaving  only  sufficient  space  between  the  band  and  articulat- 
ing teeth  to  allow  of  quite  a  heavy  solid  gold  cap,  capping 
the  band  in  the  usual  manner,  flat.  Make  the  pin  as  heavy 
as  possible  and  cover  with  the  tube  as  described  for  the 
anterior  crowns. 

"With  the  exception  that  we  make  the  ball  at  the  top 
much  heavier  and  the  pins  separated  much  more,  and  make 
a  partition  wall  in  our  tube  to  fit  between  the  two  prongs  of 
the  pin,  proceed  to  connect  the  tube  and  root  covering  as 
described,  and,  after  polishing,  set  with  cement  to  place.  I 
neglected  to  state  that  this  tooth  covering  should  always  be 
made  smaller  at  the  top  than  at  the  gam  margin. 

"We  next  make  a  telescope  crown  of  20  or  22k.  gold 
to  fit  this  inner  platinum  sheaf,  trimming  ofl"  flat  at  the 
top,  and  next  mold  a  solid  gold  cap  to  make  a  thorough 
articulation  with  the  corresponding  teeth. 

A  very  nice  method  of  obtaining  a  perfect  articula- 
tion being  to  pound  a  bullet  in  your  die-plate,  on  the  tooth 
you  desire,  file  flat  and  lay  on  top  the  cap,  and  allow  tlie 
patient  to  close  the  jaws  firmly.  The  opposite  teeth  will  press 
in  the  lead  easily,  and  allow  you  to  trim  down  with  a  knife. 

When  perfect,  drop  a  little  sticky  wax  on  a  round  stick 
and  place  the  lead  on  it,  and  proceed  to  mold  your  cap  in 
the  cuttle-fish  bone  as  usual.  By  this  method  you  have  no 
grinding  of  the  cap  after  finished. 


166 


DEPARTMENT    C. 


Soldering  the  cap  now  to  the  telescope  band,  we  have 
onr  anchor  complete,  with  the  exception  of  the  pin  in  the 
cap,  which  we  screw  and  rivet  to  place. 

We  are  now  ready  to  consider  the  attachment  of  the 
intervening  or  bridge  teeth.  Here  we  are  allowed  a  variety  ot 
methods.  The  only  stipulation  I  would  make  is  that  the  gum 
should  be  saddled  to  allow  it  to  assist  in  standing  the  strain. 

We  can  swage  a  rim  of  gold  to  fit  the  gum  quickly  by 
taking  a  plaster  impression  and  drying  out ;  flow  in  fusible 
metal  and  proceed  to  burnish  the  rim  to  place,  which  can 
readily  be  done  by  annealing  a  few  times.  Soldering  the 
saddle  to  the  two  anchors,  and  a  few  cleats  on  the  saddle, 
proceed  to  vulcanize  the  teeth  to  the  saddle  in  the  ordinary 
manner  of  attaching  to  a  gold  plate. 

Again,  in  the  lower  jaw,  we  make  a  very  inexpensive 
case  by  attaching  the  dummies  together  with  Watt's  metal, 
and  soft  solder  this  to  the  two  anchors. 

Again,  by  simply  soldering  a  strong  bar  of  gold  or  plat- 
inum between  the  two  anchors — vulcanize  the  teeth  between. 

If  you  want  more  elaborate  and  extensive  work,  swage 
your  rim,  back  your  teeth  and  solder  to  the  saddle,  rim  the 
labial  surface,  and  you  have  a  whole  gold  case. — Yan  Fossen. 


281.  New  Porcelain  Crown. — The  accompanying  il- 
lustration shows  an  easy  but  strong  way  of  constructing  a 
crown.  A  good  strong  screw  is  an- 
chored in  the  root  in  the  usual  way 
and  snipped  off  to  suit  the  articulation 
of  the  occluding  tooth ;  then  a  thin 
~T^  tubing  of  iridio-platinum  is  slipped 
down  over  this  screw,  and  a  piece  of 
thin  platinum  (K)  of  sufficient  size  to 
slightly  more  than  cover  the  end  of  the 
root,  with  small  hole  cut  in  the  center, 
is  slipped  down  over  the  tubing,  and 
burnished  to  nicely  fit  the  root  and 
over  the  edges,  and  caught  to  the  tubing 
with  a  little  plaster  and  sand  ;   when  hard,  slip  the  two  off 


USEFUL     HINTS.  167 

together,  in  their  relative  positions,  and  solder.  Place  them 
"back  again  on  the  root,  the  soldering  process  having  softened 
the  metal,  complete  the  burnishing  to  a  nicety,  and  get  an 
impression  in  plaster  with  tubing  and  plate  in  position.  Be- 
fore filling  the  impression  place  a  piece  of  German  silver  wire 
in  the  tubing,  of  sufficient  size  to  fit  snugly,  leaving  the  end 
projecting  one-half  to  three-fourths  of  an  inch — this  to  pre- 
vent the  disturbing  of  the  tube  or  crushing  it  in  bending 
the  pins  in  tooth  (H),  around  it ;  from  this  impression  you  pro- 
cure a  model  with  the  tubing  in  exact  position.  Now  grind 
and  fit  the  artificial  tooth  (H)  to  this,  wax  fast,  invest,  bend 
pins  around  the  tubing,  and  solder.  Having  removed  the 
German  silver  wire,  the  enlarged  portion  of  the  tube  at  the 
grinding  surface  to  receive  the  circular  nut  (J)  is  made  by 
using  a  larger  piece  of  tubing,  and  placed  in  the  proper 
position  after  the  first  baking,  and  the  body  placed  about 
it  to  hold  while  baking,  and  the  second  baking  completes 
the  crown,  as  shown  in  cut  (H);  the  artificial  tooth,  and  (I) 
the  porcelain  added.  This  when  cemented  to  the  screw  and 
root,  and  the  nut  driven  home  while  the  cement  is  still  in  a 
yielding  condition,  makes  a  very  strong  and  substantial 
crown. — E.  C.  Moore,  D.D.S.,  in  Archives  of  Dentistry. 

282.  Crown  Holder. — A  handy  contrivance  for  hold- 
ing a  shell  crown  while  filing,  shaping,  etc.  Take  a  piece  ot 
round  wood  of  suitable  length  and  size ;  melt  and  drip  on 
the  end  a  few  drops  of  sealing  wax.  When  desired  for  use, 
warm  the  crown  and  force  it  in  the  wax.  The  crown  can 
thus  be  held  firmly  and  will  not  get  out  of  shape. — Wm.  IT. 
Steele. 

283.  A  New  Crown  Band. — A  new  method  in  making 
a  band.  Use  platinum  gage  30  to  36:  the  band  is  made 
wider  than  necessary  after  it  has  been  fitted  and  soldered 
with  pure  gold,  the  portion  projecting  beyond  the  end  of  the 
root  is  clipped  and  bent  over,  so  as  to  cover  the  end,  being 
neatly  malleted  with  a  plugger,  to  properly  fit  the  root.  It 
can  then  be  soldered  to  any  pin-tooth  by  simply  pressing  the 


168  DEPARTMENT     C. 

pin  through  the  platina,  orit  can  also  be  used  without  solder- 
ing it  to  the  tooth,  as  the  cement  will  hold  it  in  place. — Dr. 
E.  Parmley  Brown,  in  Items. 

284.  Alloy  Crowns. — Prepare  the  canals  as  carefully 
as  for  any  crown ;  firmly  anchor  two  Howe  screw  posts  (with ' 

cement)  in  the  roots,  having  them  long  enough 
so  they  will  extend  to  within  1-16  inch  of  the 
articulating  surface  of  the  crown  (Fig.  2).  Now 
fit  to  the  roots  a  thin  platinum  band,  which 
3  "  should  be  wide  enough  on  the  buccal  portion  to 

reach  above  the  posts.  Xext,  before  the  band  is  perma- 
nently adjusted,  scflder  to  it  a  T-shaped  bar  [see  sectional 
view  of  band  3],  and  solder  to  band  as  shown  in  cut;  this 
should  be  long  enough  to  embrace  both  screw  posts.  Be  sure 
that  the  band  fits  the  tooth  closely  in  all  parts,  just  below 
the  gum-line ;  then  set  it  firmly  in  position,  with  the  T 
grasping  the  screw  posts.  'Now  mix  about  one- third  enough 
"white  gold  and  platina  alloy"  for  the  crown;  do  not 
squeeze  out  too  dry.  Begin  filling  by  working  the  alloy  well 
in  around  the  edges,  around  the  posts,  and  cross  bar.  !N^ext 
mix  enough  alloy  to  complete  the  crown,  squeeze  as  dry  of 
mercury  as  possible,  and  complete  the  work  (Fig.  1).  At  a 
subsequent  sitting,  thoroughly  dress,  and  polish  the  entire 
crown. — William  H.  Steele,  in  Dental  Tribune. 

285.  Bridge  for  Close  Bite. — Perhaps  the  simplest  ex- 
pression of  the  bridge  is  the  one  constructed  of  solid  gold. 
Where  the  bite  is  close,  there  is  nothing  that  acts  so  well  for 
strength  and  cleanliness  as  a  bridge  of  this  character. 

We  will  take,  for  illustration,  the  lower  jaw,  as  we  sel- 
dom make  them  for  the  upper.  Having  prepared  the  indi- 
vidual solid-gold  crowns  previously  described,  place  them  in 
position  on  the  roots  and  take  an  impression  of  the  whole 
jaw.  Place  the  crowns  in  their  matrices  in  the  impression 
and  stay  them  to  place  with  wax.  Pour  the  model  with 
plaster  and  marble-dust.  You  now  have  the  crowns  firmly 
held  in  position.     Take  also  an   impression  of  the  upper 


USEFUL     HIXTS.  169 

jaw,  place  the  models  together,  and  you  will  have  an  exact 
articulation.  ISText  make  the  grind ing-surface  stamps  for 
the  teeth  to  serve  as  dummies,  and  fill  in  these  with  22k. 
solder.  From  a  piece  of  !N"o.  60  tin  foil  cut  a  pattern  for 
a  pure  gold  floor.  Place  this  gold  far  enough  away  from 
the  gum  to  allow  for  convenient  cleansing.  This  gold  floor 
should  exactly  fit  the  space  between  the  abutments  of  the 
bridge.  Also  have  enouo-h  thickness  between  this  floor  and 
the  superior  teeth  for  strength.  Stay  the  floor  with  hard 
wax  to  the  crowds  to  be  used  as  abutments,  flowing  the  wax 
above  and  below  the  floor  at  its  attachments  to  them.  'Now 
place  the  grinding-surface  stamps  in  position,  getting  the 
proper  articulation  by  raising  them  and  filling  in  with  wax. 
"Wax  up  accurately  to  form,  and  place  a  strip  of  pure  gold 
along  either  the  buccal  or  the  lingual  surface.  Do  not  fail 
to  have  the  stamps  cut  with  projecting  edges  on  the  buccal 
and  lingual  surfaces  for  the  purpose  of  staying  them  in  the 
plaster  investment,  which  will  prevent  their  falling.  Also 
leave  the  edge  of  the  floor  somewhat  exposed,  so  that  it  will 
not  rise  luhen  soldered.  The  gold  strip  which  was  placed  on 
either  the  lingual  or  buccal  surface,  as  the  case  may  be, 
answers  a  valuable  purpose  if  nicely  adjusted,  not  only  to 
make  the  gold  flow  in  all  parts,  but  to  hold  the  floor  and 
stamps  exactly  in  position. 

The  adjustment  of  this  strip  depends  on  the  side 
chosen  for  the  soldering.  It  is  to  be  applied  to  the  buccal 
side  if  the  soldering  is  done  lingually,  or  vice  versa.  Now 
cut  the  plaster  away,  except  that  which  holds  the  bridge, 
make  a  ring,  and  invest  in  plaster  and  marble-dust.  Roughen 
the  plaster  model  and  soak  it  in  water  before  investing  any 
further,  to  secure  a  firm  attachment  of  the  investment  added 
to  the  model.  Next  wash  out  the  wax  with  boiling  water 
and  dry  thoroughly.  As  the  crowns  are  soldered  with 
20k.  solder,  the  entire  space  between  the  crown  stamps 
and  the  fioor  must  be  soldered  with  18k.  The  solder  flows 
in  the  position  occupied  by  the  wax,  which  was  placed 
above  and  below  the  pure  gold  floor  in  staying  it  to  the 
abutments,  and  it   will  finish  like  the  inside 'of  a  watch- 


170  DEPARTMENT      C. 

case.  The  bridge  here  described  will  give  permanent  ser- 
vice and  be  altogether  comfortable.  We  use  this  method 
where  the  bite  is  close  and  where  porcelain  facings  would 
be  neither  necessary  nor  expedient. — Extract  Cosmos. 

286.  To  Enlarge  Hole  in  Pivot  Crowns. — To  drill  or 
enlarge  the  hole  in  pivot  crowns,  I  use  a  copper  mandrel  with 
corundum  powder  and  glycerin. — G.  Y.  Beacock,in  Domin- 
ion Journal. 

287.  To  Make  Natural  Crown  Dies. — As  you  meet 
with  a  patient,  or  one  possessing  a  complete  set  of  natural 
teeth,  of  medium  size  and  normal  development,  beg  the 
privilege  of  an  impression  of  both  jaws  in  modeling  com- 
pound. Make  a  plaster  cast  of  each,  and  trim  so  that  dupli- 
cates can  be  made  in  zinc  or  hard  brass  counters  in  lead  or 
tinner's  solder.  From  these  dies  gold  caps  can  be  swaged,. 
anatomically  correct  for  every  tooth.  Two  or  three  of  these 
cheap  dies,  will  meet  almost  every  requirement. — W.  S.  Elli- 
ott, in  Items. 

288.  Porcelain  Tips. — A  porcelain  tip  made  from  a 
plate- tooth,  properly  selected  as  to  color,  ground  to  fit  the 
edge  of  the  natural  tooth  in  such  manner  as  to  give  the  pro- 
per outward  appearance,  a  platina  pin  fitted  to  extend  up 
in  the  roots  and  attached  to  the  porcelain  tips,  the  palatal 
surface  filled  in  to  proper  contour  with  backing,  and  solder 
or  porcelain  body  baked  on  them,  the  tooth  cavities  filled 
with  gutta-percha,  and  the  tips  heated  and  pressed  home 
have  given  me  good  satisfaction.  This  I  feel  to  be  a  con- 
servative operation  much  preferred  to  cutting  off  the  whole 
crown  down  to  the  roots,  and  crowning  by  any  of  the  methods 
usually  employed. — Gr.  Y.  I.  Brown,  in  Review. 

289.  Crown  Holder  and  Pin  Protector. — In  the 
process  of  grinding  the  neck  of  the  Logan  crown  to  adapt 
it  to  the  root,  one  is  apt  to  grind  also  the  pin.  To  avoid 
this  I  place  over  the  pin  a  tube  like  that  of  the  nut- 
driver  (Dr.  Howe's  pattern)  shown  in  the  accompany- 
ing cut.     The  crown  is  held  on  the  thumb  with  the 


USEFUL     HINTS. 


171 


forefinger  over  the  end  of  the  tube,  which  protects  the  pin 
from  chance  contact  with  the  engine  corundum  wheel  while 
the  crown  is  being  ground  in  the  usual  way.— F.  A.  Roy, 
M.D.,  D.D.S.,  in  Cosmos. 

290.  Cutting  Off  Teeth  For  Crowning.— A  rapid  and 
easy  method  of  cutting  off  teeth  preparatory  to  mounting 
crowns,  is  to  open  in  the  pulp  canal ;  then  with  a  sharp 
oval  bur  revolved  by  the  engine,  cut  from  within,  outward, 
on  the  line  with  the  gum  margin,  rotating  the  hand  piece,  so 
as  to  cut  equally  as  possible  in  every  direction  from  the 
pulp  canal.  Most  of  the  after-work  on  the  end  of  the  root 
can  be  done  more  rapidly  with  this  bur,  than  with  stones.— 
W.  T.  Martin,  D.D.S. 

291.  Burning  Holes  in  Crowns.— Some  one  complains 
that  in  preparing  one  of  the  Rynear's  crowns  he  burnt  a 
hole  through  the  gold  in  trying  to  spread  the  solder.  Those 
who  are  familiar  with  the  use  of  gold  solder  on  gold  will 
know  this  is  possible  with  any  solder  and  gold.  For  in- 
stance, when  solder  flows  within  the  Rynear  crown,  at  a 
point  where  it  is  not  desired,  and  a  further  effort  is  made  to 
displace  it  by  reheating,  so  that  it  will  flow  to  the  place 
originally  intended,  the  effort  will  be  futile;  for  the  solder 
having  once  flowed  becomes  a  part  of  the  crown  itself,  and, 
to  flow  again,  it  must  of  necessity  result  in  the  melting  of 
the  portion  of  the  crown  to  which  it  has  been  attached.^ 
Items. 

292.  Rubber  Porcelain  Crown. — This  is,  as  far  as  I 
know,  original  with  myself;  but  be  that  as  it  may,  it  makes 
but  little  difference,  the  crown  has  given  good  satisfaction 
where  it  has  been  tested.  For  purpose  of  illustration, 
we  will  take  a  lower  molar.  When  the  canals  have  been 
properly  cleansed  and  prepared,  trim  and  shape  the  root 
as  for  any  other  band  crown.  Then  take  measurement 
with  binding  wire,  and  make  a  narrow  gold  or  platnia 
band.    (Figure  1.)    Adjust  the  band  to  the  tooth  ;  it  should 


172  DEPARTMENT     C. 

be  a  good  close  fit  and  extend  ju3t  below  the  free  margin 
of  the  gum.      Fill    the   band   with  wax,  keep  it  dry  and 

take  a  bite.  In  removino;  the  bite, 
the  band  should  come  away  with 
it ;  but  if  it  does  not,  replace  in  its 
position  in  the  wax,  and  mount  in 
the  articulator  in  such  a  way  as  to 
retain  the  band  in  place  after  the  wax 
bite  is  removed.  When  the  plaster 
sets,  warm  and  remove  wax.  With  base-plate  wax  for  the 
body,  and  a  porcelain  cusp  (Fig.  2),  for  the  articulating  sur- 
face, build  a  perfect  crown.  When  shaped  to  suit,  take  the 
model  carefully  from  the  articulator,  being  careful  to  keep  all 
in  proper  position.  Flask  the  model,  so  it  will  open,  with 
porcelain  cusp  in  one-half  of  flask,  and  band  in  the  other ; 
wash  out  the  wax  and  pack  with  Ash-white,  or  the  pure  un- 
colored  rubber,  and  vulcanize.  This  crown  can  be  mounted 
either  with  posts  fixed  in  the  roots,  or  with  posts  vulcanized 
in  the  crown.  If  the  former,  set  the  posts  in  the  roots  per- 
manently, and  with  a  bur  cut  a  place  in  the  rubber  crown  to 
receive  them,  and  mount  with  cement  as  usual.  If  to  be 
mounted  with  fixed  posts,  the  posts  should  be  placed  in 
position,  removed  with  bite  and  band ;  flasked  and  vulcan- 
ized in  the  crown.  Fig.  3  shows  the  crown  comj^lete  and 
mounted. — Wm.  H.  Steele,  in  0.  Dental  Journal. 

293.  Preparing  Root  for  Crown. — In  preparing  a  root 
for  a  porcelain-faced  crown  I  have  been  much  pleased  in  the 
use  of  a  little  instrument  devised  by  Dr.  Taggart,  and  that 
is  an  ordinary  fissure  bur  with  a  round  shoulder  soldered 
just  far  enough  down  to  give  required  width  of  gold  band. 
This  is  for  the  purpose  of  cutting  through  the  alveolus  on 
the  proximal  sides  of  the  root,  thus  permitting  the  band, 
when  made,  to  extend  further  up  under  the  free  margin  of 
the  gum,  and  when  the  crown  is  completed  no  gold  whatever 
is  in  sight. — A.  W.  McCandless,  in  Ohio  Journal. 

294.  Narrow  Bridges. — In  a  great  many  narrow 
bridges,  where  you  want  a  very  little  plate,  but  still  a  very 


USEFUL     HINTS. 


173 


stiff  appliance,  a  large  flow  of  solder  over  a  platinum  and 
iridium  wire,  finished  round  or  half-round,  makes  a  very 
stifl:"  and  rigid  plate. — Dr.  Moffat,  in  0.  Journal. 

295.  Band  Attachments  for  Bridges. — When  a  bridge- 
piece  is  to  be  attached  to  an  anterior  tooth,  the  crown  of 
which  is  so  sound  that  excision  and  crowning  are  not  justi- 
fiable, I  make  a  baud  as  described  in  the  accompanying 
illustration : 


Fig.  A  represents  a  cuspid,  to  which  I  wish  to  anchor 
one  end  of  my  piece.  B,  the  same  with  cusp  squared  and 
sides  ground  to  receive  the  band.  The  dotted  lines  repre- 
senting the  band  fitted  at  the  neck  of  the  tooth.  The  labial 
side  cut  out,  and  the  sides  and  back  extending  so  far  below 
the  cutting  edge  that  when  the  ends  XX  (Fig.  E)  are  bent 
in  they  will  exactly  meet  at  G. 

Fig.  E  shows  the  palatal  side  of  the  band,  properly  cut 
for  correct  adaptation.  The  ends  XX  are  gently  malleted 
to  position,  using  long  handle  plugger  (Xo.  304)  and  lead 
mallet.  YY  are  then  bent  and  malleted  forward  to  overlap 
the  ends  XX,  and  Z  to  overlap  all. 

The  band  is  now  carefully  removed  and  large  pieces  of 
20k.  gold  solder  are  placed  over  the  joints  on  tlie  inner  side 
and  fused  in  the  flame  of  a  spirit  lamp,  the  solder  sinking 
and  leaving  the  inner  surface  of  the  band  comparatively 
smooth.  Contour  the  outside  with  a  small,  fine,  corundum 
wheel,  and  you  will  have  a  beautiful  shell  or  semi-cap  shown 
at  Figs.  F,  C  and  Gr,  useful  alike  on  incisors  or  cuspids.  In 
preparing  the  tooth,  grind  cusp  and  sides,  part  way  up, 
square.     Cut  out  labial  side  of  band  so  as  to  leave  the  ends 


174  DEPARTMENT     C. 

XX  extended  slightly  forward  of  the  labio-cutting  corners. 
Split  the  band,  between  X  and  Y,  at  the  palato -cutting  cor- 
ners and  a  trifle  above  the  end  of  the  tooth.  Make  the  "  Y," 
at  the  back,  full  wide ;  because  the  flap  Z  will  cover  any 
:space. — Grant  Mitchell,  D.D.S.,  in  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

296.  Fitting  Post  Crowns. — I  have  found  it  an  advan- 
tage in  making  a  close  joint  in  the  mouth,  to  place  on  the 
pin  a  disk  of  tin  plate,  then  driving  the  tooth  to  place,  the 
jjoint  of  contact  is  indicated  on  the  disk,  and  the  crown  can 
he  ground  accordingly. — H.  Lowry,  in  Review. 

297.  To  Repair  Bridges  Without  Soldering. — In  re- 
pairing broken  porcelains  in  bridge-work  without  soldering, 
'drill  holes  through  the  backing  from  the  front,  and  counter- 
sink the  palatal  surface;  then,  with  a  special  instrument  a 
•screw  thread  is  cut  on  the  pins  of  the  porcelain  facing,  and 
the  same  securely  held,  when  placed  in  position,  by  imts  on 
the  countersunk  side. — Dr.  T.  A.  Bryant,  in  Ohio  Dental 
Journal. 

298.  Fitting  Collars  for  Crowns. — Take  single-rooted 
teeth,  to  which  a  porcelain-faced  crown  is  to  be  attached. 
We  would,  before  attempting  to  trim  the  root,  shorten  it 
:almost  as  much  as  necessary,  and  then  with  safe-sided  files, 
sandpaper,  disks,  corundum  points,  and  the  various  forms  of 
scrapers  give  the  root  the  desired  shape.  "With  Wo.  34  soft 
iron  wire  now  take  an  accurate  measure  of  the  root.  From 
this  a  band  can  be  made,  and  if  we  have  remembered  the 
■shape  of  the  measure  as  it  came  from  the  tooth,  it  can  be 
made  to  proximate  the  desired  shape  with  slender  pliers. 
This  can  now  be  forced  on  the  stump,  and  such  portions  as 
would  go  too  far  under  the  gum  can  be  cut  away,  so  that  it 
•extends  beneath  the  gingival  at  every  point  alike  ;  and  if  the 
root  has  been  properly  shaped,  the  extreme  edge  of  the  crown 
will  fi,t  the  closest.  The  stump  and  band  may  now  both  be 
ground  down  together,  using  a  stone  that  will  cut  the  proxi- 
mal sides  as  well  as  throusfh  the  center  of  the  tooth..    The 


USEFUL     HINTS.  175 

reason  for  not  shortening  the  stump  to  the  necessary  height 
at  the  start  is  that  the  difficulty  of  an  accurate  measure 
would  be  greatly  increased. 

The  procedure  in  fitting  the  band  for  an  all-gold  crown 
is  necessarily  much  the  same,  though  itis  well  to  contour  the 
band  till  there  is  sufficient  knuckle  to  touch  the  adjoining 
teeth  after  the  crown  is  finished,  thereby  preserving  the 
interdental  space. 

One  word  more  about  the  preparation  for  gold  crowns 
of  teeth  which  need  little  or  no  trimming,  as  they  taper  from 
gum  to  grinding  surface.  Something  more  than  the  thick- 
ness of  the  collar  should  be  cut  from  the  buccal  surface  of 
the  tooth,  and  after  the  collar  is  properly  fitted,  small  Y- 
shaped  pieces  may  be  clipped  from  the  end  that  is  to  be  closed, 
and  the  edges  of  the  gaps  brought  together  so  as  to  touch. 
These  will  easily  solder  up  as  the  grinding  surface  is  being 
attached.     In  this  way  glaring  gold  will  be  less  conspicuous. 

In  cases  of  molar  teeth,  where  there  is  enough  recession 
to  expose  the  depression  between  the  roots,  a  groove  may  be 
cut  from  depression  to  grinding  surface  that  will  permit  us 
to  bend  in  the  collar  with  pliers,  out  of  the  mouth,  and  then 
put  it  in  place.  If  the  teeth  are  too  sensitive  for  this,  24k. 
gold  may  be  used  for  the  band,  as  this  can  the  more  easily 
be  burnished  in  the  depressions  as  the  crown  is  being  set. 

Would  that  I  could  always  make  such  accurate  fits,  like 
f5ome  whom  I  have  heard  discuss  this  subject,  that  a  piece  of 
silk  would  not  catch  on  the  edge  of  the  collar.  Many  bands 
go  too  far  under  the  gum,  and  if  we  err  either  way  it  would 
be  better  for  the  tooth  if  the  collar  stopped  just  a  little 
short  than  to  go  too  far. 

The  farther  we  get  beneath  the  gum  the  harder  it  is, 
generally,  to  obtain  good  adaptation,  and  the  more  liable  are 
we  to  have  the  band  standing  off"  at  some  point,  thereby  be- 
coming a  constant  source  of  irritation,  and,  as  a  consequence, 
in  a  short  time  there  is  the  swelling  and  tenderness  charac- 
teristic of  the  pinched  gum  pedicle,  and  we  being  unable  to 
relieve  this  permanently  without  removing  the  cause,  our 
work  is  likely  to  prove  anything  but  a  joy. 


176 


DEPARTMEKT      C. 


Wherever  collars  or  partial  crowns  are  used  for  the  sup- 
port of  bridge-work,  the  less  of  the  tooth  that  is  covered,  to 
secure  the  necessary  strength,  the  better  it  is  for  that  tooth. 

Too  much  cannot  be  said  in  condemnation  of  lettins: 
such  collars  extend  beneath  the  gum  like  ordinary  crowns, 
to  become,  in  a  short  time,  a  source  of  irritation  by  jumping' 
up  and  down  on  the  teeth.  For  instance,  a  gap  on  the  upper 
jaw,  extending  from  the  first  molar  to  a  sound  cuspid.  On 
the  attachment  to  the  molar  all  are  agreed,  but  when  it 
comes  to  the  cuspid  there  is  a  diversity  of  opinion.  A  per- 
fect-fitting collar,  slightly  broader  on  its  lingual  than  its 
labial  surface,  extending  just  to  the  largest  portion  of  the 
tooth,  is  indicated  almost  every  time.  These  may  be  made 
by  burnishing  a  piece  of  gold  directly  on  the  tooth  which 
has  been  previously  pinched  around  it  by  flat-nosed  pliers, 
taking  out  small  pieces  where  it  is  inclined  to  pucker.  But 
what  looks  to  be  a  better  way  is  to  make  a  perfect  die  of  the 
tooth,  and  around  this  shape  the  collar  to  fit. — W.  K.  Slater, 
in  Headlight. 


299.  Moving  Roots  Before  Crowning, — This  is  a  de- 
vice by  Dr.  Sillito  for  regulating,  or  changing  the  position 
of  a  root  that  was  to  be  crowned.  The  device  consisted  of  a 
small  piano-wire  spring,  anchored  to  the  root,  by  means  of  a 
Howe  screw  post,  and  exerting  pressure  on  the  adjoining 
tooth  in  the  direction  desired. 

The  particular  case  on  which  Dr.  Sillito  used  the  ap- 
pliance is  illustrated  by  Fig.  1. 
A  central  incisor  root  -which 
crowded  the  adjoining  central 
was  to  be  crowned ;  the  lateral 
was  missing  and  the  space  par- 
tially filled  by  the  cuspid  com- 
ing forward.  To  crown  the  root 
in  its  crowded  position  would 
have  necessitated  grinding  the 
mesialface  of  the  central.  To  ob- 
viate this.  Dr.  Sillito  inserted  a  ^i 


USEFUL     HINTS.  177 

Howe  screw  post  (b)  in  the  root's  canal;  cut  off  the  screw 
head,  and  constructed  a  small  spnng  (a).  The  drawing  shows 
the  appliance  in  position.  By  this  means  he  succeeded  in 
.moving  the  root  to  the  position  desired. — Ohio  Denial 
Journal. 

300.  An  Original  Bicuspid  Crown. — The  following 
way  of  making  a  permanent  crown  (porcelain)  for  broken- 
down  bicuspids  is  original  with  me : 

Prepare  root  as  in  Richmond  crown  ;  fit  band  and  solder 
top  on  it,  making  a  small  cap  over  root.  Punch  a  hole  in 
this  cap  large  enough  to  allow  the  pin  of  a  Logan  bicuspid 
crown  to  enter.  Grind  porcelain  to  set  close  to  cap,  making 
a  good  joint,  then  solder  in  place.  Mount  as  a  Richmond. 
You  have  a  strong,  artistic  piece  of  work. — J.  Harbin  Pallock, 
D.D.S.,  in  Items. 

301.  Setting  a  Genese  Crown. — Prepare  the  root  and 
canal  in  the  usual  manner,  take  an  impression  so  as  to  obtain 
a  model  that  will  give  accurate  articulation. 

Fig.  1.  Choose  the  crown  suited  in  form  and  color  to  the 

case.  Select  a  post  (Fig.  1)  that  will  fit  the  canal 
easily  and  tightly.  Having  the  model  prepared,  grind 
the  crown  to  fit  the  root  and  articulate  with  the  oppo- 
post.    site  tooth. 

Fill  the  apex  of  the  root  with  any  substance  which 
the  operator  has  found  to  be  the  most  serviceable,  to  pre- 
vent the  cement  from  being  forced  through  the  apex.  Place 
the  post  in  the  canal  and  try  the  crown  on  the  root  with  the 
post  in  position  ;  if  the  post  be  too  long  file  it  off  till  the 
platinum  lining  of  the  crown  and  the  post  touch  with  the 
tooth  in  the  desired  position. 

Dry  the  tooth  and  post.  Fill  the  platinum  cup  in  the 
tooth  with  Fowler's  Sticky  Wax.  Warm  the  post,  tap  it 
in  place  in  the  tooth,  and  finally  adjust  as  you  desire.  Cool 
the  tooth  with  water,  so  as  to  harden  the  wax  in  the  cavity, 
and  then  carefully  remove  the  tooth  and  post. 


178 


DEPARTMENT      C. 


Mix  any  investing  material,  press  the  tooth  in  it,  and 

with  it  cover  the  tooth,  except  the  cavity,  letting  the  holder 

^^'^-  -•  (Fig.  2)  support  the  tooth  invested  in 

[Hiiik  .^^^   the   lower   part,  .the   end   of  the  post 

lilii^  "^^llil^   ^^^^  investing  material  over  it,  the  post 

and  tooth  will  be  held  securely  in  place. 
This  will  leave  the  end  of  the  tooth 


Fig.  3. 


Tooth  invested, 
sbOAVing  use  of  holder. 


Copper  Holder. 

as  illustrated  in  Fig.  3 
and  post  clear  to  view. 

When  the  investment  is  dry,  j^our  boil- 
ing water  over  the  wax,  to  remove  it  from 
the  cavity,  which  should  then  be  clean  and 
dry.  Add  the  flux.  Put  thhi  strips  of 
solder  around  the  post  touching  the  plati- 
num lining.  Gradually  heat  the  investment, 
and  when  thoroughly  dry,  solder. 

When  the  crown  and  post  are  ready  for 
cementing  in  position,  dry  the  root  canal.  Rub  up  some 
amalgam  dry ;  mix  a  sufficient  quantity  of  oxyphosphate  of 
zinc;  add  to  this  an  equal  bulk  of  the  amalgam  and  work 
up  together.  This  will  give  a  slow  setting  cement  of  great 
density,  and  one  impervious  to  moisture. 

These  teeth  will  not  crack  on  rapid  cooling,  and  are 
ready  for  inserting  five  minutes  after  soldering.  They  may 
be  ground  in  any  form,  and  repolished. 

The  post  may  be  barbed,  and  it  may  be  found"  advan- 
tageous to  insert  a  wooden  point  in  a  plugger  or  any 
mallet,  and  with  it  give  a  few  taps,  which  will  drive  home 
the  crown  securely,  and  in  the  right  direction. 

A  frail  root  can  be  successfully  crowned  by 
using   a  disk  of  gold  or  platinum  cut  in  star 
shape  with  a  center  hole  slipped  over  the  post 
and  soldered    in    place   (Fig.    4).      This   will 
steady    the   post   and   crown    without    undue 
pressure   on   the  sides.     The   fine  part  of  the 
pL^itton.'^^^^^'^ '"  P^^^  ^i^^  reach  the  apex,  and  the  collar  will  sup- 
B-sectioiiai^v^WpQ^^  the  base  of  the  root.     The  openings  in  the 
^rts  t'he^post^^' collar  will  allow  the  escape  of  surplus  cement. 


Fig.  4. 


A  B 

A. — Frail  root  with 


USEFUL      HINTS.  179 

A  band  (Fig.  5),  can  be  put  on  these  crowns  in  the 
shortest  space,  having  no  overlays  on  the  crowns,  3'et  soldered 
so  thoroughly  as  to  leave  no  weak  point  or  space  for  entrance 
of  moisture. 

If  desired  to  band  instead  of  pivot,  fit  the ^^^'J' 

band  to  root,  having  the  crown  adapted  also. 
(ISTo  need  of  the  band  overlapping  the  crown.) 

Take  a  plain  disk  of  soft  platinum  or  gold 
larger  than  the  root,  place  it  over  the  end  of  i^—crojn banded. 

"  '  ■•-        _  B — Sectional  view 

the  crown  and  burnish  it  on,  puucturino;  the    "f  ,A<  showing 

'    J-  o  platinum  cup. 

center  and  turning  it  in  the  platina  cup.    The 

band  is  then  placed  on   and  waxed   in   position,  invested, 

and  the  band,  disk  and  tooth  soldered  together. 

When  trimmed  up,  the  lower  edge  of  the  band  is  flush 
with  the  top  edge  of  the  tooth,  leaving  the  crown  clear  of 
metal,  and  only  the  narrowest  band  required  on  the  root, 
with  no  possibility  of  moisture  entering  the  space. 

If  the  root  canal  is  curved,  use  flexible  drills  for  cleaning. 
Anneal  the  pivot  post,  apply  a  little  vaselin,  and  gently  tap 
it  in  place  ;  it  will  conform  to  the  direction  of  the  canal, 
and  can  be  withdrawn  for  soldering. 

If  the  platinum  lining  is  filled  with  wax  before  grind- 
ing it  prevents  moisture  or  dirt  from  getting  in  it ;  and 
when  warmed  for  fixing,  the  post  is  sure  to  be  held  tightly 
in  position. 

By  making  the  investment  high,  it  becomes  easj^  to 
direct  the  flame  around  the  tooth,  making  it  hottest  flrst, 
thereb}'  forcing  the  flow  of  the  solder  in  the  cup. — Items. 

[I  consider  this  one  of  our  best  all  porcelain  crowns. — • 
Author.] 

802.  The  Downey  Crown. — The  process  of  making  is 
as  follows  :  The  tooth  root  is  prepared  as  for  a  Richmond 
crown,  and  a  band  of  platinum  fitted  to  the  root  and  sol- 
dered with  pure  gold. 

The  band  is  made  wide  enough  to  project  a  little  beyond 
the  end  of  the  root,  as  shown  in  cut.  Fig.  a  ;  the  dotted  lines 
representing  location  of  end  of  root.     The  platinum  band  is 


180  DEPAKTMBNT     C. 

then  notched,  as  represented  at  6,  replaced  on  the  root  and 
the  protudin^  points  bent  in  and  burnished  over  the  end  of 
the  prepared  root,  as  represented  at  c.     A  tooth  of  suitable 


size,  shape  and  shade  is  next  selected  (either  an  ordinary 
vulcanite  tooth,  or  a  so-called  plate-tooth  may  be  used),  and 
an  iridio-platinum  pin,  to  extend  in  root  canal,  is  fastened 
to  the  tooth  by  bending  tooth  pins  around  it.  This  is  rep- 
resented at  d.  The  band  and  tooth  are  then  adjusted  to  the 
root,  and  sticky  wax  used  to  hold  the  parts  in  position. 
Band  and  all  are  then  removed  from  root.  Fig./,  invested  as 
usual  (powdered  silex  being  preferable  to  marble  dust),  wax 
thoroughly  boiled  out,  porcelain  body  applied,  molded  to 
shape  of  crown  desired,  and  baked.  The  porcelain  enamel  is 
extended  over  the  band  so  that  when  completed  it  is  one  of 
the  most  cleanly  and  natural  looking  crowns  made.  This 
same  method  may  be  employed  for  anchoring  bridges. — Dr. 
L.  L.  Barber,  in  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

303.  Hint  on  Anchoring  Bridges. — Where  I  have  used 
a  metal  cap  for  the  anchorage  of  a  bridge  at  one  end,  instead 
of  cementing  the  bridge  in  at  the  other  end,  supported  by  a 
cuspid,  for  instance,  I  have  cut  the  tooth  and  put  in  a  very 
hard  gald-filling,  making  just  a  little  depression.  Drill  a 
little  cavity  in  the  cuspid,  and  pack  the  gokl  very  hard; 
countersink  ;  point,  and  let  it  rest  right  in  there.  There  is 
no  chance  of  its  decaying  the  tooth.  It  has  worked  very 
nicely  in  every  case  that  I  have  tried. — F.  A.  Peeso,  in 
Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

304.  Perfect  Occluding  Gold  Crowns. — Often  cases 
present  that  irregularity  of  occlusion  which  renders  the 
ordinary  use  of  the  various  dies  in  the  market  useless. 
Among  the  various  expedients  in  such  cases  the  following 
rbay  suffice : 


USEFUL     HINTS.  181 

Fit  the  band  to  root  and  trim  on  the  occluding  edges, 
with  flat  file,  to  line  where  side  walls  begin  to  curve  on 
occluding  surface.  Return  band  to  root  and  fill  to  overflow- 
ing with  plaster  of  Paris  well-mixed,  so  as  to  set  quickly. 
Have  patient  close  teeth  together  naturally.  When  plaster  is 
hard,  remove  band  and  trim,  so  as  to  make  presentable  sur- 
face retaining  the  imprint  of  the  occluding  cusps.  Use  this 
model  for  making  an  impression  in  Mellotte's  Moldine,  from 
which  make  a  fusible  metal  die.  Perfectly  adjust  to  the 
band,  the  resulting  swaged  cap,  and  solder.  Finish.  Aperfect 
occluding  crown  will  be  the  final  result.  ' 

Another  Way. — Fill  band  with  moldine  or  plaster  and 
proceed  to  get  "  bite  "  as  before,  then  insert  this  model,  in 
fusible  metal  almost  cold,  and  drive  gold-plate  in  this  mold 
with  lead.— W.  H.  Whitslar,  M.D.,  D.D.S.,  in  Ohio  Dental 
Journal. 

305.  Crowns  Where  Roots  are  Missing. — The  inser- 
tion of  a  crown  where  the  root  is  missing ;  without  a  plate; 
clasps;  destroying  nerves  in  adjoining  teeth,  or  resorting  to 
modern  bridge-work,  may  seem  hard  to  accomplish,  but  can 
be  done  in  the  following  manner:  A  gold-plate  is  swedged 
to  cover  the  space  and  made  long  enough  to  lap  well  over  on 
labial  and  palatine  surfaces  of  the  gum.  Prongs  are  then 
soldered  to  the  sides  of  the  plate  opposite  the  adjoining  teeth, 
and  the  post  for  the  crown  in  its  proper  position. 

If  there  are  fillings  in  the  adjoining  teeth,  remove  them. 
If  no  cavities,  make  them. 

Thin  dam  is  adjusted,  leaving  no  gum  exposed.  Floors 
of  gold  are  laid  covering  the  cervical  walls  of  the  cavities. 
The  plate  is  placed  in  position  with  the  prongs  projecting 
well  in  the  cavities.  With  a  forked  instrument  held  in  the 
left  hand  straddle  the  post  and  press  the  plate  firmly  against 
the  gum,  and  hold  in  position  till  the  operation  of  filling 
the  cavities  is  completed.  After  the  fillings  are  nicely  fin- 
ished, the  dam  is  removed  and  a  Bonwill  crown  adjusted  in 
the  usual  manner. 

In  this  operation  there  are  no  backings  to  interfere  with 


182  DEPARTMENT     C. 

the  articulation,  and  where  properly  done  it  is  practical. — C. 
M.  Sharp,  D.D.S.,  in  Practitioner. 

306.  Slipper  Shell  Crown  for  Bridge-work. — This 
crown  is  used  mostly  for  incisors,  but  can  be  adapted  to 
cuspids  or  bicuspids.  Take  measurement  of  tooth  with 
wire  and  make  a  plain  tube,  solder  in  the  back  only  as  far 
as  the  tooth  is  straight ;  now  take  an  impression  of  the  tooth 
in  plaster,  and  run  a  fusible  metal  die.  Place  the  tube  on 
this  die,  and  burnish  the  loose  flaps  down  to  the  tooth  ;  or 
by  previously  cutting  out  a  V-shaped  piece  in  the  back,  you 
can  place  it  on  the  natural  tooth  or  die,  and  work  out  with 
a  sharp  instrument  that  part  of  the  labial  or  buccal  surface 
you  wish  to  remove.  Now  with  curved  scissors  cut  this 
portion  out,  and  also  all  the  proximal  sides  which  extend 
below  the  end  of  the  tooth,  which  should  ordinarily  be 
one-eighth  inch.  Now  burnish  the  back  or  lingual  flap 
up  over  the  cutting  edge,  and  it  will,  if  done  properly, 
make  the  only  perfect  fitting  slipper  crown  with  the  least 
amount  of  labor.  "Where  incisors  are  badly  decayed  on 
both  proximal  and  lingual  sides,  I  build  the  tooth  to  proper 
contour  with  good  cement,  and  make  the  above  style  crown, 
which  shows  a  great  deal  less  gold  than  it  would  were  the 
cavities  properly  prepared,  and  filled  with  gold.  This  is 
often  advisable,  where  the  tooth  is  very  frail  or  brittle,  and 
you  do  not  wish  to  devitalize  and  crown  with  a  Richmond 
or  Logan.— C.  L.  Smith,  D.D.S. 

307.  Alloy-gold  Cap  Crowns. — Many  frail  bicuspids 
and  molars  (decayed  below  gum  line,  Fig.  1)  are  extracted 
every  day  without  any  attempt  to  save  them ;  that  by  the 

following  plan  could  be  made  permanently 
serviceable.  After  getting  the  tooth  and  nerve 
canal  in  a  healthy  condition,  seal  up  the  apex 
of  the  root  with  a  gutta-perch  point,  drill  out 
the  canal  and  set  two  Howe  screw  posts  with 
cement  (see  Fig.  1),  dress  away  all  ragged  edges  of  the  cavity 
and  shape  for  filling.     Now  put  on  a  matrix  metal  band  as 


USEFUL     HINTS.  188 

described  above  ;  mix  the  alloy,  and  before  squeezing  out 
the  mercury,  divide  the  mass  and  squeeze  one  portion  much 
drier  than  the  other;  begin  the  filling  with  the  part  contain- 
ing the  most  mercury,  and  complete  with  the  dr3^  At  a 
subsequent  sitting  remove  the  band,  and  shaj^e  the  tooth  for 
a  gold  cap  crown,  fit  the  cap  and  mount  with  cement  as 
usual ;  being  sure  to  let  the  gold  cap  extend  below  the  gum 
line  (see  Fig.  2).  A  crown  mounted  in  this  way  is  durable 
and  strong  enough  to  carry  a  reasonable  amount  of  bridge- 
work. — Wm.  H.  Steele. 

308.  Backing  and  Soldering. — To  avoid  cracking, 
never  leave  any  angles  on  back  of  facing  such  as  {A  A,  Fig. 
1),  but  grind  them  off  rounding  something  like  (Fig.  2).   In 

this  manner  you  avoid  the  uneven 
expansion  and  contraction  of  porce- 
lain, and  also  in  tipping  do  not  bur- 
nish or  allow  gold  or  backing  to  ex- 
tend up  over  face  of  tooth,  but  to 
entend  out  straight  as  (Fig.  3)  the  contraction  breaks  the 
facing  at  A. 

Press  pins  on  common  cardboard  till  they  leave  a 
print,  then  punch  holes  with  plate  punch,  put  on  tooth,  trim 
for  pattern,  then  cut  gold  (24k.  28  gage)  and  press  with 
rounded  instrument  to  saucer  shape  ;  place  backing  on  tooth, 
cut  off  pins  with  nippers,  split  in  center  and  rivet  on ;  after 
placing  on  cork  or  some  soft  substance,  i^ow  grind,  file 
and  burnish  backing  to  desired  shape  and  position,  invest 
and  flow  solder.  Make  investment  thin  and  solder  on  char- 
coal ;  heat  and  cool  slowly ;  always  heating  investment 
nearly  to  fusing  point  of  solder  before  directing  flame  on 
solder  or  backing.  Another  important  point  is  to  place 
your  borax  on,  in  solution,  before  you  begin  to  heat  up. 
Slightly  scratching  surface  of  metal  with  sharp  instrument 
makes  solder  take  hold  more  readily. — C.  L.  Smith,  D.D.S. 

309.  A  Holdfast  For  Porcelain  Inlays. — Methods  hith- 
erto adopted  for  holding  porcelain  and  glass  inlays  in  their 


184  DEPARTMENT     C. 

place  having  failed,  the  following  plan  was  carried  out  to  my 
'satisfaction.  But  first  let  me  say  the  etching  with  hydro- 
fluoric acid  held  good,  and  for  a  long  time,  put  in  irregular 
inlays  and  contours,  but  it  was  likely  to  burn  off  the  fine 
edges  or  etch  the  surface  where  not  properly  protected  by 
wax,  a  difiiculty  not  always  overcome.  I  now  adopt  thd 
following  plan:  Get  my  impression  of  the  cavity  and  edges 
with  number  30  to  60  gold  foil,  when  thoroughly  fitted,  fill 
with  hard  wax,  heat  by  spatula,  and  press  to  fit  tightly.  Re- 
move and  invest  in  Teague's  Compound  as  lightly  as  possi- 
ble. When  dry,  burn  out  the  wax  by  laying  the  imprint 
wax  down  on  a  piece  of  plaster  to  absorb  the  wax  as  melted ; 
this  leaves  a  true  mold  of  the  cavity  and  edges,  and  no  force 
to  displace  the  mold,  (No  need  to  have  the  investment 
outside  the  gold  over  lap.)  Now  take  some  waste  gold  foil, 
roll  it  up  to  forin  a  pellet  that  will  lay  inside  the  cavity 
about  one-half  depth.  Put  the  porcelain  or  glass  mixture 
in  quite  wet,  and  press  and  dry  with  bibulous  paper,  then 
burn  it  in  the  usual  way,  each  firing  till  perfectly  formed 
and  full  enough.  It  should  be  a  little  below  absolute 
fusing  point  or  enough  to  thoroughly  shrink  the  porcelain 
witho.ut  vitrifying  it  till  the  last  layer.  On  removing 
the  investment  and  pealing  off  the  gold,  the  little  pellet 
can  be  picked  out,  and  a  nice  depression,  with  undercut 
edges,  will  be  formed  for  the  cement  to  enter  and  firmly 
hold  the  inlay  in  i:)lace. — Dr,  D,  Genese,  in  Ohio  Dental 
Journal. 

310.  An  Original  Crown. — The  root  is  prepared  as 
usual  for  an  ordinary  porcelain  crown.  With  a  very  fine 
drill,  preferably  one  with  a  gage,  a  series  of  holes  is  drilled 
as  near  as  practicable  to  the  circumference  of  the  root,  and 
the  interspaces  cut  out,  forming  a  groove  in  the  face  of  the 
abutment.  A  band  of  28  or  30  gage,  24k.  gold,  is  fitted 
to  this  groove  and  ground  off'  to  the  base  of  the  root. 

To  the  band  is  soldered  a  flat  cap  of  pure  gold,  34  gage, 
using  as  little  solder  as  possible,  20k.  This  is  replaced 
in  position  and  burnished  to  the  face  of  the  root.     It  is  then 


USEFUL     HINTS.  *  185 

pnnchtd  and  a  platinum  post  placed  in  positi(  n,  secured 
with  hard  wax,  inverted  and  soldered,  the  cap  being  trimmed 
accurately  to  the  outlines  of  the  root  end.  A  plate  tooth 
is  then  backed  with  gold  as  follows  :  The  tooth  is  ground 
at  the  gingival  end  to  fit  the  cap  and  beveled  from  pins 
to  cutting  edge.  From  34  gage,  24k.  gold,  a  backing  is 
cut  slightly  longer  than  the  tooth  which  is  punched,  placed 
in  position  in  the  tooth,  and  held  by  bending  the  pins.  The 
gold  is  burnished  thoroughly  to  the  tooth  and  slightly  over 
the  square  end  of  bevel  of  cutting  edge. 

Another  backing  is  cut,  long  enough  to  burnish  over  the 
articular  edge  to  thicken  the  gold  at  this  point,  in  which  a 
number  of  holes  are  punched  to  insure  perfect  union  in  sol- 
dering. 

All  the  parts  being  placed  in  position,  it  is  ^carefully 
waxed  up  and  inserted  as  usual  for  soldering. 

It  can  be  claimed  for  this  crown  that  it  is  less  bulky 
and  more  shapely  than  the  old  ferule  crown;  exposes  no  gold 
at  the  gum  margin  ;  allows  a  much  more  favorable  and  ac- 
curate adjustment  with  regard  to  other  teeth  ;  can  be  used 
when  convergent  or  divergent  roots  are  to  serve  as  abutments 
for  bridges  ;  is  especially  adapted  to  conically  shaped  roots  ; 
causes  less  pain  in  adjustment,  and  will  not  irritate  the 
pericemental  membrane.  It  is  extremely  cleanly  as  the  joint 
between  gold  and  tooth  ;  can  be  made  aboTit  perfect.  The 
band  and  cap  may  be  made  of  platinum  and  a  porcelain  back- 
ing baked,  producing  a  highly  esthetic  crown. — Dr.  J.  H. 
Crossland. 

311.  To  Remove  a  Waxed-up  Bridge. — To  remove  a 
waxed-up  bridge  from  the  mouth,  without  changing  the 
position  of  the  teeth  or  the  articulation,  or  bending  the 
piece  when  there  are  several  dummies,  fill  a  bridge-work 
impression  tray  with  quick-setting  plaster,  and  invest  it 
over  the  bridge  as  it  is  in  position  in  the  mouth,  removing 
the  bridge  in  the  plaster.  It  is  then  held  in  perfect  posi- 
tion, invested,  ready  for  soldering.  Always  place  a  pillow 
or  cushion  of  wax,  first  of  all,  from   one  cap  crown  to  the 


186  ■  DEPARTMENT     C. 

other,  on  the  ridge,  lettmg  the  teeth  hear  on  the  wax,  and 
preventing  the  suspended  crown  from  sinking  down  and 
bearing  on  the  ridge. — Dr.  Crenshaw,  in  Items. 


DEPARTMENT  D. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  189 


DEPARTMENT  D. 


312.     Selecting    and    Keeping    Dental     Medicines. — 

While  there  may  be  many  other  things  to  modify  the  action 
of  drugs,  or  the  result  of  their  application,  we  believe  many 
times  negative  results  come  through  the  use  of  inferior 
medicaments.  There  are  many  impure  drugs  in  the  market, 
especially  in  the  smaller  towns ;  drugs  that  are  either  adul- 
terated or  have  undergone  a  change  from  exposure  or  long 
keeping. 

Some  of  the  dental  medicaments  that  have  been  found 
adulterated  are : 

Arsenious  acid,  adulterated  with  lime  salts,  chalk  and 
other  substances. 

Creasote. — It  is  very  difficult  to  obtain  a  pure  beech- 
wood  creasote.  Much  of  the  so-called  creasote  has  been 
found  to  consist  of  crude  carbolic  acid,  to  which  has  been 
added  creasote  and  phosole. 

Essential  oils  are  often  adulterated  with  fixed  oils,  oil 
of  turpentine,  chloroform,  alcohol,  or  essential  oils  of  an 
inferior  grade  mixed  with  those  of  a  better  quality. 

Aconite  tincture  is  one  of  the  most  uncertain  remedies 
in  regard  to  strength  that  w^e  use.  The  commercial  article 
may  be  strong,  weak  or  sometimes  almost  inert.  This  varia- 
tion is  due  to  varying  quantities  of  the  alkaloid  used  in  its 
preparation.  That  prepared  from  the  root  is  many  times 
more  powerful  than  that  prepared  from  the  leaves.  The 
officinal  tincture  U.  S.  P.  contains  40  per  cent  aconite 
strength;  Fleming's  tincture  has  79  per  cent;  the  German 
10  per  cent;  the  British  16  per  cent;  the  French  20  per 
cent ;  so  that  care  should  be  used  in  the  selection  and  use  of 
this  remedy. 

Terebene^  as  found  in  the  shops,  is  often  contaminated 
with  resin,  turpentine,  etc. 


190  DEPARTMENT     D. 

Cocain  salts  may  contain  organic  or  other  impurities. 

Zinc  Salts. — These  may  contain  impurities  of  lead, 
copper,  iron,  aluminum  or  alkaline  earths. 

Hydrogen  ijeroxid  has  been  found  to  contain  varying 
quantities  of  sulfuric  or  hydrochloric  acids ;  some  samples 
contain  also  boric  acid  and  barium.  The  purer  the  solution 
the  less  liable  is  it  to  decompose,  and  this  is  in  a  degree 
independent  of  the  strength  of  the  solution  and  the  tempera- 
ture at  which  it  is  kept.  Solutions  of  the  commercial  article, 
however,  are  very  unstable  and  should  be  kept  in  glass  stop- 
pered bottles,  protected  from  light  and  heat.  Hydrogen 
peroxid,  ordinarily  obtained,  gives  up  a  jDart  of  its  oxigen 
at  a  temperature  of  about  34°  F.,  and  the  amount  is  increased 
in  proportion  as  the  temperature  is  raised.  Hence  the 
necessity  of  keeping  in  a  cool  place,  such  as  an  ice-chest  or 
water-cooler. 

Among  other  drugs  used  in  dentistry  that  are  affected 
by  light,  heat  or  exposure  may  be  mentioned : 

Bichlorid  of  3Iercury-^'^o\u.t\on's,. — They  are  gradually 
decomposed  on  exposure  to  light  or  in  contact  with  organic 
matter. 

Aristol  is  decomposed  by  exposure  to  light  and  moisture. 

Eurojphen  is  affected  in  the  same  manner. 

Dialyzed  iron  is  affected  by  age ;  thickens,  etc. ;  the 
solution  not  remaining  potent  after  being  kept  for  five  or 
six  months. 

Amyl  nitrate  is  a  very  volatile  liquid,  and  its  alcoholic 
solutions  rapidly  deteriorate. 

Myrtol  evaporates  at  ordinary  temperatures. 

lodin  slowly  volatilizes  at  ordinary  temperatures  if 
■exposed  to  light  and  air. 

Eugenol^  exposed  to  the  air,  becomes  darker  in  color 
and  resinous. 

Terebene,  if  exposed  to  the  air,  absorbs  oxigen  and  is 
changed. 

Cocain  solutions  are  unstable,  and  soon  decompose  on 
exposure  to  light. 

Tannic  acid,  exposed  to  moist  air,  gradually  changes. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  191 

and  aqueous  solutions,  when  exposed  to  air,  mold,  fer- 
ment and  are  converted  to  gallic  acid. 

Permanganate  of  'potassium,  in  the  presence  of  moisture, 
gives  up  the  oxigen  it  contains  and  becomes  binoxid  of 
manganese. 

Essential  oils,  if  pure,  are  not  affected  by  exposure,  but 
those  ordinarily  obtained  thicken  and  become  resinous  on 
exposure  to  air. 

Ethyl  chlorid  is  volatile  at  the  ordinary  temperature. 

Nitrate  of  silver  is  somewhat  affected  by  exposure  to 
light  and  air. 

Glacial  ijhospkoric  acid,  if  exposed  to  air,  absorbs  moist- 
ure and  is  changed  in  consistency. 

Sulphate  of  zinc  is  slowly  effervescent  in  dry  air. 

Aqua  ammonia,  if  exposed  to  air,  readily  deteriorates.. 

Thus  we  realize  the  necessity  of  keeping  medicaments 
in  well-stoppered  bottles  and  in  a  dark,  dry  and  cool  place,  to 
preserve  them.  If  we  are  careless  in  this  matter  and  allow 
our  drugs  to  deteriorate,  we  cannot  expect  satisfactory 
results  from  their  use. — Ohio  Journal. 

313.  Incompatibility  of  Medicines. — This  subject  can 
onl}'  be  glanced  at  here.  The  following  simple  rules  may 
help  the  burdened  memory  of  the  practitioner : 

Ils'ever  use  more  than  one  remedy  at  a  time,  if  one  will 
serve  the  purpose.  ISTeveruse  strong  mineral'acids  in  com- 
bination with  other  agents,  unless  you  know  exactly  what 
reaction  will  ensue.  They  decompose  salts  of  the  weaker 
acids  and  form  ethers  with  alcohol.  Select  the  simplest 
solvent,  diluent,  or  excipient,  you  know  of,  remembering 
that  the  solvent  power  of  alcohol  and  water,  for  their  par- 
ticular substances,  decreases  in  proportion  to  the  quantity 
of  the  other  added.  ITever  combine  free  acids  with  hydrates 
or  carbonates. 

Generally,  do  not  combine  two  or  more  soluble  salts. 

The  following  variably  insoluble  salts  will  be  formed 
whenever  the  materials  of  which  they  are  composed  are 
brought  together  in   solutions:    The  hydrates,  carbonates. 


192  DEPARTMENT     D. 

phosphates,  borates,  arseniates,  and  tannates  of  most  earthy 
and  heavy  metals  and  alkaloids,  and  the  metallic  sulfides ; 
the  sulfates  of  calcium,  of  lead,  and  of  the  subsalts  of 
mercury ;  the  chlorids,  iodids,  and  bromids  of  bismuth, 
silver,  lead,  and  subsalts  of  mercury;  the  iodids  of  quinin, 
morphins  and  most  alkaloids. 

Alkalies^  precipitate  the  alkaloids  and  the  soluble  non- 
alkaline  metallic  salts,  and  (also  metallic  hydrates  and  car- 
bonates) neutralize  free  acids. 

Silver  nitrate^  lead  acetate,  corrosive  sublimate  potassium 
iodide,  should  nearly  always  be  prescribed  alone.  The  first 
with  creasote  forms  an  explosive  compound.  Aconite  should 
never  be  given  except  in  a  solution  with  water. 

Silver  nitrate,  and  lead  acetate  and  subacetate,  though 
incompatible  with  almost  everything,  may  be  combined 
with  opium ;  the  latter  forming  with  opium  a  compound 
which,  though  insoluble,  is  therapeutically  active  as  a 
lotion. 

Corrosive  sublimate  is  incompatible  with  almost  every- 
thing, and  should  be  given  in  simple  syrup  ;  even  the  com- 
pound syrup  of  sarsaparilla  is  said  to  decompose  it. 

Tannic  acid,  and  substances  containing  it,  are  incom- 
patible with  albumen  and  gelatin.  Tannic  acid,  iodin,  and 
the  soluble  iodids  are  incompatible  with  the  alkaloids  and 
substances  containing  them,  and  with  most  soluble  metallic 
salts.  Vegetable  in  fusions  are  generally  incompatible  with 
metallic  salts. 

Glucosides,  such  as  santonin  and  colocynthin,  should 
not  be  prescribed  with  free  acids  or  emulsion. 

Dangerous  compounds,  because  poisonous,  are  :  Potassic 
iodid  with  potassic  chlorat ;  hydrocyanic  acid  or  potassium 
cyanid  with  metallic  hydrates,  carbonates,  subchlorids,  as 
bismuth  carbonate,  or  nitrate,  or  calomel. 

Explosions  would  result  from  the  combination  of  power- 
ful oxidizers  with  readily  oxidizable  substances,  as  potassium 
chlorat  or  permanganate  with  tannin,  sugar,  sulfur,  sulfides, 
vegetable  powders,  glycerin,  alcohol,  tinctures  or  ether. — 
Potter,  in  Items. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  193 

314.     Formula  for  Compound  Investment. — 

Take  by  measure  1-16  part,  pulverized  soapstone  ; 
3-16  Plumbago ; 
5-16  Asbestus,  [grade  No.  3,] 
7-16  Plaster  of  Paris. 
Mix  thoroughly. 

The  above  is  the  best  known  investing  material  for  all 
purposes. — R.  E.  Zellers,  D.D.S. 


315.     Antiseptic  Spray. — 

R. — Antiseptic  pastilles  (Carl  Seiler's  Formula  Pastilles)  . .  iss. 

Aq.  pura ^  i. 

Sol.  Hyd.  chlor.  cocain,  4  per  cent .^  ss. 

Glycerine ad  qs.  5  ii. 

Sig. — Use  as  spray. 

Crush  and  dissolve  the  pastille  Urst  in  water,  boiling 
water  is  quicker,  then  add  cocain.  It  will  turn  milky  and 
cloudy.  Add  glycerin,  which  will  immediately  make  the 
liquid  clear.  Spray  nose,  month  and  throat,  and  you  will 
be  safe.  This  spray  is  admirable  to  benumb  sensitive  gums, 
before  using  the  gilling-twine  to  hold  rubber-dam  in  place. 
It  is  exceedingly  useful  also  in  allaying  irritability  of  soft 
palate  in  taking  impressions. — Dr.  A.  C.  Hewitt,  in  Ohio 
Dental  Journal. 


316.  Hamamelis  in  Dentistry. — The  medicinal  prop- 
erties of  this  drug  are  anodyne  stypic,  and  mild  astringent. 
I  have  found  it  one  of  the  safest  and  best  preparations  for 
all  inflammatory  conditions  about  the  mouth,  that  I  have 
ever  used.  As  a  mouth  wash  after  bridging:  crowning; 
removing  tartar  from  the  teeth,  etc.  In  a  strength  of  one 
part  hamamelis  to  two  parts  water  it  is  valuable  for  tender 
bleeding  gums — it  may  be  used  one  part  water  to  one  part 
hamamelis.  For  hemorrhage  following  extracting,  it  is  my 
first  remedy,  and  nearly  always'controlls  the  trouble  without 
resorting  to  anything  stronger.  I  prefer  Pond's  Extract,  as 
I  found  it  the  most  uniform  and  reliable.- — Wm.  II.  Steele. 


194  DEPARTMENT     D. 

317. — A  Good  Anodyne. — Dr.  J.  W.  Jungmann  recom- 
mends the  following  as  an  excellent  obtunder  for  odontalgia 
caused  from  pulp  exposure,  after  extraction,  pain,  etc. 

R.— Menthol  crys gr.  v. 

Tine   aconit gtt.  xx. 

Chloroform  ^ qs.  5  ij. 

M.  Sig. — Apply  on  gum  over  the  seat  of  trouble  with  a  pad  of 

bibulous  paper.  — Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

318.  Naphthol. — B.  Kaplithol  is  superior  to  carbolic 
acid  or  creasote  as  an  injection  in  the  sac  of  an  alveolar 
abscess,  and  as  a  dressing  for  suppurating  pulps.  Its  com- 
parative freedom  from  odor  and  the  absence  of  unpleasant 
after  effects,  if  it  comes  in  contact  with  the  gums  or  lips,  are 
strong  points  in  its  favor. — William  Herbert  Rollins,  in 
American  Journal  Dental  Science. 

319.  Trichloracetic  Acid  for  Canker. — I  am  specially 
pleased  to  report,  so  far  as  my  experience  goes,  that  we  have 
in  trichloracetic  acid  an  unequaled  remedy  for  apthous  stom- 
atitis, or  canker  sore  mouth.  These  mucous  patches  are  often 
quite  painful  and  annoying  to  both  patient  and  operator. 
Ordinarily,  one  or  two  applications  will  be  sufficient.  In 
extensive  cases,  patients  may  be  given  a  smsill  bottle,  and 
apply  it  for  themselves.  It  seems  to  me  that  we  can  do  the 
medical  profession  no  better  service  than  to  call  their  atten- 
tion to  this  remedy  as  a  "  specific  "  in  this  class  of  lesions. 
One  application  is  sufficient  to  stop  further  progress,  if  used 
ADn  first  appearance  of  the  lesion.  I  say  this  with  consider- 
able confidence,  because  I  have  succeeded  where  the  physician 
has  failed. — J.  A.  Dunn,  in  Cosmos. 

320.  To  Prevent  Nervousness  in  Operating. — 

R.— Potassium  bromid gr.  xx. 

Cinnamon  water .» '. . ,^  ij. 

Administer  thirty  minutes  before  operating. 

— Jno.  S.  Marshall,  in  Items. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  195 

321.  Compound  Listerin  Obtundent. 

R.-— Sol.  hyd.  cocain,  4  per  cent fl.  5  iij. 

Glycerin fl.  5  ij. 

L'steriu ad  fl.  3  iv.     M. 

— Dr.  A.  C.  Hewett,  in  Review. 

322.  Solutions  of  Corrosive  Sublimate. — 'A  neat  and 
convenient  way  to  handle  corrosive  sublimate  for  making 
antiseptic  solutions,  is  to  dissolve  three  grains  in  one  fluid 
drachm  of  alcoliol,  which,  added  to  a  pint  of  listerin, 
makes  1-2000,  and  undergoes  no  chemical  change. — Ohio 
Journal. 

323.  To  Make  Hands  Soft  and  White.— Clean,  soft 
hands,  whether  old  or  new,  are  still  useful.  Tlie  successful, 
busy  dentist  must  sometimes  handle  flask,  file,  forge,  etc. 
His  hands  get  soiled.  Soap  will  not  always  whiten.  The 
following  is  excellent : 

R. — Pulv.  acidnm  boracicum lb.  i. 

"      Sodac  carb lbs.  ii. 

"      Pumice lb.  i. 

Glycerin  q.  s.  to  form  paste. 
Sig. — Use  as  a  soap. 

— Dr.  Hewitt,  in  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

324.  Formula  for  Dentists'  Headache. — For  this  we 
know  of  nothing  better  than  Trosseau's  formula  for  head- 
ache, which  is  composed  of  laurel  water  and  cyanid  of  po- 
tassium. 

R. — Potass,  cyanid grs.  iv. 

Aque  lauro  cerasi o  i^- 

Ft.  solut M 

S. — Poison.     Moisten  a  compress  and  apply  to  seat  of  pain. 

—  Ohio  State  Journal. 

325.  Soldering  Fluid. — Chlorid.of  zinc,  so  mncli  used 
in  soldering,  has,  besides  its  corrosive  qualities,  the  draw- 
back of  beins:  unwholesome.  A  soldering  mixture  has  been 
found  which  is  free  from  these  defects.     It  is  made  bv  mix- 


196  DEPARTMENT     D. 

ing  one  pound  of  lactic  acid  with  one  pound  of  glycerin 
and  eight  pounds  of  water. —  Office  and  Laboratory. 

326.  Detective  Antiseptics. — One  of  the  great  desider- 
ata of  modern  surgery  has  been  an  antiseptic  which  would 
tell  us  when  a  part  is  antiseptically  clean.  This  is  especi- " 
ally  so  in  the  surgery  of  cavities,  which  can  not  be  seen,  as 
sinuses,  normal  canals,  etc.  We  have  two  preparations  which 
we  can  rely  on  as  faithful  detectives  of  the  "  we  never 
sleep  "  variety.  Marchland's  peroxid  of  hydrogen,  and 
potassium  permanganate.  The  former,  used  in  the  fifteen 
volume  solution,  will  cause  violent  effervescence  if  pus  be 
persistent,  and  will  continue  to  do  so  till  all  the  pus  has 
been  destroyed.  Potassium  permanganate  in  a  ten-grain  so- 
lution (10  grs.  to  1  oz.  aqua),  will  turn  from  a  bright  pur- 
plish red  to  a  dirty  brown  color  in  the  presence  of  any  dis- 
organized organic  matter.  It  is  also  available  for  testing 
the  purity  of  water  for  domestic  uses.  The  brown  stains  of 
the  skin  caused  by  contact  with  the  solution  can  easily  be 
removed  by  scrubbing  with  a  weak  solution  of  oxalic  acid,  to 
which  a  few  drops  of  hydrochloric  acid  have  been  added. — 
Medical  Examiner. 

327.  Sulphate  of  Zinc  as  an  Escharotic. — Bartholow 
says  that  dried  sulphate  of  zinc,  made  in  a  paste  by  the 
addition  of  a  little  starch  and  water,  is  a  valuable  excharotic, 
and  free  from  the  danger  that  attends  many  excharotics. — 
Ohio  Journal. 

328.  Lime  Water  for  Sensitive  Teeth. — Lime  water 
is  another  excellent  remedy,  given  teaspoonful  doses  three 
or  four  times  a  day ;  it  will  aflbrd  relief  to  very  sensitive 
teeth  perceptibly.  Another  remedy  with  which  I  have  ob- 
tained most  happy  results  is  bicarbonate  of  soda.  This 
may  be  given  in  doses  (compressed  tablets)  of  from  five  to 
twenty  grains  three  or  four  times  a  day,  for  a  general  alka- 
line effect.  Locally  it  may  be  used  in  solution,  two  drams 
to  eight  ounces  of  water,  or  the  soda  itself  may  be  applied  to 


USEFUL    HI^'TS.  197 

sensitive  teeth  three  or  four  times  a  day.  Tlie  most  grati- 
fying relief,  in  cases  of  extremely  sensitive  dentine,  is  thus 
obtained. — Frank  Abbott,  r).D.S.,in  Practitioner. 

329.  Creasote  and  Oil  of  Cloves. — Equal  quantities 
by  bulk,  is  a  polychrest  remedy  that  I  keep  always  in  case 
for  application  to  aching  teeth,  painful  gums,  ulcerous  sur- 
faces, and  also  where  pulps  are  exposed.  When  a  cavity  is 
prepared  for  filling  ;  I  wipe  out  to  saturation,  the  cavity,  with 
this  agent ;  being  careful  not  to  make  it  too  dry  before  fill- 
ing ;  leaving  it  as  a  disinfectant  and  coagulant  in  the  bottom 
of  the  cavity,  before  the  provisionary  or  permanent  filling 
is  inserted. — Dr.  Shattuck,  in  Archives. 

330.  Pyrozone  for  Inflammation. — AVhen  the  mucous 
membrane  of  the  mouth  or  throat  is  inflamed,  rinse  the 
mouth  and  gargle  the  throat  with  pj^rozone,  then  use  to  fol- 
low, a  solution  of  boro-glycerin  1  to  10.  This  is  effectual, 
and  is  a  great  soother. — Revieio. 

381.  Collodion  and  its  Uses. — Collodion  is  a  saturated 
solution  of  gun-cotton  in  sulfuric  ether.  There  are  two 
forms  which  the  pharmacien  provides  for  us ;  the  one  con- 
tractile, the  other  non-contractile.  The  contractile  is  that 
one  composed  of  gun-cotton  and  sulfuric  ether  with  a 
little  alcohol,  and  the  other  is  made  of  collodion,  Canada 
turpentine  and  castor  oil.  They  are  very  useful  protections 
to  irritable  surfaces,  such  as  are  present  in  phlegmonous 
abscesses  and  sloughing  ulcers.  Where  the  inflammation 
runs  high  and  the  tenderness  is  great,  we  prefer  to  paint, 
with  a  camel's-hair  pencil,  the  entire  surface  with  the  flex- 
ible, or  second  form  of  collodion.  Where  the  inflammation 
is  on  the  decline  and  we  desire  compression,  we  use  the  con- 
tractile, or  first  form  of  collodion,  applied  in  successive  lay- 
ers with  a  camel's-hair  pencil,  till  a  suflficient  amount  of 
contraction  has  driven  the  blood  out  of  the  capillaries  and 
whitened  the  surrounding  parts  sufficiently  to  satisf}'  us 
that  the  blood  supply  will  now  be  controlled,  and  the  pa- 
tient have  a  comfortable  time  till  the  next  visit. — Archives. 


198  DEPARTMENT     D. 

332.  lodin  with  Glycerin. — Tincture  of  ioclin  mixed 
with  glycerin  is  claimed  by  Dr.  Hammond  to  prove  more 
effective  as  a  local  application  than  the  plain  tincture.  This 
is  due  to  the  retardation  of  the  dissipation  of  the  iodin  or, 
more  likely,  to  the  skin  remaining  soft,  and  hence  in  a  bet- 
ter condition  for  absorbing  the  drug. —  Western  Dent.  Jour. 

333.  Local  Anesthetic  for  Lancing,  etc. — I  have  also 
found  the  following  good  in  minor  surgical  operations,  such 
as  lancing  a  felon,  or  removing  a  small  tumor  from  the  scalp 
or  face :  Take  any  quantity  of  alcohol,  and  add  menthol 
till  you  have  obtained  a  saturated  solution,  then  add  twenty 
drops  of  chloroform  for  each  ounce  of  alcohol.  Apply  with 
a  small  piece  of  cotton,  or  spunk,  allowing  the  air  to  get  to 
the  parts  freely  for  from  three  to  five  minutes.  Then  op- 
erate.— Dr.  C.  H.  Gillman. 

334.  Vinegar  and  its  Uses. — Vinegar  is  another  polj^- 
chrest  that  I  always  keep  in  my  medicine  case;  not  so  much 
for  its  direct  action  as  vinegar,  as  for  being  a  dilute  acetic 
acid,  and  a  solvent  of  carbolic  acid  and  creasote,  wherever 
they  have  been  used  in  excess  of  our  desire  for  their  action 
on  the  tissues.  Wherever  we  dress -fistulous  openings  with 
tents  on  which  we  have  used  caustic  paste,  carbolic  acid,  or 
creasote  and  oil  of  cloves,  after  pushing  the  tent  in  the  depth 
of  the  cavity  and  excising  it  at  the  mouth,  we  swab  out  the 
excess  about  the  mouth  of  the  listule  with  a  strong  vinegar, 
so  as  to  prevent  sloughing  of  the  territory  beyond  that  im- 
mediately confined  to  the  fistule  that  we  desire  to  enlarge 
for  further  exploration. — Dr.  Shattuck,  in  Archives. 

335.  lodid  of  Zinc  has  been  used  for  more  than  two 
years  to  disinfect  pockets  of  pyorrhea  alveolaris,  in  solution 
of  12,  24,  36  or  48  grains  to  one  ounce  of  water,  once  in  four 
days  till  pus  has  ceased  to  flow  on  pressure  or  can  be  de- 
tected by  HjOo.  The  granular  is  used  to  sprinkle  on  apthous 
ulcers,  to  repair  the  gingival  margin  when  ragged,  slit  or 
fungous  ;  apply  in  full  strength. — Ibid. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  199 

336.  For  the  Toothache.— 

R.— Chloroform lo  drops. 

Carbolic  acid,  ninety-five  per  cent lo 

Glycerin ^° 

Morpbin igrain. 

M. — Use  on  cotton. 

—J.  E.  Morse,  M.D. 

337.  Treatments  for  First  Dentition.— According  to 

Dr.  Uonti{Bevuede  3IaL  de  V  Enfance^oW  interference  with 
primary  dentition  should,  as  a  general  rule,  be  proscribed. 
Accordingly,  he  considers  as  injurious  the  ordinary  prac- 
tices, as,  for  example,  biting  on  hard  objects,  bathing  the 
gums  with  so-called  emollient  substances,  etc. 

The  only  necessary  measure  of  precaution  is  to  keep  the 
buccal  mucous  membrane  in  a  state  of  perfect  cleanliness. 
It  is  best,  then,  during  dentition,  to  wash  the  mouth  several 
times  daily,  either  with  pure  water  or  antiseptic  solutions. 
Among  the  latter,  the  most  efficacious  are  the  following: 

R.— Acidi  boracici 3.00  grammes  (gr.  xiv). 

Aque  distillate 200.00  grammes  (.^  vij  o  vj). 

Tinct.  myrrhe 2.00  grammes  (111  ^iv).     M. 

Or, 

R  .— Sodii  salicylatis 3-oo  grammes  (gr.  xiv).^ 

Aque  distillate 200.00  grammes  {-  vij  o  vj). 

Tinct.  myrrhe 3  00  grammes  (1TL  xiv).     M. 

When  the  milk  teeth  have  appeared  they  should  be 
cleansed  with  a  very  soft  brush,  using  either  one  of  the  pre- 
ceding solutions,  or  a  suitable  dentifrice.  The  following, 
recommended  by  Zsigmomdy,  gives  excellent  results: 

R .— Magnesii  carb. 

Pulv.  saponus aa  10.00  grammes  (o  iiss). 

Pulv.  ossis  sepie 10.00  grammes  (5  iiss). 

Essentia  menthe gtt.  iv.  M. 

In  very  young  children  the  following  mixture  may  be 
better : 

R.— Magnesii  carb 5-00  grammes  (gr.  Ixxv). 

Crete  preparat., 

Sodii  salicylatis aa  15. co  grammes  (o  iij  gr-  xiv). 

Essentie  menthe g1-t- iv.  ^^' 


200  DEPARTMENT     D. 

When  the  milk  teeth  commence  to  decay  they  should 
he  filled  at  once,  that  they  may  be  preserved  as  long  as  pos- 
sible.— Journal  des  Sciences  Medicates  de  Lille ^  October  4th, 
1889,  p.  341. 

338.  Aromatic-Chloro  Aristol  for  Dead  Teeth. — For 
the  treatment  of  dead  and  infected  teeth  or  roots  of  teeth,  also 
for  alveolar  abscesses  with  or  without  fistula,  is  the  name  I 
have  given  to  the  following  combination : 

Aristol   I  drachm. 

Chloroform ^  ounce. 

Oil  of  cassia lo  minims. 

Owing  to  its  gummy  nature,  it  cannot  be  used  with  a 
syringe,  but  with  a  smooth  broach  wrapped  with  cotton 
fibers  it  can  be  very  readily  forced  through  the  root-canal, 
after  properly  enlarging  it. 

A  blind  abscess  at  the  apex  of  a  root  can  thus  be  suc- 
cessfully treated,  even  where  there  is  no  drainage;  in  fact, 
there  is  no  need  of  drainage,  one  or  two  applications  being  all 
that  IS  needed.  I  have  treated  teeth  by  this  method  now  for 
over  ten  months,  and  I  have  the  first  failure  to  find  or  hear 
of.  One  application  is  all  that  is  needed  for  an  infected  root- 
canal,  and  I  find  it  a  capital  dressing  for  an  exposed  nerve 
before  capping  it. 

Where  I  use  the  preparation  for  abscesses,  I  do  not  use 
anything  else  ;  there  is  no  need  of  anything  further.  Be  sure 
to  get  it  through  the  apex  of  the  root.  When  you  want  to 
apply  the  treatment  the  second  time,  pack  the  root-canal 
with  cotton  saturated  with  the  remedy  till  the  next  sitting, 
and  finally  fill  the  root  with  chloro-percha,  using  cotton 
fibers  that  are  damp  with  the  preparation  as  a  carrier  for 
the  chloro-percha.  Should  it  go  through  the  apex  a  little,  it 
is  better  than  to  not  quite  fill  to  the  end  of  the  root.  I  shall 
be  pleased  should  it  prove  to  be  as  useful  to  my  colleagues 
as  it  has  been  to  me.— S.  Clippinger,  D.D.S.,  in  Cosmos. 


USEFUL      HINTS.  201 

339.  Formulas  for  Pyorrhea. —  . 
Dr.  Riggs'  formula  is  as  follows: 

K. — Carbolic  acid i  part. 

Tinct.  iodin i     " 

Glycerin lo  parts. 

Rub  well  in  a  mortar,  and  gradually  add  chlorid  soda,  6  parts. 

Formula  of  Dr.  N.  Dodge,  of  jSTew  York,  is  as  follows : 

R . — Acid  sulphuric 5  j  • 

Water ,^  ij . 

Soda  biborate .^  iv. 

Formula  of  Dr.  F.  Y.  Clark : 

R. — Carbolic  acid 3  v. 

Alcohol ,0  iv. 

Glycerin • 3  j. 

Oil  pimentos , §  iij  • 

Sal.  red  aniline 3  ij . 

The  above  remedies  are  used  on  pledgets  of  cotton  same 
as  other  formulas,  but  care  should  be  used  in  the  Dodge 
formula  to  protect  the  surrounding  tissues,  as  it  is  liable  to 
produce  eschar. 

"  I  have  tried  several  other  remedies,  but  found  these  the 
best,  A  number  of  my  patients  keep  Dr.  Riggs'  prescrip- 
tion in  their  house,  and  many  use  it  often,  and  would  not  be 
without  it  in  their  family,  as  it  keeps  the  gums  healthy  and 
well  when  used  according  to  directions. — L.  Betts,  in  Items. 

340.  Antiseptic  Adhesive  Pomade. — This  is  a  very 
useful  protector  dressing  for  wounds  of  the  face,  etc, : 

R. — Oxid  of  zinc gr.  x. 

Chlorid  of  zinc gr.  xiv. 

Gelatin 5  x. 

Water 3  ij. 

— Scienlific  Arh. 

341.  For  Pains  After  Extracting. — A  potent  and  reli- 
able remedy  for  the  immediate  after-pains  of  teeth  extrac- 
tion is  amyl  nitrit,  the  patient  to  inhale  the  preparation 
about  three  or  four  seconds,  and  then  to  sit  still  in  the  chair 
for  about  five  minutes,  or  till  the  amyl  nitrit  has  spent  its 


202  DEPARTMENT     D. 

primary  force.  The  remedy  should  be  kept  in  every  office^ 
dental  and  medical,  where  anesthetics  are  used.  A  single 
drop  of  nitro-glycerin,  one  per  cent  solution,  in  half  a  glass 
of  cold  water,  is  even  better  than  amyl  nitrit,  and  more  last- 
ing in  its  effects. — Dr.  E.  H.  Bowne,  in  Cosmos. 

342.  Remedy  for  Hemorrhage. — For  stopping  hem- 
orrhage after  extraction,  the  following  is  a  safe  and  efficient 
remedy :  Pack  powdered  slippery  elm  in  socket,  where 
tooth  has  been  removed,  as  compact  as  possible.  If  necessary 
apply  a  compress.  It  is  a  good  styptic.  It  has  controlled^ 
hemorrhage  after  all  other  remedies  have  failed. — Elwood 
Tate,  D.D.S. 

343.  Cosmoline  for  Root  Filling. — We,  in  Brooklyn,, 
have  been  converted  by  Dr.  Van  Wert  to  his  method  of  fill- 
ing root  canals.     He  uses : 

R.— lodol 3  j 

Oxid  of  zinc 3  i j 

Cosmoline q  s. 

Make  into  a  stiff  paste  ;  it  requires  dexterity  to  make  it  so. 

— Internation  cd. 

344.  Blowing  Powders  in  Roots. — A  small,  pointed 
insufflator  furnishes  the  best  means  of  blowing  powdered 
medicines  in  root  canals  or  in  the  "pockets  "around  necks 
of  teeth,  left  by  the  removal  of  tartar. — Archives  of.Denti&try. 

345.  Chloralamid. — It  is  said  to  be  a  reliable  hypnotic 
to  quiet  the  nervous  system  and  induce  sleep  after  surgical 
operations.  It  has  no  anodyne  properties,  and  gives  prompt, 
reliable  results  with  absolute  freedom  from  evil  after-effects. 
It  is  prepared  by  combining  two  parts  of  chloral  hydrate 
with  one  of  formamide. — Items. 

346.  Acid  Phosphate  Bad  for  Teeth. — I  have  been 
noticing  for  a  year  or  two  past  that  something  has  been 
making  fearful  ravages  in  the  teeth  of  my  patients.  I  found 
that  on  every  occasion  of  this  my  patient  was  an  ardent 


USEFUL      HINTS.  203- 

lover  of  "  acid  phosphate."  I  felt  there  must  be  some  con- 
nection between  this  drug  and  the  trouble  with  the  teeth,  so 
I  determined  to  investigate  the  matter.  To  do  this  I  got 
a  supply  from  a  druggist  and  dropped  a. tooth  in  it,  and 
found  that  in  thirty  minutes  it  had  formed  a  thin  film  on 
the  outside  of  the  tooth  and  the  whole  enamel  was  softened. 
In  two  days  the  enamel  was  as  soft  as  the  other  part  of  the 
tooth,  and  the  whole  tooth  could  be  crumbled  away. 

Such  being  the  case,  I  thought  it  best  to  report  it  to  this 
society,  that  others  having  patients  using  this  drink  might 
warn  them  of  its  deleterious  effects. — Dr.  Head,  in  In- 
ternational. 

347.  Aceto  Tartrate  of  Aluminum. — This  is  another 
salt  of  aluminum  possessing  antiseptic,  astringent,  and  hem- 
ostatic properties.  It  is  a  strong  coagulator  of  egg  albumen. 
It  is  useful  for  controlling  hemorrhage  after  extraction  of 
teeth,  irrigating  cavities,  abscesses,  infected  wounds,  as  an 
application  to  congested  gums,  pyorrhea  pockets,  etc. — L. 
P.  Bethel,  .M.D.,  D.D.S.,  in  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

348.  Gutta-percha  Cajeput  Formula. — Cajeput  oil  is 
said  to  be  an  excellent  solvent  of  gutta-percha,  and,  if  pre- 
pared according  to  the  following  formula,  will  be  found  use- 
ful for  lining  cavities  and  smearing  root  canals  : 

R.— Cajeput  oil, 

Chloroform aa 

Gutta-percha q.s. 

— Items. 
• 

349.  Eucalyptus  and  Thymol. — Eucalyptus  and  thy- 
mol is  a  preparation  containing  borate  of  soda,  benzoic  acid,, 
thymol  oil  of  eucalyptus,  oil  of  wintergreen,  oil  of  thyme, 
oil  of  peppermint,  and  fluid  extract  of  wild  indigo.  It  may 
be  used  externally  or  internally.  It  is  a  non-coagulator  of 
egg  albumen.  It  may  be  freelj'-  used  as  a  mouth-wash,  root- 
dressing,  general  detergent,  for  cleansing  the  hands,  and 
Avherever   a   good  antiseptic   is   desired.     It  may   be   used 


204  DEPARTMENT     D. 

freely  about  the  mouth,  as  it  is  non-poisonous,  non-irritating 
and  not  injurious  to  tooth  structure. — Items. 

350.  The  Best  Local  Anesthetic  : — 

Cocain 5  gr. 

Ext.  witch  hazel ^  i. 

Ivisterin 5  ss. 

Aqua,  distilled 5  ss. 

Inject  with  a  clean  hypodermic  syringe.  Safe  and  ef- 
fectual.— Dr.  W.  F.  Johnson. 

351.  Antiseptic  Bath  for  Instruments:  — 

R— Alcohol 5  ij. 

Hydronapthol grs.  xx. 

Keep  in,  quinin  bottle,  or  one  similar.  Dip  instruments 
in  and  lay  away  to  dry.  Will  not  tarnish. — A.  W.  Harlan, 
in  Items. 

352.  Acetic  Acid. — A  7  per  cent  solution  of  acetic 
acid  is  a  more  effective  germicide  thanbichlorid  of  mercury. 
— Items. 

353.  Hints  on  Using  Cocaine. — 1.  Amount  of  cocain 
used  must  be  in  proportion  to  extent  of  surface  it  is  desired 
to  anesthetize.  In  no  case  should  the  quantity  exceed  one 
and  three-quarter  grains. 

2.  Cocain  should  never  be  used  in  cases  of  heart  dis- 
ease, pulmonary  disease,  or  in  persons  of  highly  nervous  tem- 
perament. 

3.  In  injecting  cocain,  the  intradermic  method  it  pref- 
erable^ to  the  hypodermic.  By  injecting  in,  not  under, 
mucous  membrane  or  skin,  the  risk  of  entering  a  blood-ves- 
sel is  avoided. 

4.  During  injection,  the  patient  should  always  be  in  a 
recumbent  position ;  in  operations  on  the  nose  and  throat, 
the  head  should  not  be  raised  till  anesthesia  is  complete. 

5.  It  is  of  great  importance  that  cocain  should  be  pure, 
since  its  combinations  with  certain  other  alkalies  result  in 
poisonous  compounds. — Brooklyn  Medical  Journal. 


USEFUL   HINTS.  205 

354.  Disinfecting  Power  of  Essential  Oils. — The  es- 
sential oils  are  classified  according  to  their  strength  as  germ- 
icides, thus:  Cinnamon,  fennel,  lavender,  cloves,  thyme^ 
mint,  anise,  eucalyptus,  turpentine,  lemon  and  rose,  the  last 
two  being  very  weak  in  disinfecting  power. — Bad.    World. 

355.  To  Control  Dental  Hemorrhage. — In  all  hemor- 
rhao-e  in  which  the  bleeding  vessels  are  to  be  reached  throusfh 
the  circulation,  gallic  acid  is  the  most  efficient,  as  its  chemi- 
cal affinities  do  not  affi3rd  the  impediments  to  its  absorption 
as  those  of  tannin,  etc.     My  favorite  prescription  is  : 

Gallic  acid, .' dr.  i. 

Cinnamon  water, dr.  ii. 

S. — Tablespoonful  every  hour  till  bleeding  is  arrested. 

Two  or  three  doses  usually  suffice  to  produce  a  clot,  and 
all  the  trouble  is  then  over. 

In  connection  with  the  above,  the  tooth  socket  should 
be  gently  but  securely  packed  with  tannin.  For  this  pur- 
pose I  use  a  saturated  solution  of  tannin  in  water,  saturating 
a  pledget  of  cotton  in  the  solution,  and  packing  it  firmly  in 
the  socket. 

Persulphate  of  iron,  either  in  solution  or  salt,  should 
positively  be  discarded  from  the  list  of  styptics  as  unreliablej 
on  account  of  the  frail  clot  it  produces  and  the  tendency  to 
secondary  hemorrhage  following  its  use. — Dr.  Otto  Arnold, 
in  Ohio  Journal  of  Dental  Science. 

356.  Sulphate  of  Copper. —  Treaiment  of  Pyorrhea. — 
The  writer  suggests  the  following  plan  of  treating  pyor- 
rhea alveolaris :  Bind  a  copper  wire .  around  the  tooth  or 
teeth  afl:ected  and  allow  it  to  remain  till  a  cure  is  brought 
about.  The  action  of  the  sulfuric  acid  in  the  mouth  will 
cause  a  slow  but  constant  formation  of  sulphate  of  copper, 
which  will  settle  in  the  pockets,  and  thus  produce  a  cure  by 
its  ceaseless  action  both  day  and  night.  The  wire  can  also 
be  so  arranged  as  to  close  the  mouth  of  the  pocket,  and  thus 
prevent  the  accumulation  of  the  foreign  substances  which 
always  so  much  retard  successful  treatment.     If  necessary 


206  DEPARTMENT     D.      . 

tlie  patient  can  moisten  the  wire  with  a  sufficiently  weak 
dilution  of  sulfuric  acid  twice  a  day. — J.  "W.  Whipple,  D.D.S. 

357.  Paste  for  Destroying  Nerves. — We  have  to  de- 
pend largely  on  the  prepared  pastes  sold  at  the  depots.  The 
•difficulty  in  preparing  a  nerve  paste  consists  in  the  insolu- 
bility of  the  arsenic,  or  the  preparation  of  an  impalpable 
powder.  Experiments  which  I  have  made  with  an  expert 
■chemist,  have  only  resulted  in  our  getting  a  fine  powder  by 
■dusting  it  through  a  cloth,  after  long  pulverizing  in  a  mor- 
tar. With  one  part  of  this  powder  I  rub  two  parts  of  anti- 
pyrin  and  lanolin,  to  form  a  stiff  paste.  The  lanolin,  in  a 
dry  cavity.,  seems  to  penetrate  the  tissue,  and  to  cause  the 
antipyrin  and  arsenic  to  act,  the  first  reducing  actual 
inflammation  of  the  part,  and  j)reventing  further  pain  dur- 
ing the  action  of  the  arsenic. 

A  combination  of — 

Arsenic i  part, 

Antipyrin 2  parts, 

Lanolin 2       " 

makes  a  painless  devitalization  possible. — Dr.  Bryan,  Office 
•and  Laboratory. 

358.  Silico  Fluorid  of  Sodium. — In  my  contact  with 
the  manufacturers,  I  am  always  on  the  look-out  for  new 
points  of  interest  to  the  dental  profession,  and  a  year  ago 
I  presented  to  you  an  article,  the  silico-fluorid  of  sodium. 
It  is  non-poisonous,  and  can  be  given  internally  in  doses  of 
from  five  to  ten  grains,  three  times  a  day,  without  any  in- 
jurious eftect.  That  it  prevents  acid  fermentation  is  also  an 
established-  fact.  Since  I  presented  it,  a  year  ago,  it  has 
been  in  constant  use  by  the  manufacturers  of  syrups  for 
soda  fountains,  as  it  keeps  them  perfectly  sweet.  Lately, 
there  has  been  a  successful  effort  made  to  prepare  them  in 
tablet  form,  and,  by  the  addition  of  the  essential  oils,  to 
prepare  a  substitute  for  carbolic  acid  for  use  in  the  mouth. 
These  now  come  in  tablets,  so  that  one  dissolved  in  two 
ounces  of  water  gives  you  the  right  strength  to  use  as  a 


USEFUL     HINTS.  207 

■stimulant  antiseptic  mouth-wash.    This  is  a  vei\y  convenient 
form  for  use. — Dr.  W.  X.  Sudduth,  in  Mass.  So. 

359.  Sozoiodol. — Sozoiodol  is  a  white  crystalline  sub- 
stance freely  soluble  in  water  and  alcohol.  It  contains 
iodin,  carbolic  acid  and  sulfur.  It  is  free  from  odor  and 
non-irritating.  At  present  it  takes  high  rank  as  a  para- 
siticid,  and  ought  to  become  useful  in  dental  practice  as  a 
microbe  destroyer. — Dent.  Revieio. 

360.  Root  Dressing  Formula.-^— 

R. — Iodoform 40 parts. 

CoflFee  (roasted) 10      " 

Vaselin 50      " 

Used  as  a  root  dressing. — Review. 

361.  Formulas  for  Fusible  Alloys. — The  following 
:alloys  melt  in  boiling  water,  and  can  be  poured  in  plaster  of 
Paris  impressions  without  any  more  drying  out  than  is  re- 
quired for  varnishing  with  sandarac  or  shellac  varnish  : 

]^ewton's. 

Tin 3  parts. 

Lead  2     " 

Bismuth 5     " 

Melts  at  100  degrees  Cent. 

Rose's. 

Tin 3  parts. 

Lead S     •' 

Bismuth 8     " 

Melts  at  95  degrees  Cent. 

Erman's. 

Tin I  part. 

Lead i     " 

Bismuth 2  parts. 

Melts  at  93  degress  Cent. 

Wood's. 

Tin 2  parts. 

Lead 4     " 

Bismuth 7     " 

Cadmium   i  part. 

Melts  at  70  degrees  Cent. 

# 


208  DEPARTMENT     D. 

Erman's  alloy  can  be  easily  made  by  taking  equal  parts 
of  Plumber's  half-and-half  solder  and  bismuth.  ^ 

This  is  very  much  like  Mellotte's  alloy,  which  is  com- 
posed of 

Tin 5  paits. 

Lead 3     " 

Bismutli 8     " 

— Dr.  John  G.  Harper,  in  Dental  Review. 

362;     Colorless  Tincture  of  lodin  Formula. — 

lodin ; 10  parts  by  weight. 

Hyposulphite  of  soda 10     "  " 

Distilled  water 10     "  " 

Spirit  of  ammonia 16     "  " 

Alcohol 75     " 

Mix  the  iodin,the  hyposulphite  and  the  water  together, 
and  digest  them  at  a  gentle  heat,  shaking  occasionally,  till 
solution  is  effected.  Then  add  the  spirit  of  ammonia,  and 
after  a  few  minutes'  shaking,  the  alcohol.  Finally,  set  the 
mixture  aside  for  three  days  in  a  cool  place,  and  filter. — 
Herald  of  Dentistry. 

363.  Iodoform  Cotton  Formula. — This  preparation, 
which  has  recently  come  in  somewhat  extensive  use,  is 
best  made  in  the  following  manner.  Take  each  ingredient 
exactly  in  the  proportions  given  : 

Iodoform 2  parts. 

Ether 10     " 

Strong  alcohol 20     " 

Glycerin 10     " 

Purified  cotton  wool 3°     " 

Dissolve  the  iodoform  in  the  ether  and  alcohol  mixed ; 
add  the  glycerin  to  this  solution,  and  saturate  the  cotton 
wool  with  the  liquid.  Let  it  dry  by  exposure  to  the  air. 
Draw  the  cotton  out  and  keep  it  in  glass-stOppered  bottles, 
with  wide  mouths,  closing  well. — Herald  of  Dentistry. 

364.  Medicated  Cement  Fillings. — In  this  paper  I 
advise,  after  an  experience  of  two  years  in  capping  exposed 
pulps,"  the  admixture  of  various  medicants  with  the  filling 


USEFUL     HINTS.  *  209 

material.  The  medicants  used  are:  1,  creasote  and  oil  of 
cloves  ;  2,  eugenol ;  3,  deliquesced  carbolic  acid  ;  4,  oil  of 
cinnamon  ;  5,  oil  of  cloves  ;  6,  creasote  pure  ;  7,  creasote,  oil 
of  cloves  and  iodoform  ;  8,  creolin ;  9,  campho-phenique ; 
10,  potassium  chlorate  powder  ;  11,  salicylic  acid  ;  12,  cam- 
phor pulvis  ;  13,  stick  sulfur  pulvis;  14,  iodoform  ;  15,  oil  of 
wintergreen. 

The  principle  of  medicinal  action  of  the  mixture,  is  the 
principle  that,  on  the  crystallization  of  the  oxyphosphate, 
no  further  change  takes  place,  hence  the  remedy  may  exert 
some  of  its  remedial  action.  I  employ  mostly  the  first 
mixture  (creasote  and  oil  of  cloves).  When  the  medicament 
is  a  liquid,  I  add  about  an  equal  quantity  of  medicament 
and  phosphoric  acid,  and  when  solid,  about  equal  parts  of 
medicament  and  oxid.  These  proportions  may  be  varied  as 
required.  I  believe  that  in  this  way  the  remedial  agent  is 
constantly  exerting  its  effect  on  the  walls  of  the  cavity, 
thus  resisting  germ-action. — Dr.  Charles  B.  Atkinson,  in 
Americcm  Dental  Association. 

365.  Antiseptic  Varnish. — For  lining  a  cavity,  after 
disinfection,  and  before  filling;  it  is  the  antiseptic  on  which 
I  rely.     The  preparation  being  : 

Tincture  gum  benzoin, 

Acid  carbol aa 

This  applied  to  the  dry  walls  of  a  cavity  forms  an  impervi- 
ous antiseptic  varnish,  while  it  cauterizes  and  seals  up  the 
canaliculi. — Dr.  Alfred  T.  Peete,  Am.  Jour.  Dent.  Sei. 

366.  Creolin. — I  have  lately  been  using  creolin  as  a 
substitute  for  carbolic  acid,  for  washing  instruments  and  for 
general  disinfecting  purposes,  and  as  a  surgical  dressing.  I 
like  it  very  much,  as  it  is  free  from  the  disagreeable  odor  of 
the  acid  and  is  not  poisonous.  T  am  now  using  creolin  gauze 
as  a  dressing  for  an  antrum  on  which  I  operated  lately, 
curretting  a  large  patch  of  pyogenic  membrane  from  the 
under  surface  of  the  infra-orbital  plate.     It  keeps  the  wound 


210  DEPARTMENT     I). 

perfectly  antiseptic  and  free  from  odor.  It  is  used  exten- 
sively throughout  Continental  Europe. 

Creolin  is  a  by-product  in  the  manufacture  of  carbolic 
acid."  It  is  produced  by  the  addition  of  resin  and  soda  to  the 
creasote  after  removal  from  the  latter  of  all  carbolic  acid. 

It  forms  a  dark-brown  syrupy  fluid,  with  a  peculiar 
odor,  somewhat  resembling  tar.  Its  taste  is  at  first  aroma- 
tic, and  at  last  burning. 

It  is  readily  soluble  in  alcohol  and  ether.  With  water 
it  is  insoluble,  but  is  suspended  in  the  form  of  emulsion, 
producing  an  opaque  milky  appearance.  The  most  com- 
plete emulsion  possible  is  two  and  one-half  per  cent. 

Creolin  belongs  to  the  most  powerful  antiseptics  and 
disinfectants.  As  a  deodorizer  it  is  unsurpassable.  It  has 
hemostatic  properties  and  promotes  granulations.  It  is 
non-irritating,  and  internally  is  non-poisonous.  It  is  used 
in  form  of  gauze,  ointment,  soap  or  emulsion. — Dr.  Fille- 
brown,  Odoniological  Society  of  Pennsylvania. 

367.  Sanitas. — In  "  sanitas  "  we  have  the  ideal  disin- 
fectant, and  experiments  appear  to  have  sufliciently  estab- 
lished its  great  power  as  a  germicide.  It  is  the  most  rapid 
of  deodorizes,  is  harmless,  can  be  given  internally,  has  a 
pleasant  odor  and  does  not  stain  clothing.  Its  great  value 
is  shown  in  the  fact  that  analysis  shows  a  large  percentage 
of  peroxid  of  hydrogen,  thymol,  eucalyptol,  camphoric 
acid,  etc.     It  has  considerable  bleaching  power. 

I  use  sanitas  oil  for  disinfecting  all  cavities  to  be  filled, 
especially  root  canals.  When  first  penetrating  a  pulp  cham- 
ber I  inject  sanitas  fluid  freely,  as  also  in  root  canals,  by 
means  of  a  bent  hj^podermic  needle,  a  device  shown  to  me 
by  Dr.  Wright.  For  treatment  of  ulcers,where  an  escharotic 
is  not  indicated,  sanitas  gives  the  best  of  results.  But  it 
has  manifold  uses.  The  sanitas  toilet  fluid  is  a  delightful 
mouth  wash,  deodorizing  the  oral  cavity  without  substi- 
tuting any  other  odor.  Used  in  a  common  atomizer,  either 
of  the  fluids  will  remove  all  odors  from  the  operating-room, 
rendering  the  atmosphere  fragrant  as  that  of  the  pine  woods. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  211 

They  will  keep  clean  and  fresh  jonr  spittoons  and  all  vessels 
about  the  office.— Dr.  Alfred  T.  Peete,  in  American  Journal 
of  Dental  Science. 

368.  For  Sensitiveness  After  Crowning. — It  is  said 
that  europlien,  when  applied  to  gingival  sensitiveness, 
caused  by  the  setting  of  crowns  or  bridges,  the  soreness  and 
irritation  subsides  promptly. — Ohio  Journal. 

360.     To    Increase  Solubility  of  Salicylic  Acid.— To 

increase  the  solubility  of  salicylic  acid  in  water,  the  addi- 
tion of  one  part  of  acid  to  one  hundred  parts  of  glycerin 
and  one  hundred  and  fifty  parts  of  w^ater  gives  the  most 
satisfactory  results.— OAzo  Journal. 

870.  Oxycyanid  of  Mercury.  — The  comparative 
merits  of  oxycyanid  of  mercury  and  corrosive  sublimate 
are  to  be  summed  up  as  follows :  Its  solution  has  a  slightly 
alkaline  reaction,  and  precipitates  albumen  only  slightly. 
It  is  less  irritant  than  solutions  of  corrosive  sublimate,  and 
solutions  of  the  chemical  1-1500  do  not  attack,  except 
slii^htly,  the  materials  used  in  surgical  instruments.  AVhen 
tested  by  the  power  of  preventing  decomposition  of  soup,  its 
antiseptic  power  proved  to  be  six  times  greater  than  that  of 
bichlorid  of  mercury;  whilst  tested  as  to  its  power  to 
destroy  the  micrococcus  pyogenes  aureus,  the  advantage  lay 
somewhat  in  favor  of  the  sublimate,  1-1400  of  the  former  to 
1-1300  of  the  latter.  When  employed  on  suppurating  sur- 
faces, or  to  render  mucous  surfaces  antiseptic,  it  furnished 
much  better  results  than  the  bichlorid,  because  of  its  much 
greater  tolerance  by  the  tissues  and  of  the  small  amount 
absorbed  thereby.— Com^^es  Rend,  cle  la  Soc.  de  Biol. 

371.  Alumnol. — An  aluminum  salt.  It  is  a  white 
non-hygroscopic  powder,  readily  soluble  in  water,  and  suita- 
ble for  application  in  various  forms.  Solutions  maybe  from 
1  per  cent  to  10  per  cent.  It  arrests  suppuration  and  secre- 
tion, and  hastens  the  closing  of  wounds.     Its  use  is  indicated 


212  DBPAETMENT    D. 

in  the  irrigation  of  cavities,  abscesses,  infected  wounds,  as 
an  application  in  pyorrhea  pockets,  etc.  It  is  an  antiseptic, 
astringent,  a  strong  coagulator  of  egg  albumen,  and  possesses 
hemostatic  properties. — Dr.  L.  P.  Bethel,  in  Ohio  Dental 
Journal. 

372.  Black's  1-2-3-Antiseptic. — Various  combinations 
have  greater  value  than  any  of  the  constituents.  Thus  Dr. 
Black's  favorite  "  1-2-3." 

Carbolic  acid i  part. 

Oil  of  cassia 2  parts. 

Oil  of  wintergreen 3       " 

has  a  range  of  antiseptic  value  greater  than  carbolic  aciil 
alone,  without  its  evil  effects. — Dental  Office  and  Laboratory. 

373.  Burns  and  Scalds. — 

li . — Acidi  salicylici i  dram. 

Olei  Olive 8  fl.  ounces. 

M.     Sig. — Apply  to  burn,  covering  with  linen  or  lint. 

— Bartholow. 

374.  Salicylic  Acid  for  Root  Dressing. — 

R. — Salicylic  acid 40  parts. 

Vaselin 60      " 

Used  as  a  root  dressing. 

— Exchange. 

375.  Carbonate  of  Magnesia. — Carbonate  of  mag- 
nesia, from  ten  to  twenty  grains,  three  times  a  day,  will  be 
found  very  efficacious.  Milk  of  magnesia  is  another  pleas- 
ant preparation  for  an  antacid  effect ;  it  may  be  given  in 
teaspoonful  doses  three  times  a  day.  If  a  laxative  is  de- 
sired, give  a  tablespoonful.  It  is  a  very  excellent  thing  to 
mix  a  teaspoonful  of  this  preparation  with  half  a  glass  of 
water,  and  rinse  the  mouth  several  times  a  day  with  it. — 
Dr.  Frank  Abbott,  in  Dental  Practitioner. 

876.  Permanganate  of  Potash. — Another  preparation 
which  is  quite  a  powerful  antiseptic  is  permanganate  of  pot- 
ash, five  grains  to  an  ounce  of  water.     It  may  be  used  very 


USEFUL     HINTS. 


213 


much  weaker  than  that  with  a  germicide  effect  as  well.  As 
a  deodorizer,  permanganate  of  potash  has  no  equal.  You 
have  here  a  solution  strong  enough  to  destroy  living  germs ; 
not  only  that,  but  if  there  is  any  had  odor  about  the  mouth 
or  teeth,  give.it  to  your  patient,  very  much  diluted,  to  rinse 
the  mouth  with,  and  the  odor  is  gone  almost  instantly.  If 
you  open  a  tooth  the  smell  of  which  is  offensive  enough  to 
drive  you  out  of  the  office,  you  can  destroy  the  odor  in- 
stantly by  simply  applying  to  the  tooth  a  little  permanga- 
nate of  potash  solution.— Dr.  Frank  Abbott,  in  Dent.  Pract. 

377.  Powdered  Resin. —  Resin  powdered  fine  and 
sprinkled  on  a  fresh  cut  or  wound,  and  wrapped  in  a  clean 
rag  dipped  in  cold  water,  will  prevent  inflammation  and 
cause  it  to  heal  kindly. . 

Powdered  resin  can  be  used  in  some  cases  for  filling  the 
roots  of  teeth,  by  working  in  the  root  and  moisten  or  dis- 
solve with  alcohol,  it  is  antiseptic  and  insoluble  in  the  mouth. 

Resin  is  very  useful  in  the  dental  offlce  for  many  things, 
such  as  putting  around  the  necks  of  teeth  to  keep  the  rub- 
ber-dam from  slipping,  also  for  keeping  the  belts  doing 
the  same  on  the  engine  and  laboratory  lathe. — Dr.  D.  Y. 
Beacock,  in  Ohio  Dent.  Jour. 

378.  Carbolate  of  Camphor.— Carbolate  of  camphor 
is  made  by  adding  one  part,  by  weight,  of  carbolic  acid  to 
three  parts  of  camphor,  setting  aside  for  twenty-four  hours, 
and  straining  through  gauze.  It  is  a  permanent  liquid, 
with  a  specific  gravity  of  990.  It  is  thoroughly  antiseptic, 
and  possesses  unsurpassed  germicidal  powers.  Locally  ap- 
plied to  wounds,  by  means  of  cotton  or  gauze,  it  prevents 
suppuration.  "When  kept  in  contact  with  the  skin  for 
several  days  it  produces  an  eruption,  which  can,  however, 
be  prevented  by  mixing  the  liquid  with  oil.  Injected  hypo- 
dermically  it  gives  the  best  results  in  aborting  abcesses  or 
boils  and  relieving  imm.—  TJierapeutic  Gazette. 

379.     Nitro-Muriatic  Acid  is  useful  to  the  dentist,  in  its 
full  strength  as  aqua-regia,  as  an  obtundent  of  sensitive  dentine 


214  DEPARTMENT     D. 

at  the  necks  of  the  teeth  and  as  a  controller  of  pain  and  as  a 
solvent  of  apthous  ulcerous  patches  in  the  mouth  and  mucous 
membrane;  and  as  a  corrective  of  the  gastric  juice  in  anemic 
and  dyspeptic  patients  it  scarcely  has  an  equal,  when  admin- 
istered from  a  phial  in  full  strength,  dropping  from  five  to 
ten  drops  in  a  wineglass  of  sweetened  water,  just  enough  to 
make  a  nice  kind  of  lemonade.  It  will  control  pain  in  the 
stomach ;  and  indigestion,  when  followed  persistently  for 
from  five  to  ten  days,  or  till  the  digestion  has  so  responded 
as  to  make  one  forget  they  needed  a  remedy.  I  merely  men- 
tion this  as  a  fact  worthy  of  attention  and  adoption,  rather 
than  going  into  the  philosophy  of  supplying  the  proper  di- 
gestive fluids  necessary  to  induce  the  proper  ferment  to  per- 
fect digestion  in  the  stomach  and  prima  via. — Dr.  Shattuck, 
in  Archives. 


380.  Tincture  of  Chlorid  of  Iron  is  useful  to  the  den- 
tist as  a  hemostatic  and  as  an  escharotic,  applied  to  ulcerous 
patches,  and  never  disappoints  me,  nor  disturbs  my  conscience 
when  I  use  it,  even  though  it  does  come  in  contact  with  the 
enamel  of  the  teeth  ;  some  of  our  brethren  have  been  fearful 
of  the  ravages  supposed  to  follow  its  contact  with  the  teeth 
when  administered  by  medical  men  as  a  tonic. — Dr.  Shat- 
tuck, in  Archives. 

381.  Salicylate  of  Soda  is  one  of  the  remedies  that 
will  assist  us  very  much  when  we  have  neuralgic  and  rheu- 
matic patients,  especially  those  whose  neuralgia  depends  on 
a  rheumatic  diathesis.  For  inflammatory  rheumatism  it 
probably  has  no  equal,  when  given  sufliciently  heroically  to 
produce  excessive  diaphoresis  and  absence  of  pain  and  sleep. 
It  may  be  well  to  state  that  there  are  some  patients  whose 
hearts  are  very  much  disturbed  by  heavy  doses  of  salicylate 
of  soda,  and  those  who  administer  it  should  make  observa- 
tions, so  as  to  either  reduce  the  quantity  or  omit  altogether 
its  administration  to  such  subjects.  —  Dr.  Shattuck,  in 
Archives. 


USEFUL      HINTS.  215 

382.  Sulphite  of  Soda  is  a  ver}'  pleasant,  convenient  and 
innocent  remedy  ^^'hicll  should  always  be  at  hand  to  correct 
unpleasant  odors  in  the  mouth  and  throat,  using  it  as  a  gar- 
gle ;  and  when  the  stomach  is  out  of  order,  a  little  of  it  may 
be  swallowed  with  benelit. — Dr.  Shattuck,  in  Archives. 

383.  An  Excellent  Varnish. — Procure  a  piece  of  clear 
amber,  scrape  or  powder  it,  dissolve  in  Squibs'  chloroform, 
which  will  take  some  time,  add  a  little  absolute  alcohol  to 
delay  evaporation,  and  you  have  a  varnish  so  hard  that  it 
will  resist  almost  anything. — C.  F.  Ives,  in  International. 

384.  Formalin  and  its  Uses. — It  is  useful  in  chronic  • 
peridontitis  and  total  necrosis,  also  in  mouth  operations, 
where  the  soft  parts  are  concerned.  In  very  sensitive  pd!- 
tients,  where  tannin,  iodoform  or  cocain  were  used,  which 
showed  unpleasant  side  effects,  formalin  showed  no  such 
action.  A  three  per  cent,  solution,  or  mixture  with  pulv. 
guramis  arabici  or  mastic  is  recommended  in  taking  impres- 
sions and  habituating  to  dentures.  In  its  chemical  composi- 
tion it  is  nearest  to  antifibrin,  and  promises  to  become  a  use- 
ful local  anesthetic  in  dentistry. — Dr.  Arkovy. 

385.  Suggestions  for  Using  Pyrozone. — The  manufac- 
turers of  pyrozone,  in  order  to  more  clearly  identify  these 
efficient  preparations  of  peroxid  of  hydrogen,  have  adopted 
the  general  name  of  pj' rozone,  and  designate  their  respective 
strengths  by  the  percentage  of  peroxid  of  hydrogen  which 
each  contains,  and  one  may  be  guided  in  their  administra- 
tion by  this  percentage  value  alone,  as  these  pyrozones  will 
be  found  to  be  uniformly  true  to  their  named  values.  The 
three  per  cent  solution  of  pyrozone  is  aqueous,  and  so  nearly 
neutral  as  to  resist  ordinary  tests.  Its  mnge  of  use  is  as  a 
mouth  wash  and  gargle,  and  as  an  irrigating  and  detergent 
wash  in  abscesses,  sinuses  and  ulcerating  surfaces. 

Of  the  methods  for  the  exhibition  of  pyrozone  may  be 
named  for  the  three  per  cent — in  bulk  one  dram  to  one  ounce 
or  more,  as  the  extent  of  territory  demands,  followed  by  an 


216  DEPARTMENT     D. 

equal  bulk  to  twice  the  bulk  of  an  alkaline  solution,  as  soda 
bicarbonate  one-half  dram  to  water  one  ounce — also  by  in- 
jection per  syringe,  spray  and  inhaler,  bearing  in  mind  that 
all  instrument  surfaces  in  contact  with  the  pyrozone  must 
be  of  glass,  hard  rubber,  platinum  or  gold. 

About  the  necks  of  teeth  and  in  pyorrhea  pockets  the 
five  per  cent  may  be  dripped  from  an  ordinary  glass  dropper, 
a  drop  at  a  time  till  sufficient  eflfect  is  produced.  An  at- 
tenuated glass  rod  or  even  a  tapered  wooden  probe  may  serve 
to  carry  a  drop  to  place.  In  fistulas  of  alveolar  or  other 
abscesses  cotton  or  other  tents  may  be  placed  to  carry  the 
pyrozone  well  within  the  tract  and  avoid  the  distension 
produced  by  violent  injection  from  a  syringe. 

The  range  of  use  of  both  five  per  cent  and  twenty-five 
per  cent  is  suggested  as  follows,  the  choice  between  the  two 
strengths  being  made  from  a  basis  of  depth  or  rapidity  of 
action  desired,  or  occasionally  the  five  per  cent  may  displace 
the  twenty -five  per  cent  when  the  mucous  membrane  proves 
unusually  irritable,  when  the  five  per  cent  will  be  much  less 
painful  than  the  twenty-five  per  cent. 

Selection  between  these  two  strenths  may  also  be  made 
because  the  site  may  be  minute  or  difficult  of  access,  that  is 
to  say,  where  the  pyrozone  is  to  produce  a  deep  influence 
through  diseased  tissue,  or  where  the  desire  is  to  more 
rapidly  clean  a  surface,  or  where  the  diseased  site  is  small  or 
more  difficult  to  reach,  the  twenty -five  per  cent  will  usually 
better  serve  than  the  five  per  cent. 

The  general  use  of  these  ethereal  pyrozones  is  in  abscess 
pockets,  fistulas  or  sinuses,  fistulous  roots,  discolored  teeth, 
pyorrhea  pockets,  removal  of  discolored  and  other  surface 
deposits,  catarrhal  congestion  of  the  throat,  nasal  passages 
and  more  remote  mucous  tracts  and  cavities  by  injection, 
spray,  tampon  or  swab.  Ulcerations  yield  kindly  to  the 
spray  or  swab.  It  is  especially  recommended  to  use  a  wash 
of  bicarbonate  of  soda  one-half  dram  to  one  ounce,  to  thor- 
oughly bathe  all  mucous  surfaces  that  have  been  acted  on 
by  pyrozone  or  other  peroxid  of  hydrogen  solutions,  that 
no  remaining  surface  acidity  due  to  its  activity  may  succeed. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  217 

Small  quantities  of  the  ethereal  pvrozone  should  be  used 
at  a  time.  The  hand  Avill  heat  the  instrument  at  times  suffi- 
ciently to  volatilize  the  ether  and  result  in  emptying  the  full 
charo;e  of  the  instrument,  sometimes  to  one's  chao;rin. — Chas. 
B.  Atkinson,  in  Ohio  Dented  Journal. 

386.  Cement  for  Mending  Casts. — Excellent  cement 
for  broken  casts  and  models  is  made  by  mixing  glycerin 
and  litharge.-*-Genese,  Off.  and  Lab. 

387.  Glacial-Phosphoric  Acid. — This  is  an  agent  that 
enters  in  our  oxyphosphate  fillings,  and  has  considerable 
action  on  the  dentine  tissues ;  one  of  which  is  at  first  to 
cause  an  unpleasant  twinge,  after  which  the  cavity  is  so 
obtunded  as  to  permit  excavation  with  but  little  pain.  From 
five  to  ten  grains  in  a  glass  of  sweetened  water,  is  a  grand 
tonic  to  a  tired  operator;  when  he  is  nervous  and  irritable; 
repeated  every  thirty  minutes  till  he  is  supported,  and 
may  be  well  worthy  our  attention. — Dr.  E.  E.  Shattuck,  in 
Archives. 

388.  Solder  and  Flux  for  Aluminum. — A  solder  for 
aluminum  is  made  as  follows  :      . 

Tin 8o  parts. 

Zinc 20      "  ' 

To  be  used  with  a  flux  composed  of — 

Ssearic  acid So  parts. 

Zinc  chlorid lo       " 

Tin  chlorid lo      " 

— Engineering  and  31ining  Journal. 

389.  Nerve  Capping  Formula. — Dissolve  sufficient 
gutta-percha  in  chloroform  to  half  fill  an  ounce  bottle.  Add 
oil  of  cloves,  20  minims  ;  tannin,  10  grains  ;  carbolic  acid, 
20  minims.  Seal  and  shake  till  satisfied  of  a  perfect  mixture ; 
then  open  and  allow  the  chloroform  to  partially  evaporate. 
There  will  remain  a  putty-like  mass,  which  is  always  ready 
for  application. — Dr.  G.  C.  Anthony,  in  Ohio  Journal. 


218  depaetme^;t    d. 

390.  Sodium  Fluorid  as  a  Sterilizer. — Sodium  fluorid, 
the  more  it  is  used  as  a  sterilizer,  the  more  satisfactory 
it  becomes.  A  saturated  solution  for  instruments  and 
broaches. — Dental  Review. 

391.  Phenate  of  Cocain,  Local  Anesthetic. — Phe- 
nate  of  cocain  is  a  preparation  of  phenic  acid  and  cocain 
in  nearly  equal  parts,  and  for  convenience  of  further  dilution 
is  sold  in  50  per  cent  alcoholic  solution.  This  association 
of  the  carbolic  acid  with  the  cocain  indicates  against  its 
hypodermic  use.  In  its  50  per  cent  strength  it  will  coagu- 
ulate  albumen,  and  its  topical  application  to  mucous  surfaces 
will  be  followed  by  a  slight  slough.  This  may  often  be 
avoided  by  wiping  glycerin  over  the  dried  gum  surfaces  be- 
fore applying  the  50  per  cent  phenate.  The  phenate  50  per 
cent  may  be  diluted  to  any  extent  desired  by  adding  alcohol 
and  water  equal  parts.  A  solution  thus  made  of  25  per  cent 
strength  will  not  coagulate. 

Phenate  of  cocain  is  a  local  anesthetic  of  considerable 
service  in  extracting  teeth.  It  is  applied  full  50  per  cent 
strong  (or  diluted,  if  desired),  on  the  dried  gum  about  the 
tooth.  A  pledget  of  cotton  forms  a  convenient  means  of 
placing  it  about  the  tooth,. where  it  should  be  left  in  contact 
from  three  to  five  minutes  at  a  time,  to  be  repeated  if  anes- 
thesia be  not  sufficient  The  patient  should  be  cautioned  not 
to  swallow,  and  so  avoid  numbness  in  the  throat,  as  the  phe- 
nate promptly  produces  this  condition  in  all  mucous  tissues. 
The  phenate  of  cocain  is  more  especially  useful  in  operating 
in  soft  tissue,  as  opening  abscesses,  removing  tumors,  treating 
exposed  pulps  and  kindred  operations.  It  has  the  merit  of 
being  a  powerful  analgesic  without  the  danger  of  constitu- 
tional impression. — Charles  B.  Atkinson,  in  Ohio  Journal. 

392.  Soothing  Applications  for  Aching  Pulps. — Zinc 
oxid,  carbonate  of  lime,  and  cocain,  make  a  soothing  ap- 
plication to  an  aching  pulp,  which  hardens  in  a  perfect 
capping  for  exposed  pulps. — Genese,  in  Office  and  Labor- 
atory. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  219 

393.  Chlorid  of  Zinc. — This  is  one  of  the  best  germi- 
cides'that  we  have,  and  is  an  antiseptic.  It  is  the  fluid  in 
which  the  oxid  of  zinc  is  mixed  for  temporary  fillings,  so- 
called.  Its  special  use  is  as  a  root  filling,  the  object  being 
to  secure  aseptic  conditions  of  the  cavity,  enabling  us  to  fill 
the  balance  of  the  cavity  with  whatever  we  please,  and  pro- 
long the  usefulness  of  the  tooth. — E.  E.  Shattuck,  in  Archives. 

394.  Sodium  Peroxid  for  Bleaching  Teeth. — For  bleach- 
ing discolored  teeth  I  have  used  sodium  peroxid  in  two  dif- 
ferent ways.  First,  by  saturating  the  dentine  with  a  strong 
solution,  following  this  by  treatment  with  a  dilute  acid. 
Second,  by  first  neutralizing  the  sodium  peroxid  with  an 
acid  and  afterward  saturating  the  dentine  with  this  neutral 
solution.  The  first  has  yielded  the  best  results. — E.  C.  Kirk, 
in  Cosmos. 

395.  Saponaceous  Tooth  Wash. — 

White  castile  soap 3  ozs. 

Oil  of  orauge  peel lo  tnins. 

Oil  of  ciunamon 5  mins. 

Water 4  ozs. 

Alcohol 12  ozs. 

Shave  the  soap  in  ribbons ;  melt  with  the  water  in  a 
water  bath,  adding  the  alcohol  while  still  warm.  Continue 
the  heat  if  necessary  till  solution  is  efiected.  When  cold, 
dissolve  the  oils  in  the  liquid. — Dental  Office  and  Ijcihoratory. 

396.  Celluloid  for  Filling  Roots. — Dr.  George  Allen 
uses  celluloid  dissolved  in  alcohol  and  ether  as  a  root  canal 
filling.    .He  states  that  it  has  o-iven  much  satisfaction. 

397.  Uses  for  Thurlington. — This  is  effective  in  sore 
mouth,  pericementitis,  sometimes  following  the  filling  of 
teeth. 

How  to  use  it. — Fold  a  piece  of  bibulous  paper  several 
times,  saturate  it  with  the  remedy,  full  strength,  and  lay  it 
on  the  gum  as  nearly  over  the  apex  of  the  root  as  possible, 


220  DEPARTMENT   D. 

keep  it  there  twenty  or  thirty  minutes.  If  the  gjiims  are 
spongy  and  bleed  easily,  apply  it  with  a  brush  or  mop*  and 
wait  a  few  minutes  before  rinsing  the  mouth.  If  there  is 
general  inflammation,  dilute  one  part  thurlington  with  three 
parts  of  water — of  this  take- one  teaspoonful  and  wash  the 
mouth.  If  the  throat  is  sore,  gargle  with  it.  The  wash  is 
excellent  for  soreness  caused  by  plate — it  is  equally  good  for 
burns  and  bruises. — Dr.  E.  Parsons,  in  Dental  Office  and  Lab- 
oratory. 

398.  Aqueous  Solution  of  Essential  Oils.— It  has  been 
found  by  Bergmann  that  while  mixtures  of  the  fixed  alkali 
soaps  with  hydrocarbons  and  essential  oils  form  only  emul- 
sions in  water;  under  separation  of  the  respective  oils,  a 
mixture  of  an  ammonia  soap  with  the  essential  oil  will  form 
a  clear  solution  in  water,  especially  in  presence  of  an  excess 
of  ammonia  {Chem.  Zeit.,  ISTovember  6th).  Turpentine  oil,  or 
some  other  essential  oil,  is  first  mixed  with  castor  oil,  or  a 
mixture  of  it  with  some  other  fat  oil;  the  mixture  is  then 
subjected  to  the  action  of  concentrated  acid,  and  the  product, 
after  being  washed  with  a  solution  of  salt,  is  saturated  with 
ammonia  in  excess.  Of  the  fat  acids  may  be  first  separated 
by  treatment  of  the  fatty  oil  with  concentrated  acid,  then 
washed  with  salt  solution,  and  the  essential  oil  added  either 
before  or  after  saturation  with  ammonia.  The  preparation 
thus  obtained  is  said  to  form  a  clear  solution,  and  not  only 
to  possess  the  properties  of  soap,  but  also  to  exercise,  in 
aqueous  solution,  the  solvent  action  of  an  essential  oil, — 
Pharm.  Journ. 

399.  Sulpho-carbolic  Acid. — Laplace  has  found  that  a 
mixture  of  twenty-five  per  cent  crude  carbolic  acid,  with  an 
equal  quantity  of  concentrated  crude  sulfuric  acid,  gives  a 
thick,  syrupy,  dark-brown  mass  which  possesses  great  dis- 
infectant power;  inferior  only  to  a  five  per  cent  carbolic 
solution  or  a  one-thousandth  acid  solution  of  bichlorid  of 
mercury.  ISTo  equally  cheap,  attainable,  and  effective  disin- 
fectant is  known. — International. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  221 

400.  Tannic  Acid  Styptic. — A  saturated  solution  in 
glycerin,  is  valuable  as  a  styptic  and  astringent.  I  fre- 
quently saturate  a  pledget  of  cotton  with  it  and  compress 
hypertrophy  of  the  gums,  occurring  frequently  between  the 
teeth  caused  by  accumulations  of  tartar  or  proximal  fillings 
extending  beneath  the  gums.  Instruct  the  patient  to  re- 
move after  twenty-four  hours. — John  G.  Harper,  m  Archives' 

401.  Prepared  Chalk. — This  is  used  for  polishing  pur- 
poses and  is  the  principal  ingredient  in  tooth  powder.  I  fre- 
quently prescribe  in  pyorrhea  alveolaris  equal  parts  of  pre- 
pared chalk  and  flowers  of  sulfur.  In  cases  where  the 
calcic  deposits  are  great,  a  prescription  containing  equal 
parts  of  prepared  chalk,  flowers  of  sulfur  and  pulverized 
soapstone,  flavored  with  oil  of  wintergreen  is  prescribed. 
It  is  claimed  that  the  soapstone  prevents  the  formation  of 
tartar,  but  I  have  not  used  it  long  enough  to  test  this  claim. 
— John  G.  Harper,  in  Archives. 

402.  Flavor  for  Tooth  Washes. — A  good  flavor  for 
almost  any  kind  of  a  tooth  or  mouth  wash,  can  be  made  of 
peppermint  30  parts,  spearmint  15  parts,  clove  5  parts. — 
Wm.  H.  Steele. 

403.  Spray  for  Inflamed  Mucous  Membrane. — 

Sodii  bicarb 5  viij. 

Sodii  bibor o  viij. 

Sodii  benzoate, 

Sodii  salicylate aa  gr.  xx. 

Eucalyptol, 

Thymol aa  gr.  x. 

Menthol gr.  v. 

Ol.  gaultheria gtt.  vj. 

Glycerin 5  viiiss. 

Alcoholis ^  ij> 

Aque   q.  s.  16  pints. 

This  formula  gives  a  solution  which  is  sufiiciently  alka- 
line to  dissolve  the  thickened  secretion  adhering  to  the  nasal 
raucous  membrane,  and  as  it  is  of  the  proper  density,  it  is 


222  DEPARTMENT     D. 

bland  and  unirritating,  leaving  a  pleasant  feeling  in  the 
nose.  At  the  same  time  it  is  antiseptic  and  acts  as  a  de- 
odorizer, being  in  this  respect  far  superior  to  Dobell's  solu- 
tion or  any  other  non-irritating  deodorizer  and  antiseptic. 
As  it  is,  however,  inconvenient  for  many  patients  to  have  so 
large  a  quantity  of  solution  on  hand,  one  of  our  Philadel- 
phia druggists  made  the  solid  ingredients  in  a  compressed 
tablet,  so  that  one,  when  dissolved  in  two  ounces  of  water, 
will  make  a  solution  identical  in  its  effects  with  the  solution 
made  after  the  above  formula,  and  my  patients  prefer  the 
tablets  to  the  solution. — From  a  Beprint. 

[This  solution  forms  a  most  excellent  mouth  wash  in 
stomatitis  and  ulitis  from  any  cause. — Ed.] 

404.  Cocain  for  Sensitive  Palate. — If  a  4  per  cent 
solution  of  cocain  be  painted  on  a  sensitive  palate  there 
will  be  no  trouble  in  taking  an  impression. — H.  H.  Buck. 

405.  Ive's  Gutta-percha  Varnish. — Make  of  virgin  rub- 
ber 30  grains,  in  half  an  ounce  of  chloroform  ;  gum  damar 
and  sandarac,  each  20  grains,  in  half  an  ounce  of  chloroform ; 
dissolve  and  make  an  ounce.  It  makes  a  very  strong,  solid, 
and  somewhat  opaque  varnish.  This  is  undoubtedly  the  best 
preparation  in  use  for  varnishing  cavities  preparatory^  to  in- 
serting-gutta-percha  fillings. — Author. 

406.  Sodium   Ethylate  for  Blunted   Gums.— A    2  per 

cent  solution  of  sodium  ethylate  painted  on  the  blunted  gum 
septum  every  other  day,  will  reduce  its  thickness  in  about 
eight  days. — Review. 

407.  Glycerole  of  Tannin  for  Gingivitis. — In  the  hope 
that  it  may  prove  as  useful  to  others  as  it  has  in  my  hands, 
I  desire  to  state  that  for  this  troublesome  affection  I  have 
•employed  with  satisfactory  results  the  glycerole  of  tannin, 
touching  with  it  the  affected  gums  twice  daily. — T.  M.  U., 
in  Cosmos, 


USEFUL     HINTS.  223 

408.  Resorcin  for  Pus  Pockets. — 

Resorciu gr.  x. 

Oil  cinnamon ^-  v. 

Alcohol ITL.  Ix. 

Water .^ij 

Inject  in  pus  pockets  around  roots  of  teeth: — Revieic. 

409.  Tropacocain  as  a  Local  Anesthetic. — As  a  local 
anesthetic  I  have  emploj-ed  tropacocain  thirty-seven  times, 
without  using,  however,  more  than  one-half  grain  at  a  dos3 
The  preparation  which  I  have  used  is  the  following : 

Tropacocain  hydrochlorate, 2  grs. 

Distilled  water,  M gtt.  i  (50). 

S. — gtt.  X  for  one  local  anesthesia. 

The  injections  are  made  as  in  the  case  of  cocain.  The 
root  or  tooth  to  be  extracted,  or  region  to  be  operated  on 
is  surrounded  by  a  series  of  injections  of  one  or  two  drops  of 
the  above  liquid,  till  the  ten  drops  have  been  used. 

I  have  been  able  to  extract  roots,  penetrate  the  alveolus, 
and  remo-ve  a  sequestrum  without  the  least  complaint  on  the 
part  of  the  patient,  the  injection  itself  being  painless.  The 
local  anesthesia  produced  is  much  more  rapid  than  with 
cocain,  and  commences  forty-five  seconds  to  one  minute  after 
the  beginning  of  the  injection.  The  anesthesia  lasts  longer 
and  appears  more  developed  than  with  cocain.  But  one  point 
on  which  we  must  insist ;  that  is,  that  this  injection  be  not 
made  suddenly ;  at  least  one  minute  should  be  employed  in 
injecting  the  dose.  In  this  respect  let  me  mention  a  method 
which  I  have  used  with  success  in  several  cases  of  cocain 
accidents,  and  that  is,  that  as  soon  as  toxic  symptoms  ap- 
pear I  introduce  a  lancet  in  the  injected  region,  so  that 
the  flow  of  blood  may  wash  out  the  part  of  the  injected 
liquid  which  may  not  have  yet  passed  in  the  blood  current, 
and  so  reduce  the  chances  of  too  severe  poisoning. 

1.  Used  in  an  equal  dose  sufficient  to  produce  local  an- 
esthesia, the  new  drug  is  much  less  toxic  than  cocain,  and  has 
a  very  slight  action  on  the  vital  functions  of  the  economy. 

2.  It  produces  a  local  anesthesia  more  rapid  and  more 
pronounced  than  cocain,  and  of  at  least  as  great  a  duration. 


224  DEPARTMENT     D. 

3.  The  solution  of  the  salt  being  an  antiseptic,  can  be 
kept  for  several  months  without  decomposition,  while  after 
a  few  days  a  cocain  solution  is  worthless  for  injection. — 
Hugenschmidt,  Extract  Cosmos. 

410.  Dr.  Harlan's  Tooth  Paste. — Below  we  give  the 
formula  for  this  preparation  : 

I}. — Crete  precip., 

Pulv.  orris  rad aa  5  ii. 

Pulv.  saponis  Cast,  alba ^  ss. 

Pulv.  OS.  sepia 3  ii. 

Pulv.  myrrhe 5  i. 

Pulv.  sacch.  alba., 

Pulv.  boracis aa  5  i. 

Carmine grs,  x. 

01.  gaultheria 3  i. 

Glycerin, 

Honey aa  1  i. 


M.  Ft.  paste. 


West.  Dent.  Jour. 


411.  Dental  Uses  of  Thymol. — In  the  Deutsche 
Monatsschrift  far  Zahnheilkunde,  January  and  April  issues 
for  1892,  A.  J.  Hartmann  calls  attention  to  the  value  of 
thymol  as  a  medicament  in  the  treatment  of  acute  pulpitis, 
claiming  for  it  an  antiseptic  and  germicidal  action  which  is 
sufficient  to  arrest  the  inflammatory  process  resulting  from 
microbic  infection  without  exerting  any  escharotic  effect 
on  the  pulp-tissue.  He  cites  cases  of  pulpitis  with  ex- 
posure successfully  treated  by  thymol  in  substance,  and 
recommends  it  as  decidedly  superior  to  carbolic  acid  as  a 
preliminary  treatment  to  the  capping  operation,  which  he 
asserts  may  be  successfully  performed  after  a  sufficient  treat- 
ment with  thymol. 

A  limited  series  of  experiments  made  with  this  drug 
fully  substantiate  the  claims  which  Hartmann  makes  for  it. 
The  application  may  be  made  either  by  applying  a  small 
crystal  or  a  powder  of  the  drug  directly  to  the  pulp,  and 
sealing  it  in  under  a  suitable  temporary  stopping.  A  satu- 
rated solution  of  thymol  in  chloroform  may  be  used  on  cotton, 


USEFUL     HINTS.  225 

or  the  drug  may  be  melted  in  a  small  capsule  of  metal  or 
porcelain,  and  a  pellet  of  cotton  or  small  disk  of  blotting 
paper  dipped  in  the  fluid  thymol  and  applied.  The  drug 
possesses  the  peculiar  property  of  remaining  fluid  long  after 
its  temperature  has  fallen  below  its  fusing-point,  which  gives 
ample  time  to  apply  it  to  the  pulp-exposure  before  solidifi- 
cation takes  place.  In  every  instance  so  far  as  tried,  relief 
of  pain  instantly  follows  the  application.  In  deep-seated 
caries  with  great  sensitiveness  of  dentine,  where  it  is  pro- 
posed to  temporarily  fill  with  gutta-percha,  very  satisfactory 
results  have  followed  from  touching  the  warmed  and  plastic 
gutta-percha  to  the  surface  of  a  thymol  crystal,  which 
slightly  softens  the  surface  of  the  gutta-percha  by  its  solvent 
action,  renders  it  adhesive  as  does  chloroform  or  cajeput  oil, 
and  when  inserted  exerts  an  antiseptic  and  obtundent  eflect 
on  the  dentine.  Its  use  in  this  way  suggests  the  possibil- 
ity of  its  value  as  a  component  part  of  the  gutta-percha 
temporary-stopping  material  in  the  preliminary  treatment  of 
cavities  with  sensitive  dentine. — Edward  C.  Kirk,  in  Cosmos. 

412.  Sandarac  Varnish. — Put  a  quantity  of  gum  san- 
darac  in  a  bottle,  and  cover  with  alcohol ;  use  a  wide  mouth 
bottle.  It  should  be  shaken  from  time  to  time  till  all  the 
shellac  is  dissolved.  As  there  are,  however,  quite  a  quantity 
of  little  sticks,  bark  and  other  foreign  matter  in  the  globules 
of  this  gum,  a  little  dift'erent  manner  of  procedure,  to  make 
this  varnish,  will  be  indicated.  The  alcohol  having  been 
poured  on  the  gum,  it  is  shaken  for  two  or  three  days  (or 
more),  till  the  gum  is  dissolved.  The  varnish  thus  made 
is  now  strained  through  some  fine  muslin  to  free  it  of  foreign 
matter.  Like  shellac  varnish,  it  may  be  made  thicker  or 
thinner  by  the  addition  of  gum  or  alcohol ;  and  like  it,  also, 
it  should  be  kept  in  a  stock  bottle,  while  that  needed  for 
constant  use  kept  in  a  smaller  wide-mouth  bottle  fitted  with  a 
good  cork  and  brush. — Dr.  Cheupin,in  Office  and  Laboratory. 

413.  Toothache  Cotton. — Melt  white  wax  or  sper- 
raacetti,  two  parts,  and  when  melted  add  carbolic  acid  crys- 


226  DEPARTMENT    D.      ' 

tals,  one  part,  and  chloral  hydrate  crystals,  two  parts,  stir 
well  till  dissolved.  While  still  liquid,  immerse  thin  laj^ers 
of  carbolized  absorbent  cotton-wool,  and  allow  them  to  dry; 
when  required  for  use,  a  small  piece  may  be  snapped  oiF  and 
slightly  warmed ;  when  it  can  be  inserted  in  the  hollow 
tooth  where  it  will  solidify.  The  ease  produced  by  this 
simple  method  is  really  very  great. — Medical  Record. 

414.  Local  Anesthetic  for  Small  Operations. — 

Chloral  hydrate, 

Gum  camphor aa  2  drams. 

Morphia  sulphate » }4.  dram. 

Chloroform i     "  M. 

This  may  be  painted  with  a  camel's-hair  brush  over  the 
area  to  be  incised ;  allowed  to  dr}'  and  repeated  as  necessary 
to  render  the  part  insensible. — Med.  News. 

415.  Chloroform  Water. — This  application,  which  is 
much  employed  in  Paris,  is  prepared  as  follows :  An  excess 
of  chloroform  is  poured  in  a  bottle,  three  parts  filled  with 
distilled  water,  and,  after  repeated  shaking,  the  mixture  is 
allowed  to  stand  till  the  excess  of  chloroform  is  deposited 
and  the  liquid  quite  clear.  The  transparent  portion  is  then 
to  be  removed  by  a  syphon,  forming  a  saturated  solution  of 
ten  grams  of  chloroform  per  liter.  Applied  on  compresses, 
either  in  its  pure  state,  or  diluted  with  a  half  or  whole 
weio-ht  of  water,  it  is  found  to  relieve  superficial  pains  ;  but 
when  these  are  more  deeply  situated,  a  very  hot  linseed  meal 
poultice  is  first  applied,  which  is  afterward  replaced  by  the 
compress  of  chloroform  water.  Active  revulsion  is  thus 
produced  which  relieves  the  pain.  Associated  with  a  weak 
solution  of  opium  it  relieves  vague  dental   pain. — Medical 

Tiynes  and  Gazette. 

416.  Test  Capping  for  Exposed  Pulp. — 

Boric  acid, 

White  wax aa  i  part. 

Oil  sweet  almonas, 

Paraf&n aa  2  parts. 

— H.  Milling,  in  Items. 


.USEFUL     HINTS.  227 

417.  A  Fine  Tooth  Wash.^ 

White  castile  soap 3  ij. 

Alcohol ^  iij. 

Honey .?  j. 

Perfume  for  above : 

Asarum  canaden?e, 

Orris  root aa  5  j . 

Strong  alcohol   O  j . 

Make  a  tincture  and  add 

Tincture  musk. . . . : ■ 3  j. 

Essence  of  millefleurs 3  ss. 

Essence  of  patchoulli TTLxx. 

Dissolve  the  soap  in  alcohol,  add  lioney  and  four  ounces 
of  the  i^erfum.e.—Excha7ige. 

418.  To  Retain  Dressing  in  Teeth. — A  piece  of  rubber 
tubing  slipped  over  a  tooth  is  good  to  keep  in  a  dressing 
when  the  shape  of  the  cavity  is  such  that  it  is  not  retensive, 
especially  when  the  tooth  is  isolated  or  standing  alone. — Dr. 
D.  Y.  Beacock,  in  Dominion  Dental. 

419.  Phenyl  Acetic  Acid. — Internal  antiseptic  in  ten- 
drop  doses ;  dissolved  1  to  6  in  alcohol  in  1  oz.  water.     Used 

ocally  to  paint  ulcers  and  patches  in  the  mouth. — Denial 
Review. 

420.  Eugenol. — -Acetamide  is  a  new  anesthetic,  which 
will  be  unique  in  its  class  on  account  of  its  form  of  a  dry, 
micro-crystalline  powder ;  it  is  claimed  that  the  application 
causes  perfect  anesthesis  of  the  mucous  membrane  of  the 
tongue,  and  the  action  is  free  from  irritating  by  effects. — 
Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

421.  Acid  Cinnamic— CeH„  C,  H,  C,  N,  C,  0,  OH.  Sol- 
uble in  hot  water,  alcohol  ether.  Insoluble  in  cold  water. 
Used  as  a  spray  in  five  per  cent  alcoholic  solution,  or  in 
emulsion  in  a  neutral  oil. — Dental  Review. 

422.  Eulyptol. — An  antiseptic  proposed  by  Dr. 
Schmelz,  its  composition  being: 


228  DEPARTMENT     3. 

Carbolic  acid i  part. 

Oil  of  eucalyptus i     " 

Salicylic  acid 6  parts. 

It  is  liquid,  has  an  aromatic  odor,  dissolves  readily  in 
ether,  alcohol,  alkaline  solutions;  but  in  water  to  a  very 
limited  extent. — Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

423.  Richardson  on  Local  Anesthetics. — He  uses  a 
mixture  of  100  g.  ether  and  0.4  g.  <;arbolic  acid  preferably 
to  ether  alone.  Its  action  is  more  intense  and  of  longer 
duration.  He  recommends  as  a  spraying  solution :  Men- 
thol,  1;  chloroform,  10;  and  ether,  15.  jSTeudorfer  employs  a 
solution  of  0.59  cocain  hydrochlorate  in  50  g.  of  bitter 
almond  water.  The  combination  of  cocain  and  cyanogen 
should  be  very  eifective.  Steever  uses  cocain  hydrochlo. 
rate,  1  ;  antipyrin,  3  ;  and  water,  20. — Corres.f.  Schw.  Aerzte 
and  Ph.  Central, 

424.  Formula  for  Dorsenia. — This  is  about  the  only 
obtunding  preparation  the  merits  of  which  do  not  depend 
on  cocain.     It  is  said  to  be  composed  as  follows  : 

Listerin  and  water in  quantity. 

Carbolic  acid 3  parts. 

Camphor 2     " 

Alcohol 3     " 

Glycerin 2     " 

—Ex. 

425.  Lysol  for  Mouth  Washes,  etc. — Half  ounce  of 
lysol  in  sixteen  ounces  of  water  may  be  still  further  diluted 
to  use  as  a  mouth  wash.  The  writer  takes  of  this  stock  so- 
lution, six  drams  to  four  ounces  of  water  for  washing 
scalers,  exca.vators,  forceps,  etc. — Dental  Review. 

426.  To  Toughen  Wax. — To  toughen  wax,  stir  in  the 
melted  wax  a  small  quantity  of  Venice  turpentine. — L.  S. 
Keagle. 

427.  Antifebrin  for  Periodontitis. — Dr.  Elliott  says 
out  of  fifty  cases  he  has  been  successful  in  reducing  within  a 


USEFUL     HIXTS.  229 

few  hours,  forty-five  cases  of  pain  of  advanced  periodontitis, 
by  two  doses  of  ten  grains  each  of  antifebrin  (acetanilide.) 

428.  Temporary  Filling  Formula. — For  closing  cavi- 
ties temporarily  the  following  preparation  has  been  recom- 
mended: Best  gum  mastic  2  grams,  chloroform  5  grains. 
Dissolve  and  add  balsam  Peru  2  grams. — Ex. 

• 

429.  Formula  for  Metal  Base. — It  is  said  that  to  take 
silver  4  parts,  and  platina  1  part,  will  make  a  very  good  den- 
tal alloy  for  plates — that  it  works  easily  in  swaging;  does  not 
tarnish  in  the  mouth;  can  be  soldered  with  18k.  gold  solder, 
and  that  rubber  can  be  attached  the  same  as  on  a  gold-plate. 
—Dr.  Buck. 

430.  Metal  for  Casting  in  Plaster  Mold. — Dr.  Rich- 
mond says  the  following  may  be  poured  in  a  plaster  im- 
pression without  generating  steam.  Tin,  20  ;  lead,  19  ;  Cad- 
mium, 13  ;  Bismuth,  48,  by  weight.     It  melts  at  150°  F. 

—Ex. 

431.  Reid's  Antiseptic  Liquid  Dentifrice. 

Thymol 2  grs. 

Carbolic  acid  . . . .' 2  drops. 

Oil  sassafras 8     " 

Oil  wintergreen 8     " 

Oil  rose  geranium  (Turk) 8     " 

Oil  eucalyptus 3     " 

Glycerin 2  ozs. 

Alcohol 4  j^  ozs. 

White  castile  soap 2  drs. 

Dist.  water,  q.  s.  to 16  ozs. 

Calcium  Phosphate q.  s. 

Color, 
Caramel, 

Tinct,  cudbear aa  q.  s. 

Dissolve  the  soap  in  5  ozs.  warm  water.  Dissolve  the  acid  and  oils 
in  the  alcohol  and  add  to  the  soap  solution.  Filter  through  paper  con- 
taining a  small  quantity  of  calcium  phosphate.     Add  glycerin. 

— Pharmaceutical  Era. 

482.  Parting  Fluid  for  Impressions. — Some  one  has 
said  that  equal  parts  of  castor  oil  and  coal  oil,  colored  with 


230  DEPARTMENT     D. 

aniline  red,  make  an  excellent  parting  compound  for  plaster 
impressions. — Odontographic  Journal.    . 

433.  Use  of  Phytolacca. — In .  April  Items  was  an 
article  on  phytolacca  (poke  root)  that  I  want  to  add  a  word 
to.  That  is*.  It  is  the  best  remedy  for  quinsy  extant ;  used 
in  small  doses,  and  stronger  as  a  gargle.  In  fact,  if  used 
when  the  premonitory  symptoms  set  in,  it  will  abort  the 
disease.  According  to  Burt's  "  Materia  Medica,"  it  comes 
nearer  to  being  a  specific  for  diphtheria  than  any  other 
drug. — P.,  in  Items. 

434.  Hypodermic  Solutions. — Hypodermic  solutions 
should  be  prepared  with  the  utmost  care,  so  as  to  exclude,  as 
much  as  possible,  all  micro-organisms.  If  possible,  the  dis- 
tilled water,  vials,  and  everything  coming  in  contact  with, 
them  during  the  preparation,  should  previously  be  sterilized 
by  a  sufficient  degree  of  heat.  If  this  is  not  convenient  the 
solution,  prepared  with  distilled  water,  should  be  filtered 
through  a  small  pellet  of  pure  absorbent  cotton,  pushed  in 
the  neck  of  the  funnel.  These  solutions  should  be  prepared 
only  in  small  quantities,  as  they  are  liable  to  deteriorate  by 
keeping.  Many  of  them  may  be  preserved  for  a  considera- 
ble time  by  the  addition  of  15  to  20  per  cent  of  alcohol  or 
glycerin,  or  by  the  addition  of  boric  acid  (about  five  grains 
to  one  fiuidounce)  or  by  using  chloroform  water  instead  of 
plain  distilled  water  for  solution.  The  last  named  agent  is  'par- 
ticularly useful.  Preservatives  should,  however,  not  be 
added,  except  by  direction,  or  with  the  knowledge  of  the 
prescriber.  As  soon  as  the  slightest  change  is  noticed  in  any 
hypodermic  solution  it  should  be  rejected. — Prescription. 

435.  Cavity  Varnish. — For  closing  cavities  tempora- 
rily, the  following  preparation  has  been  recommended  : 

Best  gum  mastic 2  grams. 

Chloroform 5       " 

Dissolve  and  add  : 

Balsam  pera 2  grams. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  231 

After  12  'to  15  hours  the  liquid  is  to  be  filled  in 
bottles. — Exchange. 

436.  New  Preparation  of  Gutta-percha. — In  setting 
crowns  of  porcelain  with  platina  pins  extending  in  the 
roots,  and  for  setting  gold  crowns  and  caps,  I  find  a  filling 
made  of  vermilion  and  gutta-percha  of  service. 

This  is  made  by  mixing  with  heat  and  careful  working 
one  part  of  gutta-percha  and  three  parts  of  vermilion.  This 
combination  resists  the  destructive  action  of  the  mouth 
much  better  than  the  usual  combination  of  gutta-percha  and 
oxid  of  zinc.  For  buccal  cavities,  where  the  ordinary 
gutta-percha  filling  softens  on  the  surface,  it  is  of  value.  A 
whole  list  of  gutta-percha  stoppings  can  be  prepared  with- 
out the  use  of  oxid  of  zinc,  which  are  interesting  as  experi- 
mental, and  I  shall  hope  at  some  future  time  to  report  on 
these.  The  combination  of  iron  oxid  with  gutta-percha  is 
one  of  these,  and  favorable  results  seem  to  have  been  obtained 
with  this  mixture,  but  it  takes  years  to  determine  their  rela- 
tive value. — "W.  H.  Rollins,  in  International. 

437.  Celluloid  Cement.-;-One  part  shellac  dissolved 
in  one  part  spirits  of  camphor  and  three  parts  of  90  per 
cent  alcohol.  The  cement  should  be  applied  warm, and  the 
broken  parts  securely  held  together  till  the  solvent  has 
entirely  evaporated. — Scientific  American. 


DEPARTMENT  E. 


USEFUL     HINTS. 


235 


DEPARTMENT  E- 


438.  Forming  Cavities  in  Porcelain  Teeth.— Every 
one  who  has  occasion  to  place  a  filling  in  a  porcelain  tooth 
has  experienced  the  unsatisfactory  working. of  the  diamond 
drill.  The  objections  are,  first,  from  the  length  of  time 
consumed,  as  a  diamond  drill  cannot  he  hurried  ;  second, 
from  the.  expense,  owing  to  the  frequent  breaking  of  the 
drill;  and  third,  the -unsatisfactory  edge  produced. 

The  method  I  would  advocate  is  as  follows :     To  form 
a  cavity  in  a  central  on  the  mesio-labial  surface  ;  first  take 
an  ordinary  corundum  Avheel  with  round  edge  and  of  suf- 
ficient thickness  to  give  the  required  length  of  cavity,— 
that  is,  from  as  near  the  cervix  to  the  cutting  edge     Fio.  i. 
as  is  desired.     Now  cut  from  the  mesial  surface 
directly  in  the  tooth  till   you    have  the   cavity 
deep  enough  to  show  the  filling  when  in  place,     /      ;   j 
the  desired  amount  on  the  labial  surface.     The  la-    Vi..-i-^^ 
bial  aspect  of  the  tooth  will  present  the  appearance  seen  in 
Fig.  1,  with  a  well-formed  edge ;  the  lingual  aspect  the  form 
shown  in  Fig.  2,  giving  a  distinct   shoulder  at  a  and  b. 
Now,  with  a  copper  disk,  fairly  thin,  cut  in  at  a  and  hii\ 
the  directions  of  c  and  d  respectively.     In  this  way  the  fill- 
ing may  be  held  from  falling  out  either  upward,  downward, 
or° toward  the  labial  surface.     To   prevent  its       ^.  2. 
moving  backward,  make  undercuts,  still  using 
the  copper  disk,  just  anterior   to  a  and  b  re- 
spectively.    The  undercut  made  anterior  to  a 
will  be  entirely  on  the  mesial  surface,  and  is 
represented  at/.  Fig.  3.     It  will  be  covered  by  the  rubber 
when  in  place.     That  at  e  may  be  cut  well  in,  finishing  off 
the  filling  in  the  concavity  on  the  lingual  side  just  below 
the  shoulder,  which  is  beneath  the  pins.     This  method  of 


236 


DEPARTMENT    E. 


retaining  the  filling  is  essentially  a  system  of  dovetails.  It 
is  advisable  to  bend  the  pin,  proximating  the  cavity,  back 
out  of  danger  of  injury  by  the  grinding.  After  Fig.  3. 
forming  the  cavity,  invest  in  plaster,  for  conveni- 
ence in  handling,  and  fill,  Then  take  out  of  plas- 
ter and  finish.  A  filling  put  in  by  this  method  will 
be  firm  in  place  and  present  a  perfect  edge,  which 
latter  it  is  quite  impossible  to  obtain  by  means  of  the  dia- 
mond drill.  Of  course  the  edge,  posteriorly,  will  be  irregular 
in  outline,  but  that  is  covered  by  the  rubber  when  the  tooth 
is  vulcanized  in  place. — H.  A.  Keely,  D.  M.  D.,  Internafl 
Journal. 

439.  Cast  Aluminum  Plates  for  Regulating. — Dr.  F. 
Abbott  says :  I  have  used  cast  aluminum  plates  to  good 
advantage  for  these  purposes.  The  plate  is  cast  over  the 
model  and  fits  more  accurately  than  most  other  plates.  Then 
you  can  insert  screws,  if  you  choose,  as  the  metal  is  not 
hard,  yet  strong  enough  to  hold  them.  The  plate  can  be 
firmly  held  in  ]:>lace  by  running  the  metal  over  the  molar 
teeth  as  far  as  the  necks,  and  driving  it  solidly  down. —  The 
Ohio  Journal. 


440.     Home-made    Cavity    Drier. — Get    an   ordinary 

c  h  i  p -  b  1  o  we r,  and 
hard  solder  a  heavy 
piece  of  copper  to  it 
as  shown  in  cut  (A). 
The  copper  may  be 
dressed  out  in  two  sections ;  nicely  fitted  to  the  tube  ;  bound 
to  place  with  binding  wire,  and  well  soldered.  Thus  for 
fifty  to  sixty  cents  you  have  a  good  cavity  drier. — Wm.  H. 
Steele. 


441.  Cleaning  Office  Glassvyare. — Wipe  your  office 
glassware  with  muriatic  acid ;  it  removes  all  water  stains, 
and  keeps  the  patient's  nose  in  a  normal  condition. — E.  W.  S. 


USEFUL     HINTS. 


237 


442.     An  Economical  Electric  Motor. — I  believe  the 
electric  motor  one  of  our  most  useful  appliances  in  the  den- 
tal office,  and  it  would  have  been  in  almost  universal  use 
to-day,  were  it  not  for  the  fact  that  the 
manufacture  and  sale  of  them  has  been 
so  conducted  that  practitioners  of  ordi- 
nary means  thought  them  a  luxury  and 
entirely  out  of  their  reach ;  and  so  they 
would  be  if  bought   as   advertised   and 
sold   by   dental    depots    generally,    viz.^ 
throw  away  your  engine  and  engine  mal- 
let, then  buy  a  complete  electric   plant 
for  each  special  purpose,  at  a  total  ex- 
pense of  from  §125  to  $225. 

One  motor,  if  a  good 
make,  will  answer  all  pur- 
poses, and  can  be  made  to 
run  the  engine,  engine  mal- 
let, fan,  laboratory  lathe,  and 
a  dynamo  for  electro  crown- 
and  bridge- work,  or  gold  and  silver  plating  if  desired.  The 
base  of  the  motor  will  not  be  heavy  enough  for  this  pur- 
pose as  it  comes  from  the  maker;  it  will  be  necessary  to 
have  a  hard  wood  base  made  like  1  (see  cut  B);  to  this 
have  a  strong  piece  of  hard  wood  turned  upright  (2)  fitted, 
of  proper  height  and  size,  so  that  your  engine  standard 
will  fit  firmly  on  to  it.  By  this  means  you  will  not  need 
to  throw  away  the  engine,  and  can  instantly  change  from 
wheel  to  motor.  The  battery  (if  local  or  storage)  should 
be  placed  just  inside  the  laboratory  door,  with  wires  run- 
ning up  through  swivel  hangers  in  the  top  of  the  casing. 
When  needed  in  the  laboratory,  slip  ofi"  the  standard,  carry 
the  motor  in  and  place  it  on  the  bench  or  floor ;  with 
four  screw-eyes,  through  the  corners  of  1,  fasten  it  down 
firmly,  put'on  the  belt  and  go  to  work.  A  fan  can  be  put 
up  in  front  of  the  operating  chair  and  run  with  the  motor 
at  the  same  time  in  conjunction  with  the  engine,  by  having 
two  grooves  on  the  pulley.     The  current  for  running  the 


238  DEPARTMENT     E. 

motor  can  be  taken  from  electric  light  wires,  furnished  by  a 
storage  battery, or  (where  there  is  no  electric  light  plant)  by 
a  self-generating  battery.  A  motor,  suitable  for  this  pur- 
pose, can  be  got  for  $18  to  $22,  and  if  in  a  city  where  there 
is  no  electric  power,  it  can  be  run  with  a  local  battery  of 
four  to  six  cells,  costing  from  $2.50  to  $3  per  cell,  or  with 
a  storage  battery.  Buy  only  of  some  reliable  dealer;  always 
specify  what  kind  of  current  the  motor  is  to  be  run  by,  as 
it  has  to  be  wound  to  suit  the  current  it  is  to  be  driven  with. 
A  much  nicer  and  cheaper  way  to  get  a  motor  is  to  put  it 
up  yourself,  and  any  one  who  is  capable  of  doing  a  nice 
piece  of  crown-  or  bridge-work  will  have  no  trouble  to  ac- 
complish the  work  in  a  satisfactory  manner.  The  Scientific 
American  publishes  a  little  pamphlet  that  furnishes  all  in- 
structions, and  teaches  the  principles  on  which  the  motor 
works.  There  are  several  electric  houses  that  supply  at  a 
cost  of  from  $3  to  $6  the  iron  work  for  the  armature,  frame, 
the  wire  and  all  other  material  used  in  constructing  the 
motor. — Wm.  H.  Steele,  in  0.  Denial  Journal. 

443.  Cushions  for  Tired  Heels. — For  tired  heels  Dr. 
Spence  has  found  great  help  from  the  simple  operation  of 
placing  inside  the  shoe,  and  below  the  wearer's  heel,  a 
cushion  formed  of  soft  and  thin  leather,  made  into  a  pocket 
and  stuffed  with  hair.  The  natural  springiness  of  hair  pre- 
vents this  pad  from  ever  flattening  down  verj^  hard,  and 
thus  avoids  the  occlusion  of  the  ball  of  the  heel  with  those 
prominences  of  the  leather  often  found  in  this  location.  By 
means  of  this,  the  irritating  discomfort  of  tired  heels  can 
be  largely  banished  from  the  dental  profession. — Items. 

444.  Refining  Gold. — The  scraps  must  be  spread  on 
paper  or  glass,  and  a  strong  magnet  passed  over  and 
among  them  repeatedly,  to  take  out  as  much  iron  and  steel 
as  possible  before  putting  in  the  crucible.  This  is  a  very 
simple  method,  and  it  will  often  save  one  or  two  remeltings, 
if  attended  to  before  commencing  operations.  Or  the  filings 
may  be  placed  in  a  tall  bottle,  covered  with  a  solution  of  one 


USEFUL     HINTS.  239 

part  of  sulfuric  acid  to  eight  of  water,  shaken  uj)  and  al- 
lowed to  stand  for  some  time.  The  acid  will  dissolve  out 
the  iron,  steel,  tin,  copper  and  zinc  filings,  leaving  the  noble 
metal  untouched.  When  all  is  dissolved,  throw  away 
the  solution  and  Avash  the  filipgs  several  times  with  pure 
water.  Then  dry  and  heat  them  as  before  described.  It  is 
best  to  waste  the  solutions  and  wash  the  filings  through 
filter  paper,  in  order  to  avoid  the  loss  of  very  fine  particles 
of  gold  floating  in  the  liquids. 

By  thus  remelting  scrap  separatel3^,the  refiner  can  come 
reasonably  near  to  a  homogeneous  alloy  to  start  with,  and  he 
can  then  raise  or  reduce  the  quality,  or  color  it  much  more 
easily  and  certainly,  than  if  attempting  to  mix  scrap,  filings 
and  new  gold  at  one  operation. 

Plumbago  crucibles  should  be  used,  as  they  are  far  the 
best  for  melting  metals  requiring  a  high  degree  of  heat,  and 
with  care  they  will  stand  from  twenty  to  fifty  heatings.  If 
using  a  new  crucible,  a  little  powdered  charcoal  should  be 
put  in  it  along  with  the  metal.  This  will  coat  the  surface 
of  the  plumbago,  and  prevent  the  melted  metal  from  stick- 
ing to  it. 

The  pouring  of  the  gold  in  the  ingot  mold  requires 
some  dexterity  and  practice.  It  must  not  be  done  so  slowly 
as  to  allow  the  stream  of  metal  to  run  down  the  sides  of  the 
crucible ;  neither  should  the  stream  be  so  small  as  to.  chill 
the  metal  before  entering  the  mold,  or  imperfect  castings 
will  result,  and  give  trouble  in  rolling  the  ingot.  On  the 
other  hand,  the  stream  should  not  be  allowed  to  strike  with 
force  enough  to  slop  over  the  mold,  making  rough  and  un- 
even castings.  The  flux  floating  on  the  surface  of  the  metal 
should  be  prevented  from  passing  in  the  mold  with  the 
metal  by  using  a  thin  piece  of  dry  flat  wood,  held  with  the  left 
hand  at  the  lip  of  the  crucible  while  pouring.  Po2:)lar  is  the 
best,  as  it  burns  very  slowly.  The  warming  and  greasing  of 
the  ingot  mold  should  also  be  attended  to  carefully.  If  it 
is  too  cold  or  too  hot  the  metal  will  spit  and  fly  about  on 
being  turned  in  it.  It  should  be  so  hot  as  just  to  allow 
touchins:  with  the  hand  for  a  second  or  two.    If  these  details 


240  DEPARTMENT    E. 

are  carefully  attended  to,  smooth,  tough  and  malleable  cast- 
ings are  pretty  sure  to  result. 

In  melting  scrap  gold  filings,  etc.,  care  should  be  taken  to 
see  that  it  is  quite  clean,  and  free  from  organic  matter,  etc. 
It  is  a  good  plan  to  heat  the  scrap  in  an  iron  ladle,  till  all 
wax,  grease,  etc.,  are  removed,  before  placing  in  the  crucible 
for  melting.  Always  melt  old  gold  by  itself,  using  sal 
amoniac  and  charcoal  in  equal  quantities  as  a  ilux.  When 
the  ingot  has  been  cast  and  cooled,  test  its  malleability  by 
rolling  or  hammering.  If  it  should  split  when  rolling  it  is 
due  to  the  presence  of  some  foreign  metal,  such  as  lead,  tin, 
iron,  or  steel.  If  the  latter,  the  ingot  should  be  broken  up 
and  remelted  with  two  parts  of  carbonate  of  potash  and  one 
part  of  nitrate  of  potash.  The  flux  will  combine  with  the 
iron  or  steel,  leaving  the  gold  free.  Then  cast  and  try  the 
ingot  as  before.  If  the  impurity  be  lead  or  tin,  the  metal 
will  be  very  brittle,  and  when  broken  the  grains  will  be  close 
and  pale.  A  very  small  quantity  of  lead  or  tin  will  render 
gold  too  brittle  to  work.  It  must  then  be  remelted  as  before, 
using  as  a  flux  two  parts  of  charcoal  to  one  of  corrosive  sub- 
limate, breaking  the  gold  in  small  fragments,  and  mixing 
thoroughly  with  plenty  of  flux  while  melting.  In  this  re- 
melting  so  often,  serious  loss  in  weight  occurs,  due  to  the 
elimination  of  the  foreign  metals ;  for  this  reason  old  gold 
should  be  melted  and  refined  separately  before  using  it  to 
make  alloy,  or  otherwise  the  refiner  will  be  seriously  out  in 
his  calculations,  and  the  resulting  alloy  will  not  be  of  the 
grade  desired. — Denial  Practitioner  and  Advertiser. 

445.  Tempering  Mandrels. — Dr.  "Wedelstadt,  of  St. 
Paul,  Minn.,  says  that  if  screw-headed  mandrels  are  tempered 
to  a  straw  color  they  will  outwear  a  hundred  untempered 
ones.  Both  screw  and  mandrel  should  receive  the  same 
temper.  We  all  know  how  soon  the  thread  of  the  ordinary 
mandrel  screw  is  worn  out. — Ex. 

446.  To  Reduce  Heat  of  Spirit  Lamp. — For  reducing 
the  heat  of  the  flame  of  a  spirit  lamp  introduce  a  piece  of 


USEFUL     HINTS.  241 

platina  wire  through  the  wick,  so  that  it  will  not  melt  the 
edges  of  gold  foil  when  placed  in  the  flame. — G.  Brunson, 
in  0.  Journal. 

447.  A  Convenient  Foil  Carrier. — Take  a  large  sewing 
needle,  and  with  a  corundum  wheel  grind  at  the  head  till 
the  eye  is  reached  ;  thus  a  fork  will  be  formed  out  of  the  eye. 
Draw  the  temper  and  curve  the  forked  end  somewhat :  with 
riveting  hammer  flatten  the  point.  Fill  a  cone-socket  handle 
with  pulverized  shellac  ;  heat  the  socket  and  insert  the  point 
of  the  mutilated  needle  ;  center  carefully;  with  the  pencil 
of  the  shellac  substance  add  a  little  more  to  make  the  joint 
perfect,  and  the  instrument  is  ready  to  catch  gold. — Dr.  F. 
E.  Battershell,  in  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

448.  To  Flexoize  Files. — To  flexoize  a  Froid  file,  im- 
merse it  in  any  heavy  oil,  burning  ofl:'  the  same  in  a  Bunsen 
flame  as  one  would  in  temperinglight  steel  springs.  Pumice  ap- 
plied by  means  of  a  brush  restores  the  color. —  Oclont.  Journal 

449.  Making  a  Cotton-Brush. — I  have  a  little  device 
which  I  call  the  cotton-brush.  It  is  simply  made  from  an  or- 
dinary penholder  and  has  a  wire  aluminum  screw.  I  have 
found  it  very  serviceable  in  cases  w^here  the  gums  have  been 
very  much  congested  and  extremely  tender,  and  in  such  cases 
children  particularly  dislike  very  much  to  have  their  gums 
brushed  with  a  bristle-brush.  These  cotton-brushes,  which 
simply  consist  of  twisting  a  piece  of  cotton  around  the  screw, 
clean  the  teeth  very  nicely  indeed.  Of  course,  the  cotton  is 
thrown  away  after  it  is  used. 

I  have  used  these  brushes  for  about  eighteen  months, 
and  have  found  they  worked  YQry  well.  Take  a  piece  of 
cotton  and  twist  the  screw,  and  it  winds  it  on  tight,  and 
gives  a  simple  method  of  carrying  an  astringent  or  anything 
else  you  want  in  the  mouth.  In  every  case  where  I  treat 
pyorrhea  alveolaris,  I  give  the  patient  one  of  these,  and  tell 
him  to  dip  it  in  listerin,  or  whatever  else  I  recommend,  and 
rub  the  gums  well. — J.  B.  Littig,  International  Journal. 


242  DEPARTMENT    E. 

450.  Conductivity  of  Filling  Materials. — There  exists 
a  very  simple  method  for  comparing  the  heat  conducting 
power  of  metallic  bodies :  The  metals  to  be  compared  are 
shaped  in  wires  of  equal  length  and  diameter  and  coated  with 
a  thin  cover  of  stearin.  When  heated  at  one  end  by  an 
alcohol  flame  the  melting  stearin  drop  will  travel  toward 
the  cool  end  if  the  wire  is  held  in  an  inclined  position.  The 
quicker  the  drop  travels  the  greater  is  the  conducting  prop- 
erty of  the  wire,  and .  in  this  way  it  is  easy  to  demonstrate 
this  quality  of  filling  materials. — Hans  Block,  in  Dental 
2  ribune. 

451.  Blow-pipe  Flames. — Thomas  Fletcher,  the  well- 
known  expert  in  practical  metallurgy,  gives  the  following 
directions  for  the  use  of  the  blow-pipe  : 

The  flames  may  be  separated  in  two  classes.  Those 
used  for  blow-pipe  analysis  are  produced  by  air  jets  of  small 
bore,  and  as  smooth  as  possible  inside ;  the  theoretically  per- 
fect jet  is  made  of  glass  tube  drawn  out  small,  and  broken 
oif  where  the  required  bore  exists.  The  advantage  of  this 
jet  is  the  perfect  smoothness  of  the  bore,  which  enables  the 
operator  to  produce  perfectly  defined  flames,  with  the  reduc- 
ing and  oxidizing  zones  large  and  clearly  defined.  The  dis- 
advantage of  the  glass  jet  is  its  delicacy  and  constant  liability 
to  injury.  IsText  to  this  comes  the  platinum  tip,  which  re- 
mains fairly  smooth  inside ;  and  last  of  all  comes  the  simple 
and  cheap  brass  nozzle  so  universally  used.  The  flame  in 
this  class  of  blow-pipe  is  produced  by  an  air  pressure  low 
enough  to  prevent  the  breaking  up  of  the  blue  cone,  the  tip 
of  which  is  the  hottest  part ;  inside  this  blue  cone  is  the  re- 
ducing flame ;  beyond  it  is  the  oxidizing  zone.  For  brazing 
and  soldering,  a  heavier  air  pressure  and  a  larger  bore  jet 
is  required ;  the  blue  cone  is  broken  up,  and  the  different 
zones  of  flame  are  much  less  clearly  defined,  and  in  practice 
are  much  less  important.  The  flame  is  still  roughly  divided 
in  a  blue,  or  greenish-blue  center,  and  an  outer  yellowish 
mantle,  surrounding  and  projecting  beyond  the  blue.  The 
rough  point  of  the  latter  is,  as  before,  the  hottest  part,  and 


USEFUL     HINTS.  248 

this  should  touch  the  work  to  be  l)razed.  It  has  a  distinctly 
oxidizing  action ;  but  this  is  overcome  in  practice  by  the 
protection  of  the  flux  used,  which  must  have  the  power  of 
dissolving  oxids. —  The  Dental  Practitioner  and  Advertiser. 

452.  Soldering  Tubes  to  Regulating  Appliances. — Dr. 
"W".  H.  Gage  recommends  that  before  soldering  tubes  to 
regulators  or  other  appliances,  they  should  be  filled  with  a 
few  fibers  of  asbestos  to  prevent  the  solder  entering  them  and 
choking  them  up. —  The  Dental  Practitioner  and  Advertiser. 

453.  A  New  Fusible  Alloy. — Nature  gixQ^  the  formula 
of  a  new  alloy  which  is  specially  adapted  to  many  important 
uses  in  the  art.  It  melts  at  the  low  temperature  of  160°  F., 
the  temperature  of  moderately  hot  water,  and  considerably 
below  that  at  which  the  magic  spoons  of  long  ago  melted  in 
a  cup  of  tea.  Its  composition  is  :  Bismuth,  48  ;  cadmium, 
13  ;  lead,  19  ;  tin,  20.  This  new  alloy  will  withstand  quite 
a  severe  pressure.  This  makes  a  useful  alloy  for  crown  pat- 
terns, when  making  electro  crowns,  and  filling  metal  tubing 
that  is  to  be  bent  and  shaped. — "Wm.  H.  Steele. 

454.  New  Tempering  Bath. — Take  a  suitable  quantity 
of  muriatic  acid  ;  dissolve  all  the  zinc  the  acid  will  take. 
Prepare  a  tempering  bath  composed  of  one  part  of  the  above 
zinc  acid  and  one  part  water.  Heat  the  steel  according  to 
its  hardness.  If  high  or  hard  steel,  heat  till  just  red,  and 
then  temper  in  the  acid  bath.  If  low  steel,  heat  it  as  hot 
as  you  would  to  temper  in  water,  then  temper  in  an  acid  bath. 
After  immersing  in  the  acid  bath,  cool  off  in  water.  For 
lathe  and  planer  tools  draw  no  temper  ;  but  for  other  tools 
draw  temper.  Unlike  water  tempering,  the  colors  that  ap- 
pear under  this  method  give  no  clue  to  the  hardness. 

By  this  process,  steel  is  readily  hardened  to  any  desired 
degree,  and  may  he  made  to  cut  glass  like  a  diamond.  If 
desired,  an  acid  bath  composed  of  two  parts  of  muriatic  acid 
and  one  part  water  may  be  used.  Mr.  Peck,  however,  pre- 
fers the  zinc  acid  as  being;  more  dense. 


244 


DEPARTMENT  B. 


A  prominent  advantage  of  this  method  of  tempering  is 
the  certainty  of  its  results.  It  never  fails  to  yield  the  temper 
required.  It  can  be  relied  on  for  every  description  of  steel 
or  tool. — Scientific  American. 

455.  Dentists'  Leg. — A  pecular  sensation  of  numbness, 
or  "  pins  and  needles  "  in  the  extremities  is  frequently  ex- 
perienced by  dentists.  This  condition  Dr.  George  Johnson 
considers  to  be  due  to  the  combined  influence  of  perverted 
nerve-function,  directly  due  to  a  mechanical  impediment  to 
the  circulation  through  the  rigidly-contracted  muscles  and 
their  associated  nerves,  and  to  direct  compression  of  the 
nerves  by  the  firmly-contracted  muscles.  This  combination 
is  found  in  dentists  who  stand  fixed  and  firm  in  one  position 
for  long  periods  of  time.  The  obvious  means  of  prevention 
and  of  cure  consist  in  rest  for  the  overstrained  limb  or  such 
a  frequent  change  of  position  as  is  equivalent  to  a  certain 
amount  of  rest. —  The  Lancet. 


456. 


Home-made  Disk  Mandrel. — 

A. — Common*  wrought  finish- 
ing nail,  12  or  15  cents  per  lb. 
B.— Morse  drill. 
C. — Ordinary  tap. 

D. — Blue  head  screw,  25  or  30 
cents  per  doz. 

E. — Mandrel  complete. 

E.  C.  Moore,  D.D.S.,  in   Ar- 
chives. 


U 


457.  Recut  your  old  Burs. — Attach  a  hard-rubber  disk 
to  a  dental  engine,  by  a  bit  having  a  tightening  screw,  such 
as  is  generally  used  for  mounting  celluloid  disks. 

The  bur  to  be  recut  should  be  placed  in  a  stock  or  hand- 
vise  to  hold  it  firmly.  Proceed  to  recut,  as  follows :  Drive 
the  engine  at  moderate  speed,  passing  the  revolving  disk 


USEFUL     HINTS.  245 


from  end  to  end  of  each  cut  in  the  bur,  being  careful  to  omit 
none  •  examine  the  bur  under  an  ordinary  magnifying  glass,  and 
correct  any  imperfect  edges,  till  certain  that  all  are  well  cut. 
The  disk  should  be  used  dry,  and  removed  out  of  con- 
tact with  the  bur  after  a  second  or  two,  in  order  to  avoid 
heatino-  by  friction,  which  would  spoil  both  bur  and  disk. 
Of  coul'se  the  disk  can  be  reapplied  as  often  as  necessary  to 
complete  the  work.  . 

Any  ordinary  excavating  bur  may  be  recut  m  this  man- 
ner in  a  few  minutes,  five  or  ten,  after  a  little  practice,  so  as 
to  be  equal  to  the  higher  priced  stone-cut  burs.  Besides, 
the  saving  in  utilizing  old  burs  hitherto  thrown  aside,  is  a 

profitable  item.  -,       -,       i^^  i-      +i  • 

When  a  disk  becomes  round-edged  and  unfat  tor  tnis 
purpose,  the  edge  may  be  sharpened  and  rebeveled  quickly, 
by  revolving  it  rapidly  against  a  wet,  coarse  corundum 
wheel,  being  careful  to  move  the  disk  about  over  the  surface 
of  the  corundum  to  avoid  cutting  grooves  m  the  latter. 
These  disks  retail  at  twenty-five  cents,  and  one  will  recut  a 
gross  of  old  burs.     Try  it.-O.  Dental  Journal. 

458      Hint  on  the  Oil  Can.— One  of  the  essential  requi- 
sites of  a  well  regulated  dental  ofiice  or  laboratory  is  an  oil 
can,  but  one  of  the  most  objectional  features  in  its  use  is  the 
certainty  of  soiling  the  hands  from  the  accumulation  of  oil 
and  dust  on  the  outside  of  the  bowl.     Dr.  Mathews  obviates 
this  by  making  a  cup  of  tin  or  brass,  half  an  inch  m  diame- 
ter   and  soldering  it  about  midway  of  the   length  of  the 
nozzle;  this,  filled  with  spunk  or  absorbent  cotton,  serves 
as  a  receptacle  for  the  oil  which  usually  trickles  down  the 
nozzle  and  in  time  spreads  over  the  surface  of  the  bowl      An 
occasional  renewal  of  the  absorbent  material  is  all  that  is 
necessary  to  keep  your  oil  can  in  a  condition  to  be  handled 
without  profanity.     Try  it,  and  our  word  for  it,  you  will  be 
delighted.— Dr.  Mathews,  in  Cosmos. 

459.     Syringe    Needles-to    Clean.-Hypodermic    or 
other  syringes,  when  clogged  so  that  a  fine  wire  cannot  be 


246  DEPARTMENT  E. 

forced  through  them,  may  be  cleaned  by  holding  over  a 
spirit  flame  for  a  moment,  and  the  foreign  matter  will  be 
quickly  expelled  or  destroyed,  so  that  liquids  may  be  used 
immediately.  When  a  wire  has  rusted  in  a  needle,  dip  the 
point  in  oil,  then  hold  it  over  a  flame,  and  it  can  be  re- 
moved. It  is  well  to  draw  oil  through  the  point,  then  heat 
it,  and  rust  will  be  removed  from  the  interior;  afterwards 
wash  with  alcohol,  and  it  is  ready  for  use. — Dental  Review. 

460.  To  Make  Articulating  Paper. — Of  course  this  is 
a  cheap  article  and  will  hardly  pay  one  to  make  it  for  the 
money  saved ;  but  occasionally  we  get  caught  when  it  is 
needed,  and  we  have  not  the  time  to  order.  For  black 
paper,  use  finest-lamp  black  mixed  with  refined  unsalted 
lard,  to  which  has  been  added  (for  flavoring)  a  few  drops  of 
oil  of  gaultheria.  This  colored  paste  is  to  be  thoroughly 
rubbed  in  the  paper  with  a  piece  of  white  flannel.  After 
enough  color  has  been  absorbed,  take  a  piece  of  clean  white, 
flannel  and  rub  till  all  color  ceases  to  come  ofi".  "  Copying 
tissue"  makes  a  nice  paper  for  the  purpose.  If  medium 
tough  paper  is  treated  as  above,  it  is  very  useful  for  making 
duplicate  copies  of  orders,  letters,  etc.  The  sheets  of  col- 
ored paper  being  placed  between  sheets  of  fine  linen  writing 
paper,  and  written  on  with  a  hard  lead  pencil,  gives  two  or 
three  copies  at  one  writing. — William  H.  Steele,  in  Items 
OF  Interest. 

461.  Articulating  Paste. — This  can  be  made  hj  using 
the  same  colors  as  in  making  the  paper ;  the  colors  being 
rubbed  up  with  lanolin  instead  of  lard. — William  H.  Steele, 
in  Items  oe  Interest. 

462.  To  Improve  W^ood  Polishing  Points. — Wood 
polishing  points,  specially  the  large  wheel-shaped  ones,  will 
wear  without  crumbling  if,  before  using  for  the  first  time, 
they  are  soaked  for  several  hours  in  a  weak  solution  of 
shellac  in  alcohol,  and  subsequently  given  time  1o  get  quite 
dry  ;  say  about  half  a  day. — C.  D.  Cheney,  in  Cosmos. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  247 

463.  Dentists'  Hands. — There  are  some  men  in  the 
profession  who  do  not  realize  the  importance  of  properly 
caring  for  their  hands.  A  man  who  operates  at  the  chair 
should  keep  his  hands  clean,  soft  and  white,  and  his  linger 
nails  properly  trimmed  and  cleaned ;  for  if  there  is  anything 
that  will  disgust  a  refined  lady,  and  cause  her  to  change  her 
dentist,  untidy  hands  and  slovenly  attire  will  do  it.  There 
are  undoubtedly  many  in  the  profession  who  would  feel 
insulted,  if  told  that  their  hands  were  unfit  to  go  in  a 
patient's  mouth ;  but  how  can  one  expect  to  have  clean 
hands  and  carry  a  stump  of  a  cigar  between  their  fingers, 
the  greater  part  of  their  leisure  time.  Such  fingers  are 
pickled  clear  through  with  tobacco,  and  are  disgusting  to  one 
who- dislikes  the  weed. — Etta  M.  Steele. 

464.  Handy  Soldering  Pliers. — You  take  the  ordi- 
nary pincers  and  hold  a  piece  of  gold  over  a  Bunsen  burner, 
and,  unless  you  are  very  quick,  your  fingers  will  get  very 
hot  and  you  must  drop  it.  I  had  a  pair  of  pincers  made 
with  each  of  the  points  set  in  a  little  box  of  asbestos.  I  find 
it  very  valuable  and  satisfactory.  You  can  leave  it  in  the 
burner  as  long  as  you  please,  and  the  heat  will  not  aftect  it ; 
it  is  a  good  thing  in  the  office  and  in  the  laboratory. — Dr. 
George  Evans,  in  International. 

465.  To  Protect  Instruments  from  Rust. — All  kinds 
of  dental  or  surgical  instruments,  that  are  only  used  occa- 
sionally, or  that  are  to  be  laid  aside  for  a  time,  can  be  eflect- 
ually  protected  from  rust  by  coating  them  with  the  following : 

Best  quality  of  cosmoline,  |  lb.;  best  yellow  wax,  2  ozs.; 
melted  together  over  a  slow  fire,  and  thoroughly  mixed. 
"Wipe  the  instrument  well  with  chamois  skin,  and  apply  a 
coat  of  the  above  with  a  piece  of  flannel. — William  H.  Steele. 

466.  Acid  on  the  Clothes. — ^In  working  with  acids 
in*  the  laboratory,  it  sometimes  accidentally  gets  spattered  on 
our  clothing.  To  meet  these  emergencies,  have  handy  a  bottle 
of  spirits  of  ammonia,  and  immediately  saturate  the  places 


248  DEPARTMENT  E. 

with  it ;  this  will  stop  all  action  of  the  acid. — William  H. 
Steele,  in  Items. 

467.  Burnt  Fingers. — In  handling  hot  flasks,  furnaces, 
etc.,  we  generally  get  burnt  fingers.  Petroleum  jelly  (Chees- 
brough  plain  vaselin)  applied  immediately,  will  stop  pain 
and  cure  the  burn;  bind  a  piece  of  linen  on,  and  keep  it 
saturated  with  the  jelly  till  all  soreness  disappears. — William 
H.  Steele,  in  Items. 

468.  To  Remove  Iodoform  Odor  from  Hands. — For 
the  removal  of  the  iodoform  odor  from  the  hands  and  uten- 
sils, Bienert  recommends  washing  once  with  linseed  oil  and 
water.  The  odor  is  said  to  disappear  with  surprising  quick- 
ness.—PA«n7i.  CenU^alhalle. — Druggists'  Bulletin. 

469.  Aluminum  Wire. — This  wire  is  valuable  in 
strengthening  rubber  plates — as  a  carrier  for  any  corrosive 
agent,  making  canal  points,  and  many  other  places  where  a 
non-corrosive  wire  is  needed. -r--E!x. 

470.  Refining  ^A^aste  Amalgam. — The  question  of  the 
easiest  and  best  method  of  refining  amalgam  scraps,  either 
those  which  have  been  mixed  up  and  not  used,  or  old  fill- 
ings, so  that  they  can  be  again  utilized,  is  of  interest  to 
every  practicing  dentist. 

It  is  well  known  that  mercury  boils  at  357°  C.  and  can 
be  driven  off  from  amalgam  by  a  sufficiently  high  heat. 
The  other  metals  present  are  not  very  easily  volatile,  and,  if 
they  can  be  prevented  from  oxidizing,  should  be  left  in  a 
condition  to  again  form  an  amalgam  on  the  addition  of  mer- 
cury. I  have  made  some  experiments  in  this  line,  and  find 
that  this  result  can  be  obtained  in  the  following  manner : 

The  mercury  may  be  allowed  to  escape,  or  the  process 
can  be  conducted  so  as  to  preserve  it.  In  the  former  case 
the  operation  should  be  carried  on  where  there  is  a  good 
draft  to  remove  the  vapors  of  mercury,  so  as  to  escape 
the  danger  from  breathing  them.     It  is  only  necessary  to 


USEFUL     HINTS.  249 

heat  the  scraps  in  a  crucible  till  the  mercury  is  expelled, 
usinsj  a  flux  to  prevent  the  oxidation  of  the  alloy.  A  sand 
crucible  may  be  employed  and  a  coal-fire,  or  any  heat  by 
which  it  can  be  raised  to  redness.  As  a  flux,  borax  glass — 
borax  which  has  been  fused  to  drive  ofl^"  the  water  of  crys- 
tallization— answers  ver}"  well.  The  amalgam  should  be 
placed  in  the  hot  crucible  in  small  portions,  so  that  it  may 
not  be  thrown  out  by  the  sudden  conversion  of  the  mercury 
in  vapor.  Enough  borax  should  be  used  to  form  a  ring 
when  melted  around  the  button  of  alloy,  and  the  heat  must 
be  maintained  till  the  mass  has  come  to  a  quiet  fusion  and 
the  globules  of  mercury  at  first  seen  on  the  walls  of  the 
crucible  have  disappeared.  The  metal  can  then  be  poured 
out  and  the  ingot  reduced  to  the  necessary  fineness  by  any 
of  the  common  methods.  As  a  convenient  means  of  doing 
this  I  have  been  accustomed  to  pour  the  mass  in  an 
unglazed  porcelain  mortar,  which  has  been  heated  so  that  it 
can  hardly  be  held  in  the  hand,  and  grinding  quickly  with 
a  warm  pestle.  By  a  little  practice  the  metal  can  be,  by 
this  means,  reduced  to  a  fine  state.  The  coarser  particles 
may  be  sifted  out  by  a  fine  wire  gauze  and  remelted.  As 
some  of  the  borax  will  probably  remain  mixed  with  the 
alloy,  it  is  advisable  to  boil  it  a  few  minutes  in  water  that 
this  may  be  removed  if  present.  After  drying  it  is  ready 
for  use. 

If  the  mercury  is  to  be  recovered,  the  scraps  must  be 
heated  in  a  mercury  retort  or  a  crucible  with  a  bent  tube 
inserted  through  the  cover.  The  mercury  will  distil  over, 
through  this,  and  can  be  condensed  where  there  is  no  possi- 
bility of  breathing  the  vapor.  "When  as  much  as  possible 
has  been  removed  in  this  way  the  heating  should  be  con- 
tinued a  short  time  with  the  crucible  open,  in  order  to  expel 
the  last  traces.  The  residue  can  then  be  treated  as  described 
above. — E.  TV.  R'ockwood,  in  International  Journal. 

471.  Clarifying  "Wax. — Collect  in  a  basin  all  your  old 
^x  and  add  a  pint  of  water  containing  half  an  ounce  of 
5xalic  acid  crystals.     Boil  slowly  for  half  an  hour  and  set 


250 


DEPARTMEUT    E. 


aside  to  cool, giving  it  plenty  of  time.  Scrape  off  the  refuse 
wax  underneath  the  cake,  and  if  the  light  color  from  the 
effects  of  the  oxalic  acid  is  not  desirable,  melt  it  in  a  pan 
without  water,  and  stir  in  thoroughly  a  sufficient  quantity 
of  liquid  butter  color  or  some  other  pigment. — C.  W.  Berry. 

472.  Use  of  the  Storage  Battery. — The  use  of  the 
storage  battery  in  furnishing  power  for  small  motors  and 
light  for  examining  of  nasal,  oral  and  pharyngeal  cavities, 
and  the  teeth  ;  in  furnishing  abundance  of  heat  in  desensi- 
tizing dentine ;  in  drying  and  sterilizing  a  root-canal ;  in 
removing  painlessly  and  without  hemorrhage  epulic  and 
polypoid  growths;  in  cauterizing  indolent,  ulcerated  mucous 
tissue,  makes  a  storage  battery,  be  it  only  a  small  one,  an 
invaluable  adjunct  to  the  operating-room. — C.  T.  Gramm,  in 
0.  Denial  Journal. 


473.     Melting  Points  of  Metals. — 

Metals.                                          Centigrade.  Fahrenheit. 

Aluminum degrees    700 degrees     1,292 


Antimony  . . . . 

Arsenic  

Bismuth 

Cadmium 

Cobalt 

Copper 

Gold 

Indium 

Iron,  wrought. 
Iron,  cast.. . . . 
Iron,  steel. . . . 

Lead 

Magnesium. . . 

Mercury 

Nickel 

Potassium 

Platinum 

Silver 

Sodium 

Tin 

Zinc 


425- 

185. 

264. 

320. 
1,200 
1,091. 
1.381. 

176 

1,530- 

1,200. 

1,400. 
334- 
235- 

—40. 

1,600. 
62. 

2,600. 

1,040. 
96. 

235- 
412. 


797 
365 
507-2 
608 
2,192 
1,995  8 
2,485-8 
348-S 
2,786 
2,192 
2,552 
617 

455 
—40 
2,912 

I43"6 

4,712 
1,904 
172-8 
455 
773"6 

—JEx. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  251 

474.  Laboratory  Pads  and  Holders. — Pads  and 
holders  that  are  non-conducting  and  will  not  scorch,  are  very 
convenient  when  soldering,  baking,  eto.  These  can  be  easily- 
made  by  any  dentist  at  a  cost  of  a  few  cents  each.  Procure 
at  the  plumbers,  some  asbestos  paper,  such  as  is  used  fory 
covering  hot-air  pipes ;  get  some  of  each,  the  thinnest  and' 
thickest  grades,  use  the  thin  for  making  holders  and  thick 
for  bench  pads,  the  latter  to  protect  the  bench  from  hot 
flasks,  soldering,  etc.  Cut  the  paper  in  sizes  and  shapes 
desired  ;  now  lay  these  pieces  on  some  heavy  flannel ;  cut 
out  the  pieces  of  flannel  one  inch  larger  on  all  sides  than 
the  asbestos ;  turn  the  edges  up  over  the  paper  and  stitch 
fast.  In  using  these  always  have  the  asbestos  side  of  the 
holder  or  pad  next  to  the  hot  surface. — William  H.  Steele, 
in  Items  of  Interest. 

475.  Flexible  Wrench  for  Band  Matrice. — Dr.  Fer- 
nandez, of  Chicago,  has  a  neat  little  wrench  for  use  with  the 
Brophy  band  matrix.  It  is  constructed  with  a  flexible  shaft 
and  can  be  used  at  any  angle.  The  shank  of  a  watch  key  is 
soldered  to  a  short  piece  of  steel  coil  spring,  and  the  opposite 
end  of  the  spring  to  a  straight  shaft  of  any  desired  length. 
It  can  be  made  in  a  few  minutes  and  is  very  useful. — Inter- 
national Journal. 

476.  To  Mount  Corundum  Disks. — Take  a  blank  man- 
drel for  the  denial  engine,  and  with  a  flle  roughen  the  surface ; 
or  take  one  such  as  are  sold  at  the  depots,  having  a  gimlet- 
point;  warm  the  end,  so.  that  when  dipped  in  powdered 
shellac,  enough  will  adhere  to  it  to  thoroughly  coat  the 
surface  when  held  in  the  flame  of  a  spirit  lamp.  Place  the 
end  in  the  hole  in  the  center  of  the  disk,  and  allow  it  to  set. 
Insert  the  mandrel  in  a  handpiece  and  warm  it  sutflciently 
to  soften  the  shellac;  then  revolve  the  disk  by  the  engine, 
and  true  up  the  wheel  with  the  finger  as  it  runs,  keeping  the 
disk  in  motion  till  the  shellac  is  cool. — S.  T.,  in  Cosmos. 

477.  Cutting  Soft  Rubber. — It  is  quite  diflicult  to  .cut 
soft,  or  unvulcanized  rubber,  as  it  will  stick  to  the  shears. 


252  DEPARTMENT    E. 

To  overcome  this  trouble,  dip  the  shears,  or  knife  in  water 
occasionally.  This  is  equally  useful  in  trimming  or  sharp- 
ening bands  or  other  appliances  of  soft  rubber. — ^William  H. 
Steele,  in  Tribune. 

,  478.  Soapstone  for  Rubber-dam. — Manufacturers  of 
rubber-dam  cover  the  surface  with  powdered  soapstone,  and 
if  dentists  will  do  the  same  after  washing  and  drying,  they 
will  find  it  (the  dam)  will  slip  over  the  teeth  "  as  if  it  had 
been  greased,"  and  not  feel  so  bad  in  contact  with  the  face. 
I  keep  an  individual-pepper  filled  ready  for  use. — Abiel 
Bowen,  Medina,  IST.  Y. 

A    ^  479.      A  Left-hand  Screw  Plate  from  a  Right- 

hand  Tap. — Take  a  piece  of  steel  wire  and  cut  on 
it  a  right-hand  thread.  File  off  the  threads  on  each 
side,  leaving  exactly  opposite  to  each  other  two 
narrow  rows  of  threads.  A  is  a  cross  section  of  the 
filed  tap.  B  is  a  j)erspective  showing  the  tap  and 
its  unfiled  right-hand  threads.  After  hardening  and 
tempering  the  tap,  drill  through  a  piece  of  steel-plate 
two  holes  equal  in  diameter  to  the  reduced  diameter 
of  the  tap.  Insert  the  tap  with  a  steady,  constant 
push  ;  to  overcome  the  regular  right-hand  lead,  turn 
it  to  the  left.  The  result  will  bo  a  complete  left-hand 
screw-plate.  C  shows  the  left-hand  screw.  With 
the  same  tap  placed  in  the  other  hole,  cut  a  right- 
hand  screw,  and  harden  and  temper  the  plate.  Then 
use  the  plate  to  make  two  right  and  left  taps  of  the 
common  kind,  so  that  wire-threaded  in  either  hole 
of  the  plate  will  fit  a  corresponding  nut  threaded  by 
the  right  or  left-hand  tap. 

Dental  regulating  and  other  fixtures  or  appli- 
ances not  infrequently  require  left  as  well  as  right- 
hand  screws,  and  those  can  easily  be  made  by  the 
method  described.  The  cut  shows  clearly  the 
threads  of  the  screw. — J.  H.  Beebee,  in  Dental 
Cosmos. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  253 

480.  Polishing  Instrument  Points. — Put  in  the  pol- 
ishing cylinder  (described  below)  the  excavator  points,  burs, 
or  other  instrument,  and  put  in  with  them  about  two  tea- 
spoonsful  of  the  finest  flour  of  emery;  close  the  cylinder; 
screw  it  to  the  lathe,  and  run  at  a  good  speed  till  all  rust  and 
spots  are  removed ;  take  off  the  cover  and  examine  frequently ; 
when  clean,  remove  from  the  cylinder,  pour  out  the  emery  and 
wipe  out.  Put  in  one  teaspoonful  of  crocus,  two  of  clean 
sawdust,  a  little  olive  oil,  and  the  points  ;  put  on  the  cover 
and  run  the  lathe  till  polished  to  suit ;  remove  from  cylinder, 
and  wipe  ofl:'  with  chamois  skin. 

The  excavator  points  should  now  be  sharpened  on  an 
Arkansas  stone.  The  engine  burs  can  be  nicely  sharpened 
as  good  as  new ;  either  with  a  knife-edged  Arkansas  stone 
by  hand,  or  with  a  round  knife-edged  stone  in  engine. 

Polishing  Cylinder. — To  make  the  cylinder  for  this  work : 
Take  a  piece  of  seamless  brass  tubing,  one  and  a  half  inches 
in  diameter,  inside  measurement,  and  three  inches  long.  Close 
one  end  by  fitting  in  a  bottom  of  heavy  brass.  Now  make  a 
heavy  brass  nut  that  will  screw  on  to  the  lathe  head ;  then 
solder  this  nut  to  the  center  of  the  bottom  piece,  and  place 
the  bottom  in  the  cylinder,  solder  fast  with  soft  solder.  JSText 
make  a  tin  or  copper  cover,  make  it  to  fit  on  tightly,  so  that 
it  will  not  come  off  during  use. — Wm.  H.  Steele,  in  Items. 

481.  Keeping  Rubber-dam  in  Water. — How  to  keep 
rubber-dam.  A  grand  suggestion.  Put  it  in  a  glass  jar,  and 
fill  jar  with  water ;  then  close  the  jar  up  air-tight,  and  let 
stand  in  a  cool  dark  place  for  two  weeks,  and  then  open  the 
jar  and  rinse  the  rubber  in  clean  fresh  water.  Put  the  rub- 
ber back  in  the  jar  and  fill  with  water,  and  keep  as  before. 
I  have  a  sample  of  rubber  that  I  have  kept  over  five  years  in 
this  way  that  is  as  good  as  new. — Dr.  R.  R.  Rykert,in  Items. 

482.  The  Coupling  of  Battery  Cells. — The  diagrams 
below  illustrate  ditterent  methods  of  coupling  the  cells  of 
a  battery  according  as  it  is  desired  to  produce  jpower  (force 
intensity,  potential),  or  for  creating  a  quantity  current.     In 


254  DEPARTMEKT     E. 

diagram  No.  1  the  cells  are  coupled  in  series  from  zinc  to 
carbon — positive  to  negative.  This  method  of  coupling  pro- 
duces what  is  called  a  high-tension  current,  and  is  that 
which  is  employed  for  power  and  for  illuminating  purposes. 
In  this  arrangement  each  cell,  whether  large  or  small,  gives 
a  definite  potential ;  and  every  additional  cell  gives  increased 


No.  1. 
Battery-Cells  Coupled  in  Series  to  produce  Eleetro-motive  Force  or  Power  (potential). 


No.  2. 
Battery-Cells  Coupled  in  Multiple  Arc  to  produce  a  Quantity  Current. 

intensity  to  the  current  produced,  the  number  of  cells  deter- 
mining the  intensit}',  without  reference  to  their  size  or  the 
depth  of  immersion  of  the  electrodes  in  the  electrolytic 
fluid.  The  number  of  cells  necessary  to  be  employed  in  a 
given  case  depends,  therefore,  on  the  amount  of  resistance  to 
be  overcome.  The  unit  of  measure  of  electrical  force  is  ex- 
pressed by  the  term  volt  (as  the  pressure  of  steam  in  a  boiler 
is  designated  by  i)0uuds) ;  the  unit  of  the  measure  of  resist- 
ance is  an  ohm ;  the  unit  of  the  measure  of  quantity  is  an 
ampere.  In  an  ordinary  bichromate-cell,  such  as  the  Grenet 
■or  a  plunge  battery  in  which  a  single  fluid  such  as  the  electro- 
poion  is  used,  one  cell  gives  a  potential  of  a  little  over  one 
iind  three-quarters  volts  ;  two  such  cells  give  twice  that,  and 
so  on  according  to  the  number  of  cells, — six  cells,  when  ar- 
ranged as  in  diagram  No.  1,  producing  ten  and  one-half  volts. 
When  a  current  of  electricity  passes  through  a  conductor 
which  resists  its  passage,  it  heats  the  conductor  to  a  degree 
proportionate  to  the  resistance  which  it  meets.  The  thin  , 
iilament  of  infusible  carbon  in  the  lamp  forms  a  portion  of 


USEFUL     HINTS.  ^'-'^ 


an  electric  circuit,  and  because  of  its  low  c^onducting  po.e. 

is  heated  to  iucandcsence  by  the  P^^^.^S^  °/ '''""™f  •  .^ '^ 
small  lamps  employed  for  examination  of  the  -".O"*  ofte.  a 
resistance  of  about  five  ohms,  requu-mg  proximately  &^e 
vot  to  overcome  it.     Three  cells  of  an  ordinary  h.chromat 
or  Bunsen battery  producea  current  of  about  five  vo.ts.   The 
h  tensity  of  the  current  required  depends  on    he  size  and 
charTct  Jr  of  the  carbon  filament.     A  current  that  would  be 
necessary  to  produce  incandescence  in  a  three-candle-powe, 
lamp  would  destroy  the  filament  in  a  one-cand  e-power  lani^ 
To  increase  the  intensity  of  the  current  by  increasing  t  e 
number  of  cells  beyond  the  amount  required  ^.o^^^^^^^ 
resistance  sufficiently  to  produce  iiicandesence  ^^  ]»  ^^  *^ 
destruction  of  the  carbon  filament.     In  lamps  of  the  same 
size  and  intended  to  be  alike  the  resistance  is  not  uniform, 
owi!"to  a  diflerence  in  the  size  or  density,  and  the  carbon 
may  be  destroyed  in  one  by  a  current  just  sufficient  to  pro- 
duce iucandcsence  in  another.     It  is  therefore  ""-y  *« 
employ  a  resistance  device  to  graduate  the  flow  of  the  cm 
rent      In  diagram  No.  2  the  cells  are  coupled  from  zmc  to 
zinc,  carbon  to  carbon-positive  to  positive.     By  this  ar- 
ran<.ement  quantity  of  current  is  produced,  according  to  the 
number  of  electrodes  and  the  amount  of  their  exposure  to  the 

electrolytic  flnid-the  larger  the  electrodes  and  the  deeper 
their  immersion  the  greater  the  chemical  action.     But,  while 
■  an  increased  exposure  of  the  electrodes  to  the  fluid  increases 
the  amount  of  electricity  generated,  it  does  "<>* --^^^  *^ 
electro-motive  force.  If  the  six  carbons  and  six  zincs,  coupled 
as     presented  in  diagram  So.  2.  were  all  placed  in  one  cell 
tnstead  of  in  six,  the  result  would  be  the  same,     A  quantity 
current  is  required  for  cautery  purposes.    To  summar.z  , 
potential  or  intensity  of  a  current  deP<^'>'i='  *'^*'  °"  ^^ 
method  of  coupling,  and  secondly,  on  the  number  o  eel  s  m- 
eluded  in  the  series,  irrespective  of  their  size  and  of  the 
depth  of  immersion  of  the  electrodes  ;  while  the  production 
of  a  quantity  current  requires  a  difi-erent  coupling  and  de- 
pends on  the  amount  of  surface  of  the  electrodes  exposed  to 
the  fluid,  irrespective  of  the  number  of  cells. 


256  DEPARTMENT    E. 

It  should  be  understood  that  when  the  battery  is  placed 
at  a  distance  from  the  lamp,  as  in  the  cellar  or  a  room  at  a 
considerable  remove  from  the  operating-room,  the  length  of 
the  connecting-cord  necessary  makes  an  increased  resistance 
to  be  overcome,  and  in  such  case  an  additional  cell  will  prob- 
ably be  required  to  produce  the  same  eiFect  as  when  the  cells 
are  placed  near  at  hand. — J.  W.  W.,  in  Cosmos. 

483.  To  Cleanse  Dirty  Hands. — For  cleaning  hands, 
however  dirty,  first  rub  well  in  warm  oil,  then  sprinkle  with 
powdered  borax,  and  wash  off  in  the  usual  way. — Old  File. 

484.  To  Make  Exploring  Needles. — An  almost  inval- 
uable thing  I  have  found  for  making  explorations  and  ex- 
aminations around  the  mouth,  is  to  take  a  package  of  Sharp's 
'No.  4  needles,  and  by  the  aid  of  an  alcohol  lamp  and  a  pair 
of  pliers  they  can  be  bent  in  any  conceivable  shape,  so  as 
to  reach  all  points  around  or  between  the  teeth.  (The  rea- 
son I  say  Sharp's  'No.  4  needles  is,  because  they  appear  to 
me  to  be  the  most  convenient  size.)  If  a  suitable  point  has 
not  been  made  previous  to  an  examination  that  will  reach 
the  desired  spot,  it  is  only  the  work  of  a  moment  to  con- 
struct one  just  the  shape  desired.  The  said  points  can  be 
turned  at  any  angle,  and  made  so  fine  that  they  will  pene- 
trate almost  the  finest  space  and  catch  in  the  finest  cavity, 
and  by  the  use  of  a  small  file  the  large  ends  may  be  filed 
rough,  so  that  they  will  fit  and  hold  firmly  in  the  ordinary 
nerve  broach  holder.  The  heating  takes  the  temper  out  of 
the  needles,  rendering  them  quite  tough.  They  are  inex- 
pensive, and  you  have  any  shape  of  exploring  point  desired. 
— Charles  S.  Hardy,  in  Items. 

485.  To  Renew  Zinc. — When  used  in  making  dies,  zinc 
gets  too  thick  and  loses  life ;  it  can  be  renewed  by  placing  it 
in  a  melting  ladle ;  melt  it  and  keep  the  ladle  over  the  heat 
till  the  metal  shows  a  dark  red,  then  add  of  strong  hydro- 
chloric acid — the  metal  to  be  stirred  constantly  while  the 
acid  is  being  put  in. — Thomas  Fletcher. 


USEFUL     HINTS,  257 

486.  Action  of  Acids  on  Cements.— According  to  the 
statements  of  Dr.  Brubaker,  lactic  acid  dissolves  cement 
fillings  very  rapidly,  while  acetic  acid  has  little  or  no  effect 
on  them. — Exchange. 

487.  Dorrence's  Alloy. — This  alloy  is  made  of  silver, 
1  part ;  zinc,  2  parts  ;  and  copper,  3  parts  ;  (metals  must  be 
pure)  and  is  used  to  alloy  gold  or  silver  plate  for  making 
solders.  It  makes  a  strong,  easily  flowing  and  tough  solder 
that  follows  the  color  of  the  plate  from  which  it  is  made. 
I  prefer  it  to  the  solders  that  I  have  been  able  to  buy,  and 
can  profitably  use  my  plate  scraps.  If  the  dental  depots 
would  furnish  this  alloy  they  would  do  the  profession  a 
service. 

Fragments  of  roots  broken  off"  in  extracting,  can  often  be 
easily  removed  b}^  burring  away  the  alveolar  process  imme- 
diately surrounding  them,  thereby  avoiding  much  pain  and 
laceration.  It  would  be  an  advantage  if  the  dental  instru- 
ment-makers would  make  some  burs  with  long  shanks  for 
this  purpose. 

It  is  sometimes  advantageous  to  make  a  model  of  plas- 
ter and  sand,  and  when  the  work  is  adjusted  do  not  remove 
from  the  model,  but  add  enough  more  plaster  and  sand  to  hold 
the  parts  in  position,  remove  wax  and  solder. — Ohio  Journal. 


Carat,  Grains  and  Percentage. — The  word 
"  carat "  comes  from  the  Abyssinian  name  of  bean.  It  cor- 
responds in  weight  with  a  species  of  East  Indian  bean,  and 
was  originally  used  only  as  a  weight,  in  the  same  manner  as 
our  word  "  grain  "  comes  from  a  grain  of  wheat,  and  has 
also  its  averasfe  weight.  The  exact  relation  of  the  carat  to 
the  grain,  Troy  weight,  is,  in  round  numbers,  as  4.608  to 
1.185  ;  or,  in  other  words,  1.185  carats  are  equal  to  4.608 
grains  Troy.  By  division  of  the  last  number  by  the  first, 
we  find  for  the  weight  of  the  carat  3.88  grains  very  nearly. 
The  carat  is  the  weight  by  which  jewelers  sell  diamonds. 
The  carat  is  now  only  used  for  weighing  precious  stones  and 
pearls,  because  the  grain  is  too  small. 


258  DEPAHTMENT     E.   ' 

In  ancient  times,  it  was  used  as  the  unit  of  weight  for 
gold,  but  is  now,  on  account  of  the  greater  abundance  of 
that  precious  metal,  superseded  by  the  ounce.  In  regard  to 
the  alloy  of  gold,  it  has  been  accepted  to  take  twenty-four 
carats  of  gold  or  ninety -three  grains,  very  near,  as  the 
standard  of  pure  gold,  and  to  call  gold  in  which  twenty 
carats  in  twenty -four  carats  are  pure  gold,  gold  of  twenty 
carats;  when  three- fourths  is  pure,  or  eighteen  carats  in 
twenty-four  carats,  it  is  called  eighteen-carat  gold.  So  in 
regard  to  the  alloy  of  gold,  the  word  carat  has  become  sim- 
ilar to  the  expression  of  a  percentage,  wHth  the  difference 
that  twenty-four  is  substituted  for  one  hundred.  So  eighteen- 
carat  gold  is  identical  to  seventy -five  per  cent  fine ;  twelve- 
carat  to  fifty  per  cent  fine,  etc.  That  this  manner  of  esti- 
mating the  value  is  kept  up  is  simply  due  to  the  custom  of 
following  the  duodecimal  system  in  making  alloys,  which 
naturally  drives  us  to  the  expressions,  seventy,  eighty,  or 
ninety  per  cent  when  speaking  of  the  fineness  of  the  most 
valuable  metals. — Exchange. 

489.  Soldering  without  Heat. — This  consists  of  two 
alloys ;  the  one  of  metallic  sodium  and  mercury,  and  the 
other  of  metallic  copper  and  mercury,  prepared  and  used  as 
follows :  The  flux  consists  of  one  part  of  sodium  to  fifty  parts 
of  mercury.  This  must  be  carefully  protected  from  the 
atmosphere  in  a  glass-stoppered  bottle.  This  has  the  prop- 
erty of  amalgamating  any  metal  with  which  it  comes  in 
contact,  forming  an  adhesive  amalgam  even  on  cast  iron. 
The  solder  proper  is  made  as  follows:  Dissolve  10  ounces  of 
sulphate  of  copper  in  2  pints  of  water,  and  then  precipitate 
the  copper  by  the  introduction  of  strips  of  zinc.  "Wash  the 
precipitate  in  hot  water  two  or  three  times,  drain  off",  and 
for  every  ounce  of  precipitated  copper  add  2  ounces  of  mer- 
cury. Add  also  a  little  sulfuric  acid  (say  15  to  20  drops), 
to  aid  in  the  amalgamation  of  the  metals.  The  finely 
divided  copper  and  mercury  forms  a  paste  which  sets  and 
becomes  intensely  hard  in  the  course  of  a  few  hours.  It 
should  be  made  up,  ^vhile  soft,  in  little  pellets   and   put 


USEFUL     HINTS.  259 

away.  "When  required  for  use,  first  amalgamate  the  sur- 
faces to  be  joined  by  rubbing  them  lightly  with  the  flux. 
This  is  the  equivalent  of  tinning  in  the  ordinary  soldering 
methods.  Then  take  one  (or  more,  as  the  case  may  be)  of 
the  pellets,  and  warm  till  the  mercury  begins  to  exude  at 
the  surface.  T^^ipe  ofl:"  the  exuded  drops  with  a  clean  rag, 
and  drop  the  pellets  in  a  small  mortar  and  rub  till  smooth, 
or  about  the  consistency  of  prepared  white  lead.  Smear 
this  over  one  of  the  surfaces  to  be  joined,  and  apply  the 
other  surface  to  the  latter  as  quickl}^  as  possible.  The  joints 
set  so  firmly  in  the  course  of  two-and-a-half  to  three  hours, 
that  only  a  hammer  and  cold  chisel  (or  a  degree  of  heat 
suflicient  to  melt  ordinary  solder)  can  separate  the  surfaces. 
For  an  even  stronger  and  much  quicker  setting  solder, 
where  expense  is  no  item,  take  the  following  to  replace  the 
copper  and  mercury  (using  the  same  flux) : 

Silver 8  parts. 

Tin lo     " 

Bismuth i  part. 

Platinum i     " 

Melt  together,  and  cast  an  ingot.  Rasp  to  filings,  or 
otherwise  reduce  to  small  particles.  When  required  for  use, 
mix  about  3  parts  of  filings  and  1  of  mercury  in  a  small 
mortar  till  it  becomes  a  smooth  paste.  This  sets  in  about 
fifteen  minutes,  and  can  not  be  made  workable  again  by 
heat ;  it  must  be  mixed  just  as  required.  The  omission  of 
the  platinum  reduces  the  strength  of  the  solder,  and  length- 
ens the  time  required  to  harden  to  about  one  hour.  The 
omission  of  bismuth  makes  a  more  granular  mass,  which 
is  better  for  filling  up  crevices.  With  bismuth,  it  is  as 
smooth  and  plastic  as  potter's  clay,  Joints  made  by  this 
solder  are  almost  inseparable.  It  is  very  valuable  in  repair- 
ing surgical  and  philosophical  instruments,  the  brazing  of 
delicate  springs,  and  in  all  cases  where  the  application  of 
heat  would  be  hurtful  or  destructive. — National  Druggist. 

490,  Engine  Foot  Pad. — A  neat  and  cheap  rubber  foot 
pad  for  the  engine,  can  be  made  from  ordinary  hcary  rubber- 


260  DEPARTMENT    E. 

dam.  Cut  a  piece  of  paper,  to  just  fit  the  foot  piece  of  the 
engine;  lay  this  on  the  rubber  and  cut  a  piece  like  it, 
cement  it  to  the  foot  piece  with  Le  Page's  glue.  Such  a 
pad  will  answer  all  purposes  of  one  costing  a  dollar. — "Wm. 
H.  Steele. 

491.  New  Soldering  Fluid. — Chlorid  of  zinc,  so  much 
used  in  soldering,  is,  besides  its  corrosive  qualities,  un- 
healthy and  disagreeable  to  use.  A  soldering  mixture  has 
been  found  which  is  free  from  these  defects.  It  is  made  by 
mixing  one  pound  of  lactic  acid  with  one  pound  of  glycerin, 
and  eight  pounds  of  water. — Off.  and  Lah. 

492.  A  Fine  Polishing  Paste. — Mix  ten  parts  of  tin 
putty,  eight  parts  prepared  buckshorn,  and  twenty-five  of 
spirits  of  wine,  to  a  paste.  Cleanse  the  article  with  this, 
and  polish  with  this  and  fine  blotting  paper. —  Off.  and  Lah. 

493.  Gutta-Percha  Bowl. — Dr.  Geo.  Evans  forms  a 
mass  of  gutta-percha  in  the  shape  of  a  small  bowl,  in  which 
is  dropped  chloroform.  The  mixture  is  made  immediately 
for  any  and  all  purposes  it  is  to  be  used.  By  this  method  a 
thin  or  thick  solution  can  be  had  at  the  same  time. — Catch- 
ing^ s  Compend. 

494.  To  make  Gold  Non-Cohesive. — Ammoniate  your 
gold  when  you  want  it  non-cohesive ;  by  annealing,  it  be- 
comes cohesive  again.  Heat  will  drive  oft'  any  gaseous 
matters  from  the  surface  of  gold. — Revieio. 

495.  Bunsen  Burner;  Best  Way  to  Use. — The  best 
way  (according  to  Fletcher)  to  use  a  small  Bunsen,  is  to  have 
it  mounted  with  the  tube  horizontally,  or  nearly  so.  In 
such  a  position  it  never  gets  choked  with  dirt,  and  can  be 
turned  down  safely  to  the  smallest  point  of  flame  without 
the  use  of  the  air  slide,  and  without  risk  of  lighting  back. 
— Items. 

496.  Dirty  Oil-Stones. — Many  otherwise  clean  operat- 
ing tables  contain  one  of  these.     Did  you  ever  see  a  dentist 


USEFUL     HINTS.  261 

pick  up  the  oil-stone  and  turn  his  back  to  the  patient  before 
opening  the  case?  A  little  piece  of  cloth,  wet  in  alcohol, 
and  applied  with  plenty  of  elbow  grease,  will  keep  the  stone 
as  clean  as  new. — "SYm.  H.  Steele,  in  Items. 

497.  To  Spring  Temper  Broaches. — To  give  a  spring 
temper  to  broaches  by  dipping  them  in  melted  lead,  keeping 
them  there  till  as  hot  as  the  lead  and  instantly  pluno;:ino; 
them  in  hot  water. — Dr.  C.  J.  Tibbetts,  in  Items. 

498.  To  Clean    Obstructed   Hypodermic    Points. — If 

the.  needle  of  your  Iwpodermic  syringe  is  obstructed,  and 
you  have  no  wire  fine  enough  to  enter  the  point,  have  re- 
course to  a  section  of  braided  picture  wire;  one  of  the  fine 
strands  from  this  is  just  the  thing  needed. — Dr.  Vs".  S.  Elliott, 
in  Items. 

499.  Soldering  Aluminum  Without  Flux. — The  solder 
is  an  alloy  of  aluminum  and  tin,  suitable  proportions  bring 
45  parts  tin  to  11  parts  aluminum.  The  metals  are  melted 
separately,  poured  together,  and  then  cast  in  slugs.  Xo 
flux  is  required. — R.  Heaton,  in  Scientific  American. 

500.  Materials  Used  in  Artificial  Teeth. — The  sub- 
stance of  an  artificial  tooth  is  made  principally  of  spar  and 
silex;  the  gum  color,  of  the  purple  of  Cassius  and  teroxid  of 
gold  ;  the  bluish  tint  is  platina ;  the  yellowish  tint,  oxid  of 
titanium. — Items. 

501.  Cosmetic  for  the  Hands. — For  keeping  the  hands 
white  and  soft  Meyer  recommends  the  following,  to  be  rubbed 
in  after  a  thorough  washing  and  drying :  Lanolin  100  parts, 
paraffin  25,  vanillin  0.1,  oil  of  roses  sufficient.  It  is  most 
conveniently  kept  in  collapsible  tubes,  and  is  especially  suited 
to  the  needs  of  physicians,  who  must  frequently  disinfect 
their  hands. — Exchange. 

502.  To  Barb  Nerve  Broaches. — When  reduced  to  the 
desired  size  the  barbino;  is  easilv  done  bv  taking  an  enamel 


262 


DEPARTMENT    E. 


chisel,  very  thin  on  the  edge  and  very  hard.  Place  the 
broach  in  a  sliding  tube-holder  or  chuck — same  as  for  hold- 
ing it  securely  while  cutting  down  with  the  corundum  wheels 
— and  hold  under  it  a  piece  of  glass  or  any  hard,  bright  sur- 
face. Hold  the  chisel  at  ninety  degrees  angle  to  the  broach, 
commencing  near  the  point,  and  with  the  blade  of  the  chisel 
held  on  the  broach,  not  directly  at  right  angles  with  it,  but 
with  the  right  edge  or  corner  of  chisel  turned  farther  away 
from  it,  so  as  to  throw  the  barb  up  the  right  side  of  its 
length,  in  order  to  insure  its  catching  the  pulp.  If  cut 
directly  across,  at  right  angles,  it  will  not  do  so  nicely.  A 
slight  pressure  on  the  chisel  will  raise  a  barb — be  it  ever  so 
slight — that,  if  cut  to  the  right  will  be  sure  to  catch  the 
pulp  every  time.  Do  not  make  more  than  three  or  four 
barbs,  and  close  together  at  the  point,  and  not  so  deep  as  to 
endanger  its  main  strength.  This  can  be  very  successfully 
done  by  a  little  practice. — Dr.  Bonwill,  extract  from  Inter- 
national. 

503.  Reducing  Nerve-Broaches. — For  reducing  steel 
piano-wire,  evenly  tempered,  use  two  corundum  wheels  kept 
together  by  a  coiled  spring  (see  cut),  and  afterwards  use 
paper  disks  with  the  soft  rubber  on  either  side,  for  line  work. 


Fig.  1. 


Fig.  2. 


Fig.  3. 


BonwiU's  devices  for  making  nerve-broaches  from  Stubs'  tempered  steel  piano-wire,  and 
for  reducing  Swiss  broaches  to  an  infinitesimal  size. 


9ftQ 

USEFUL     HINTS. 


DESCRIPTION    OF    APPARATUS. 

No  1  consists  Of  two  sharp-cutting  corundum  wheels, 
used  dry,  with  one  at  a  slight  bevel,  as  shown  m  cut.     ihe 
ter  on;  is  screwed  fast  to  mandrel  rnade  for  the  prupo- 
,„.l  the  inner  one  is  shellaced  to  a  thin  sleeve  which  moves 
lengthwise  only  on  the  mandrel,  and  is  controlled  by  a  coded 
spring,  the  tension  of  which  is  regulated  by  the  movable 
CO  la.  and  screw  on  the  mandrel  nearest  the  chuck  ot  engine 
hand.piece  or  lathe.     The  collar  holding  the  corundum  wheel 
■rprevented  from  turning  on  the  shat^  by  a  i^n  rumiing 
throuo-h  it,  and  on  a  flattened  surface  of  mandrel,     ih  s  is 
foi  heavy  ;ork  of  reducing  tempered  stub  wire,  but  will  do 

SO  to  a  very  fine  broach.  ^^     1 1 

No  2  is  a  shellac  and  corundum  wheel  and  a  soft  rubber 
disk  of  plain  packing  rubber  on  the  inside  next  to  the  hub 
on  mancLl,  and  both  secured  tightly  to  keep  from  turning^ 
The  rubber  disk  should  be  of  greater  diameter  o  allow  the 
broach  to  be  guided  in  between  them  easily.  The  edge=  at 
the  periphery  will  be  slightly  apart  when  screwed  up  tightly. 
Both  revolve  at  the  same  time. 

No  3  is  made  of  two  one-inch  shellaced  corundum  paper 
or  cloth  disks,  coarse  or  fine,-better  meclium  f"^  *e  l^^*! 
which  is  used  for  very  delicate  work  -and  «"  b"*  ^f  ?;° 
these  a  half-  or  three-quarter  inch  soft  rubber  d^f  -  "  '  f'"" 
packing  rubber  and  placed  around ;  all  screwed  tightly  on 
mandrel.  There  is  no  trouble  in  making  them  from  the 
material  every  dentist  has  on  hand,  if  it  be  only  the  paper 

^''\  making  No.  1  the  bevel  should  be  very  slight  and 
perfect,  as  the  broach  is  so  small.  The  inner  wheel  shoidd 
have  controlling  it  a  very  stiti'  spiral  spring,  nicely  adjusted 
to  permit  the  broach  to  go  down  between  he  wheels  While 
the  broach  or  wire  is  being  cut,  it  ^mild  ^^ '■^.^'^f  J""" 
stantly  to  keep  it  perfectly  round,  and  the  point  kept  n 
towai  the  center  if  the  wheels,  in  order  to  more  perfect^ 
point  it.  They  are  held  by  a  small  chuck  l^"™  :P;7?  ^^^f^ 
being  cut,  and  when  in  use  are  fastened  to  a  very  light  handle. 
•      —Dr.  Bonwill,  extract  from  International. 


264 


DEPARTMENT     E. 


504.  Sandpaper  Holder  for  Hand  Use. — Take  a  quart- 
taper  cork,  trim  up  in  cone  shape  on  the  lathe,  make  a  slit 
through  apical  end  of  cone  half-way  down  with  a  dental  saw, 
insert  in  this  a  piece  of  sandpaper  a  little  wider  than  the 
opening,  hent  back  at  one  end  for  retention,  and  you  have  a 
hand  sandpaper  mandrel  for  use  on  rubber  plates,  which 
conforms  with  depressions  and  works  admirably. — Dr.  Barnes, 
in  Items. 


505, 


Mouth  Lamp.  —Dr.  W.  H.  Trueman  exhibited 
a  little  device  for  the  removal  of  crowns  which 
were  set  in  the  roots  with  gutta-percha.  It  was 
merely  a  small  vial  with  a  slot  in  the  cork,  through 
which  passed  a  piece  of  grocer's  cotton  cord,  form- 
ins;  a  wick.  The  cord  was  moistened  with  alco- 
hoi  and  set  on  fire.  A  minute  blaze  was  the 
result,  which  was  held  for  a  few  moments  next 
the  crown.  The  gutta-percha  was  thus  quickly 
softened,  more  quickly  and  effectually  than  by  the 
application  of  a  heated  instrument  to  the  tooth, 
as  is  usually  the  plan  adopted,  and  with  no  dis- 
comfort to  the  patient.  The  cut  represents  the 
appliance. — Office  and  Laboratory. 


506.  Suggestions  for  Using  Diamond  Drills. — When 
drilling  a  cavity  with  a  diamond  drill,  oil  onl}^  should  be 
used  as  a  lubricant,  thus  preventing  the  drill  from  becoming 
heated,  which  would  cause  it  to  tear  out ;  also,  when  drill- 
ing a  cavity,  two  drills  should  be  used  of  different  sizes,  the 
larger  one  to  widen  the  cavity,  and  the  other  for  the  retain- 
ing points.  When  properly  used,  these  two  drills  should 
last  till  the  steel  which  holds  the  diamonds  is  actually 
worn  away. — A  maker  of  them,  in  Items. 


507.  Rubber-dam  Clamps. — Rubber-dam  clamps  are 
among  the  most  valuable  instruments  that  a  dentist  uses ; 
at  the   same   time   they   are   among   the   most   dangerous. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  265 

Any  one  who  lias  used  them  for  a  long  series  of  years  has 
had  cases  where  decay  came  as  the  result  of  the  injury  in- 
flicted on  the  enamel  by  the  hard  and  sharp  edges  of 
the  steel  jaws  of  the  clamp.  I  have  seen  many  such  results 
in  delicate  teeth,  and  have  sought  for  some  means  to  over- 
come this.  In  my  own  practical  employ  clamps  with  adjust- 
able jaws  of  soft  metal  or  other  substances  like  hard  rubber 
and  celluloid.  These  jaws  are  easily  replaced  if  injured, 
and  enamel  would  require  to  be  very  soft  indeed  to  receive 
injury  from  such  clamps.  I  have  never  seen  a  case  that 
showed  subsequent  decay  from  the  use  of  my  clamps.  I 
describe  them  here  in  order  to  prevent,  if  possible,  some  un- 
scrupulous person  from  patenting  the  invention,  which  con- 
sists briefly  in  making  clamps  with  removable  jaws  ;  said 
jaws  instead  of  being  made  as  at  present  of  hard  steel,  are 
constructed  of  soft  metals  like  tin  or  rubber  or  celluloid,  or 
other  suitable  material ;  the  object  being  to  provide  jaws 
too  soft  to  injure  the  enamel  of  the  tooth.  These  little  re- 
movable jaws  can  be  molded  in  quantity,  and  are  therefore 
cheap,  and  at  the  same  time  they  are  readily  bent  to  fit  any 
special  form  of  the  tooth  to  which  they  are  to  be  ajipHed ; 
this  is  a  strong  point  in  their  favor.  Besides  this  advantage 
they  require  but  a  few  clamps  to  fit  a  whole  set  of  teeth,  for 
the  jaws,  being  removable,  suitable  ones  can  be  selected  from 
a  great  number,  and  simply  placed  in  the  clamps  for  use. 
— William  IT.  Rollins,  in  Iniernational. 

508.  A  Piano  Wire  Separator. — Another  appliance 
is  a  little  instrument  that  will  not  slip,  but  hold  the  teeth 
firmly  in  getting  space.  It  consists  of  a  small  piece  of  piano 
wire,  with  a  thread  cut  on  it.  One  end  is  flattened,  and 
on  the  other  end  is  a  little  nut.  A  small  washer  goes  on  the 
other  side  between  the  teeth.  It  is  a  matter  of  considerable 
convenience,  and  in  some  cases  a  very  serviceable  little  sepa- 
rator. It  is  not  applicable  to  cases  where  it  is  liable  to  slip 
against  the  gum.  That  may  be  modified  by  putting  a  little 
sandpaper  washer  under  the  nut. — Dr.  II.  ^Y.  Gillett,  in 
International. 


266 


DEPARTMENT     E. 


A 


-   G 


509.  How  to  Make  a  Useful  Instrument. — Explanation 
of  cut.—A^  celluloid  or  vulcanite  anvil,  for  the  punch  to 

strike  on.  B,  rubber 
cutter  or  punch.  C, 
ligature  cutter,  part- 
ly open  and  in  posi- 
tion for  removing  the 
punch.  D,  copper  jaw 
of  point  pliers.  E^ 
shows  middle  section 
of  rubber  punch.  F^ 
points  of  punch  and  size  of  holes.  G,  reverse  end  of  punch. 
The  little  instrument  shown  in  above  cut, has  been  in  con- 
stant use  in  my  office  for  five  years,  and  has  proved  souseful^ 
that  I  give  my  method  of  making  it  for  the  benefit  of  your 
readers.  Procure  of  some  dealer  an  ordinary  nickel-plated 
card  punch,  such  as  used  by  merchants  for  canceling  sales 
on  credit  cards.  With  a  steel  punch  drive  out  the  cutter,  fit 
in  its  place  a  piece  of  celluloid  or  vulcanite,  having  the  top 
rounded,  as  shown  in  A.  This  makes  the  bed-piece  for 
cutting  the  rubber  on ;  the  top  is  rounded  for  the  purpose 
of  stretching  the  rubber-dam,  as  the  punch  closes  down 
on  it. 

Next,  turn  out  of  a  piece  of  Stubs'  best  steel  drill  rod^ 
the  rubber-dam  punch  (E).  The  two  small  ends  want  to  be 
of  difierent  size  in  order  to  punch  the  two  difi:erent  size 
holes ;  the  center,  or  shoulder,  should  be  large  enough  to 
give  it  a  firm  seat  in  the  jaw  of  the  instrument ;  center  the 
small  ends  and  drill  in  them  deep  enough  to  make  the 
cone-shaped  holes  and  cutting  edges  shown  in  the  cut.  Drill 
a  hole  in  the  lower  jaw,  directly  opposite  the  vulcanite  anvil, 
and  entirely  through,  large  enough  to  take  in  the  largest 
end  of  the  punch.  With  a  square  end  drill  (or  better  turn 
it  out  in  the  lathe)  enlarge  this  hole  deep  enough  so  it  will 
take  in  the  shoulder  of  the  punch,  allowing  the  top  of  the 
shoulder  to  come  flush  with  the  face  of  the  jaw. 

To  make  the  point  plier  combination,  close  the  jaws  of 
the  punch  and  wind  them  together  firmly  with  wire;  center 


USEFUL     HINTS.  267 

a  twist  drill  between  them, and  drill  a  hole  through  ;  remove 
the  wire  with  a  file,  cut  a  dove-tail  mortise  and  fit  in  a 
piece  of  copper  (D).  On  the  side  where  the  ligature  cutter 
shuts  in,  the  copper  should  be  filed  down  smooth  with  the 
face  of  the  jaw  sufficient  to  let  the  blade  close  in  out  of  the 
way  when  not  needed.  The  balance  of  the  copper  should  be 
left  high  enough  to  allow  the  grasping  of  a  cone-socket  point 
without  having  the  rubber  punch  strike.  The  next,  and  last 
step,  is  the  ligature  cutter.  Make  this  from  a  piece  of  the 
very  best  steel  and  shape  as  shown  in  cut  (C).  The  large 
end,  or  shank,  should  be  made  concave,  with  two  pointed 
corners,  and  should  be  fastened  to  the  jaw  in  such  a  position 
that  one  or  the  other  of  these  corners  shall  act  as  a  lock  to 
hold  the  punch  in  place  at  all  times,  except  when  concave 
end  of  the  blade  is  exactly  in  line  with  the  oval  shoulder  of 
the  punch  (as  shown  in  cut).  AYhen  in  this  position  the 
punch  can  be  easily  removed  arid  reversed.  Drill  a  small 
hole  in  the  jaw  and  rivet  the  blade  to  place.  Do  not  rivet 
the  head  so  tight  but  that  it  can  be  opened  and  closed.  This 
instrument  can  be  made  by  any  one  at  a  cost  of  one  dollar 
to  one  dollar  and  twenty-five  cents,  and  will  take  the  place 
of  three  instruments  costing  four  dollars  and  fifty  cents. — 
Wm.  H.  Steele,  in  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

510.  To  Make  Cells  for  Storage  Batteries. — Procure 
a  glass  bottle,  cut  a  strip  of  one-sixteenth  sheet  lead,  to  fit 
nicely  around  the  inside ;  score  this  all  over  on  the  inside. 
Now  cut  two  pieces  from  the  same  gage  lead,  almost  square, 
one  having  a  central  slit  half-w^ay  down  from  above  and  the 
other  half-way  up  from  below.  Score  these  also  on  both 
sides.  Put  them  together,  fastening  them  with  a  drop  of 
solder,  and  also  attach  leaden  lug.  A  similar  leaden  lug 
must  be  attached  to  the  inner  coating  of  the  bottle.  Is'ow 
coat  the  scored  lead  with  red  lead  and  oil  of  vitrol  paste  ; 
allow  to  dry  in  a  warm  place.  When  quite  dry  the  cell  can 
be  filled  with  a  mixture  of  water,  4  parts ;  oil  of  vitrol,  1 
part  by  weight.  If  carefully  put  together,  this  all  is  ready 
to  receive  a  charge  at  once. — Jour.  Brit.  Asso. 


268  DEPARTMENT     E. 

511.  Rubber-dam  Holders. — The  small  clamps  sold  by 
clothiers  for  holding  neck  scarfs  to  the  shirt  front,  are  con- 
venient in  holding  folds  of  the  dam  out  of  the  way  of  the 
operator. — Dr.  H.  R.  I^Teeper,  in  Archives. 

512.  Annealing  Nerve  Broaches. — Anneal  nerve 
broaches  in  a  glass  tube. — G.  P.  Terry,  in  Ohio  Dental 
Journcd. 

513.  To  Renew  Cement  Powder. — The  powder  of 
"  osteo-plastics "  by  standing,  often  becomes  impaired  by 
absorbing  moisture.  To  remedy  this  it  should  be  heated 
over  a  sand  bath  in  a  porcelain  dish. — Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

514.  Proportions  of  Mercury  and  Alloy. — It  is  said 
on  good  authority  that  the  quantity  of  mercury  to  use  in 
amalgam  fillings  is  thirty  parts  of  mercury  to  one  hundred 
parts  of  amalgam.  The  less  tin  in  the  allo}^,  the  less  mer- 
cury will  be  required. — Items. 

515.  Smudging  of  Gold.— The  common  method  of 
annealing  gold  mats,  pellets,  or  cylinders,  by  holding  them 
over  or  in  the  flame  of  an  alcohol  lamp  or  Bunsen  gas  burner, 
is  a  practice  which,  while  ordinarily  successful,  is  liable  to 
occasion  defects  in  the  fillings. 

The  resulting  imperfections  are  not  always  observable 
in  flush-finished  fillings,  though  some  of  these  subsequently 
scale  at  marginal  points  on  their  surfaces ;  but  elaborate 
building  or  contour  work  not  infrequently  meets  with  most 
disappointing  disaster,  due  to  the  smudging  of  the  gold  by 
the  incomplete  combustion  of  the  flame  fuel.  Clearly  one  of 
the  most  important  preliminaries  to  a  gold  operation  should 
be  a  careful  scrutiny  of  the  annealing  flame,  to  be  sure  that 
there  is  not  a  trace  of  smoke  ;  that  the  combustion  is  perfect. 
The  wick  of  the  alcohol  lamp  is  usually  too  tight  in  its  tube, 
arid  not  loose  enough  in  its  assemblage  of  fibers  to  permit  a 
free  flow  of  the  fluid  fuel.  Of  course,  the  appearance  of  a 
single  glow-point  of  a  flber-end  of  the  wick  is  a  certain  sign 


USEFUL     11I^■T5.  269 

of  smoke,  and  should  at  once  be  remedied.  When  a  lower 
grade  than  95  per  cent  alcohol  is  used,  the  residual  fluid, 
after  a  few  hours  burning,  becomes  so  watery  as  to  lessen  com- 
bustion, and  cause  the  charring  of  the  wick- end.  The  sight 
of  a  blackened  wick-end  leaves  no  doubt  as  to  the  probable 
character  of  the  annealing,  and  the  operative  work  done  by 
the  use  of  that  lamp. 

The  illuminating  gas  of  diverse  cities  ditier  in  quality, 
and  even  in  the  same  city  varies  from  time  to  time  in  its 
heat  and  light-giving  properties;  therefore  the  ordinary 
Bunsen  burner  is  liable  to  vary  in  its  degree  of  combustion ; 
but  the  habit  of  closely  observing  the  flame  and  keeping  it 
regulated  to  the  blue  point  of  complete  combustion,  will  tend 
to  the  avoidance  of  the  risk  of  smudging,  the  main  thing 
being  to  be  sure  that  the  burner  is  a  good  one.  It  is  well  to 
keep  at  hand  a  piece  of  white  porcelain — for  instance,  a 
small  butter-plate — and  by  occasionally  holding  it  for  a 
minute  or  two  over  the  flame,  gain  an  assurance  of  the  entire 
absence  of  smoke.  * 

The  mica  method  of  annealing  is  preferable,  as  avoiding 
all  risk  of  a  smudge. — W.  S.  HoAve,  in  Ohio  Dental  Journal 

516.  Treatment  of  Syphilis  in  the  Mouth. — As  soon 
as  the  lesion  has  been  sufficiently  studied  and  observed,  and 
we  are  sure  that  it  is  a  syphilitic  sore,  we  are  justified  in  be- 
ginning the  treatment,  which  consists  especially  in  the  in- 
ternal administration  of  one  of  the  salts  of  mercury. 

Later  on,  on  the  decline  of  the  secondary  period,  when 
the  tertiary  symptoms  make  their  appearance,  the  internal 
administration  of  iodid  of  potassium  comes  in  play,  and 
it  is  really  remarkable  with  what  rapidity  some  of  these 
gummat-ous  tumors  melt  away  when  the  potassium  salt  is 
given.  In  rare  instances  the  iodid  alone  will  not  act,  but  in 
connection  with  small  doses  of  mercury  it  is  capable  of  work- 
ing wonders. 

Hence,  whenever,  after  having  removed  all  mechanical 
irritative  points,  we  find  that  an  ulcerative  lesion  of  the  buc- 
cal cavity  does  not  disappear,  we  must  administer  from  thirty 


270  DEPARTMENT     E. 

to  sixty  grains  of  iodid  of  potassium  in  twenty-four  hours, 
and  continue  its  daily  use  for  several  weeks.  After  a  week's 
treatment,  sometimes,  the  whole  lesion  is  changed,  indicating 
its  nature. 

The  mouth  must  always  be  kept  in  as  aseptic  a  con- 
dition as  possible,  by  the  use  of  antiseptic  mouth-washes, 
such  as  thymol,  boracic  acid,  chloral  solutions;  while  the 
lesions  may  be  touched  twice  a  day  with  the  following  prep- 
aration : 

R. — Salol. .    4  grams. 

Iviquid  vaselin 30  grams. 

M. — Sig.  For  external  use. 

As  to  the  prophylactic  measures  to  be  taken  they  are  of 
the  greatest  importance. 

If  the  father  or  mother  of  a  family  be  affected  by  this 
disease,  he  or  she  must  be  absolutely  forbidden  to  kiss  their 
children,  or  to  allow  any  one  to  use  anything  that  could  have 
come  in  contact  with  the  infected  mouth.  All  dental  instru- 
mentshaving  come  in  contact  with  syphilitic  patients  must 
be  placed  in  boiling  water  for  at  least  half  an  hour  before 
thej  are  again  used. 

We  must  also  be  careful  to  protect  our  fingers  with  a 
napkin,  moistened  with  a  strong  bichlorid  of  mercury  solu- 
tion, if  we  place  it  so  as  to  guard  the  mouth  against  the  slip- 
ping of  an  instrument. 

Again,  after  an  operation  on  a  syphilitic  patient,  the 
hands  must  be  washed  for  two  minutes  in  a  1-1000  bichlorid 
solution. — A.  C.  Hugenschmidt,  in  Cosmos. 

517.  To  Make  Twist  Drills. — Take  a  piece  of  fine 
piano  wire,  flatten  by  grinding  or  otherwise,  about  half  an 
inch  at  one  end.  Do  this  without  drawing  the  temper. 
Twist  the  flattened  end  to  the  left,  while  held  in  the  vise, 
with  a  pair  of  pliers.  You  will  have  as  nice  a  twist  drill  as 
you  can  wish  for  entering  the  smallest  canals.  If  carefully 
made  they  can  scarcely  be  broken  while  in  use,  and  can  be 
made  as  fine  and  small  as  desired. — D.  Y.  Beacock,  D.D.S., 
in  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  271 

518.  Treatment  of  Cystic  Tumor. — "A  cystic  tumor," 
says  Professor  Ingersoll,  "should  be  erupted  from  its  mucous 
contents  by  careful  puncture  at  the  lowest  point,  and  then 
collapsed  by  pressure.  This  can  usually  be  done  by  a  pad 
of  considerable  size  dipped  in  dry  tannin  and  held  firmly  on 
the  cyst  by  pressure  of  the  lips  or  cheek.  Mechanical  treat- 
ment," he  says,  "  should  be  confined  to  the  external  surface 
of  the  cyst,  and  consist  of  the  use  of  stimulants  and  as- 
tringents."— Items. 

519.  Painless  Clamp  Attachment. — Dr.  Albin  Len- 
hardtson,  in  the  Odontologisk  Tidskrlft,  recommends,  to  lessen 
the  pain  in  adjusting  the  clamp,  that  its  claws  be  covered 
with  a  piece  of  rubber  skin  of  corresponding  size.  In  this 
there  is  another  advantage — the  hold  on  the  tooth  being 
stronger  on  account  of  the  elasticity  of  the  rubber. — Items. 

520.  Coloring  Wax. — To  stain  beeswax  a  bright  trans- 
parent color,  melt  the  wax  and  add  either  armatto  or  tur- 
meric. The  addition  of  hard  paralfin  or  spermaceti  will 
harden  it. — Exchange. 

521.  Using  Corundum  Wheel  about  the  Mouth. — 
TThen  a  corundum  wheel  is  used  the  particles  are  forced  up 
under  the  gum ;  this  is  readily  removed  by  a  spraying 
apparatus.  I  use  a  spray  more  than  I  do  a  syringe.  TThen 
cleaning  the  teeth  of  tartar  some  pieces  will  get  loose  and 
lodge  under  the  gum  :  the  spray  effectually  removes  them. 
The  same  result  follows  the  use  of  pumice  refuse.  The 
patients  like  it.  Every  dentist  should  get  a  spraying  appa- 
ratus, and  he  will  never  be  without  it  afterward. — R.  Otto- 
lengui,  in  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

522.  Hint  on  Using  Disks. — A  celluloid  disk  placed 
at  the  back  of  any  sandpaper  disk  stiffens  it  materially  and 
is  a  great  improvement.  By  holding  a  smooth  burnisher  on 
the  smooth  polished  surface  of  the  celluloid  when  polishing 
a    gold  filling,  th^  disk  can  be   bent  and   pressed  in  any 


272  DEPARTMENT     E, 

uneven  surface  without  destroying  it,  thus  avoiding  the 
trouble  and  annoyance  of  changing  so  frequently.  A  cellu- 
loid disk  can  be  placed  between  two  sandpaper  disks,  back 
to  back,  and  used  to  advantage. — D.  V.  Beacock,  in  Items. 

523.  Home-made  Syringe. — Get  the  rubber  bulb  from 
an  ordinary  drop  tube,  and  fit  a  hyjDodermic  syringe  needle 
to  it  by  wrapping  a  strip  of  dam  on  the  hub  of  the  needle, 
or  by  slipping  several  thicknesses  of  rubber  tubing  over  the 
hub,  so  that  by  stretching  the  bulb  over  the  hub  with  the 
clamp  forceps  it  will  fit  entirely  air-tight.  It  is  a  very  ser- 
viceable device,  and  its  many  uses,  such  as  syringing  out 
canals,  carrying  medicaments  to  the  teeth,  etc.,  will  be 
readily  appreciated.  By  using  a  needle  with  a  large  bore,  a 
cleanly  oiler  for  the  engine  can  be  made. — Dr.  H.  R.  jSTeeper. 

52J:.  To  Make  Serviceable  Drills. — The  most  service- 
able drills  we  have  used  are  made  by  grinding  fissure  burs 
to  a  drill  point  of  the  desired  shape.  If  they  are  not  sufii- 
ciently  hard,  they  can  easily  be  tempered  harder.  They  are 
especially  useful  in  opening  proximal  cavities  through  the 
crown. — Dr.  H.  R.  ISTeeper,  in  Archives. 

525.  To  Make  Mouth  Mirrors. — Dr.  Joseph  E.  Waitt, 
^^Boston,  Mass.,  demonstrated  a  method  of  making  mouth- 
mirrors  by  which  the  cost  was  reduced  to  a  minimum.  It 
consisted  of  making  three  dies,  each  with  a  round  hole,  the 
first  for  shaping  and  the  others  for  finishing  the  l)acking  for 
the  mirror,  w^hich  backing  is  made  of  German  silver  and 
stamped  in  the  die  by  a  steel  mandrel.  The  mirrors  are  cut 
by  a  diamond  glass-cutting  machine,  and  cemented  in  the 
backing.  This  method  is  not  patented,  and  was  exhibited 
for  the  benefit  of  the  profession. —  Trans.  Mass.  Dent.  So. 

526.  Making  Rubber  Corundum  Disks.— Dr.  George 
A.  Maxfield,  Holyoke,  Mass.,  showed  an  ingenious  way  of 
making  hard  rubber  corundum  disks.  The  corundum  grit 
is  incorporated  with  the  rubber  by  being  passed  through  a 


USEFUL     HI^'TS.  273 

clothes-wringer  (the  quantity  of  the  mineral  used  influencing 
the  coarseness  of  the  disk),  and,  after  being  cut  to  the  required 
diameter  by  a  mandrel  for  the  purpose,  they  are  vulcanized, 
beins:  struns:  on  a  tine  wire,  the  diameter  of  the  engine  man- 
drel,  and  separated  from  each  other  by  a  small  circular  piece 
of  tin,  the  whole  encased  in  a  clamp  to  press  and  hold  them 
together.  A  great  many  can  be  made  at  one  time,  and  at  a 
cost  that  is  not  worth  mentioning. —  Trans.  3Iais.  Dent.  So. 

527.  To  Avoid  Infection. — A  physician  recommends 
the  placing  in  the  mouth  of  a  fragment  of  myrrh  if  one  tinds 
himself  in  an  infected  atmosphere ;  he  has  employed  this 
means  with  happy  results  in  several  epidemics.  'He  con- 
siders myrrh  as  a  specific  against  infection.  Physicians  in 
the  East  use  this  means  constantly  in  visiting  patients. — Ux. 

528.  To  Clean  Impression  Trays. — To  clean  and 
brighten  impression  trays  place  them  in  a  vessel  of  water,  to 
which  has  been  added  several  tablespoonsful  of  "  Pjde's 
Pearlin,"  and  boil  for  a  few  minutes.  AVhile  hot  rub  dry 
with  a  rough  towel,  and  the  trays  will  be  as  clean  and  bright 
as  when  new. — R.  B.  Foster,  in  Items.  . 

529.  Drip  Tray  for  Lathes. — Take  a  suitable  piece  of 
sheet  zinc,  make  a  small  tray  6  J  inches  long,  3  J  inches  wide, 
and  J  inch  deep.  When  constructing,  cut  slanting  in  the 
corners  of  the  zinc  so  that  when  the  ends  are  bent  up  and 
soldered,  they  will  lean  foward  about  20^.  Xow  solder 
another  piece  of  zinc  across  the  tray  about  ^^  inch  in  front 
of  and  parallel  to  the  posterior  end.  Take  a  piece  of  glass 
7  inches  long  and  of  proper  width  to  tit  in  the  space  be- 
tween the  double  end,  place  in  position  and  the  tray  is  com- 
plete. The  glass  stands  at  an  angle  of  20°  forward,  so  that 
when  the  tray  is  placed  under  the  lathe-wheels,  brushes,  etc., 
the  glass  catches  all  of  the  drip,  and  yet  does  not  shut  off  the 
lio;ht.  The  trav  beins:  of  zinc  does  not  rust  out. — G.  H. 
"Wilson,  in  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 


274  DEPARTMENT    E. 

530,  Sterilization  of  Instruments  and  Cleansing 
Hands.^ — Before  beginning  my  work  in  the  morning,  I 
cleanse  my  nails,  which  are  not  allowed  to  become  over  a 
m.m.  long,  with  a  pen-knife,  and  then  brush  the  hands, 
giving,  of  course,  particular  attention  to  the  nails,  for  two 
minutes  with  a  rather  stiff  brush,  in  a  warm  one  to  two  per 
cent  solution  of  lysol.  Lysol  is  quite  equal,  if  not  slightly 
superior,  to  carbolic  acid  as  an  antiseptic,  and  is  far  less 
escharotic.  It  makes  a  soapy  solution,  and  cleanses  the  hands 
beautifully  even  without  soap,  though  I  usually  add  soap  as 
a  matter  of  habit,  as  well  as  to  make  the  cleansing  doubly 
sure.  The  hands  are  then  rinsed  in  hydrant  water  and  thor- 
oughly dried.  The  whole  operation  requires  about  four  min- 
utes. The  hands  are  perfectly  clean,  but,  of  course,  not 
absolutely  free  from  germs.  If  the  fingers  are  rough  or 
cracked,  or  the  nails  long,  double  the  time  will  be  requisite 
to  accomplish  the  same  end.  A  slight  odor  of  lysol  clings 
to  the  fino^cr=5.  but  I  have  not  found  it  disag-reeable  to  the 
patients ;  on  the  contrary,  they  are  glad  to  be  reminded  of 
the  fact  that  the  dentist  takes  proper  care  of  his  hands. 

Between  operations  or  consultations  I  wash  the  hands 
in  soap  water,  brushiug  the  nails  and  fingers  from  one-half  a 
minute  to  a  minute. 

If,  however,  I  have  performed  an  operation  on  a  filthy 
mouth,  I  return  to  the  lysol  solution,  even  increasing  its 
strength  according  to  indications  to  two  and  one-half,  three, 
and  even  four  per  cent.  I  have  found  that  a  four  or  five  per 
cent  solution  of  carbolic  acid,  lysol,  or  trichlorphenol  suffices 
to  completely  sterilize  mechanically  clean  instruments  in 
thirty  minutes. 

I  keep  two  complete  sets  of  instruments  constantly  in 
use,  and  as  soon  as  I  have  finished  operating  for  one  patient, 
the  whole  set  of  instruments  used  is  removed  from  the 
operating  table  and  placed  in  the  antiseptic  solution,  where 
it  is  allowed  to  remain  while  the  other  set  is  in  use,  or  at 
least  half  an  hour.  Since  about  four  weeks  I  have  substi- 
tuted lysol  for  carbolic  acid.  All  instruments,  including 
-^iorundum  disks,  files  and  clamps,  are  subjected  to  this  treat- 


USEFUL     HINTS.  275 

ment,  whereas,  those  instruments  which  do  not  come  in 
contact  with  the  mucous  membrane,  or  do  not  become  soiled 
in  the  mouth  (gold-pluggers,  etc.),  are  only  occasionally 
sterilized. 

Mouth-mirrors  require  extra  care,  and  must  be  carefully 
brushed  before  treating  with  the  lysol  solution,  in  order  to 
remove  small  particles  of  infectious  matter  which  may  have 
inserted  themselves  between  the  glass  and  the  fastening.  I 
keep  so  many  mirrors  on  hand  that  I  do  not  require  to  use 
any  one  twice  the  same  day.  There  is  consequently  no  time 
lost  between  patients  in  cleansing  mirrors. 

To  be  able  to  place  before  every  patient  a  glass  which 
at  least  does  not  carry  any  germs  from  the  mouth  of  a  pre- 
vious patient,  I  have  provided  as  many  glasses  as  I  have 
patients  in  a  day.  These  are  all  placed  in  a  three  per  cent 
solution  of  lysol  in  the  evening,  and  remain  there  for  over 
twelve  hours.  They  are  then  thoroughly  rinsed  in  hj^drant 
water. — W.  D.  Miller,  in  Cosmos. 


531.  Suggestions  on  Storage  Batteries. — Locate  your 
battery  in  a  convenient  and  sufficient  light,  place  so  as  to  be 
easy  of  access  and  inspection.  Look  at  it  every  day,  and 
always  before  commencing  to  charge  ;  see  that  the  active 
material  in  the  plates  does  not  fall  out  and  accumulate  at 
the  bottom  of  the  cells  so  as  to  touch  the  plates ;  this  would 
cause  a  short  circuit  and  injure  the  plates,  also  diminish  the 
power  of  cells.  Use  well-insulated  copper  wire  of  not  less 
than  In'o.  15  B  &  S  gage,  and  E"o.  12,  especially  if  the 
battery  is  located  more  than  twelve  or  fifteen  feet  away  from 
your  appliances  at  the  chair;  the  reason  for  this  is  that  the 
quantity  of  your  current  should  not  be  wasted  in  traversing 
an  unnecessary  length  of  wire,  or  the  force  or  voltage  of  the 
current  reduced  by  the  high  resistance  of  small  wire  external 
to  the  magnet  coils  of  your  motor  or  mallet ;  this  loss  is 
reduced  toward  the  minimum  just  in  proportion  to  the  in- 
crease in  size  of  the  conducting  wires  leading  from  the  bat- 
tery to  the  motor. — W.  W.  Vance,  in  Ex.  Review. 


276  DEPARTMENT    E. 

532.  Fusible  Metals. — 

I<ead.  Tin.                                 Bismuth                                        Melts  at 

I  part I  part i  part 250° 

I     ''     I     "     2  parts 20° 

10  parts  16  parts 8  "  300° 

16  "  14  "  8  "  280° 

I  part I  part 2     "    add  a  little  mercury.  112° 

— J.  E.  Davis,  in  Items. 

533.  Watt's  Metal  for  Cast  Dentures. — Tin,  40  dwt. ; 
silver,  8  dwt. ;  bismuth,  16  grains. — J.  E.  Davis,  in  Items. 

534.  Cause  of  Rubber  Sore  Mouth. — Many  reasons 
have  been  given  for  the  disease  called  rubber  disease.  Some 
think  that  the  vermilion  in  the  plate  is  poisonous ;  some 
claim  to  prove  that  free  mercury  exists  in  the  plate  ;  some 
that  the  closeness  of  the  fit  causes  a  mechanical  damming 
up  of  the  follicles,  and  still  others  hold  that  it  is  none  of 
these,  but  that  the  rubber  being  a  non-conductor,  the  heat 
of  the  tissues  is,  so  to  speak,  penned  up,  causing  irritation. 

I  have  but  one  opinion  about  it.     It  is  that  the  porous 
condition  of  the  rubber  plate,  for  all,  even  the  best  of  them, 
are  variably  less  porous,  affords  a  lodging-place  for  germs 
which  irritate  the  tissues.     It  has  been  well  said  that  prob- 
ably no  culture  field   is  better  fitted   for  the  development 
of  germs  than  a  rubber  plate ;  and  of  all  the  dirty  things  I 
have  ever  seen  about  the  mouth  an  unclean  rubber  plate  is 
the  foulest.     And  it  is  remarkable  with  what  perfect  inno- 
cence the  plate  is  handed  to  the  dentist  for  repairs,  with 
sufficient  food  clinsfino;  to  it  to  afibrd  materials  for  a  naked- 
eyed  analysis  of  what  was  had  for  breakfast  and  possibly 
for  days  past.     I  am  sure  that  in  some  cases  no  part  of  the 
plate  was  in  contact  with  the  mucous  membrane.     Only  food. 
Foul,  fermenting,  filthy,  the  w^hole   thing  is  superlatively 
dirty.     Even  in  the  mouths  of  the  most  careful  and  fasti- 
dious patients  the  rubber  plate  cannot  be  kept  clean.     This 
condition  of  affairs  is  simply  impossible  with  a  gold  plate. 
It  is  only  possible  w^here  a  surface,  such  as  a  rubber  plate  has, 
presents  places  for  attachment  for  pasty  food,  mucus,  etc. 


USEFUL     HINTS. 


277 


I  honestly  think  that  the  so-called  rubber  disease 
disease  mainly  of  dirt,  and  that  in  so  far  as  we  get  rid  of 
occasion  the  disease  will  vanish. — J.  B. 
Hodgkin,  in  Items. 

535.  Light  Yellow  Tartar. — Light- 
ish yellow-black  tartar  is  deposited  at  the 
gum  margin,  especially  on  the  exterior 
next  the  cheeks.  The  tartar  disposes  to 
caries  the  points  where  it  is  deposited.  It 
is  not  the  tartar  in  Ihe  true  acceptation 
of  the  word,  but  an  infectious  deposit,  a 
fermentous  medium,  with  permanent  acid 
reaction  (Viat).  Green  tartar  which,  con- 
trary to  the  other  kinds  of  tartar  deposits, 
does  not  come  from  the  salivary  glands, 
but  is  produced  by  a  parasite  from  the 
exterior — the  Leptothrix  buccalis. — 
Robin,  in  Ohio  Dental  Journal. 

536.  Bands  and  Matrices. 
— The  simpliest  and  best  matrix 
or  band  I  know  of  is  made  from 
thin  stencil  cutters  German  sil- 
ver, it  can  be  obtained  from 
dealers  in  stamp  makers'  sup- 
plies at  a  trifling  cost.  Cut 
from  the  sheet  a  piece  the  size 
and  shape  required,  place  it 
around  the  tooth,  draw  it  tightly 


IS  a 
the 


together,  and  hold  firmly  with  a  pair  of  jSTo.  6  separating  for- 
ceps, give  it  a  bend  as  in  Fig.  C,  remove  the  forceps  and  bend 


278  DEPARTMENT    E. 

again  as  in  Fig.  D.  If  it  is  necessary  to  leave  the  band  on  from 
one  sitting  to  another,  this  projecting  end  (Fig.  D)  can  be  bent 
down  on  the  band,  and  secured  by  a  piece  of  floss  silk  tied 
aronnd  the  tooth.  The  Wilmington  Dental  M'f 'g  Co.  have 
recently  introduced  a  pair  of  plier,  invented  by  Dr.  C.  E. 
Esterly,  designed  especially  for  fastening  matrix  bands  (see 
Figs.  B  and  E),  and  they  should  be  on  every  operator's  table.  — 
Wm.  H.  Steele. 

537.  Origin  of  Pus. — Inflammation  is  a  disturbance  of 
nutrition  of  a  tissue,  causing  recurrence  to  the  embryonal 
condition  of  the  tissue  involved. 

The  embryonal  condition  is  established  by  the  breaking 
up  of  the  tissues  in  those  medullary  or  indifierent  corpus- 
cles, which,  at  an  early  stage  of  normal  development,  have 
built  up  the  tissue. 

The  medullary  corpuscles  arise,  not  only  from  the  pro- 
toplasmic bodies  of  the  tissue,  the  so-called  cells,  but  also 
from  the  intercellular  or  basis  substance,  as  these  shared  in 
the  formation  of  the  basis  substance  and  must  in  its  solu- 
tion. 

The  medullary,  or  indifi:erent  corpuscles,  will  represent 
a  tissue  so  long  as  they  remain  interconnected  and  continu- 
ous. By  a  simple  reappearance  of  basis  substance,  the  most 
favorable  termination  is  established — resolution. 

If  the  inflammatory  or  medullary  corpuscles  have 
largely  augmented,  a  number  thereby  remaining  in  original 
connection,  the  result  will  be  productive — hypp^plasia. 

If  the  inflammatory  corpuscles  spring  from  previous 
"  cells,"  basis  substance  and  blood-vessels  break  asunder,  be- 
come isolated  and  suspended  in  an  albuminous  liquid,  and 
henceforth  represent  pus  corpuscles. 

Pus,  therefore,  is  a  destroyed  tissue,  broken  up  in  its 
constituent  elements,  and  as  such,  unfit  for  the  production 
of  new  tissue ;  though  the  single  pus  corpuscles  will  remain 
alive  and  ameboid  almost  indefinitely,  so  long  as  they  are 
sufficiently  nourished. — Dr.  W.  H.  Atkinson,  in  Am.  Den. 
Asso. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  279 

538.     Combinations  of  Metals  With  Mercury. — 

Silver  forms  definite  crystalline  chemical  compounds 
with  mercnry. 

Tin  unites  with  mercury  in  atomic  proportions,  form- 
ing a  weak  crystalling  compound.     (Kirk.) 

Copper  does  not  form  definite  compounds  with  mer- 
cury :  but  in  the  form  of  crystals  is  dissolved  by  it  in  vary- 
ing proportions. 

Gold  is  dissolved  by  inereury  in  all  proportions  ;  but 
does  not  form  a  definite  atomic  compound. 

Zinc  unites  with  mercury  in  atomic  proportions. 

Platinum  only  unites  with  mercury  when  reduced  to  a 
spongy  condition, 

^Palladium.— The  union  with  mercury  is  probably  chem- 
ical.—T.  E.  Weeks,  D.D.S. 


539.     Affinity  of  Metals.— 

Mercury  dissolves  all  metals  but  iron. 

Silver  has  affinity  for  platinum. 

Tin  has  affinity  for  gold  and  platinum. 

Copper  unites  with  zinc  in  all  proportions ;  and  in  some 
proportions  forms  definite  compounds. 

Gold  unites  with  silver  in  any  proportion  ;  and  is  ren- 
dered very  brittle  by  the  least  trace  of  antimony,  palladium 
or  lead. 

Zinc  unites  in  all  proportions  with  gold  and  tin  ;  forms 
chemical  compounds  with  platinum. 

Platinum  unites  in  definite  proportions  with  silver  and 
cadmium— T.  E.  Weeks,  D.D.S. 


540.  Disk  Lubricator.— Put  a  little  petroleum  jelly  on 
the  coarse  polishing  or  dressing  disks  and  they  will  not  heat 
the  tooth ;  but,  will  catch  the  particles  of  gold  that  would 
otherwise  be  lost.  It  softens  the  disks,  making  them  more 
pliable  for  reaching  out  of  way  places  ;  while  they  cut  just  a& 
well  as  when  drv. — A.  Secor. 


280  DEPARTMENT     E. 

541.     Properties  Imparted  to  Alloys  by  Metals. — 

Mercury,  being  the  controlling  metal,  imparts' its  spher- 
ical tendency  to  the  amalgamated  mass ;  specially  in  those 
alloys  which  are  "  solution,"  or  "  mechanical  mixtures." 
This  tendency  is  greater  with  those  metals  having  a  low 
fusing  point,  cooling  slowl}*,  and  when  amalgamated  settling 
slowly,  as  tin  ;  and  less  with  those  which  melt  at  a  higher 
temperature,  cool  quickly,  and  set  quickly  when  amalga- 
mated ;  as  silver  and  copper, 

Silver  controls  hardening  or  setting,  because  of  its  crys- 
tallin  form  and  chemical  affinity  for  mercury.  It  main- 
tains the  bulk  integrity  of  the  filling,  and  should  be  the 
largest  component  of  an  alloy.  The  silver  sulphide  formed 
by  the  action  of  sulphuretted  hydrogen  is  supposed  to  have 
prophylactic  action  against  decay. 

Tin  should  be  next  in  quantity,  because  it  increases 
plasticity,  prevents  discoloration,  and  reduces  conductivity. 
It  also  retards  setting,  reduces  edge  strength,  and  favors 
spheroiding;  hence  should  not  be  used  in  such  proportions 
as  to  become  the  controlling  metal. 

Copper  diminishes  shrinkage,  hastens  setting,  and  adds 
to  the  present  and  possibly  to  the  permanent  whiteness  of 
the  filling.  It  is  also  supposed  to  have  greater  compatibil- 
ity with  tooth  substance  and  pulp  tissue  than  other  metals, 
and  has  been  shown  to  have  antiseptic  action. 

Gold  lessens  shrinkage,  resists  corrosion,  increases  edge 
strength,  increases  smoothness  and  plasticity,  and  hastens 
setting  ;  all  these  to  a  greater  degree  in  small  quantities  than 
any  other  metal,  5  per  cent  to  7  per  cent  being  all  that  is 
advantageous  to  use. 

Zi7ic  controls  shrinkage,  hastens  setting,  improves  color, 
and  imparts  a  peculiar  smoothness  in  mixing. 

Platinum. — Authorities  differ  in  regard  to  the  influence 
of  this  metal ;  some  claiming  that  it  increases  setting,  hard- 
ness, stability,  and  improves  color ;  while  others  contend 
that  it  imparts  no  properties  which  cannot  be  obtained  by  a 
judicious  combination  of  other  metals ;  which  seems  to  be 
true. 


USEFUL     HINTS.  281 

Cadmium  having  been  proven  to  be  dangerous  to  pulp 
vitality,  should  never  be  used. 

Antimony  blackens  so  badly  that  the  properties  of  con- 
trolling shrinkage  and  increasing  plasticity  which  it  imparts, 
*do  not  seem  to  be  of  sufficient  advantage  to  "warrant  its  em- 
ployment. 

Palladium  does  not  improve  alloys,  but  amalgamated 
alone  with  mercury,  furnishes  an  amalgam  which  does  not 
shrink  or  discolor,  but  its  expense  hinders  its  universal  use. 

It  is  an  open  question,  whether  freedom  from  discolora- 
tion is  a  desirable  attribute ;  it  is  certainly  true  that  cavity 
surfaces  under  leaky  fillings,  which  have  become  coated  with 
a  black  oxid  or  sulphide,  have  remained  free  from  decay  for 
years.  We  hold  that  unsightliness  is  the  principal  objection, 
unless  such  chemical  compounds  are  formed  as  to  cause 
wasting  of  the  filling  or  be  detrimental  to  the  health  of  the 
patient.— T.  E.  Weeks,  D.D.S. 

542.  To  Prevent  Blood  Adhering  to  Cuspidor. — After 
cleaning  and  drying  cuspidor,  I  wipe  with  an  oiled  rag,  this 
leaves  an  oiled  surface.  Blood  and  saliva  immediately 
descend,  leaving  no  trace. — G.  Charles  Bowles,  in  Items. 

543.  Cheap  Rubber. — This  is  a  question  that  has  at- 
tracted a  great  deal  of  attention  of  late,  from  the  fact  that 
certain  manufacturers  and  dealers  have  given  out  claims  ; 
that  they  offer  a  low  price  rubber  that  is  as  good  as  any  in 
the  market.  This  statement  is  misleading,  for  the  reason 
that  all  cheap  rubbers  contain  a  large  amount  of  adultera- 
tion with  heavy  matter,  than  does  the  better  grades.  The 
cheap  adulterants  employed  in  the  transformation  of  pure 
Para  gum,  two  grades  of  rubber  can  be  made;  which  varj^ 
in  value,  directly  in  proportion  to  the  amount  of  foreign 
matter  introduced  in  the  fibers  of  the  gum ;  it  will  be 
readily  seen,  that  if  the  manufacturer  of  the  rubber,  makes 
his  charges  in  proportion  to  the  cost  of  manufacturing  his 
product,  there  is  proximately  no  difference  in  the  price  of 
the  rubber;  for  the  reason  that  the  better  grade  will  cover 


282  DEPARTMENT     E. 

more  space,  and  consequently  make  a  large  number  of  plates. 
For  example,  take  a  square  foot  of  the  best  rubber  that  can 
be  had,  and  an  equal  area  of  the  poorest  grade  and  weigh 
them  ;  it  will  be  found  that  the  cheap  grade  will  weigh 
from  fifteen  to  twenty  per  cent  more  than  the  better  grade  ; 
which,  figured  out,  will  probably  be  about  the  difi^erence  in 
price.  And  this  is  not  all,  while  poor  rubber  costs  as  much 
for  the  surface  covered  as  does  the  higher  grades  ;  it  is  much 
more  liable  to  break  the  blocks  and  teeth  in  vulcanizing, 
will  not  take  or  retain  as  fine  a  polish,  is  heavier,  does  not 
make  as  strong  a  plate,  is  far  more  injurious,  and  less  durable. 
— Wm.  H.  Steele,  Extract  of  Paper  read  at  Iowa  State  Dental 
Society,  Omaha,  1894. 

544.  Composition  of  Human  Teeth. 

Cementum.  Dentine.  Enamel. 

Organic 29.27 28.70 3.59 

Inorganic 7073 7i-30  96.41 

The  inorganic  portion  divides  up  as  follows : 

Dentine.  Enamel. 

Phos.  cal 66.72 89.82 

Carbon,  cal 3.36 4.37 

Phos.  Mag 1.08. 1.34 

Salts,  etc 83 88 

Organic 28.0  c 3.59 

100.00  100.00 

The  totals  of  the  first  table  give  238.44  parts  of  inor- 
ganic, as  against  61.56  organic — a  proportion  of  four  of  in- 
organic to  one  of  organic  in  these  portions  of  the  tooth. 
The  composition  of  the  enamel,  the  most  important  part  of 
the  tooth,  because  most  exposed,  and  least  likely  to  repair, 
shows  a  very  great  preponderence  of  the  inorganic :  96.41 
inorganic  to  3.59  organic ;  which  last,  some  writers  even 
question  as  organized  organic  matter. —  Van  Bibra's  Dental 
Register. 

545.  Treatment  in  Odontiasis — It  is  during  the  erup- 
tion of  the  temporary  teeth  one  observes  troubles  of  a  diverse 
nature,  such  as  salivation,  redness  (blushing),  heat,  and  swell- 


USEFUL     HINTS.  283 

ing  of  the  gums,  apbthe,  ulcerations,  slight  cough,  diarrhea, 
convulsions,  fever  with  agitation,  etc.  Then  interfere,  and 
make,  if  there  is  reason,  an  opening  for  the  eruption  of  the 
teeth.  When  there  is  fever,  give  a  solution  of  bi-carbonate 
of  potash,  combined  with  a  little  citric  acid,  to  which  add 
some  drops  of  tincture  of  henbane,  in  case  of  agitation. — 
Dr.  Macario,  in  Nice  Medical. 

546.  Solubility  in  Metals. — 

Mercury. — -Soluble  in  dilute  nitric,  and  hot  sulfuric  acid. 

Silver— h\  nitric,  and  hot,  strong  sulfuric  acid. 

Copper — In  hot  mineral  acids  ;  slowly  attacked  in  air 
and  moisture  by  vegetable  acids,  alkalies,  and  saline  solutions. 

Gold — In  aqua  regia ;  not  affected  by  single  acids  or 
alkalies. 

Zinc — In  dilute  acids,  and  solutions  of  the  alkaline 
hydrates. 

Platinum  is  dissolved  slowly  in  aqua  regia.  —  T.  E. 
Weeks,  D.D.S. 

547.  Oxidation  of  Metals. — 

Mercury — JSTot  affected  by  air  or  moisture. 

Silver — Xot  acted  on  by  air  or  water ;  but  readily  by 
sulfuretted  hydrogen. 

Tin  oxidizes  very  slowly. 

Copper — In  moist  air  becomes  coated  with  a  green  car- 
bonate;  is  tarnished  by  sulfuretted  hydrogen. 

Gold — Unaffected  by  air,  water  or  sulfur. 

Zinc  tarnishes  slowly  ;  is  coated  with  carbonate  in  moist 


air. 


gen. 


Platinum — Unaffected  by  air  or  water. 

Cadmium  tarnishes  slowly  in  air  and  sulfuretted  hydro- 


Antimony  oxidizes  badly  when  amalgamated. 
Palladium  does  not  oxidize  easilj^  but  is  acted  on  by 
iodin.— T.  E.  Weeks,  D.D.S. 

648.     Screw  vs.  Rubber  for  Regulating. — I  had  one  of 
those  very  trying  cases  this  summer  where  a  bicuspid  erupted 


284  DEPARTMENT     E. 

without  the  arch.  There  was  room  enough  for  its  reduction 
by  u  slight  change  of  the  other  teeth,  and  after  a  space  was 
made  it  was  merel}^  required  to  have  an  instrument  to  bring 
it  in  place.  Nature  may  have  accomplished  this  unassisted, 
but  it  had  remained  in  that  crowded  position  for  a  year  and 
a  half,  and,  therefore,  it  seemed  advisable  to  force  it-  in 
position.  I  made  a  plate,  putting  two  hooks  on  it,  and  threw 
an  elastic  band  around  the  tooth,  and  brought  it  in  position 
in  one  week.  Now,  what  was  the  harm  in  taking  my  elastic 
band,  instead  of  working  with  a  screw  ?  Every  one  who 
makes  a  practice  of  using  springs  or  screws  instead  of  rubber 
will  admit,  when  he  looks  over  his  cases,  that  it  takes,  it 
may  be,  live  months  to  do  that  which  can  be  done  by  con- 
tinuous pressure  in  half  the  time.  What  may  be  lost  by 
possible  danger  to  the  tooth  by  moving  it  rapidly  is  more 
than  counterbalanced  by  the  comfort  of  the  patient,  and  in 
causing  the  appliance  to  be  worn  not  more  than  half  the 
usual  time.  I  think  the  nerves  of  the  patient  are  to  be  con- 
sidered as  much  as  anything  else.  Where  you  can  get  two 
molars  with  anything  like  a  knuckle  on  them,  make  a  rub- 
ber wedge  and  fit  that  clasp  to  go  to  that  point  and  keep 
them  wedged  till  the  appliance  is  placed,  and  as  soon  as  it  is 
pressed  down  you  have  a  point  that  prevents  that  clasp  from 
riding  up.  You  can  alwaj^s  force  it  up,  because  half-round 
wire  is  alwaj^s  wedged-shaped,  and  it  won't  slip. — Dr.  Otto- 
lengui,  in  Items. 

549.  Sunlight  Injures  Instruments. — 

Fine  edged  tools  assume  a  blue  color  and  lose  all  temper 
if  exposed  for  any  considerable  length  of  time  to  the  light  of 
the  sun,  either  in  summer  or  winter. — Exchange. 

550.  Hard  Rubber  Corundum  Disks. — The  most  diffi- 
cult part  is  the  combining  the  caoutchouc  and  corundum  or 
emery.  Taking  a  sheet  of  black  rubber,  such  as  we  use  for 
making  plates,  it  is  softened  over  a  water  bath,  not  by  dip- 
ping in  hot  water.  When  softened,  one  side  is  covered  with 
the  emery  (No.  90  if  for  cutting,  No.  100  or  120  for  polish- 


USEFUL     HINTS;  285 

ing),  then  folded  over  on  itself  and  passed  through  a  pair 
of  rollers  [a  common  clothes-wringer  answers  the  purpose 
well],  and  this  repeated  till  a  proper  quantity  of  emery  is 
worked  in  the  rubber.  Use  four  parts  of  emery  or  corun- 
dum to  one  part  of  rubber,  by  weight.  The  combination 
of  the  rubber  and  emery  is  not  a  chemical,  but  simply  a 
mechanical  one. 

After  the  corundum  and  rubber  are  properly  combined, 
laying  the  rubber  on  a  glass  slab,  and  with  a  roller  made  by 
filling  a  bottle  with  boiling  water,  roll  it  to  the  thickness 
necessary  for  disks  and  wheels,*  and  with  the  same  cutters 
used  for  cutting  sandpaper  disks,  cut  out  the  disks  or  wheels. 
From  scraps  from  the  tin  shop  may  be  cut  disks  of  tin 
plate  somewhat  larger,  and  stringing  the  corundum-rubber 
disks  and  tin  plates  alternately  on  a  wire  the  size  of  the 
screw  of  the  mandrel  used  in  the  engine,  clamp  them 
together.  For  this  purpose  use  two  square  pieces  of  brass 
plate  about  one-eighth  inch  in  thickness,  with  four  holes  in 
each  for  as  many  bolts,  and  screw  them  only  tight  enough 
to  make  a  pressure.  They  are  now  ready  for  the  vulcanizer, 
and  are  vulcanized  the  same  as  a  dental  plate.  As  soon  as 
removed  from  the  vulcanizer,  drawing  out  the  wire,  as  it 
is  more  easily  removed  when  hot,  cool  as  rapidly  as  you  wish, 
and  when  cold  there  is  no  trouble  in  separating  the  disks. 

If  hubs  on  the  disks  are  desired,  take  a  number  of  pieces 
of  brass  plate,  say  about  three-sixteenths  inch  thick,  drill 
the  hole  for  the  wire,  and  countersink  each  side  the  size 
you  wish  the  hub.  By  countersinking  both  sides  you  will 
need  only  half  as  many  brass  pieces,  as  the  tin  plate  can  be 
used  on  the  flat  sides  of  the  disks.  To  prevent  them  adher- 
ing to  the  brass,  place  a  piece  of  tin-foil  between  the  disk 
and  brass.  After  the  disks  and  wheels  are  vulcanized,  true 
them  up  by  placing  them  on  the  mandrel  in  the  engine,  and 
while  running  it,  warm  the  edge  of  the  disk  in  a  flame  of 
gas  or  alcohol  till  it  softens,  then  run  it  against  a  piece  of 
glass  or  porcelain.     To  make  the  stub-wheels  roll  thicker 

*  To  prevent  coruadum-rubber  adhering  to  the  roller,  dnst  a  little  of 
the  corundum  or  emery  over  the  surface. 


286  DEPARTMENT     E. 

than  the  disks.  Disks  and  wheels  of  different  thickness  can 
be  vulcanized  at  the  same  time,  but  to  vulcanizfe 
disks  or  wheels  of  different  diameters  it  will  be 
necessary  to  use  heavier  plates  between  them. 
Large  wheels  for  laboratory  use  can  be  made  in  the 
same  way  as  small  ones. 

Disks  and  wheels  for  polishing  fillings  and 
teeth  can  also  be  made  from  vulcanite  or  soft  rubber, 
and  as  the  rubber  for  dental  plates  becomes  hard 
rubber  when  vulcanized,  it  will  be  necessary  to 
have  a  special  rubber,  one  containing  less  sulfur,  for 
this  purpose,  as  the  amount  of  sulfur  added  to  the 
caoutchouc,  and  the  length  of  time  vulcanized,  con- 
stitute the  difference  after  vulcanization,  between 
hard  rubber  and  vulcanite  or  soft  rubber. — 
George  A.  Maxfield,  D.D.S.,  in  Dental  Office  and 
Laboratory. 

551.  To  Prevent  Sulfurous  Smell  in  Vul- 
canizing.— Half  grain  of  coffee,  either  steeped  or 
fresh,  in  the  vulcanizer,  destroys  the  sulfurous  smell 
so  disagreeable,  if  there  is  a  slight  leak  where  the 
operating-room  and  laboratory  communicate.  Coffee 
grounds  burned  in  the  laboratory  are  a  good  de- 
odorent  in  case  of  necessity. — Off.  and  Lah. 

552.  Home-made  Canal  Drier. — Take  a  piece 
of  small  insulated  copper  electric  bell  wire,  and  dress 
own  to  a  taper  see  cut  (1).  Get  a  piece  of  large  cop- 
per rod,  and  turn  down  to  shape  of  2,  bore  a  hole 

ll„l||   through,  and  hard  solder  to  place ;  for  handles  use  the 
''■   ordinary  ten-cent  broach  holders. — Wm.  H.  Steele. 


INDEX. 


Abscess,  Evacuator 

Hunter, 

"       New  Treatment  for 

Jennings, 

"       Injecting  Alveolar 

Cosmos, 

"       Grouse  Method  of  Treating 

Items, 

Acid,  Phenyl  Acetic 

Den.  Rev., 

"     Cinnamic 

a         a 

"     On  the  Clothes 

Steele, 

"     Glacial  Phosphoric 

Shattuck, 

"     Nitro-Muriatic 

i( 

"    Phosphate,  Bad  for  Teeth 

Head, 

Aceto  Tartrate  of  Aluminum 

Bethd, 

Acid,  Acetic 

Items, 

"     To  Increase  Solubility  of  Salicylic 

Ohio  Journ., 

"    Trichloracetic  for  Canker 

Dunn, 

"     Salicylic  for  Eoot  Dressing 

Exchange, 

Air  Chambers,  Uselessness  of 

Stephen, 

Aluminum,  Burnishing 

Hasktns, 

"          Plates  for  Kegulating  Cast, 

Ohio  Jour., 

Alloy,  A  New  Fusible 

Steele, 

Aluminum  Wire 

Exchange, 

Alloy,  Dorrance's 

Ohio  Journ., 

Alloys,  Properties  Imparted  to,  by  Metals 

Weeks, 

Alumnol 

Bethel, 

Aluminum  Hints 

Steele, 

Amalgam,  Burnishing  in 

Wilcox, 

"         Contouring  with 

West, 

"         Finisher 

Off.  and  Lab., 

"         That  will  not  Shrink,  etc. 

Steele, 

"         Eefining  Waste 

Rockwood, 

"         Starting  in  DiflScult  Cavities 

Off.  and  Lab., 

Packing  in  Frail  Teeth 

Jennings, 

Amalgo-Gold  Fillings 

Clapp, 

Amalgam,  Silk  for  Squeezing  Mercury  from 

Ohio  Journ., 

Anesthetic,  Phenate  of  Cocain,  Local 

Atkinson, 

Antiseptic,  Adhesive  Pomade 

Seien.  Am., 

Anesthetic,  The  Best  Local 

Johnson, 

Antiseptic,  Bath  for  Instruments 

Harlan, 

287 

A 

34 

A 

48 

A 

66 

A 

83 

D 

419 

D 

421 

E 

466 

D 

387 

D 

379 

D 

346 

D 

347 

D 

352 

D 

309 

D 

319 

D 

374 

B 

253 

B 

154 

E 

439 

E 

.453 

E 

469 

E 

487 

E 

541 

D 

371 

B 

222 

B 

240 

A 

29 

A 

56 

A 

67 

E 

470 

B 

2U0 

A 

89 

A 

103 

A 

14 

D 

391 

D 

340 

D 

350 

D 

351 

INDEX. 


Anesthetic,  Local  for  Small  Operations 
Antiseptic  Varnish 

"        Black's,  1,  2,  3 
Antiseptics,  Detective 
Anodyne,  A  Good 
Antiseptic  Spray 
Articulation,  Three  Rules  for 
Artificial  Teeth,  Enlarging  Holes  in 
Articulating  Paper,  To  Make 

"  Paste 

Articulation,  To  Obtain  a  Correct 
Artificial  Teeth,  Clicking  of 
Aristol  Aromatic-Chloro  for  Dead  Teeth 
Articulating  Hint  on 

"  Artificial  Teeth 

Artificial  Teeth,  To  Gild 
Band,  a  New  Crown 
Bands,  Rapid  Fitting  of  Crown 
Base,  Formula  for  Metal 
Battery,  Use  of  the  Storage 
Battery  Cells,  Coupling  of 
Batteries,  Suggestions  on  Storage 
Backing  and  Soldering 
Bands  and  Matrices 
Batteries,  To  Make  Cells  for  Storage 
Bicuspids,  Repairing  with  Porcelain 
Bites,  Watt's  Metal  Cusps  for  Short 
Bleaching  Teeth,  Sodium  Peroxid  for 
Blow-Pipe  Flames 
BlowPipe,  Use  of  the 
Borax,  To  Prevent  Frothing 
Bracket  Table,  Celluloid  Top 
Bridge,  For  Close  Bite 
Bridges,  Narrow 
Bridge,  Removable 
Bridges,  Band  Attachment  for 
Broaches,  To  Spring  Temper 
Bridges,  To  Repair  Without  Soldering 
Broaches,  Annealing  Nerve 
Bridges,  Hint  on  Anchoring 
Bridge,  To  Remove  a  Waxed  Up 
Burs,  Recut  Your  Old 
Burnt  Fingers 
Burnisher,  Use  of  the 
Burns  and  Scalds 
Bunsen  Burner,  Best  Way  to  Use 
Casts,  Cement  for  Mending 


Med.  News, 

Peete, 

Dental  0.  and  L. 

Med.  Examiner, 

Ohio  Den.  Jour., 

Hewitt, 

Haskell, 

Rollins, 

Steele, 


Hazeltine,^ 

Ciippinger, 

Dadmun, 

Templeton, 

Beacock, 

Brown, 

Fischer, 

Buck, 

Oramm, 

J.  W.  W. 

Vance, 

Smith, 

Steele, 

Jour.  Brit.  Asso 

Smith, 

Steele, 

Kirk, 

Den.  Prac.  and 

Haskell, 

Gramm, 

Evans, 

Ext.  Cosmos, 

Moffatt, 

Fossen, 

Mitchell, 

Tibbetts, 

Bryant, 

Terry, 

Peeso, 

Crenshaw, 

0.  Den.  Journ., 

Steele, 

Items, 

Bartholow, 

Items, 

Genese, 


Adt 


D 
D 
D 
D 
D 
D 
B 
B 
E 
E 
B 
B 
D 
B 
B 
B 
C 
C 
D 
E 
E 
E 
C 
E 
E 
A 
B 
D 
E 
B 
B 
A 
C 
C 
C 

c 

E 

C 
E 
C 
C 
E 
E 
A 
D 
E 
D 


414 
365 
372 
326 
317 
315 
171 
187 
460 
461 
215 
216 
338 
252 
141 
225 
283 
274 
429 
472 
482 
531 
308 
536 
510 
•  22 
166 
894 
451 
147 
153 

60 
285 
294 
280 
295 
497 
297 
512 
303 
311 
457 
467 

75 
373 
495 
386 


INDEX. 


289 


Canal,  Nitrate  of  Silver  in 
Cavities,  To  Keep  Dry 

"        Operating  on  Labial 
Cavity  Varnish 
Carat,  Grains  and  Percentage 
Cavity,  How  to  Dry  a 

"        Drier,  Home-made 
Canal 

Camphor,  Carbohite  of 
Celluloid  Blanks  for  Countersunk  Teeth 
Cement,  Celluloid 

"        Action  of  Acids  on 
Cements,  Hint  on  Mixing 
Cement  Powders,  to  Renew 

"       Fillings,  Medicated 

"         Gold  Capped 
Cements,  Mixing 

"  Effect  of  Hot  Air  on 

Chalk,  Prepared 
Chloralamid, 
Chloroform  Water, 
Clasps,  Proper  Fitting  of 
Clamp  Attachment,  Painless 
Clasps,  On  Rubber  Plates 
Clamps,  Applying  Rubber-dam 
Cotton  Brush,  Making  a 
Corundum  Disks,  To  Mount 
Cotton,  To  Remove  from  Pliers 
Collodion  and  its  Uses 
Continuous  Gum,  Is^ew  Method  «f  Working 
Corundum  Wheels,  For  Wetting 

"         Wheel,  Using  About  Mouth 
Cocain,  Hints  on  Using 
Corrosive  Sublimate,  Solutions  of 
Crowns,  Alloy 
Crown,  New  Porcelain 

"       Holder 
Crowns,  Enameling  Gold 
Crown,  Grinder 

"       Dies  of  Watt's  Metal 
Crowns,  Double  Backing  for  Richmond 
Crown  Pivots,  Tool  for  Bending 

"       Temporary 

"       The  Yoke 

"       To  Repair  Pivot 

"       Making  a  Double  Cap 

*'       Perfect  Fitting  Gold 


Holmes, 

A 

55 

Items, 

A 

58 

Douglas, 

A 

69 

Exchange, 

D 

435 

li 

E 

488 

Templeton, 

A 

105 

Steele, 

E 

440 

t( 

E 

552 

Thera.  Gaz. 

D 

378 

H.  S.  W. 

B 

156 

Scient.  Am., 

D 

437 

Exchange, 

E 

486 

Steele, 

A 

100 

0.  Dent.  Jour., 

E 

513 

Atkinson, 

D 

364 

Oltramore, 

A 

15 

Humhy, 

A 

8 

Register, 

A 

53 

Harper, 

D 

401 

Items, 

D 

345 

3Ied.  T.  and  G., 

D 

415 

Bonnitl, 

B 

160 

Items, 

E 

519 

McMillen, 

B 

149 

Ottolengm, 

A 

4 

Littig, 

E 

449 

S.  T., 

E 

476 

Jari'is, 

A 

77 

Archives, 

D 

331 

Extract, 

B 

229 

Odout.  Joiirn., 

B 

243 

Ottoleiigui, 

E 

521 

B.  Med.  Jour., 

D 

353 

Ohio  Jour., 

D 

322 

Steele, 

C 

284 

Moore, 

C 

281 

Steele, 

C 

282 

Evans, 

c 

266 

W.  S.  H., 

c 

267 

Ex., 

c 

268 

Items, 

c 

269 

Chupein, 

c 

272 

Simpson, 

c 

273 

Items, 

c 

275 

Amend, 

c 

276 

Evans, 

c 

277 

Shields, 

c 

279 

290 


INDEX. 


Crowns,  Contouring 

"        Burning  Holes  in 
Crown,  Rubber  Porcelain 

''       Preparing  Root  for 
Crowns,  Articulation  of  Gold 

"        Quick  Method  Making  Counter-Die  for 
Crown  Dies,  To  Make  Natural 
Creasote  and  Oil  of  Cloves 
Crown  Holder  and  Pin  Protector 
Crowns,  Fitting  Collars  for 

Post 
Crowning,  Moving  Roots  Before 

"  Varnishing  Teeth  Before 

Crown,  The  Downey 
Crowning,  Cutting  off  Teeth  for 
Crown  Slipper  Shell  for  Bridge-work 
Crowns,  Perfect  Occluding  Gold 

"       Where  Roots  are  Missing 

''        Alloy — Gold  Cap 
Crown,  An  Original  Bicuspid 

"      To  Enlarge  Hole  in  Pivot 
Creolin 

Crowning,  For  Sensitiveness  After 
Crown,  Setting  a  Genese 

"      An  Original 

"      A  Gold  Bicuspid 
Cuspidors,  For  Offensive 
Cuspidor,  To  Prevent  Blood  Adhering  to 
Dentifrice,  Reid's  Antiseptic  Liquid 
Dentist's  Leg 

Dentition,  Treatment  for  First 
Dentine,  To  Sterilize  Softened 
Dentures,  Artificial 
Dentist's  Headache,  Formula  for 
Dies,  Imperfections  in  Metal 
Disk  Mandrel,  Home-made 
Disks  and  Strips,  Soap  on 
Dirty  Oil  Stones 
Dies,  Use  of  Cores  in  Casting 
Disks,  Hint  on  Using 

"      Making  Rubber  Corundum 
Disk  Lubricator 

Dies,  Preventing  Odor  in  Casting 
Disks,  Hard  Rubber  Corundum 
Dorsenia,  Formula  for 
Drills,-  Suggestions  for  Using  Diamond 

"       To  Make  Twist 


Lowry, 

C 

265 

Items, 

c 

291 

Steele, 

c 

292 

McCandless, 

c 

293 

White, 

c 

262 

Robinson, 

c 

263 

Elliott, 

c 

.  287 

Shattuek, 

D 

329 

Roy, 

c 

289 

Slater, 

c 

298 

Lowry, 

c 

296 

Ohio  Den.  Jour., 

c 

299 

Items, 

c 

278 

Barber, 

c 

302 

Martin, 

c 

290 

Smith, 

c 

306 

Wh  itslar, 

c 

304 

Sharp, 

c 

305 

Steele, 

c 

307 

Fallock, 

c 

300 

Beacock, 

c 

286 

Fillehrown, 

D 

366 

Ohio  Jour., 

D 

368 

Items, 

C 

301 

Crossland, 

c 

310 

Elliott, 

c 

264 

Items, 

A 

110 

Bowles, 

E 

542 

Pharin.  Era, 

D 

431 

The  Lancet, 

E 

455 

Jour,  des  S.  M.  de  L., 

,  D 

337 

Smith, 

A 

104 

Land, 

B 

136 

Ohio  Stale  Jour., 

D 

324 

Sprague, 

B 

177 

Moore, 

E 

456 

A 

108 

Steele, 

E 

496 

Parsons, 

B 

227 

Beacock, 

E 

522 

Trans.  3Iass.  Den.  So., 

,  E 

626 

Secor, 

E 

540 

Den.  Trib., 

B 

150 

MaxfieJd, 

E 

550 

Ex., 

D 

424 

Items, 

E 

506 

Bmcock, 

E 

517 

INDEX. 

291 

Drills,  To  Make  Serviceable 

Neeper, 

E 

524 

Electric  Motor,  An  Economical 

Steele, 

E 

442 

Engine,  Care  of 

i. 

A 

25 

"       Foot  Pad 

<( 

E 

490 

Engines,  To  Improve  Shaw 

Beacock, 

B 

226 

Eugenol 

0.  Dent.  Jour., 

D 

420 

Eulyplol 

t(       It        If 

D 

422 

Eucalyptus  and  Thymol 

Items, 

D 

349 

Extracting,  To  Implant 

0.  Dent.  Jour., 

A 

26 

"            For  Nervous  Persons 

Ptnny, 

A 

72 

"            Pioots,  Use  of  Screw  in 

Chupein, 

A 

79 

"            Imprisoned  Wisdom  Teeth 

Eubank, 

A 

81 

"            For  Pains  Afterward 

Bowne, 

D 

341 

Third  Molar 

Brackett, 

A 

130 

Extraction,  Inflammation  After, 

Thomas, 

A 

13 

Exploring  Needles,  To  Make 

Hardy, 

E 

484 

Felt  Wheels  and  Cones,  Shellac  for 

Beebee, 

B 

196 

Filling,  A  Temporary 

Archives, 

A 

37 

Fillings,  Vent 

W.  S.  IT., 

A 

41 

"         Finishing  Gold 

North, 

A 

43 

Filling,  Formula  for  Temporary 

Ex., 

D 

428 

Files,  To  FJexoize 

Odont.  Jour., 

E 

448 

Filling  Materials,  Conductivity  of 

Block, 

E 

450 

Fillings,  Anchor-Pins  for 

S.  H.  W., 

A 

107 

"        Pain  Caused  by  Biting  on 

Marshall, 

A 

84 

"         Burnishing  Cement 

Items, 

A 

87 

"         Failure  of  from  Frail  Walls 

Welch, 

A 

92 

Fistula,  Facial 

'   Off.  and  Lab., 

A 

99 

Fillings,  Polishing  Cement 

Steele, 

A 

88 

Finishing  Burs,  To  Prevent  Clogging 

Joining's, 

A 

97 

Filling  Undercuts 

Grouse, 

A 

28 

Fillings,  To  Protect  Cement  or  Percha 

Welch, 

A 

109 

"        Contour 

Cormany, 

A 

126 

Patching  Gold  with  Alloy 

Mill, 

A 

106 

Filling,  Below  Gum  Margin 

Steele, 

A 

127 

"       Large  Compound 

" 

A 

121 

Fillings,  Facing  Alloy  with  Gold 

Tockwell, 

A 

122 

Flasking,  To  Prevent  Air-holes  in 

Chupein, 

B 

158 

Oil  for 

Steele, 

B 

173 

Flask-Clamps,  Self  Closing 

u 

B 

182 

Flasking,  A  Method  of 

Arndt, 

B 

194 

Flasks,  Kubber-Dam  in  Closing 

Merritt, 

B 

198 

Fluid,  New  Soldering 

Off.  and  Lab., 

E 

491 

Flasks,  To  Prevent  Plaster  from  Adhering  to 

Bmkland, 

B 

217 

Flask  Bolts 

Steele, 

B 

220 

"      Heater 

Davisson, 

B 

221 

"      To  Prevent  Staining  Hands 

Barker, 

B 

246 

292 


INDEX. 


Formalin  and  lis  Uses 

Arkovy, 

D 

384 

Forceps,  Using  Elevating 

Am.  Jr.  Den.  Sci, 

A 

125 

Foil  Carrier,  A  Convenient 

Battershell, 

E 

447 

Fusible  Alloys,  Formulas  for 

Harper, 

D 

361 

Gas,  liints  on  Giving 

Ball, 

A 

21 

"     Cylinders  Exploding 

I.  a, 

A 

74 

"     Points  on  Nitrous  Oxid 

Sparroiv, 

A 

124 

Glycei-ole  Tannin  for  Gingivitis 

T.  M.  U., 

D 

407 

Gold,  To  Make  Stick 

West.  Den.  Journ., 

A 

23 

"      Refining 

Den.  Prac.  and  Adv. 

,   E 

444 

"      To  Make  Non-Cohesive 

Mevieiv, 

E 

494 

"      Smudgin-g  of 

Iloive, 

E 

515 

"      Incompatibility  of 

Shields, 

A 

119 

"      and  Alloy,  Welding 

Palmer, 

A 

123 

Gum-Sections,  Replacing  Pinless 

Steele, 

B 

162 

Gutta-percha,  New  Preparation  of 

JRollins, 

D 

436 

Bowl 

Catching' s  Comjw.nd, 

E 

493 

"            Heater 

Allen, 

A 

111 

Gum  Block,  To  Replace  Tooth  in 

Peacock, 

B 

241 

"     Sections,  Fusion  of 

Brimmer, 

B 

251 

Gulta  percha  Cajeput,  Formula 

Items, 

D 

348 

Gums,  Papillary  Growths  on  the 

Lankester, 

A 

131 

"       Warty  Growths  on  the 

u 

A 

132 

"       Vascular  Growths  on  the 

11 

A 

18 

Hands,  Dentists' 

Steele, 

E 

463 

Iland- piece  Protector 

Ennis, 

A 

46 

Hammer,  Rubber  Head  for  Riveting 

Peacock, 

B 

165 

Hands,  To  Remove  Iodoform  from 

DriKjgists'  Pulletin, 

E 

468 

"         "  Cleanse  Dirty 

Old  File, 

E 

483 

"        Cosmetic  for  the 

Exchange, 

E 

501 

"        To  Make  Soft  and  White 

Hewitt, 

D 

323 

Hamamelis  in  Dentistry 

Steele, 

D 

316 

Hemorrhage,  To  Control  Dental 

Arnold, 

D 

355 

"              Remedy  for 

Tate, 

D 

342 

Hypodermic  Solutions 

Prescription, 

D 

434 

"            Points,  To  Clean  Obstructed 

Elliott, 

E 

498 

Impressions,  Colored  Soap  Suds  for 

H, 

B 

184 

"            Parting  Fluid  for 

Odont.  Journ., 

D 

432 

"            What  it  Should  Embrace 

Ames, 

B 

201 

Impressions  of  Soft  Pendulous  Gums 

Neeper, 

B 

231 

"           Treatment  of  Broken 

Moore, 

B 

232 

"           Removing 

Molloy, 

B 

242 

"            When  Pouring 

Parker, 

B 

247 

"           Perfect  Plaster  Partial 

Templeton, 

B 

138 

Impression  Trays,  How  to  Clean 

Foster, 

E 

528 

"          Tray,  Insertion  of 

While, 

B 

137 

"          To  Remove  from  Tray 

PattersheU, 

B 

139 

INDEX. 


293 


Inlaj-s,  Getting  Mould  for 
Instruments,  Warm 
Inlays,  Setting  Hot 
Investment,  To  Kepair  Soldering 

"  Compound,  Formula  for 

Inllamed  Mucous  INIembranes,  Spray  for 
Instrument  Points,  Polishing 
Inlays,  Dressing  Down 
Instrument,  How  to  Make  a  Useful 
Infection,  How  to  Avoid 
Inlays,  Hold-fast  for  Porcelain 
Instruments,  Sunliglit  Injures 
Incisors,  Securing  Loosened 
Iron,  Tincture  of  Chlorid  of 
lodin  with  Glycerin 
lodid  of  Zinc 

lodin,  Formula  for  Colorless  Tincture  of 
Iodoform  Cotton,  Formula  for 
Jaw,  Replacing  Dislocated  Lower 
Joints,  Clean 
Lathe  Drip,  A 

Laboratory  Pads  and  Holders, 
Lathes,  Drip  Tray  for 
Laboratories,  Gas  Fitting  in 
Light,  Mirror  for  Reflecting 
Lime  Water,  For  Sensitive  Teeth 
Local  Anesthetic  for  Lancing,  etc. 
"      Anesthetics,  Richardson  on 
"  "  Tropacocain  as  a 

Lysol,  For  Mouth  Washes,  etc. 
Matrix,  A  New 
Mallet,  Using  the  Electric 
Matrice,  Flexible  Wrench  for  Band 
Matrix,  for  Cement,  Celluloid, 

"       Metal,  How  to  Use, 
Magnesia,  Carbonate  of 
Metals,  Melting  Points  of 
Mercury  and  Alloy,  Proportions  of 
Metals,  Fusible 

Metal,  Watt's  for  Cast  Dentures 
Mercury,  Combination  of  Metals  with 
Metals,  Affinity  of 

"       Solubility  of 

"       Oxidation  of 
Mercury,  Oxycyanid  of 
Medicines,  Selecting  and  Keeping  Dental 
"  Incompatibility  of 


Bril.  Jrmr., 

A 

.32 

J'o/litii^, 

A 

?,9 

Jvfernaliondl.  Jonrridl, 

A 

0.3 

Oltolcvf/'iii, 

B 

186 

ZeUer.% 

D 

314 

Bcprmt, 

D 

403 

Steele, 

E 

4  SO 

Girdwood, 

A 

114 

Steele, 

E 

509 

Ex., 

E 

.527 

Genese, 

C 

309 

Ex., 

E 

-549 

Davenport, 

A 

20 

Shaliuel; 

D 

.380 

W.  Dent.  Jour., 

D 

332 

Ibid, 

D 

.3.35 

Herald  of  Deniktry, 

D 

.3fi2 

Her.  of  Dent., 

D 

Therapeidic  Gazette, 

A 

93 

Stevens, 

B 

190 

Morsman, 

B 

178 

Steele, 

E 

474 

Wilson, 

E 

529 

Fletcher, 

B 

135 

Bogue,    ' 

A 

78 

Abbott, 

D 

328 

Gillman, 

D 

333 

Bicliardson, 

D 

423 

Hugenschmidt, 

D 

409 

Dent.  Bev., 

D 

425 

Steele, 

A 

38 

H  D.  H, 

A 

68 

Int.  Jour., 

E 

475 

Slwhe,  ' 

A 

76 

Gormly, 

A 

116 

Abbott, 

D 

375 

Ex., 

E 

473 

Items, 

E 

514 

Davis, 

E 

532 

(1 

E 

533 

Weeks, 

E 
E 

538 
539 

« 

E 

54(i 

(( 

E 

547 

Com.pt es  Pend  , 

D 

370 

0.  Jour., 

D 

312 

Potter, 

D 

313 

294 


INDEX. 


Mirrors,  For  the  Forehead, 

"         To  Make  Mouth 
Moldine,  Uses  for  Melotte's 
Models  and  Impressions,  To  Duplicate 
Molding  Material,  A  New 
Modeling  Compound,  To  Prevent  from  Sticking 
Models,  Copying 
Mouth  Lamp 

Models,  Cores  for  Casting  Undercut 
Molars,  Restoring  Articulation  of  Tipping 
Napkins  in  the  Office 

"        for  Excluding  Moisture, 
Naphthol 
Necrosis-Phosphor 
Nerve  Capping  Formula 
Nerve  Broach  Reducers 

"      Broaches,  To  Barb 
Nerves,  Capping  Exposed 

"       Paste  for  Destroying 
Necrosis  of  Superior  Maxillary 
Nervous  Patients,  To  Quiet 
Obtundent,  Compound  Listerin 
Odontiasis,  Treatment  in 
Otfice,  Health  in  the 

"      Glass  Ware,  Cleaning 
Oils,  Aqueous  Solution  of  Essential 
Oil  Can,  Hint  on 

Oils,  Disinfecting  Power  of  Essential 
Operating,  To  Prevent  Nervousness  in 
"  "         "         a  Slip  in  Dental 

Stool, 
Palate,  Cocain  for  Sensitive 
Paste,  A  Polishing 
Partials,  To  Make  StrdVig 

"        Lower 
Partial  Plate,  with  Bands 
Partials,  Model  Plates  for 
Periodontitis  Antifebrin 
Pericemental  Inflammation, 
Phytolacca,  Use  of 
Plates,  Mending  Cracked 

"      To  Line  with  Black  Rubber 

"      Shaping  when  Muscles  Interfere 

"      Skeleton 

"      Flexible  Rubber 

"      Thin  Rubber 

"      To  Remove  Teeth  from 


Rollins, 

A 

24 

Trans.  Mass.  Den.  i 

S:K,  E 

525 

F.B., 

B 

164 

Templeton, 

B 

167 

Osborne, 

B 

174 

Botven, 

B 

188 

Off.  and  Lab., 

B 

203 

U            li               « 

E 

505 

Den.  Review, 

B 

199 

Walton, 

A 

98 

Steele, 

A 

94 

Ottolengui, 

A 

6 

Rollins, 

D 

318 

Jacobs, 

A 

52 

Anthony, 

D 

389 

Bonwill, 

E 

503 

a 

E 

502 

Steele, 

A 

128 

Bryan, 

D 

357 

Friedenwuld, 

A 

17 

Dwinelle, 

A 

7 

Hewelt, 

D 

321 

Macario, 

E 

545 

Noble, 

A 

1 

E.  W.  S., 

E 

441 

Pharm.  Journal,  ' 

D 

398 

Mathews, 

E 

458 

Bad    World, 

D 

354 

Marshall, 

D 

320 

Newkirk, 

A 

9 

Steele, 

A 

95 

Buck, 

D 

404 

Off.  and  Lab., 

E 

492 

Perry, 

B 

219 

Nichol, 

B 

249 

Reeve, 

B 

258 

Steele, 

B 

144 

Elliott, 

D 

427 

Sedgwick, 

A 

10 

P-, 

D 

433 

Abbott, 

B 

152 

Yant, 

B 

155 

Case, 

B 

157 

Gantz, 

B 

159 

Stowell, 

B 

161 

Dick, 

B 

168 

Odont.  Jour., 

B 

169 

INDEX. 


295 


Plates,  Strengthening  Rubber 
"      Useful  Hint  on  Rubber 
"      Lower  Gold 
"      Stamping  by  Hydraulic 
"      Hint  on  Sandpapering 
"      Adding  New  Teeth  to  Old 
"      Sandpapering 
"      Sandpaper  Mandrel  for 
"      Retaining  Lower  with  Gold  Posts 
"      To  Mend  a  Rubber 
"      Something  New  in  Rubber 
Plaster  Bowl,  For  Mixing 
Plate,  To  Make  Hold 
Plaster,  To  Renew 

"       Mold,  Metal  for  Casting  in 
Plate  Celluloid,  Aluminum 
"     Practical  Cheoplastic 
"     Holding  a  Broken 
"     Reswaging  a  Metal 
"     Retainer,  A 

"     To  Replace  Broken  Block  on  Rubber 
"     To  Prevent  Teeth  Cutting  into  Upper 
Plaster  Spoon,  for  Mixing 
Plates,  Lining  Rubber  with  Metal 
Plate,  To  Make  Rubber  Smooth 
Plates,  New  Lining  for  Vulcanite 
"      Refitting  Rubber 
"      To  Remove  Teeth  from 
Plate,  To  Get  Cast  of  Broken  Lower 
Plaster,  To  Strengthen  Poor 
Plates,  Strong,  Thin  Celluloid 
Plate,  To  Restore  Color  to  Black  Rubber 
Plaster,  Suggestions  About 
Plates,  To  Finish  High-Arch 
"       Obtaining  Even 
"      To  Make  Gold  Without  Dies 
Polishing,  Diamond  Powder  for 
Porcelain,  To  Prevent  Checking  from  Heat 

"  Tooth-Crown  With  Gum 

Polishing  Points,  To  Improve  Wood 
Porcelain  Tips 
Potash,  Permanganate  of 
Protector,  Tooth  and  Gum 
Prosthetic  Dentistry,  Axioms  of 
Pumice  Carrier 
Pulp  Canal,  Hint  on  Treating 
Pus  Pockets,  Resorcin  for 


Overshire, 

B 

172 

Douglas, 

B 

175 

Ledyard, 

B 

180 

Bogue, 

B 

181 

Buck, 

B 

192 

Sparks, 

B 

197 

Teague, 

B 

205 

Barnes, 

B 

211 

Dull, 

B 

214 

Reed, 

B 

195 

Sled,  and  Dent.  Jour 

,B 

224 

Items, 

B 

179 

Oi'iatt, 

B 

183 

Steele, 

B 

189 

Ex., 

D 

430 

Steele, 

B 

204 

Staples, 

B 

207- 

Tickner, 

B 

208 

Sparks, 

B 

234 

Steele, 

B 

238 

Ward, 

B 

235 

Boyd, 

B 

237 

Elliott, 

B 

239 

Dent.  Reviev:, 

B 

244 

Overshire, 

B 

248 

Cronlher, 

B 

25 1 

Smith, 

B 

256 

Sylvester, 

B 

259 

Secor, 

B 

260 

<i 

B 

261 

Johnson, 

B 

257 

Burns, 

B 

145 

Otloleagui, 

B 

133 

Ohio  Dent.  Jour., 

B 

140 

Brit.  Jour., 

B 

142 

Browne, 

B 

143 

Evans, 

A 

59 

Harkinson, 

C 

270 

Sharpe, 

C 

271 

Cheney, 

E 

462 

Browne, 

C 

2SS 

Abbott, 

D 

376 

Jennings, 

A 

96 

Haskell, 

B 

134 

Southern  Journal, 

A 

44 

Pract.  Adv., 

A 

51 

Rev., 

D 

408 

296 


INDEX. 


Pulps,  Soothing  Application  for  Aching 

"       Caps,  Copper 
Pulp,  For  Inflammation  of  the 
Pulp-Stones,  Detecting 
Pulps,  Treatment  for  Wounded 
Pus,  Origin  of 

Pulp,  Test  Capping  for  Exposed 
Pyorrhea  Alveolaris  and  its  Treatment 

"  •        Formula  for 
Pyrozone  for  Inflammation 

"        Suggestions  for  Using 
Pkigger  Points,  Broken  Instruments  as 
Pluggers,  On  the  Use  of 
ReguLating  Twisted  Wire  for 
"  White's  Plate  for 

"  Studs 

"  Screws  vs.  Rubber  for 

Kesin,  Powdered 
Eiglit  Angle  Points,  Useful 
Roots,  Treatment  of  Fractured 

"       To  Fill  with  Chloro-percha 
Root  Canal  Dryer 

"     Canals,  Removing  Points  from 
Roots,  Celluloid  for  Filling 

"      Cutting  off"  with  Saws 
Root  Canal,  Oil  Dressing  for 

"         "      Treatment 

"     Canals,  Determining  Curves  of 

"     Filling,  Cosmoline  for 
Roots,  Blowing  Powder  in 
Root  Canals,  For  Drying 

"     Dressing  Formula 
Rubber-dam,  To  Stop  Holes  in 
"  "      Burning  Ploles  in 

Rust,  To  Protect  Instruments  from 
Rubber,  Cutting  Soft 
Rubber-dam,  Soap  Stone  for 

"  "      Keeping  in  Water 

Ruge,  Engraving  the 
Rubber-dam,  Ajjplying  to  Labial  Cavities 
Rubber  Flasking,  Pink 
Rubber-dam  Clamps, 
Rubber,  To  Prevent  Weighted  Irritating 
Rubber-dam  Plolders 
Rubber  Sore  Mouth,  Cause  of 

"       Cheap 
Rubber-dam,  Application  of 


Genese, 

D 

392 

Parlcer, 

A 

82 

Williams, 

A 

86 

Tliomas, 

A 

102 

Spaulcliiig, 

A 

113 

Atkinson, 

E 

537 

Milling, 

D 

,416 

Arringion, 

A 

12 

Belts, 

D 

339 

Review, 

D 

330 

Atkinson, 

D 

385 

Merriil, 

A 

33 

Ejc.  Rev. 

A 

101 

Davenport, 

A 

50 

Inlernai.  Journal, 

A 

70 

Shaw, 

A 

73 

Ottolengai, 

E 

548 

Beacock, 

D 

377 

Baitershdl, 

A 

16 

Barifield, 

A 

30 

Roijce, 

A 

62 

Office  and  Lah,ralory, 

A 

49 

Williams, 

A 

36 

Allen, 

D 

396 

Rollins, 

A 

80 

Harlan, 

A 

64 

Wc^t, 

A 

35 

Shields, 

A 

90 

Intcrnaiional 

D 

343 

Arckiives, 

D 

344 

3Iitchell, 

A 

112 

Review, 

D 

360 

Beacock, 

A 

27 

Thompson, 

A 

31 

Steele, 

£ 

465 

u 

E 

477 

Bowen, 

E 

478 

Rijkert, 

E 

481 

JSiakahara, 

B 

202 

Beacock, 

A 

91 

Steele, 

B 

230 

Rollins, 

E 

507 

Horse, 

B 

215 

Neeprr, 

E 

511 

Jlodykin, 

E 

534 

Steele, 

E 

543 

Ottolengui, 

A 

3 

INDEX. 


207 


Rubber-clam,  Ligation  of 
Sanitas, 

Sandpaper,  Holder  for  Hand  Use 
Screw  Plate,  a  Left-hand 
Separator,  A  Piano  Wire 
iSilk,  Substitute  for  Floss 
Soldering,  Small  Pieces 
"  Tubes  and  Nuls 

"  Investment  for 

Sodium  Ethylate,  for  Blunted  Gums 
Soldering,  Tubes,  To  Eegulating  Appliances 

"  Pliers,  Handy 

Solder  and  Flux  for  Aluminum, 
Sodium  Fluorid  as  a  Sterilizer, 
Soldering,  Second 

"  Without  Heat 

Soda,  Salicylate  of 

"     Sulphite  of 
Soldering,  Without  Investment 

"  Teeth  Changing  Color  in 

''  Bands  to  Plates 

"  Aluminum  without  Flux 

"  Bands,  Clasps,  etc. 

Solder,  Jumping 
Sodium,  Silico  Fluoiid 
Sozoiodol, 
Soldering  Fluid, 

Spirit  Lamp,  To  Reduce  Heat  of 
Styptic  Tannic  Acid, 
Sterilization  of  Instruments, 
Sulphate  of  Copper — Treatment  of  Pyorrhea, 
Sulpho-Carbolic  Acid, 
Swaging,  Manilla  Paper  for 

"  Plate  Springing  in 

Swaging  Plates  for  High  Arches 
Swedging  with  Screw  Press 
Syringe  Needle,  Before  Introducing 
"      To  Clean 

"       Home-made 
Syphilis,  Treatment  of,  in  the  Mouth 
Tartar,  Light  Yellow 
Teeth,  Forming  Cavities  in  Porcelain 

"      To  Remove  Stains  from 

"      Capping 

"      Palm  for  Separating 

"      To  Detect  Dead 

'■      Polishing  After  Cleaning 


<( 

A 

5 

Peete, 

D 

367 

Barnes, 

E 

504 

Beebee, 

E 

479 

Gillett, 

E 

50S 

Barher, 

A 

lis 

Liltixj, 

H 

1G3 

West.  Jom\, 

B 

176 

LedyanI, 

B 

185 

Eev., 

D 

406 

Dental  Prac.  and  Adv 

,E 

4o2 

Evans, 

E 

464 

Eng.  and  Min.  Jour., 

D 

388 

Dent.  Rev., 

D 

390 

Barrett, 

B 

206 

Nat.  Dnuj(jist, 

E 

489 

Shatluch, 

D 

381 

a 

D 

382 

Neivkirk, 

B 

213 

Nelson, 

B 

212 

Brit.  Jour., 

B 

218 

Heaton, 

E 

499 

Melton, 

B 

233 

Wilcox, 

B 

228 

Sadduth, 

D 

358 

Dent.  Reviiw, 

D 

359 

Off.  and  Lab., 

D 

325 

Brunson, 

E 

446 

Harper, 

D 

400 

Miller, 

E 

630 

Whipple, 

D 

356 

International, 

D 

399 

E.rchanc/e, 

B 

170 

Bartlett, 

B 

151 

Items, 

B 

236 

Leech, 

B 

148 

Hoff, 

A 

54 

Den.  Rev., 

E 

459 

Neeper, 

E 

523 

Hwjenschmidt, 

E 

516 

Robin, 

E 

535 

Keeky, 

E 

438 

Brit.  Jour., 

A 

42 

Gilmore, 

A 

45 

Her.  of  Den. 

A 

47 

Heitzmann, 

A 

61 

Steele, 

A 

65 

^98 


INDEX. 


Teeth,  Rubber  Overcoat  for  Sensitive 

"      On  Gold  Plate,  Resetting  Pinless 

"      Sensitive  to  Changes 

"      on  Rubber,  English  Pinless 

"      Resetting  Pins  in  Artificial 

"      Materials  Used  in  Artificial 

"      Splint  for  Supporting 

"      To  Remove  Deciduous 

"      Composition  of  Human 

"      To  Retain  Dressing  in 

"      Gold  Backing  Eroded 

"      Protecting  While  Erupting 

''      Separating 
Tempering  Mandrels 

>'  Bath,  New 

Thymol,  Dental  Uses  of 
Thurlington,  Uses  for 
Tired  Heels,  Cushions  for 
Tin,  For  Filling,  Preparing  and  Using 
Tooth,  To  Rotate  a 

"         "    Splice  a  Broken 

•'       Paste 
Toothache  Cotton, 
Tooth  Washes,  Flavor  for 

"       Wash,  Saponaceous 
Toothache,  For  the 
Tooth  Wash,  A  Fine 
Tumor,  Treatment  of  Cystic 
Varnish,  Sandarac 
"  Gutta-percha 

'•         An  Excellent 
Yioegar  and  its  Uses 
Vulcanite  and  Celluloid  Combined 
Vulcanizers,  For  Leaking 
Vulcanizer,  Care  of  the 
Vulcanizing,  to  Prevent  Sulphur  Smell 
Vulcanizer  Wrench 
Wax,  To  Toughen 

"       Clarifying 

"      Coloring  * 

Wedges,  To  Prevent  Slipping 
W^heels,  To  Prevent  Polishing  Splitting 
Zinc,  Chlorid  of 

"     Sulp.,  as  an  Escharotic 

"     To  Renew 


Edicards, 

A 

71 

Ottolengui, 

B 

191 

Items, 

A 

85 

ti 

B 

209 

Steele, 

B 

223 

Items, 

E 

500 

Angle, 

A 

115 

Eames, 

A 

120 

Von  Bihra 

E 

541 

Beacoek, 

D 

418 

Dodge, 

A 

19 

Perry, 

A 

11 

Oltolengid, 

A 

2 

Ex., 

E 

445 

Scien.  Amer., 

E 

454 

Kirk, 

D 

411 

Parsons, 

D 

397 

Items, 

E 

443 

Darby, 

A 

129 

International, 

A 

40 

Bogue, 

A 

57 

Harlin, 

D 

410 

Med.  Bee, 

D 

413 

Steele, 

D 

402 

Den.  Off.  and  Lab., 

D 

395 

Morse, 

D 

336 

Ex., 

D 

417 

Items, 

E 

518 

Chupein, 

D 

412 

Ives, 

D 

405. 

<( 

D 

383 

Shatiuek, 

D 

334 

'S  J.  S., 

B 

193 

Schillniger, 

B 

210 

Snoiv, 

B 

146 

Off.  and  Lab., 

E 

551 

Wright, 

B 

i50 

Keagle, 

D 

426 

Berry, 

E 

471 

Ex., 

E 

520 

Barker 

A 

117 

Secor, 

B 

255 

Shattuck, 

D 

393 

0.  Jour., 

D 

327 

Fletcher, 

E 

485 

^m 

!j/j6^D^yE 

^ 

